mts-1700 series - mantatestforums.commantatest.mantatestforums.com/.../07/mts-1700_user...apr 06,...

Manta Test Systems Incorporated4060B Sladeview Crescent, Unit #1

Mississauga, Ontario, L5L 5Y5, CanadaTel: +1(905) 828-6469 Fax: +1(905) 828-6850

e-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.mantatest.com

MTS-1700 SERIESADVANCED UNIVERSAL PROTECTIVE

RELAY TEST SYSTEM

OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL

Fifteenth EditionFebruary 2003

MTS-1700 SERIES Advanced Univeral Protective Relay Test System™, Operation and and ReferenceManual

All rights reserved by Manta Test Systems Incorporated. No part of this publication may be reproduced ordistributed in any form or by any means without the permission of Manta Test Systems Incorporated.

The information and specifications contained within from Manta Test Systems are believed to be accurateand reliable at the time of printing. However, because of the nature of this product, specifications shown inthis manual are subject to change without notice.

The features and capabilities described herein reflect those available in MTS-1710 firmware version 8.0(or greater) and MTS-1720 firmware version 5.0 (or greater).

February 2003.

Document ID#: CU A002 15A

Powertest™ is a trademark of Manta Test Systems Inc.

Manta Test Systems Incorporated4060B Sladeview Crescent, Unit #1

Mississauga, Ontario, L5L 5Y5, CanadaTel: +1(905) 828-6469 Fax: +1(905) 828-6850

e-mail: [email protected] Internet: http://www.mantatest.comToll-free technical support (U.S.A & Canada): 1-800-233-8031

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 1Introduction

1.1 DISTINCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS .........................................................1-11.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION..........................................................................1-11.3 APPLICATIONS ...........................................................................................1-31.3.1 Standard Applications..............................................................................1-31.3.2 Fault Playback Applications ....................................................................1-31.4 TERMINOLOGY .........................................................................................1-41.4.1 Static Relay Testing .................................................................................1-41.4.2 Dynamic Relay Testing ...........................................................................1-41.4.3 Fault Playback..........................................................................................1-41.4.4 On-Panel Testing .....................................................................................1-41.5 TECHNICAL SUPPORT ..............................................................................1-51.6 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS.....................................................................1-51.7 LIMITED PRODUCT WARRANTIES ........................................................1-61.7.1 Hardware..................................................................................................1-61.7.2 Software & Firmware ..............................................................................1-61.7.3 Separate Extended Warranty for Hardware Products ..............................1-61.7.4 Exclusion of other Warranties .................................................................1-71.7.5 Extension of Warranty .............................................................................1-7

Section 2Specifications

2.1 INPUTS .........................................................................................................2-12.2 OUTPUTS .....................................................................................................2-12.3 METERING...................................................................................................2-22.4 COMPUTED MEASUREMENTS................................................................2-32.5 STATIC/DYNAMIC TESTING CAPABILITIES........................................2-32.6 FAULT PLAYBACK....................................................................................2-32.7 RS-232C INTERFACE..................................................................................2-42.8 APPLICATION SOFTWARE.......................................................................2-42.9 OPTIONS.......................................................................................................2-42.10 ADDITIONAL STANDARD FEATURES...................................................2-52.11 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS ..............................................................2-5

Section 3Operation Summary

3.1 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT ...........................................................................3-13.2 REAR PANEL LAYOUT .............................................................................3-53.3 BASIC APPLICATIONS ..............................................................................3-73.3.1 Getting Started .........................................................................................3-73.3.2 Safety & other precautions ......................................................................3-83.3.2.1 SAFETY. ...........................................................................................3-83.3.2.2 ISOLATION ......................................................................................3-83.3.2.3 PROTECTION...................................................................................3-8

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL iiiCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.3.2.4 PRECAUTIONS. ..............................................................................3-83.3.3 Making Basic Adjustments......................................................................3-83.3.4 Generalized Setup Procedure...................................................................3-93.3.5 Overcurrent Relay Test ............................................................................3-113.3.5.1 SETUP. .............................................................................................3-113.3.5.2 MINIMUM PICKUP TEST...............................................................3-123.3.5.3 INVERSE-TIME CHARACTERISTIC TEST..................................3-123.3.5.4 INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENT TEST... .........................................3-123.3.5.5 TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST ................................................................3-143.3.6 Voltage Relay Test...................................................................................3-153.3.6.1 PICKUP TEST...................................................................................3-153.3.6.2 TIMING TEST. .................................................................................3-163.3.6.3 TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST ................................................................3-163.3.7 1-Φ Impedance Relay/Directional Overcurrent Relay Test ...................3-173.3.7.1 REACH/MINIMUM PICKUP TEST. ...............................................3-183.3.7.2 MTA TEST.... ....................................................................................3-193.3.7.3 OPERATE TIME TEST.... ................................................................3-193.3.7.4 TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST.... ............................................................3-193.3.8 Voltage Restrained Overcurrent Relay Test ............................................3-193.3.8.1 MINIMUM PICKUP TEST...............................................................3-203.3.8.2 OPERATE TIME TEST.... ................................................................3-203.3.8.3 TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST.... ............................................................3-203.3.9 3-Φ Impedance Relay Test.......................................................................3-203.3.9.1 PREPARATION..... ...........................................................................3-213.3.9.2 REACH TEST.... ...............................................................................3-223.3.9.3 MTA TEST.... ....................................................................................3-223.3.9.4 OPERATE TIME TEST.... ................................................................3-233.3.9.5 SWITCH-ONTO-FAULT TEST..... ..................................................3-233.3.9.6 CURRENT SUPERVISION TEST.... ...............................................3-233.3.9.7 PERMISSIVE TRIP TEST..... ...........................................................3-243.3.9.8 TESTING SIGNAL SEND/CARRIER SEND OUTPUT.... .............3-253.3.10 Differential Relay - Three-Terminal Type...............................................3-263.3.10.1 MINIMUM PICKUP TEST...............................................................3-263.3.10.2 SLOPE TEST.....................................................................................3-273.3.10.3 OPERATE TIME TEST.... ................................................................3-273.3.10.4 HARMONIC RESTRAINT TEST..... ...............................................3-273.3.10.5 INSTANTANEOUS TEST................................................................3-283.3.10.6 TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST.... ............................................................3-293.3.11 Differential Relay - Independent Coil Type ............................................3-303.3.11.1 MINIMUM PICKUP TEST...............................................................3-313.3.11.2 SLOPE TEST.....................................................................................3-313.3.11.3 OPERATE TIME TEST.... ................................................................3-323.3.11.4 HARMONIC RESTRAINT TEST.... ................................................3-323.3.11.5 INSTANTANEOUS TEST................................................................3-323.3.11.6 TARGET TEST..... ............................................................................3-323.3.12 Synchronizing/Reclosing or Synchrocheck Relay...................................3-32

iv MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.3.12.1 PHASE ANGLE LIMIT TEST..........................................................3-333.3.12.2 VOLTAGE LIMIT TEST..... .............................................................3-343.3.12.3 SLIP FREQUENCY LIMIT TEST....................................................3-343.3.12.4 BREAKER ADVANCE TIME CHECK.... .......................................3-343.3.12.5 SYNCHRONIZING ELEMENTS WITH POSITIVE

SEQUENCE VOLTAGE SUPERVISION........................................3-343.3.13 Ground Fault Overvoltage Relay .............................................................3-353.3.13.1 SETUP..... ..........................................................................................3-363.3.13.2 OVERVOLTAGE PICKUP TEST.... ................................................3-373.3.13.3 OVERVOLTAGE TIMING TEST....................................................3-373.3.13.4 3RD HARMONIC UNDERVOLTAGE TEST.... .............................3-373.3.13.5 UNDERVOLTAGE INHIBIT TEST... .............................................3-373.3.14 Frequency Relay Test ..............................................................................3-383.3.14.1 PICKUP TEST...................................................................................3-383.3.14.2 TIMING TEST ..................................................................................3-383.3.14.3 TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST ................................................................3-393.3.14.4 UNDERVOLTAGE INHIBIT TEST... .............................................3-393.3.14.5 FREQUENCY RATE-OF-CHANGE TEST.... .................................3-393.3.15 DC Auxiliary/Time-Delay Relay Test .....................................................3-403.3.15.1 PICKUP TEST...................................................................................3-403.3.15.2 PICKUP TIMING TEST..... ..............................................................3-413.3.15.3 DROPOUT TIMING TEST...............................................................3-423.4 SETTINGS MAP...........................................................................................3-423.5 GENERAL HINTS ON MANUAL USE ......................................................3-44

Section 4Detailed Operation

4.1 FAULT STATES...........................................................................................4-14.2 OPERATION MODES..................................................................................4-14.2.1 Static Operation Mode .............................................................................4-14.2.2 Dynamic Operation Mode .......................................................................4-24.2.3 Blinking Indicators in Dynamic Mode ....................................................4-34.3 CHARACTERISTICS OF FAULT STATES ...............................................4-34.4 OUTPUT LEVELS........................................................................................4-44.5 TRIGGER/TIMER OPERATION.................................................................4-74.5.1 Start Trigger .............................................................................................4-74.5.2 Stop Trigger .............................................................................................4-74.5.3 Reset.........................................................................................................4-84.5.4 External Start Trigger Inputs ...................................................................4-84.5.5 External Stop Trigger Inputs....................................................................4-84.5.6 Trigger Threshold Levels.........................................................................4-94.5.7 Two-Wire Pulse Timing ..........................................................................4-104.5.8 Timing in Cycles......................................................................................4-104.5.9 Testing SCR Output Type Relays............................................................4-114.6 CURRENT MODES......................................................................................4-124.6.1 I1-LOW Current Mode ............................................................................4-13

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL vCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.6.2 Il-HIGH Current Mode ............................................................................4-144.6.3 I3 Current Mode.......................................................................................4-144.6.4 I3-WYE Current Mode ............................................................................4-144.6.5 I1 & I2 Current Mode ..............................................................................4-154.6.5.1 BASIC ADJUSTMENTS.... ..............................................................4-154.6.5.2 SPECIAL NOTES..... ........................................................................4-164.6.6 HARMONIC Current Mode ... ................................................................4-184.6.6.1 % PURE HARMONIC - BASIC ADJUSTMENT............................4-204.6.6.2 DC AMPS - BASIC ADJUSTMENT................................................4-22 4.6.6.3 SPECIAL NOTES.. ...........................................................................4-234.6.7 I4-DC Current Mode................................................................................4-234.6.8 Disabling of Voltage C in Special Current Modes ..................................4-234.6.9 Fault Current Preset Feature ....................................................................4-244.6.10 I3-PARALLEL Current Mode.................................................................4-244.6.10.1 OUTPUT CAPABILITY...... .............................................................4-244.6.10.2 SELECTING I3-PARALLEL CURRENT MODE.... .......................4-254.6.10.3 PARALLELING WITH ONE MTS-1710, PLUS ONE

MTS-1720......... .................................................................................4-254.6.10.4 PARALLELING OF TWO MTS-1710s............................................4-264.6.10.4.1 Single phase load .........................................................................4-264.6.10.4.2 Three phase connection ...............................................................4-274.6.10.5 PARALLELING OF TWO (MTS-1710 + MTS-1720)

SYSTEMS..... ....................................................................................4-284.6.10.5.1 Single phase high current.............................................................4-284.6.10.5.2 Three phase high current..............................................................4-294.6.10.6 PARALLELING MORE THAN TWO (MTS-1710 + MTS-1720)

SYSTEMS..... ....................................................................................4-304.6.10.6.1 Single phase high current.............................................................4-304.6.10.6.2 Three phase high current..............................................................4-314.6.10.7 SETTING AND DISPLAYING CURRENT IN THE

I3-PARALLEL CURRENT MODE...... ............................................4-324.6.10.8 FAULT CURRENT PRESET IN THE I3-PARALLEL

CURRENT MODE...... ......................................................................4-324.6.10.9 IMPEDANCE AND POWER DISPLAY IN I3-PARALLEL

CURRENT MODE...... ......................................................................4-324.6.10.10 PHASOR TABLE COMMAND AND POWERSCOPE

OPERATION IN I3-PARALLEL CURRENT MODE..... ................4-324.6.10.11 DISABLED FUNCTIONS IN I3-PARALLEL CURRENT

MODE................................................................................................4-334.7 FAULT MODES............................................................................................4-334.7.1 Φ-N Fault Type ........................................................................................4-344.7.2 Φ-Φ Fault Type ........................................................................................4-344.7.3 3Φ-(Φ-Φ) Fault Type ...............................................................................4-344.7.4 3Φ-(Φ-N) Fault Type ...............................................................................4-344.7.5 2Φ-N Fault Type ......................................................................................4-344.7.6 Fault Simulation Examples......................................................................4-35

vi MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.7.6.1 SINGLE-PHASE-TO-GROUND FAULT EXAMPLE..... ...............4-354.7.6.2 SINGLE-PHASE OVERVOLTAGE EXAMPLE.............................4-354.7.6.3 PHASE-TO-PHASE FAULT EXAMPLE.... ....................................4-354.7.6.4 THREE-PHASE-TO-GROUND FAULT EXAMPLE......................4-364.7.6.5 THREE-PHASE-OVERVOLTAGE FAULT EXAMPLE................4-364.7.6.6 TWO-PHASE-TO-GROUND FAULT EXAMPLE.... .....................4-364.7.7 Voltage Adjustment with Unbalanced Systems.......................................4-364.8 PHASE ANGLE CONTROL ........................................................................4-374.8.1 Basic Adjustments ...................................................................................4-374.8.2 Interpretation of Phase Angle Display and Fault Mode Selection...........4-374.8.2.1 IN I1-LOW, I1-HIGH & I3 CURRENT MODES.............................4-384.8.2.2 I3-WYE CURRENT MODE.... .........................................................4-394.8.3 Adjusting Prefault, Fault and Postfault Phase Angle...............................4-394.8.4 Special Notes ...........................................................................................4-394.9 MONITOR VOLTAGE.................................................................................4-404.10 FREQUENCY CONTROL............................................................................4-404.10.1 Frequency Reference Modes ...................................................................4-404.10.1.1 LINE FREQUENCY REFERENCE MODE.....................................4-404.10.1.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY REFERENCE MODE..........................4-414.10.2 Harmonic Generation...............................................................................4-414.10.3 Dynamic Frequency Testing....................................................................4-414.10.4 Multi-System Synchronization ................................................................4-424.10.4.1 CONNECTION METHOD.... ...........................................................4-424.10.4.2 CONTROL OF FREQUENCY AND PHASE ANGLE WHEN USING MULTI-SYSTEM SYNCHRONIZATION.... .....................4-434.10.4.3 USE OF THE MULTI-SYSTEM SYNC CAPABILITY FOR

TESTING PILOT-WIRE RELAY SYSTEMS..................................4-444.10.5 External Frequency Reference.................................................................4-454.11 AUDIBLE TONE ..........................................................................................4-464.12 ADJUSTING POSTFAULT VALUES .........................................................4-474.13 WARNING ANNUNCIATORS....................................................................4-474.14 DC VOLTAGE CONTROL .........................................................................4-49

Section 5Advanced Operation

5.1 MENU OPERATION ....................................................................................5-15.1.1 Basic Usage..............................................................................................5-15.1.2 Special Notes ...........................................................................................5-45.2 RAMPING & FAULT DURATION .............................................................5-45.2.1 Programming Ramp/Duration Settings....................................................5-55.2.2 Voltage Ramp & Fault Duration..............................................................5-85.2.3 Current Ramping & Fault Duration .........................................................5-85.2.3.1 CURRENT DURATION...... .............................................................5-85.2.3.2 REMOTE-END-TRIP-SIMULATION..... ........................................5-85.2.4 Frequency Ramping .................................................................................5-85.2.5 Phase Ramping ........................................................................................5-9

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL viiCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.2.6 Effects on other Operations .....................................................................5-95.2.7 Clearing Ramp and Duration Settings .....................................................5-95.2.8 Programming Durations...........................................................................5-105.2.9 Example Applications of Ramp and Fault Duration Features .................5-105.3 TIMER CONTROL .......................................................................................5-125.3.1 Internal Start Timer Mode .......................................................................5-125.3.2 External Start Timer Mode ......................................................................5-135.4 FAULT INCIDENCE ANGLE CONTROL..................................................5-165.5 SYNCHRONIZING MODE..........................................................................5-175.5.1 Operation .................................................................................................5-175.5.2 Phase Measurement in Synchronizing Mode...........................................5-175.5.3 Measurement of Circuit Breaker Advance Time .....................................5-175.6 PHASE SEQUENCE.....................................................................................5-185.7 DYNAMIC MEASUREMENT MODE ........................................................5-185.8 DEFAULT SETTINGS .................................................................................5-195.8.1 Restoring Default Settings .......................................................................5-195.8.2 Primary Default Settings..........................................................................5-195.8.3 Other Default Settings .............................................................................5-205.9 WARNING TONE ........................................................................................5-205.10 DISPLAY CONTROL FEATURES .............................................................5-205.10.1 Default Mode Display..............................................................................5-205.10.2 Multiple Readings Display ......................................................................5-215.10.3 Ratio Display Modes ...............................................................................5-215.10.3.1 IMPEDANCE DISPLAYS...... ..........................................................5-215.10.3.1.1 Z1 gnd display .............................................................................5-215.10.3.1.2 Automatic impedance display selection ......................................5-235.10.3.1.3 Automatic resistance display selection ........................................5-235.10.3.1.4 Automatic reactance display selection.........................................5-235.10.3.2 CURRENT RATIO DISPLAY..........................................................5-245.10.3.3 PERCENT SLOPE DISPLAY...........................................................5-245.10.3.3.1 |I1-I2|÷((I1+I2)÷2) formula..........................................................5-245.10.3.3.2 I2÷((2I1+I2)÷2) formula..............................................................5-245.10.3.4 I1 & I2 CT TAPS FOR CURRENT RATIO DISPLAYS... ..............5-255.10.3.5 VOLTS-PER-HERTZ RATIO DISPLAY.........................................5-255.10.4 Power Display Modes..............................................................................5-255.11 ADVANCED POSTFAULT FEATURES ....................................................5-255.11.1 Breaker Time ...........................................................................................5-255.11.2 Auto-Reclose Simulation .........................................................................5-255.11.2.1 AUTO-RECLOSE TIME DELAY... .................................................5-255.11.2.2 RECLOSE INTO FAULT.... .............................................................5-265.11.3 Trip Type .................................................................................................5-275.11.4 PT location ..............................................................................................5-285.11.5 Examples..................................................................................................5-295.12 PHASE ADJUSTMENT MODE...................................................................5-305.12.1 Normal Phase Adjustment Mode .............................................................5-305.12.2 Individual Phase Adjustment Modes .......................................................5-31

viii MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.12.2.1 MENU CONTROL OF INDIVIDUAL PHASE ...............................5-325.12.2.1.1 Individual phase adjustment in I1-LOW & I1-HIGH

current modes...............................................................................5-325.12.2.1.2 I2-HARMONIC current mode individual phase adjustment .......5-335.12.2.1.3 I1&I2 current mode individual phase adjustment........................5-345.12.2.1.4 I3 current mode individual phase adjustment ..............................5-355.12.2.1.5 I3-WYE current mode individual phase adjustment....................5-365.12.2.2 NON-MENU CONTROL OF INDIVIDUAL PHASE... ..................5-385.12.3 Viewing Phase Settings ...........................................................................5-405.12.4 Special Notes ...........................................................................................5-415.12.5 Example - Use of Individual Phase Adjust for Synchronizing Device

Testing .....................................................................................................5-415.12.5.1 PHASE ANGLE LIMIT TEST..........................................................5-415.12.5.2 VOLTAGE LIMIT TEST..... .............................................................5-425.13 25Hz FREQUENCY REFERENCE MODE .................................................5-425.14 PHASE MEASUREMENT FEATURES ......................................................5-425.14.1 Phase Measurement Speed.......................................................................5-425.14.2 Reverse Angle Display ............................................................................5-425.14.3 Phase Angle Measurement Reference .....................................................5-435.15 AUX CONTACT OUTPUT ARRANGEMENT ..........................................5-445.15.1 Normally Open/Normally Closed Arrangement......................................5-445.15.2 Breaker Simulation 52A/52B...................................................................5-455.15.3 Permissive & Unblock Signal Simulation ...............................................5-455.15.4 Auxiliary Contact Delay ..........................................................................5-465.16 PHASE REVERSAL FUNCTION................................................................5-46

Section 6RS-232C Interface

6.1 RS-232C CONNECTION..............................................................................6-16.1.1 Interface Specifications...........................................................................6-16.1.2 RS-232C Connector Pin Assignments ....................................................6-16.1.2.1 COM1 PORT..... ................................................................................6-16.1.2.2 COM2 PORT.... .................................................................................6-26.1.3 Baud Rate Selection.................................................................................6-26.1.4 XON/XOFF Handshaking .......................................................................6-26.2 COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS.....................................................................6-36.2.1 Control Mode Programming....................................................................6-36.2.2 Fault State Control ...................................................................................6-36.2.3 Fault Mode Control..................................................................................6-56.2.4 Operation Mode Control ..........................................................................6-56.2.5 Voltage Programming..............................................................................6-56.2.5.1 COMMANDS.... ................................................................................6-56.2.5.2 EXAMPLES..... .................................................................................6-76.2.6 Current Control ........................................................................................6-96.2.6.1 CURRENT CONTROL COMMANDS..... .......................................6-96.2.6.2 COMMANDS USED IN I3-WYE CURRENT MODE..... ...............6-126.2.6.3 EXAMPLES..... .................................................................................6-13

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL ixCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.2.7 Phase Control ...........................................................................................6-146.2.7.1 COMMANDS.... ................................................................................6-146.2.7.2 EXAMPLES..... .................................................................................6-156.2.8 Frequency Control/Programming ............................................................6-166.2.8.1 COMMANDS..... ...............................................................................6-166.2.8.2 EXAMPLES..... .................................................................................6-176.2.9 RS-232 Control ........................................................................................6-196.2.10 Timer & Tone Control .............................................................................6-206.2.11 Display/Print Commands .........................................................................6-206.2.12 Clock/Calender Control ...........................................................................6-226.2.13 Fault Playback Commands ......................................................................6-236.2.13.1 COMMANDS - 8 BIT DATA..... ......................................................6-236.2.13.2 COMMANDS - 14 BIT DATA.... .....................................................6-236.2.14 Programmable Waveform Commands.....................................................6-246.2.14.1 COMMANDS.... ................................................................................6-246.2.14.2 USAGE..... .........................................................................................6-256.2.14.3 EXAMPLE - 8 BIT DATA................................................................6-256.2.14.4 EXAMPLE - 14 BIT DATA..............................................................6-266.2.15 DC Voltage Control .................................................................................6-286.2.16 COM2 Interface Commands ....................................................................6-286.2.17 Other Commands .....................................................................................6-306.3 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MANUAL SETTINGS AND RS-232C

COMMANDS................................................................................................6-356.4 COMMAND REPEAT FACILITY...............................................................6-356.5 COMMAND SUMMARY ............................................................................6-366.5.1 Control Mode Programming....................................................................6-366.5.2 Fault State Control ...................................................................................6-366.5.3 Operation Mode Control ..........................................................................6-366.5.4 Fault Mode Control..................................................................................6-366.5.5 Voltage Programming..............................................................................6-366.5.6 Current Control ........................................................................................6-376.5.7 Phase Control ...........................................................................................6-376.5.8 Frequency Control/Programming ............................................................6-376.5.9 RS-232 Control ........................................................................................6-376.5.10 Timer & Tone Control .............................................................................6-386.5.11 Display/Print Commands .........................................................................6-386.5.12 Clock/Calender Control ...........................................................................6-386.5.13 Fault Playback & Programmable Waveform Commands........................6-386.5.13.1 COMMANDS FOR 8-BIT FAULT PLAYBACK...... ......................6-386.5.13.2 COMMANDS FOR 14-BIT FAULT PLAYBACK.... ......................6-396.5.13.3 PROGRAMMABLE WAVEFORM COMMANDS.........................6-396.5.14 Individual Phase & Amplitude Programming Commands ......................6-396.5.15 DC Voltage Control Commands..............................................................6-396.5.16 COM2 Interface Commands ....................................................................6-396.5.17 Other Commands .....................................................................................6-396.6 PROGRAMMING HINTS ............................................................................6-40

x MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.7 INDIVIDUAL PHASE AND AMPLITUDE PROGRAMMING.................6-406.7.1 Programming Individual Phase/Amplitude for the MTS-1710 ...............6-416.7.1.1 INDIVIDUAL PHASE/AMPLITUDE SETTINGS MAP.... ............6-416.7.1.2 INDIVIDUAL PHASE PROGRAMMING COMMANDS..... .........6-426.7.1.3 INDIVIDUAL AMPLITUDE PROGRAMMING

COMMANDS..... ...............................................................................6-426.7.1.4 EXAMPLES..... .................................................................................6-446.7.1.5 SPECIAL NOTES..... ........................................................................6-466.7.2 Programming Individual Phase/Amplitude for the MTS-1710 +

MTS-1720................................................................................................6-466.7.2.1 INDIVIDUAL PHASE/AMPLITUDE SETTINGS MAP..... ...........6-476.7.2.2 INDIVIDUAL PHASE PROGRAMMING COMMANDS..... .........6-476.7.2.3 INDIVIDUAL AMPLITUDE PROGRAMMING COMMANDS....6-486.7.2.4 EXAMPLES..... .................................................................................6-496.7.2.5 SPECIAL NOTES..... ........................................................................6-50

Section 7Fault Playback

7.1 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................7-17.2 FAULT PLAYBACK MODES .....................................................................7-17.2.1 Internal Data Mode ..................................................................................7-17.2.2 Internal Data Repetitive Mode.................................................................7-27.2.3 External Data Mode .................................................................................7-27.3 FAULT DATA FORMAT.............................................................................7-27.3.1 General Data Format................................................................................7-27.3.1.1 EXAMPLE FOR MTS-1710 ONLY - 8 BIT..... ...............................7-27.3.1.2 EXAMPLE FOR THE MTS-1710+MTS-1720 - 8 BIT.... ................7-37.3.1.3 EXAMPLE FOR THE MTS-1710+MTS-1720 - 14 BIT..... .............7-57.3.1.4 DETERMINING PLAYBACK DATA VALUES - 8 BIT..... ..........7-67.3.1.5 DETERMINING PLAYBACK DATA VALUES - 14 BIT..... ........7-77.3.1.6 FAULT PLAYBACK IN I3-PARALLEL CURRENT MODE.... ....7-87.4 SAMPLE RATE & ANTI-ALIAS FILTER..................................................7-87.5 REQUIRED SETTINGS FOR FAULT PLAYBACK ..................................7-97.5.1 MTS-1710 Only.......................................................................................7-97.5.2 MTS-1710+MTS-1720 ............................................................................7-97.6 OPERATION IN VARIOUS FAULT MODES............................................7-107.6.1 Prefault State............................................................................................7-107.6.2 Fault State ................................................................................................7-107.6.3 Postfault State ..........................................................................................7-107.7 PLAYBACK OF DIGITAL CHANNELS ....................................................7-107.8 EXTERNAL DATA MODE USAGE ...........................................................7-117.8.1 Connections .............................................................................................7-117.8.2 General Procedure....................................................................................7-11

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL xiCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section 8Servicing

8.1 FUSE REPLACEMENT................................................................................8-18.1.1 Mains Input Fuse .....................................................................................8-18.1.2 COMM Port Picofuse ..............................................................................8-18.2 LAMP REPLACEMENT ..............................................................................8-18.3 FIRMWARE UPGRADE ..............................................................................8-18.4 GENERATION CALIBRATION..................................................................8-28.4.1 AC Voltage Generation Calibration .......................................................8-38.4.2 AC Current I1 Generation Calibration.....................................................8-38.4.3 AC Current I3 Generation Calibration.....................................................8-48.4.4 VDC Voltage Generation Calibration .....................................................8-48.5 MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION.............................................................8-58.5.1 AC Voltage Measurement Calibration ....................................................8-68.5.2 AC Current (I1) Measurement Calibration..............................................8-68.5.3 AC Current (I1-HIGH) Measurement Calibration...................................8-78.5.4 DC Current Measurement Calibration .....................................................8-88.5.5 AC Current I3 Measurement Calibration (Φ-N Values)..........................8-88.5.6 AC Current (I3) Measurement Calibration (Φ-Φ Values) .......................8-108.6 DC VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION ..................................8-118.7 TIME MEASUREMENT VERIFICATION .................................................8-128.8 POWER-UP DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES....................................................8-128.9 INTERNAL BATTERY REPLACEMENT..................................................8-128.9.1 Procedure .................................................................................................8-128.10 LED/LAMP TEST FUNCTION....................................................................8-13

Section 9MTS-1720 Two Channel Current Source

9.1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................9-19.2 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................9-19.2.1 Inputs .......................................................................................................9-19.2.2 Outputs.....................................................................................................9-19.2.3 Metering...................................................................................................9-29.2.4 Static/Dynamic Testing Capabilities .......................................................9-29.2.5 Fault Playback..........................................................................................9-29.2.6 Physical Characteristics ...........................................................................9-39.2.7 Options.....................................................................................................9-39.3 SETUP ...........................................................................................................9-39.3.1 Front Panel Layout...................................................................................9-39.3.2 Rear Panel Layout....................................................................................9-49.3.3 Getting Started .........................................................................................9-59.3.3.1 CONNECTIONS AND POWER.......................................................9-59.3.3.2 ENABLING MTS-1720 OUTPUT....................................................9-69.3.3.3 SPECIAL NOTES.... .........................................................................9-99.3.3.4 PRECAUTIONS..... ...........................................................................9-109.4 THREE-PHASE CURRENT OPERATION (I3-WYE CURRENT

MODE) ..........................................................................................................9-11

xii MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

9.4.1 Important Fundamentals ..........................................................................9-119.4.2 Fault Modes .............................................................................................9-129.4.2.1 Φ-N FAULT TYPE............................................................................9-129.4.2.2 Φ-Φ FAULT TYPE............................................................................9-139.4.2.3 3Φ FAULT TYPES............................................................................9-139.4.2.4 2Φ-N FAULT TYPE..........................................................................9-149.4.3 Displayed Quantities................................................................................9-169.4.4 Phase Angle Adjustment..........................................................................9-169.4.5 Simultaneous AC & DC Currents............................................................9-179.4.5.1 TESTING DC-OPERATED TARGETS OF OVERCURRENT

RELAYS..... .......................................................................................9-179.4.6 Testing High Burden Current Differential Relays ...................................9-199.4.7 Use of Impedance Display .......................................................................9-209.5 APPLICATION OF ADVANCED CAPABILITIES....................................9-219.6 RS-232 CONTROL .......................................................................................9-219.6.1 Configuration Check................................................................................9-219.6.2 Current Mode Selection ...........................................................................9-219.6.3 Current Programming ..............................................................................9-229.6.4 Examples..................................................................................................9-229.7 FAULT PLAYBACK....................................................................................9-259.8 SERVICING ..................................................................................................9-259.8.1 Mains Input Fuse .....................................................................................9-259.8.2 Firmware Upgrade ...................................................................................9-25

Section 10MTS-1750 High Current Source

10.1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................10-110.2 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................10-110.2.1 Power Supply...........................................................................................10-110.2.2 Current Output .........................................................................................10-110.2.3 Measurement Accuracy & Resolution .....................................................10-110.2.4 Protection .................................................................................................10-110.2.5 Physical Characteristics ...........................................................................10-110.2.6 Accessories Included ...............................................................................10-210.2.7 Interface Connector..................................................................................10-210.3 SETUP ...........................................................................................................10-210.3.1 Front Panel Layout...................................................................................10-210.3.2 Rear Panel Layout....................................................................................10-310.4 OPERATION.................................................................................................10-410.4.1 MTS-1710 + MTS-1750 Configuration...................................................10-410.4.1.1 CONNECTIONS AND POWER. ....................................................10-410.4.1.2 ENABLING MTS-1750 OUTPUT....................................................10-510.4.1.3 OPERATION WITH THE MTS-1710 + MTS-1750

CONFIGURATION...........................................................................10-610.4.1.3.1 Current Adjustment and Display .................................................10-610.4.1.3.2 RS-232 Programming ..................................................................10-6

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL xiiiCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

10.4.2 MTS-1720 +MTS-1720 + (3) MTS-1750s Configuration.......................10-610.4.2.1 CONNECTIONS AND POWER.......................................................10-610.4.2.2 OPERATION WITH THE MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 +

(3)MTS-1750s CONFIGURATION & SINGLE PHASE OUTPUT............................................................................................10-7

10.4.2.2.1 Setup ............................................................................................10-710.4.2.2.2 Current Adjustment and Display .................................................10-810.4.2.2.3 RS-232 Programming ..................................................................10-810.4.2.3 OPERATION WITH THE MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 +

(3)MTS-1750s CONFIGURATION & THREE PHASE OUTPUT............................................................................................10-9

10.4.2.3.1 Setup ............................................................................................10-910.4.2.3.2 Current Adjustment and Display .................................................10-1010.4.2.3.3 RS-232 Programming ..................................................................10-1010.4.3 Alarms......................................................................................................10-1010.4.4 Application of Advanced Capabilities .....................................................10-1010.4.4.1 INDIVIDUAL PHASE AND AMPLITUDE ADJUSTMENT

WITH THE MTS-1750......................................................................10-1010.4.4.2 FAULT PLAYBACK WITH THE MTS-1750.... .............................10-1110.4.4.3 PARALLELLING MORE THAN TWO MTS-1710/MTS-1720

SYSTEMS WITH MTS-1750s.... ......................................................10-1110.4.4.4 OPERATION OF THE MTS-1750 AS A STAND-ALONE

CURRENT SOURCE.... ....................................................................10-11

Section 11MTS-1753 Three Channel Current Source

11.1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................11-111.2 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................11-111.2.1 Power Supply...........................................................................................11-111.2.2 Current Output .........................................................................................11-111.2.3 Protection .................................................................................................11-111.3 SETUP ...........................................................................................................11-211.3.1 Front Panel Layout...................................................................................11-211.3.2 Rear Panel Layout....................................................................................11-311.4 OPERATION.................................................................................................11-411.4.1 MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + MTS-1753 Configuration.............................11-411.4.1.1 CONNECTIONS AND POWER .....................................................11-411.4.1.2 ENABLING MTS-1753 OUTPUT ..................................................11-611.4.1.3 OPERATION WITH THE MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + MTS-1753

CONFIGURATION...........................................................................11-611.4.1.3.1 Current Adjustment and Display .................................................11-6

xiv MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPENDIX APROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL I/O CHANNELS (OPTION -03A)

A.1 FEATURES ...................................................................................................A-1A.2 APPLICATIONS ...........................................................................................A-1A.3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ..............................................................A-1A.4 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................A-2A.5 OPERATION.................................................................................................A-3A.5.1 Digital Inputs ...........................................................................................A-3A.5.2 Digital Outputs.........................................................................................A-3A.5.3 Phase Comparison Output .......................................................................A-3A.6 COMMAND SET DESCRIPTION ...............................................................A-3A.6.1 Interpretation of Logic Values .................................................................A-4A.6.2 Specifying Values in Digital I/O Commands ..........................................A-4A.6.3 General Commands..................................................................................A-4A.6.4 Digital Input Control................................................................................A-5A.6.5 Digital Output Control .............................................................................A-7A.6.5.1 COMMANDS.... ................................................................................A-7A.6.5.2 EXAMPLES.... ..................................................................................A-10A.6.6 Phase Comparison Output Programming ................................................A-11A.6.6.1 COMMANDS..... ...............................................................................A-11A.6.6.2 EXAMPLES...... ................................................................................A-12A.7 COMMAND SUMMARY CHART..............................................................A-13

APPENDIX BMTS-1730 DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CONDITIONER

B.1 SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................B-1 B.1.1 Input Channels .........................................................................................B-1B.1.2 Output Channels ......................................................................................B-1B.1.3 Power .......................................................................................................B-1B.1.4 Physical Characteristics ...........................................................................B-1B.2 APPLICATIONS ...........................................................................................B-1B.3 ORDERING INFORMATION......................................................................B-2B.4 FRONT PANEL ............................................................................................B-3B.5 REAR PANEL...............................................................................................B-4B.6 CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS AND SPECIAL FUNCTIONS .....................B-5B.7 FOUR-CHANNEL INPUT MODULE .........................................................B-6B.8 16-CHANNEL INPUT MODULE ................................................................B-8B.8.1 Connector Pinout .....................................................................................B-9B.8.2 Input Bank Configuration and Numbering ..............................................B-10B.8.3 Active Input Bank Selection ....................................................................B-11B.8.4 Input Threshold Voltage Selection ..........................................................B-11B.9 EXAMPLE APPLICATION .........................................................................B-11

APPENDIX CALPHABETICAL RS-232 COMMAND SUMMARY

................................................................................................................ C-1

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL xvCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPENDIX EMTS-1710 SYNSCOPE PROGRAM

E.1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................E-1E.2 FEATURES ...................................................................................................E-1E.3 OPERATION.................................................................................................E-1E.3.1 Setup ........................................................................................................E-1E.3.2 Synchroscope Graph ................................................................................E-2E.3.3 Synchronizing Element Measurements ...................................................E-2E.3.4 Phase Limit Test ......................................................................................E-2E.3.5 Voltage Limit Test ...................................................................................E-2E.3.6 Frequency Limit Test...............................................................................E-3E.3.7 Setting Nominal Values ...........................................................................E-3

GLOSSARY................................................................................................................ F-1

AN1 - APPLICATION NOTETESTING AUTOMATIC RECLOSING FUNCTIONS

WITH THE MTS-17101.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ H-12.0 RECLOSE OPEN INTERVAL MEASUREMENT .................................... H-12.1 PROCEDURE............................................................................................... H-12.1.1 Procedure using the MTS-1710 + MTS-1730 ........................................ H-22.1.2 Procedure using the MTS-1710 alone .................................................... H-32.2 NOTES ......................................................................................................... H-43.0 MULTI-SHOT AUTO RECLOSE TEST..................................................... H-5

AN2 - APPLICATION NOTEFREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS REGARDING MTS-1700 USAGE

1.0 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................................... I-12.0 QUESTIONS AND ANSWERS .................................................................... I-1

AN3 - APPLICATION NOTEPRACTICAL MHO DISTANCE RELAY TESTING

WITH THE MTS-17101.0 INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................J-12.0 TYPES OF TESTING ....................................................................................J-13.0 PRACTICAL TESTING ASPECTS ..............................................................J-23.1 TESTING STEADY STATE CHARACTERISTICS ....................................J-23.1.1 Test Voltages and Currents.......................................................................J-23.1.2 Test Voltages ............................................................................................J-33.1.3 Resolution .................................................................................................J-43.1.4 Apparent Impedance .................................................................................J-53.1.5 Transient effects........................................................................................J-63.1.6 Hysteresis..................................................................................................J-63.2 DETERMINING OPERATION TIMES ........................................................J-63.3 TESTING DYNAMIC AND VARIABLE CHARACTERISTICS ...............J-83.4 FAULT PLAYBACK.....................................................................................J-93.5 OTHER CONSIDERATIONS .......................................................................J-9

xvi MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

3.5.1 Prefault Voltage and Current ....................................................................J-93.5.2 Overcurrent Supervision .........................................................................J-103.5.3 Testing Multiple Zone Relays.................................................................J-104.0 IMPROVING PRODUCTIVITY IN DISTANCE RELAY TESTING

WITH THE MTS-1710.................................................................................J-105.0 REFERENCES .............................................................................................J-12

AN4 - APPLICATION NOTETESTING PILOTLESS ACCELERATED TRIPPING FUNCTIONS OF

PROTECTIVE RELAYS WITH THE MTS-17101.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ K-12.0 PROCEDURE............................................................................................... K-12.1 TESTING THE PILOTLESS ACCELERATED TRIP FUNCTION........... K-12.1.1 Manual Method ...................................................................................... K-22.1.2 RS-232 Control Method ......................................................................... K-32.2 TESTING THE REJO ELEMENT ON THE SEL-121F RELAY ............... K-4

AN5 - APPLICATION NOTEPERFORMING CURRENT REVERSAL AND SEQUENTIAL

CLEARING SIMULATIONS WITH THE MTS-17101.0 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................L-12.0 PERMISSIVE OVERREACH SCHEME EXAMPLE..................................L-12.1 DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................L-12.2 VERIFYING RELAY OPERATION/NON-OPERATION ..........................L-22.3 VERIFYING PERMISSIVE SIGNAL GENERATION ...............................L-33.0 PERMISSIVE UNDERREACH SCHEME EXAMPLE...............................L-43.1 DESCRIPTION .............................................................................................L-43.2 VERIFYING RELAY OPERATION/NON-OPERATION ..........................L-5

AN6 - APPLICATION NOTE PERFORMING SYNCHRONIZING RELAY DROPOUT TESTS

WITH THE MTS-17101.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................M-12.0 PROCEDURE...............................................................................................M-1

AN7 - APPLICATION NOTEPERFORMING MEMORY VOLTAGE POLARIZATION AND TRIP

DURATION TESTS WITH THE MTS-17101.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ N-11.1 MEMORY VOLTAGE POLARIZATION TESTS ..................................... N-11.2 TRIP DURATION TESTS ........................................................................... N-22.1 PROCEDURE USING THE EXTERNAL TIMER START MODE........... N-22.2 PROCEDURE USING THE INTERNAL TIMER START MODE............ N-3

AN8 - APPLICATION NOTETRIGGERING AN OSCILLOSCOPE FOR RECORDING TESTS

WITH THE MTS-17101.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ O-12.0 PROCEDURE............................................................................................... O-1

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL xviiCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

AN9 - APPLICATION NOTECOMMUNICATING TO THE SEL RELAYS VIA THE

MTS-1710 COM2 PORT1.0 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................... P-12.0 PROCEDURE................................................................................................ P-1

AN10 - APPLICATION NOTECOMMUNICATING TO THE GEC OPTIMHO RELAY

VIA THE MTS-1710 COM2 PORT1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ Q-12.0 PROCEDURE............................................................................................... Q-1

AN11 - APPLICATION NOTE MTS-1730 INTERFACING

1.0 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................R-12.0 INPUT INTERFACING ................................................................................R-12.1 SIMPLE CONTACT OUTPUT.....................................................................R-12.2 LIVE CONTROL SIGNALS.........................................................................R-12.3 SCR OUTPUT ...............................................................................................R-22.4 GE DLP RELAY TRIP OUTPUT.................................................................R-22.5 GEC QUADRAMHO 24V LOGIC TEST OUTPUT....................................R-22.6 5V LOGIC OUTPUT SENSING...................................................................R-32.7 OPTICAL SENSING OF LEDS....................................................................R-33.0 OUTPUT INTERFACING ............................................................................R-43.1 RELAY BREAKER SIMULATOR ..............................................................R-43.2 CURRENT ROUTING..................................................................................R-43.3 GEC OPTIMHO/QUADRAMHO TEST OPTION/SCHEME

PROGRAMMING .........................................................................................R-53.4 GEC MICROMHO TEST OPTION/SCHEME PROGRAMMING.............R-54.0 EXAMPLES USING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS .........................................R-64.1 MULTIPLE SHOT AUTO-RECLOSE TESTING .......................................R-64.2 PROGRAMMABLE TOTAL FAULT DURATION....................................R-7

AN12 - APPLICATION NOTE COMMUNICATING WITH DIGITAL RELAYS VIA THE

MTS-1710 COM2 PORT1.0 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................... S-12.0 COM2 CABLE REQUIREMENTS .............................................................. S-13.0 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE .............................................................. S-24.0 PROCEDURE................................................................................................ S-2

AN13 - APPLICATION NOTE AUTOMATIC MODIFICATION OF SEL SERIES RELAY MASKS

BOOSTS PRODUCTIVITY DURING AUTOMATED TESTING.1.0 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................T-12.0 COM2 CABLE REQUIREMENTS AND CONNECTIONS .......................T-13.0 THE RelaySet TEST MACRO ......................................................................T-24.0 PROCEDURE FOR ADDING THE RelaySet TEST MACRO TO A

TEMPLATE...................................................................................................T-25.0 EXAMPLE: BLOCKING THE Z2GT & Z3 ELEMENTS PRIOR TO

RUNNING THE 51NT TEST (SEL-121F RELAY).....................................T-3

xviii MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

AN14 - APPLICATION NOTE TESTING GENERATOR EXCITATION SYSTEMS

WITH THE MTS-17101.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ U-12.0 TEST OF AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE REGULATOR CIRCUIT................ U-13.0 TEST OF REACTIVE CURRENT COMPENSATOR (RCC).................... U-14.0 TEST OF UNDER EXCITATION LIMITER (UEL) .................................. U-15.0 TEST OF POWER SYSTEM STABILIZER ............................................... U-16.0 TEST OF TERMINAL VOLTAGE LIMITERS.......................................... U-1

AN15 - APPLICATION NOTE CAPTURING WAVEFORMS WITH THE

POWERTEST EVENT RECORDER1.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ V-12.0 PROCEDURE MANUAL CAPTURE METHOD....................................... V-23.0 PROCEDURE AUTOMATIC CAPTURE METHOD ................................ V-3

AN16 - APPLICATION NOTE AUTOMATED TESTING OF THE GEC OPTIMHO RELAY

1.0 INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................... W-12.0 AUTOMATING OUTPUT CONTACT CONFIGURATION.................... W-13.0 CABLE REQUIREMENTS AND CONNECTIONS.................................. W-24.0 SIMPLIFYING COMMUNICATIONS WITH THE OPTIMHO

RELAY ........................................................................................................ W-24.1 COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE ............................................................ W-34.2 HOW TO INSTALL, CONFIGURE AND TEST “OPTICOM” ................ W-45.0 TESTS INCLUDED WITH THE OPTIMHO-LL TEMPLATE................. W-5

AN17 - APPLICATION NOTE TESTING OF DC CURRENT-OPERATED TARGETS

WITH THE MTS-17101.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ X-12.1 QUICK CHECK METHOD ......................................................................... X-12.2 MANUAL METHOD TO DETERMINE TARGET & SEAL-IN UNIT

PICKUP/DROPOUT .................................................................................... X-22.3 DYNAMIC TEST (OVERCURRENT RELAY) ......................................... X-22.4 DYNAMIC TEST (VOLTAGE RELAY).................................................... X-42.5 DYNAMIC TEST (1Φ DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT, POWER,

OR IMPEDANCE RELAY) ........................................................................ X-52.6 DYNAMIC TEST (1Φ DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT, POWER,

OR IMPEDANCE RELAY) USING THE MTS-1710 ONLY .................... X-7

AN18 - APPLICATION NOTE TESTING BREAKER FAILURE PROTECTION RELAYS

WITH THE MTS-17101.0 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................ Y-12.0 METHOD ..................................................................................................... Y-12.1 OPERATION TIME TEST .......................................................................... Y-12.2 NON-OPERATION TEST ........................................................................... Y-2

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL xixCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

AN19 - APPLICATION NOTE HIGH RESOLUTION DC VOLTAGE/DC CURRENT OUTPUT

WITH THE MTS-17101.0 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................Z-12.0 METHOD ......................................................................................................Z-12.1 DC VOLTAGE OUTPUT .............................................................................Z-12.2 DYNAMIC TESTING...................................................................................Z-22.3 USE WITH POWERTEST............................................................................Z-23.0 DC CURRENT OUTPUT .............................................................................Z-24.0 PERFORMANCE..........................................................................................Z-4

AN20 - APPLICATION NOTE TESTING POWER SWING BLOCKING (OUT-OF-STEP BLOCKING)

ELEMENTS WITH THE MTS-1700 SYSTEM1.0 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................... AA-12.0 TEST METHOD........................................................................................ AA-12.1 TESTING THE IMPEDANCE CHARACTERISTIC .............................. AA-12.2 TESTING THE BLOCKING FUNCTION ............................................... AA-22.2.1 Phase Angle Ramp Method ................................................................. AA-22.2.2 Current Ramp Method ......................................................................... AA-32.2.3 Step Method......................................................................................... AA-42.3 TESTING THE OUT-OF-STEP DETECTION ELEMENT TIMER ....... AA-52.4 TESTING BLOCKING DEASSERTION................................................. AA-72.5 TESTING OUT-OF-STEP TRIPPING ..................................................... AA-8

AN21 - APPLICATION NOTE SIMULATING 3-PHASE VOLTAGE AND 3-PHASE CURRENT OUTPUT

WITH THE MTS-1710 ONLY 1.0 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................BB-12.0 EXAMPLE..................................................................................................BB-23.0 SIMULATED THREE-PHASE OUTPUT-CONTROL VIA THE MTS-1710 SETTINGS PROGRAM ..........................................................BB-34.0 OTHER FAULT TYPES ............................................................................BB-4

AN22 - APPLICATION NOTE TESTING POSITIVE, NEGATIVE AND ZERO SEQUENCE ELEMENTS

1.0 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS BACKGROUND ..............................CC-11.1 POSITIVE SEQUENCE ELEMENTS.......................................................CC-21.1.1 Definition ..............................................................................................CC-21.1.2 Applications ..........................................................................................CC-21.1.3 Test Methods.........................................................................................CC-21.1.3.1 SINGLE PHASE SOURCE TEST METHOD ...............................CC-21.1.3.2 TWO PHASE SOURCE TEST METHOD ....................................CC-41.1.3.3 BALANCED THREE-PHASE TEST METHOD ..........................CC-51.1.3.4 UNBALANCED THREE-PHASE TEST METHOD ....................CC-61.2 NEGATIVE SEQUENCE ELEMENTS ...................................................CC-71.2.1 Definition ..............................................................................................CC-71.2.2 Applications ..........................................................................................CC-7

xx MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.2.3 Test Methods.........................................................................................CC-71.2.3.1 SINGLE PHASE SOURCE TEST METHOD ...............................CC-81.2.3.2 TWO-PHASE SOURCE TEST METHOD. ...................................CC-81.2.3.3 BALANCED THREE-PHASE TEST METHOD ..........................CC-91.2.3.4 UNBALANCED THREE-PHASE TEST METHOD ..................CC-101.3 ZERO SEQUENCE ELEMENTS ............................................................CC-101.3.1 Definition ............................................................................................CC-101.3.2 Applications ........................................................................................CC-111.3.3 Test Methods.......................................................................................CC-111.3.3.1 SINGLE PHASE SOURCE TEST METHOD .............................CC-111.3.3.2 TWO PHASE SOURCE TEST METHOD ..................................CC-121.3.3.3 BALANCED THREE-PHASE TEST METHOD ........................CC-131.3.3.4 UNBALANCED THREE-PHASE TEST METHOD ..................CC-132.0 SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS AND HARMONICS.......................CC-14

AN23 - APPLICATION NOTE HARMONIC RESTRAINT ELEMENT TESTING OF GE BDD15/16 AND

ABB HU RELAYS USING THE MANTA TEST SYSTEMS MTS-1710 1.0 INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................... DD-11.1 KEY POINTS OF THE FACTORY RECOMMENDED

CALIBRATION ........................................................................................ DD-11.2 HARMONIC ANALYSIS OF THE HALF-WAVE RECTIFIED AC ..... DD-12.0 TESTING................................................................................................... DD-22.1 TEST METHOD WITH AN ELECTRONIC SOURCE........................... DD-22.2 TESTING WITH THE MTS-1710 ............................................................ DD-22.3 SAMPLE TEST RESULTS....................................................................... DD-33.0 REFERENCES .......................................................................................... DD-3

AN24 - APPLICATION NOTE TESTING THE LINEAR RESETTING FEATURE

OF OVERCURRENT RELAYS1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... EE-12.0 TEST PROCEDURE .................................................................................. EE-22.1 CHECKING THE LINEAR RESET FEATURE ....................................... EE-22.2 CHECKING THE CONTACT RESET TIME ........................................... EE-3

AN25 - APPLICATION NOTE HARMONIC RESTRAINT ELEMENT TESTING OF

ALSTOM MBCH AND KBCH RELAYS USING THE MANTA TEST SYSTEMS MTS-1710

1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... FF-12.0 PREVIOUS TEST PROCEDURES ........................................................... FF-12.1 THE FACTORY RECOMMENDED PROCEDURE................................ FF-12.2 TEST PROCEDURE USING FUNDAMENTAL AC + PURE SECOND HARMONIC.............................................................................. FF-13.0 A NEW TEST TECHNIQUE ..................................................................... FF-24.0 TEST PROCEDURE STEPS...................................................................... FF-45.0 REFERENCES ........................................................................................... FF-4

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL xxiCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

AN26 - APPLICATION NOTE RETRIEVING AND PLAYBACK OF OSCILLOGRAPHY

WAVEFORMS1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... GG-12.0 PROCEDURE............................................................................................. GG-12.0.1 Retrieving and Converting SEL321 Oscillography files to COMTRADE

format.................................................................................................... GG-12.0.2 Retrieving and converting DLP Oscillography files to COMTRADE

format.................................................................................................... GG-22.0.3 Retrieving and converting ABB REL512 Oscillography files to

COMTRADE format ............................................................................ GG-22.0.4 Downloading COMTRADE files to the MTS-1700 System ............... GG-3

AN27 - APPLICATION NOTE TESTING THE HIGH IMPEDANCE DETECTION OF THE GE DFP200

1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... HH-12.0 MANUAL TESTING PROCEDURES OF THE GE DFP200

HIGH IMPEDANCE DETECTION ALGORITHM.................................. HH-12.1 ARCING TEST PROCEDURE.................................................................. HH-33.0 PROCEDURES OF USING THE PROGRAMMABLE FAULT SPREADSHEET......................................................................................... HH-33.1 FEATURES AND DESCRIPTION............................................................ HH-33.2 PROCEDURES .......................................................................................... HH-43.3 PLAYING THE PROGRAMMABLE FAULT ......................................... HH-53.4 SUMMARY OF USEFUL COMMANDS................................................. HH-54.0 TESTING PROCEDURES OF THE GE DFP200 HIGH IMPEDANCE

DETECTION ALGORITHM USING FAULT PLAYBACK ................... HH-54.1 DOWN CONDUCTOR TEST.................................................................... HH-54.2 ARCING TEST........................................................................................... HH-75.0 OTHER USES FOR FAULT PLAYBACK SPREADSHEET .................. HH-76.0 REFERENCES ........................................................................................... HH-7

AN28 - APPLICATION NOTE KD-4 RELAY TEST PROCEDURE USING THE MTS-1710 TEST EQUIPMENT

1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... II-12.0 DESCRIPTION OF RELAY ...................................................................... II-13.0 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED AND CONNECTIONS ................................. II-14.0 SAFETY WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS......................................... II-15.0 MHO CIRCLES AND MTA ...................................................................... II-25.1 SETTINGS, CALCULATION OF RELAY REACH AND MTA............. II-25.1.1 Phase-Phase element MHO circle, A-B Faults ..................................... II-35.1.2 Phase-Phase element MHO circle, B-C Faults ..................................... II-55.1.3 Phase-Phase element MHO circle, C-A Faults ..................................... II-55.2 PHASE-PHASE ELEMENT MTA ............................................................ II-55.3 THREE-PHASE ELEMENT MHO CIRCLE ............................................ II-65.4 TESTING THE THREE-PHASE ELEMENT MTA.................................. II-65.5 TARGET (CURRENT OPERATED) ........................................................ II-66.0 OPERATING SPEED................................................................................. II-7

xxii MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

6.1 TESTING THE OPERATING SPEED OF THE PHASE-PHASEELEMENT.................................................................................................. II-7

6.2 THREE-PHASE ELEMENT...................................................................... II-97.0 HELPFUL HINTS AND EQUATIONS..................................................... II-98.0 TESTING WITH THE MTS-1710 AND MTS-1720................................. II-9

AN29 - APPLICATION NOTE CO RELAY TEST PROCEDURE USING THE MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

MTS-1710 TEST EQUIPMENT 1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... JJ-12.0 DESCRIPTION OF RELAY ...................................................................... JJ-13.0 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED AND CONNECTIONS ................................. JJ-14.0 SAFETY WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS......................................... JJ-25.0 RELAY SETTINGS ................................................................................... JJ-26.0 ENABLING OF TORQUE CONTROL OPTION ..................................... JJ-37.0 MINIMUM INVERSE-ELEMENT TRIP CURRENT .............................. JJ-38.0 INVERSE TIME CHARACTERISTIC...................................................... JJ-39.0 INSTANTANEOUS TRIP CURRENT...................................................... JJ-410.0 INSTANTANEOUS TRIP TIME............................................................... JJ-411.0 TARGET AND SEAL-IN UNIT................................................................ JJ-511.0.1 Current-Operated Target....................................................................... JJ-511.0.2 Voltage-Operated Target ...................................................................... JJ-6

AN30 - APPLICATION NOTE GCX17G RELAY TEST PROCEDURE USING THE

MTS-1710 TEST EQUIPMENT 1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... KK-12.0 DESCRIPTION OF RELAY ...................................................................... KK-13.0 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED AND CONNECTIONS ................................. KK-24.0 SAFETY WARNINGS AND PRECAUTIONS......................................... KK-35.0 MHO CIRCLE AND MTA OF STARTING ELEMENT.......................... KK-35.1 SETTINGS, CALCULATION OF MHO, AND REACTANCE

REACHES AND MTA............................................................................... KK-35.2 STARTING ELEMENT MHO CIRCLE, A-N FAULTS .......................... KK-35.3 STARTING ELEMENT MTA ................................................................... KK-56.0 REACH AND MTA OF ZONE 1 REACTANCE ELEMENT .................. KK-66.1 MEASUREMENT OF REACH AT 90°..................................................... KK-66.2 MEASUREMENT OF ZONE 1 REACTANCE ELEMENT MTA........... KK-77.0 REACH AND MTA OF ZONE 2 REACTANCE ELEMENT .................. KK-78.0 OPERATING SPEED OF COMBINED ELEMENTS .............................. KK-88.1 ESTABLISHING INITIAL CONDITIONS............................................... KK-88.2 MEASUREMENT OF OPERATING TIME CURVE............................... KK-89.0 TARGET AND SEAL-IN UNIT................................................................ KK-910.0 HELPFUL HINTS AND EQUATIONS..................................................... KK-911.0 TESTING WITH THE MTS-1710 AND MTS-1720 COMBINATION ... KK-1012.0 CONCLUSIONS ........................................................................................ KK-10

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL xxiiiCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

AN31 - APPLICATION NOTE TESTING OF A THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE BALANCE RELAY WITH A SINGLE

THREE-PHASE SOURCE1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................... LL-12.0 TEST STRATEGY..................................................................................... LL-12.1 TEST PROCEDURE .................................................................................. LL-32.1.1 Setup ..................................................................................................... LL-32.1.2 Simple unbalance pickup test ............................................................... LL-32.1.3 Loss of one potential test ...................................................................... LL-42.1.4 Operation time test................................................................................ LL-42.1.5 Testing other phases and the alternate 3-phase input ........................... LL-43.0 TWO 3-PHASE CURRENT SOURCES FROM ONLY ONE

3-PHASE CURRENT SOURCE ................................................................ LL-44.0 REFERENCES ........................................................................................... LL-4

INDEX........................................................................................................... MM-1

xxiv MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Figure Title PageNumber Number

1.1 MTS-1700 SYSTEM .....................................................................................1-2

3.1 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT ...........................................................................3-1 3.2 REAR PANEL LAYOUT .............................................................................3-5 3.3 MODE/MENU DISPLAY.............................................................................3-7

3.4 OVERCURRENT RELAY TEST SETUP....................................................3-113.5 OVERCURRENT RELAY TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST SETUP ..................3-133.6 VOLTAGE RELAY TEST SETUP ..............................................................3-153.7 CONNECTIONS FOR VOLTAGE RELAY TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST ....3-173.8 1-Φ IMPEDANCE OR DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT RELAY

TEST SETUP.................................................................................................3-183.9 3-Φ IMPEDANCE RELAY TEST SETUP...................................................3-213.10 3-Φ IMPEDANCE RELAY PERMISSIVE TRIP TEST SETUP.................3-243.11 CONNECTIONS FOR THREE-TERMINAL CURRENT

DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS...........................................................................3-263.12 INSTANTANEOUS TEST FOR THREE-TERMINAL CURRENT

DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS...........................................................................3-283.13 CURRENT-OPERATED TARGET TEST - THREE-TERMINAL TYPE

DIFF’L RELAY.............................................................................................3-303.14 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL RELAY TEST - INDEPENDENT COIL

TYPE .............................................................................................................3-313.15 SYNCHRONIZING RELAY TEST..............................................................3-333.16 CONNECTIONS FOR SYNCHRONIZING ELEMENTS WITH

POSITIVE SEQUENCE VOLTAGE SUPERVISION.................................3-35 3.17 GROUND FAULT OVERVOLTAGE RELAY ...........................................3-36

3.18 SIMPLE FREQUENCY RATE-OF-CHANGE TESTS................................3-403.19 DC AUXILIARY/TIME-DELAY RELAY PICKUP TEST.........................3-413.20 DC AUXILIARY/TIME-DELAY RELAY TIMING TEST.........................3-42

4.1 FAULT STATE DIAGRAM FOR STATIC OPERATION MODE.............4-24.2 FAULT STATE DIAGRAM FOR DYNAMIC OPERATION MODE........4-24.3 EXAMPLE OUTPUT SEQUENCE (PREFAULT OFF & POSTFAULT

ON) ................................................................................................................4-54.4 EXAMPLE OUTPUT SEQUENCE (PREFAULT ON & POSTFAULT

OFF)...............................................................................................................4-64.5 EXAMPLE OUTPUT SEQUENCE (PREFAULT ON & POSTFAULT

ON) ................................................................................................................4-64.6 EXAMPLE OUTPUT SEQUENCE (PREFAULT OFF & POSTFAULT

ON) ................................................................................................................4-74.7 FOUR-WIRE TIMING MEASUREMENT ..................................................4-9

4.8 TWO-WIRE PULSE TIMING CONNECTIONS.........................................4-10

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL xxvCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS


4.9 TEST CONNECTIONS FOR SCR OUTPUT TYPE RELAYS...................4-114.10 3Φ IMPEDANCE RELAY TEST SETUP ....................................................4-154.11 PROPER & IMPROPER CURRENT OUTPUT CONNECTIONS IN

I1&I2 CURRENT MODE .............................................................................4-174.12 PERCENTAGE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY TESTING ................................4-184.13 SUM OF FUNDAMENTAL FREQUENCY CURRENT OF 60HZ WITH

50% HARMONIC .........................................................................................4-194.14 SUM OF FUNDAMENTAL AND THE RECTIFIED DC CURRENT .......4-19 4.15 PURE DC RECTIFIED SIGNAL WITHOUT ANY FUNDAMENTAL

CURRENT.....................................................................................................4-204.16 HARMONIC RESTRAINT TESTING .........................................................4-224.17 PARALLELING WITH (1) MTS-1710 + (1) MTS-1720.............................4-254.18 PARALLELING WITH TWO MTS-1710s ..................................................4-264.19 PARALLELING FOR A THREE-PHASE LOAD .......................................4-274.20 PARALLELING OF TWO (MTS-1710 + MTS-1720) SYSTEMS..............4-284.21 THREE-PHASE HIGH CURRENT PARALLEL CONNECTION .............4-294.22 PARALLELING MORE THAN TWO (MTS-1710 + MTS-1720)

SYSTEMS SINGLE PHASE LOAD ............................................................4-304.23 PARALLELING MORE THAN TWO (MTS-1710 + MTS-1720)

SYSTEMS THREE PHASE LOAD..............................................................4-314.24 VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT IN VARIOUS FAULT MODES ....................4-334.25 VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT WITH UNBALANCED SYSTEMS ..............4-374.26 MULTI-SYSTEM SYNC CONNECTION (TWO MTS-1710 +

MTS-1720 SYSTEMS)..................................................................................4-424.27 MULTI-SYSTEM SYNC CONNECTION (TWO MTS-1710s ONLY) ......4-424.28 PILOT WIRE RELAY TEST (DIRECT CONNECTION) ...........................4-444.29 PILOT WIRE RELAY TEST (SIMULATED CHANNEL DELAY)...........4-454.30 EXTERNAL AMP SIGNAL INPUT CONNECTOR...................................4-46

5.1 MTS-1710 MENU TREE ..............................................................................5-25.2 MTS-1710 SETTINGS SUB-MENU TREE .................................................5-35.3 BASIC RAMP/DURATION SEQUENCES .................................................5-65.4 OTHER RAMP/DURATION SEQUENCES................................................5-75.5 PHASE ANGLE RAMP DIRECTION PROGRAMMING..........................5-95.6 DC AUXILIARY RELAY TIMING TEST ..................................................5-145.7 SPECIAL APPLICATION OF THE EXTERNAL START TIMER

MODE............................................................................................................5-155.8 EXAMPLES OF FIA SETTINGS.................................................................5-165.9 AUTO-RECLOSE TIME DELAY................................................................5-265.10 TWO-SHOT AUTO RECLOSE TEST .........................................................5-275.11 POSTFAULT SEQUENCE EXAMPLE 1 ....................................................5-295.12 POSTFAULT SEQUENCE EXAMPLE 2 ....................................................5-30

xxvi MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

TABLE OF CONTENTS


5.13 INDIVIDUAL PHASE ADJUSTMENT MODES........................................5-315.14 INDIVIDUAL PHASE ADJUSTMENT MENU TREE (I1-LOW &

I1-HIGH CURRENT MODES).....................................................................5-335.15 INDIVIDUAL PHASE ADJUSTMENT MENU TREE FOR

I2-HARMONIC CURRENT MODE.............................................................5-345.16 INDIVIDUAL PHASE ADJUSTMENT MENU TREE FOR I1&I2

CURRENT MODE ........................................................................................5-355.17 INDIVIDUAL PHASE ADJUSTMENT MENU TREE FOR I3

CURRENT MODE ........................................................................................5-365.18 INDIVIDUAL PHASE ADJUSTMENT MENU TREE FOR I3-WYE

CURRENT MODE ........................................................................................5-365.19 [PHASE] BUTTON ACTION & PHASE DISPLAY MODE ......................5-435.20 BREAKER SIMULATION USING AUX CONTACTS..............................5-455.21 PERMISSIVE & UNBLOCK SIGNAL SIMULATOR USING AUX

CONTACTS ..................................................................................................5-46

7.1 EXTERNAL AMP IN CONNECTOR ..........................................................7-11

9.1 MTS-1720 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT ........................................................9-3 9.2 MTS-1720 REAR PANEL LAYOUT...........................................................9-49.3 REAR PANEL MTS-1710/MTS-1720 INTERCONNECTIONS.................9-59.4 TYPICAL FULL THREE-PHASE RELAY CONNECTIONS ....................9-79.5 CONNECTIONS FOR RELAYS WITH NEUTRAL CURRENT COILS...9-99.6 PROPER AND IMPROPER CONNECTIONS FOR I3-WYE

CURRENT MODE ........................................................................................9-109.7 PHASE-GROUND FAULT ..........................................................................9-129.8 PHASE-PHASE FAULT...............................................................................9-139.9 THREE-PHASE (Φ-Φ) FAULT ....................................................................9-149.10 THREE-PHASE (Φ-N) FAULT ....................................................................9-149.11 TWO-PHASE-TO-GROUND FAULT .........................................................9-159.12 OVERCURRENT RELAY DC TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST .........................9-199.13 TEST CONNECTIONS FOR CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS

IN I3-WYE MODE........................................................................................9-20

10.1 MTS-1750 FRONT PANEL..........................................................................10-210.2 MTS-1750 REAR PANEL ............................................................................10-310.3 MTS-1710 + MTS-1750 CONTROL CONNECTIONS ...............................10-410.4 MTS-1710 + MTS-1750 CURRENT CONNECTIONS ...............................10-510.5 MTS-1710 DISPLAY INDICATING MTS-1750 DETECTED ...................10-510.6 MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3)MTS-1750 CONTROL CONNECTIONS.....10-710.7 MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3)MTS-1750 SINGLE PHASE CURRENT

CONNECTIONS ...........................................................................................10-8

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL xxviiCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS


10.8 MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3)MTS-1750 THREE PHASE CURRENT CONNECTIONS ...........................................................................................10-9

10.9 MTS-1750 CONTROL CONNECTOR CONNECTIONS FOR STAND ALONE OPERATION ..................................................................................10-12

11.1 MTS-1753 FRONT PANEL..........................................................................11-211.2 MTS-1753 REAR PANEL ............................................................................11-311.3 MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + MTS-1753 CONTROL CONNECTIONS .........11-411.4 MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + MTS-1753 CURRENT CONNECTIONS .........11-511.5 MTS-1710 DISPLAY INDICATING MTS-1753 DETECTED ...................11-6

A-1 DIGITAL OUTPUT EXAMPLES ................................................................A-10

B-1 MTS-1730 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT ........................................................B-3B-2 MTS-1730 REAR PANEL LAYOUT...........................................................B-4

B-3 FOUR-CHANNEL INPUT MODULE .........................................................B-6B-4 CONFIGURATION JUMPERS FOR INPUT SENSE LEVELS ON

FOUR-CHANNEL INPUT MODULES .......................................................B-7B-5 MTS-1730 16-CHANNEL INPUT MODULE..............................................B-8

B-6 EXAMPLE CONNECTIONS OF MTS-1730 TO SEL-121G DISTANCERELAY ..........................................................................................................B-12

1. CONNECTIONS FOR AUTO RECLOSE TEST ........................................ H-12. CONNECTIONS FOR RECLOSE OPEN INTERVAL MEASUREMENT

USING THE MTS-1710 + MTS-1730 ........................................................ H-2 3. CONNECTIONS FOR RECLOSE OPEN INTERVAL MEASUREMENT

USING THE MTS-1710............................................................................... H-3 4. MULTI-SHOT RECLOSE TESTING CONNECTIONS

USING THE MTS-1710............................................................................... H-5

1. CONNECTIONS FOR QUICK CHECK OF OVERCURRENT RELAY TARGET/SEAL-IN........................................................................ X-1

2. CONNECTIONS FOR DYNAMIC TEST OF O/C RELAY TARGET/SEAL-IN ...................................................................................... X-3

3. TYPICAL WAVEFORMS DURING DYNAMIC TESTOF SEAL-IN UNIT ...................................................................................... X-4

4. CONNECTIONS FOR DYNAMIC TEST OF VOLTAGE RELAYTARGET/SEAL-IN ...................................................................................... X-5

5. CONNECTIONS FOR DYNAMIC TEST OF 1-PHASE OVERCURRENT/POWER/IMPEDANCE RELAYS................................. X-6 6. CONNECTIONS FOR DYNAMIC TEST OF 1-PHASE OVERCURRENT/POWER/IMPEDANCE RELAYS USING ONLY THE MTS-1710................................................................... X-8

xxviii MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

TABLE OF CONTENTS


1. CONNECTIONS FOR BREAKER FAIL RELAY TESTS......................... Y-1 2. OPERATION TIME TEST .......................................................................... Y-2

1. TEST CONNECTIONS............................................................................. HH-2 2. SPREADSHEET ENTRY SECTION ....................................................... HH-4

1. TEST CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MTS-1710 AND KD-4 RELAY........II-2 2. VECTORS FOR Φ-Φ ....................................................................................II-4

3. VECTORS FOR 3Φ FAULT .........................................................................II-6 4. CONNECTIONS FOR TARGET TEST .......................................................II-7 5. STANDARD NORMALIZED MHO CIRCLE...........................................II-14

1. TEST CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MTS-1710 AND CO RELAY .......... JJ-2 2. CONNECTIONS FOR TARGET TEST ...................................................... JJ-5

1. TEST CONNECTIONS BETWEEN MTS-1710 AND GCX17GRELAY ...................................................................................................... KK-2

2. STANDARD NORMALIZED MHO CIRCLE - 60° .............................. KK-13

1. GENERIC INPUTS TO A THREE-PHASE VOLTAGE BALANCEDRELAY ....................................................................................................... LL-1

2. SIX PHASE VOLTAGE VECTORS ......................................................... LL-23. UNBALANCED SIX PHASE VOLTAGE VECTORS............................. LL-24. SIX PHASE VOLTAGE VECTORS SHOWING LOSS OF ONE

POTENTIAL .............................................................................................. LL-2 5. TEST CONNECTIONS.............................................................................. LL-3

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL xxixCU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS

xxx MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

INTRODUCTION - Section 1

INTRODUCTION

1.1 DISTINCTIVE CHARACTERISTICS

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The MTS-1700 Series Universal Protective Relay Test System is a comprehensive relay test systemdesigned for standard testing of polyphase and single-phase protection relays. It can perform steady-stateand complex dynamic testing of relays, as well as fault playback (regeneration of digitized faultwaveforms).

The system comes in four basic hardware components, as shown in Figure 1.1.

• 3Φ sourcing and fault simulation in a single compact unit.

• Full ramping capability of all outputs available under manual control.

• Manual or computer-controlled testing in static and dynamic modes. All functions can be

computer-controlled via standard RS-232C interface.

• Single knob adjustment of Φ−Φ and 3Φ voltage, current, phase and frequency.

• Programmable prefault, fault and postfault conditions.

• Performs playback of pre-recorded fault waveforms for re-creating fault events.

• Integrated measurement of time, voltage, current, phase and frequency.

• Unique, easy-to-use start and stop trigger inputs. • Dual current and harmonic current mode.

• Built-in front panel menu for advanced features.

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL 1-1CU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS


FIGURE 1.1 MTS-1700 SYSTEM

The MTS-1710 alone can test the majority of single and three-phase devices (except those requiring fullthree-phase current), as well as differential relays. Add the MTS-1720, two channel current source for fullthree-phase current capability. Add the MTS-1730 for full digital testing capability, especially under auto-matic computer control. Add the MTS-1750, high current source, for testing where precision high currentsare required.

All four of the instruments can be computer controlled in each of the seven possible configurations (MTS-1710 only; MTS-1710 + MTS-1720; MTS-1710 + MTS-1750; MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3)MTS-1750s;MTS-1710 + MTS-1730; MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + MTS-1730; or MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + MTS-1730+ (3) MTS-1750s) using the MTS-1780 Protective Relay Test Software.

Controlled sourcing of 3-phase voltage, and a single phase current, is provided internally. C o m p le t eprogrammability of amplitude, phase and frequency of the voltage and current outputs is provided.Measurement of all output parameters, as well as start/stop timing, are available via front panel control.

The MTS-1700 system is particularly designed for simulation of faults in three phase systems. Advancedfault simulation capabilities, such as frequency, voltage, current and phase ramping, are standard. Fullcontrol of all functions via the RS-232C computer interface paves the way for automated testing of manytypes of protection relays.

The fault playback capabilities of this unique field instrument will link field testing back to protectivesystem engineering. It allows engineers to subject relays to predicted characteristic faults (based uponcomputer simulation models), or abnormal faults, and analyze their performance before implementation.

1-2 MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A


Furthermore, when actual faults do occur, digital fault records can be reconstructed using the MTS-1710 tore-subject the relay (in the field) to the fault events. Analysis of these tests can lead to modifying relaysettings or other protective circuitry to prevent future problems.

1.3 APPLICATIONS

1.3.1 Standard Applications

• Static, dynamic testing and calibration of virtually all protective relays, including:

• On panel testing of relay systems, both steady-state and dynamic operation.• 3Φ transducer testing/calibration.• Voltage, current, phase, frequency, Watt, VAR transducers.• Power swing (out-of-step) simulation/testing.

1.3.2 Fault Playback Applications

• Playback of digital fault records, or relay event reports, into relays and relay systems for fault andmisoperation analysis

• Fault simulation, harmonic sourcing, and transient simulation for relay and relay system testing- Inrush current simulation/testing (including DC offset)- Ground resistance testing- Playback of multiple and evolved faults.

• Digital fault recorder testing.• Playback of EMTP output waveforms to relays and relay systems for simulation of hypothetical or

predicted system faults. • Simulation of non-zero source impedance for testing impedance relays. (Performed with the assistance of EMTP simulation output).• Generation of user-defined power waveforms for relay sensitivity testing.• Testing of pilot wire relaying systems.• Power system modelling.• Relay qualification and acceptance testing.

Over/undercurrentImpedance/DistanceUnder/overfrequencyDirectional overcurrentSynchrocheckTransformer differentialVolts-per-HertzOut-of-stepReclosing/synchronizingMulti-function distanceBreaker failure

Over/undervoltageMhoFrequency rate-of-changeLine DifferentialMotor protectionReverse powerTime overcurrentLoss of excitationDC time delay/auxiliaryNegative sequence



1.4 TERMINOLOGY

The following section clarifies terminology defining various approaches to relay testing.

The MTS-1700 Series Universal Protective Relay Test System is very versatile, and may be used in allthese types of relay testing.

1.4.1 Static Relay Testing

Static relay testing refers to testing of relays using very slowly varying inputs to accurately locate pickuppoints and to perform repeatable measurements.

1.4.2 Dynamic Relay Testing

This form of testing refers to testing of relays using instantaneous steps/ramping of voltage and currentinputs.

To closely simulate conditions during in-service operation, the voltages and currents are typically steppedfrom a nominal level to a pre-determined fault level. The MTS-1710 has the unique ability to performdynamic testing under manual control.

1.4.3 Fault Playback

Fault playback refers to the regeneration of digitized voltage and current waveforms at high power levels.The waveform data may originate from any of the following sources:

a) Fault records from digital fault recordersb) Digital simulation output e.g. from Electromagnetic Transient Program (EMTP)c) Event reports from microprocessor-based relaysd) User-defined waveformse) Fault record libraries

Playback of these waveforms allow actual and hypothetical fault events to be re-created. Analysis ofprotective relay system performance can also be carried out as a result of these events. Real-timesimulation and analysis of system response to transients and other abnormal conditions is furtherpermitted.

For a more detailed discussion of this application, see the paper “Protective Relay Digital Fault Recordingand Analysis” by Elmo Price, Conference of Protective Relay Engineers, Texas A&M University, April,1998.

1.4.4 On-Panel Testing

This refers to testing of relays and relay systems while they’re installed on panels and equipment racks.This involves injecting voltages and currents directly to the panel to test complete system response, and toverify correct input/output wiring and phasing.



1.5 TECHNICAL SUPPORT

The design of this instrument reflects decades of experience in the electric power industry. Manta TestSystems recognizes, however, that there will be testing situations encountered which were not consideredduring product design, and we want it to be the product which best serves your specific needs.

Manta Test Systems subsequently encourages any user questions, problems or suggestions to be forwardedto us, either via the representative through which the product was purchased, or directly to us via the faxnumbers provided on the front cover.

Users who make suggestions for worthwhile improvements may be eligible for free upgrading of theirinstrument.

All technical inquiries and questions regarding service, repair and calibration of products formerly soldunder the brand name “Powertec” should be directed to:

MANTA TEST SYSTEMS INCORPORATEDToll free customer support: 1-800-233-8031 (USA & Canada)

Fax: 1-905-828-6850Telephone: 1-905-828-6469

e-mail: [email protected]

Technical support phone numbers are also shown in the front panel menu of the MTS-1710 under theOTHER SERV TECHNICAL-SUPPORT selection.

1.6 SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

This instrument can generate high levels of current and voltage. Incorrect usage may cause personal injuryor damage to the instrument.

The user must be qualified to work safely in the intended application environment of this instrument. Non-adherence to the following minimum requirements constitutes misuse of the MTS-1710, and themanufacturer accepts no liability for damages arising from such misuse:

1) The instrument case must always be effectively grounded. The rear panel grounding stud must beconnected via minimum 12 gauge wire to a known secure ground to supplement the power supply cordground.

2) All leads and connectors should be in good condition and rated for the appropriate voltage and currentcarrying requirements. Current outputs must be securely connected with minimum 12 gauge leads withC-hook terminals.

3) The outputs must not be connected to live outputs or live equipment.

4) All outputs must be turned off before making changes in connections.



5) Never exceed the following maximum ratings:

(a) 300Vrms to ground on any input (power or control)(b) 300VDC differential to external trigger inputs

6) All rear panel fuses must contain properly rated fuses.

1.7 LIMITED PRODUCT WARRANTIES

1.7.1 Hardware

Manta Test Systems warrants that its hardware products, and the hardware components of its products,shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of oneyear from the date such products are shipped from Manta Test Systems.

Provided that Manta Test Systems receives notice of any defects in materials or workmanship of itshardware products, or hardware components of its products, within such one-year period, Manta TestSystems shall, at its option, either repair or replace the defective hardware product or hardware component,if proven to be defective.

1.7.2 Software & Firmware

Manta Test Systems warrants that its software products, and the software and firmware components of itsproducts, shall not fail to execute their programming instructions under normal use and service, due todefects in materials and workmanship, if properly installed on intended hardware, for a period of one yearfrom the date such products are shipped from Manta Test Systems.

Provided Manta Test Systems receives notice of such defects within the warranty period, it shall, at itsoption, either repair or replace the software or firmware media, if proven to be defective.

1.7.3 Separate Extended Warranty for Hardware Products

Aside from the standard warranty set forth above, Manta Test Systems offers a separate extended warrantyplan for all hardware products (excluding cables, batteries and accessories) which may be purchased, andextends the standard warranty by one additional year.

The extended warranty is issued under the same terms, conditions and exclusions as the standard warrantyset forth herein. Pricing is based upon the cost of the product, and the average cost of servicing andcalibration. Refer to the Manta Test Systems price list available from your local representative, or MantaTest Systems, for extended warranty pricing for specific products.

The extended warranty must be purchased and paid for within three months from the date the product isshipped from Manta Test Systems.



EXCLUSION OF OTHER WARRANTIES AND LIMITATION OF REMEDIES

1.7.4 Exclusion of other Warranties

THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE, AND ARE IN LIEU OF ANY AND ALL OTHERWARRANTIES (WHETHER WRITTEN, ORAL OR IMPLIED) INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY IN OTHER RESPECTS THAN AS SET FORTH ABOVE, ANDWARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

Limitation of Liability and Remedies

IT IS UNDERSTOOD AND AGREED THAT MANTA TEST SYSTEMS’ LIABILITY ANDPURCHASER’S SOLE REMEDY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, UNDER ANY WARRANTY, IN TORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE, SHALL NOT EXCEED THECOST OF REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF MANTA TEST SYSTEMS’ PRODUCTS, AS SET FORTHABOVE, AND, UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, SHALL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS BE LIABLE FORANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, PERSONAL INJURY, PROPERTY DAMAGE, DAMAGE TO OR LOSS OFEQUIPMENT, LOST PROFITS OR REVENUE, COSTS OF RENTING REPLACEMENTS, ANDOTHER ADDITIONAL EXPENSES.FURTHERMORE, IT IS UNDERSTOOD AND AGREED THAT MANTA TEST SYSTEMS SHALLNOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES, LOSSES OR EXPENSES AS A RESULT OF THEPURCHASER’S OR ANYONE ELSE’S:

I. NEGLIGENCE (WHETHER DEEMED ACTIVE OR PASSIVE),

II. MISUSE, ABUSE, OR MODIFICATION OF MANTA TEST SYSTEMS PRODUCTS,

III. USE OR OPERATION OF PRODUCTS NOT IN CONFORMITY WITH THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS FURNISHED BY MANTA TEST SYSTEMS FOR ITS PRODUCTS,

IV. REPAIR OR MAINTENANCE OF MANTA TEST SYSTEMS’ PRODUCTS BY PERSONS ORENTITIES NOT AUTHORIZED BY MANTA TEST SYSTEMS, OR

V. DAMAGE TO, OR DESTRUCTION OF, PRODUCTS, DURING DELIVERY TO MANTA TEST

SYSTEMS FOR ANY REASON.

Limitation of Warranty Regarding Software

Manta Test Systems does not warrant that the operation of the software, firmware or hardware shall beuninterrupted or error free.

1.7.5 Extension of Warranty

At the discretion of Manta Test Systems, the warranty may be extended for a product which has been returnedfor service shortly after its warranty period has expired.


SPECIFICATIONS - Section 2

SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE: All specifications are subject to change. All AC quantities are RMS values, except asotherwise noted.

Power outputs are specified for nominal 120VAC/60Hz or 240VAC/50Hz power input,and 25°C ambient operating temperature. Derating applies for lower input powervoltages and higher ambient temperatures.

For all current outputs, maximum obtainable current will vary inversely with loadimpedance. For extended operation at high power output levels, ensure adequate cooling(i.e. tilt stand raised to aid air flow to bottom inlets, and adequate clearance for exhaustoutlets).

2.1 INPUTS

Single phase 105-130VAC @ 15A max (or 210-250VAC @10A max), factory setExternal Start/Stop trigger inputs

for externally triggering fault initiation/terminationNC or NO wet/dry contact sensingDC/AC voltage sensing (10V threshold level, 52k ohms input impedance minimum)

2.2 OUTPUTS

3-phase wye voltage0-150 V rms phase-neutral, direct coupled85 VA (1.13A) per phase maximum @ 75V Φ-N output, P.F.=1.060 VA (0.8A) per phase maximum @ 75V Φ-N output, P.F.=0.552.5 VA (0.7A) per phase maximum @ 75V Φ-N output, P.F.=0120 VA per phase maximum @ 150V Φ-N output, P.F.=1

Single phase currentSwitched to 3 phase output terminals, direct coupled0-30A rms, 400VA maximum, 44V rms maximumFor simultaneous 3-phase current, MTS-1720 requiredTypical performance:

0 - 25A into 0.24Ω (150VA maximum)0 - 20A into 0.75Ω (300VA maximum)0 - 15A into 1.8Ω (400VA maximum)0 - 10A into 3.5Ω (350VA maximum)0 - 5A into 8Ω (200VA maximum)

Additional current modes:• 0-6 A DC mode• Mixed harmonic current mode for harmonic restraint testing• High current 0-90A @3V AC mode for instantaneous tests (7.5VAC maximum compliance

voltage) • Dual AC current mode for slope tests (I1: 60A maximum, 50A @3V, I2: see above for single

phase current)



• Parallel current mode allows paralleling of current outputs of MTS-1710 and MTS-1720 forup to 90A max, 1000 VA max, 44 Vrms max.

• I2-Harmonic maximum current of 17A Output frequency

• power line (frequency and phase locked) • 1st through 10th harmonic of power line• variable 40.000 - 80.000 Hz (0.001 Hz resolution, 0.01% accuracy)

80.00 - 800.00 Hz (0.01 Hz resolution, 0.02% accuracy) • 25Hz frequency mode

Four output level settings:• off, prefault, fault, postfault

Phase control:• Phase between current and any voltage is adjustable from 0 through 360°• Adjustment resolution: 0.25°

Auxilary output contacts:• Two auxiliary output contacts• Configurable as NO, NC, 52A, 52B (Aux. contacts 1 & 2), Permissive or Unblocking with

programmable delay (Aux. contact 1 only)

2.3 METERING

All outputs are directly metered. This allows direct readout of Φ-Φ and Φ-N voltages, currents andinterphase angles.

Time, frequency, phase, current and voltage are measured simultaneously. In addition, the phase is alwaysmeasured between the monitor voltage and the current, allowing all standard phase angle relations to bedirectly displayed.

• AC Voltage measurements: A-N, B-N, C-N, A-B, B-C, C-ATrue RMS responding, autorangingVoltage scales (approx):0-82V, 82-327VAccuracy: ±0.5% of reading ±0.2% of scale

• AC Current measurements: Measures actual output currentTrue RMS responding, autorangingCurrent scales (approx): 0-8.2A, 8.2-32.7AHigh current scales (approx): 0-24.5A, 24.5-98.3AAccuracy: ±0.5% of reading ±0.2% of scale

• DC Current measurement: Measures actual output current:0 - 10.00A scale Accuracy: ±1% of reading ±0.2% of scale

• Phase measurement: Accuracy: ±0.5° for input levels >5% of range 0 -359.9° or 0 - ±180° display modes

Selectable V-leads-I or I-leads-V measurement reference



• Time measurement: Measures fault interval from either internal or external start trigger0 -99999 sec or 0 - 99999 cycles, autoranging scalebest resolution: 0.1 ms/ 0.1 cyclesaccuracy: 0-9.9999sec scale: ±0.5ms ±1 least significant digit

all other scales: ±0.005% ±1 least significant digittwo-wire pulse timing mode

• Frequency measurement: power line frequency measurement (accuracy & resolution: ±0.01Hz)variable frequency value displayed to 0.001Hz resolution

2.4 COMPUTED MEASUREMENTS

• Impedance (V÷I, V÷2I , V÷1.732I, V÷((1+k)I) ) with programmable k-factor• Resistance (Re(V÷I), Re(V÷2I) , Re(V÷1.732I), Re(V÷((1+k)I)) ) with programmable k-factor• Reactance (Im(V÷I), Im(V÷2I) , Im(V÷1.732I), Im(V÷((1+k)I)) with programmable k-factor• Single phase power (Watts, Vars, VA, Power Factor)• I1÷I2, I2÷I1, (I1-I2)÷((I1+I2)÷2), I2÷((2I1+I2)÷2), with programmable CT tap values for I1, I2• %harmonic current• V÷Hz• Breaker advance time, breaker closing angle

2.5 STATIC/DYNAMIC TESTING CAPABILITIES

• Phase to neutral faults• Phase to phase faults• Three phase faults• Two phase to neutral faults• Phase, frequency, voltage and current stepping• Phase, frequency, voltage and current ramping with adjustable rate of change• Presettable fault durations, 0 -99.9999 sec• Programmable auto-reclose time delay and reclose-into-fault events• Programmable breaker time• Three-pole and single-pole tripping• Programmable PT location simulation

2.6 FAULT PLAYBACK

• Ability to accept fault data from fault recorders, EMTP simulation outputs, or user-defined waveforms• Sample rate: programmable 2-30 kHz• Record length: 8 bit: 8000 samples per each of four channels (six channels available when

MTS-1720 is also used)14 bit: 60k samples per each of four channels (six channels available whenMTS-1720 is also used)

• Resolution: 8 bit: 8 bit dynamic + 12 bit scaling14 bit: 14 bit dynamic + 16 bit scaling

• Peak output levels: ±230.5V for voltage channels ±42.4A for current channels



2.7 RS-232C INTERFACE

• Two ports, optically isolated• All instrument functions are RS-232C controllable• Standard baud rates from 300 to 38400 baud• XON/XOFF handshaking protocol (hardware handshaking must be enabled when 38400 baud is used)• Easy-to-use terminal mode

2.8 APPLICATION SOFTWARE

Provided with the MTS-1710:

• MTS-2100, MTS-2150, Powerscope demonstration program• Syncscope demonstration program

Available separately:

• MTS-2800 “MPowerTM” for Windows: Protective Relay Test Environment for the Manta TestSystems MTS-1700 Series

• MWave Fault Waveform Playback Software• MTS-1900 Utility Suite - utility programs enhance the use of various features of the MTS-1700 series.

2.9 OPTIONS

• Option -03: Programmable digital I/O and trigger channels• Option -04: Low level input to power amplifiers for advanced fault playback & external

phase/frequency sync input• Option -07: Auxiliary DC voltage output. 24-300VDC @ 100VA maximum output to supply auxiliary power to device(s) under test.• Option -10: Hardshell shipping case with rollers• Option -11: Cordura carry case• Option -12: French display• Option -14: 19” Rackmount enclosure• Option -15: 240V, 50/60Hz line input• Option -16: Default 110V/50Hz output• Option -18: Foot Switch - for enabling the fault state when doing steady state testing• Option -19: Additional Operation and Reference Manual• Option -20: 1 Year extended warranty Additional year for a total of two years.• CABLE C1 MTS-1710 to SEL-121 communication cable• CABLE C2 MTS-1710 to SEL-221, SEL-251, and SEL-321 relay communication cable• CABLE C1 MTS-1710 to GEC Optimho relay communication cable

• MTS-1720 Two Channel Current Source (Integrates to build a full 3Φ-voltage, 3Φ- current system)• MTS-1730 Digital Input/Output Signal Conditioner• MTS-1750 High Current Source



2.10 ADDITIONAL STANDARD FEATURES

• Fault incidence angle control• Synchronizing mode for testing synchronizing devices• Internal clock/calendar• Audible feedback tone• Programmable auxiliary contact outputs for slaving other devices• Circuit breaker-advance time measurement• High speed measurement modes• Breaker signal (52A/52B) simulation• Permissive/unblock signal simulation (with programmable delay)• Multi-system synchronization• User settable default output voltages and frequency

2.11 PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS

• 19”W x 7.5”H x 18”D (48.3cm W x 19.1cm H x 45.7cm D)• Weight: 60.0 lbs (27.2 kg) without front/rear protective covers 63.4 lbs (28.7 kg) with front/rear

protective covers • Built-in carry handle/tilt stand


OPERATION SUMMARY - Section 3

OPERATION SUMMARY

3.1 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT

FIGURE 3.1 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT

NOTE: Text in square [] brackets is used to denote various controls throughout this manual. 1. [EXTERNAL START] TRIGGER INPUTS

These three input terminals allow external contact or voltage signals to initiate a test. The lowerand centre terminals detect impedance change-of-state, such as contact closure or low-impedancevoltage source appearance. The upper and centre terminals detect voltage change-of-state.

2. [TIME] PUSHBUTTON

This button selects the timer display. Pressing [TIME] more than once toggles between the time incycles and time in seconds display mode.

3. [POWER] SWITCH

This switch turns on the MTS-1710.

4. [TONE] PUSHBUTTON

This pushbutton toggles the tone indicator on/off and is intended to facilitate detection of externalrelay operation.The light indicates when either a closed contact or active voltage is sensed on the[EXTERNAL STOP] trigger inputs.

12

34

56 8

7 910

1112

1314

15 181716

2019

21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2930

31 3332 34 35 36



5. [EXTERNAL STOP] TRIGGER INPUTS

These three input terminals allow external contact or voltage signals to stop a test.The lower andcentre terminals detect impedance change-of-state, such as contact closure or low-impedancevoltage source appearance. The upper and centre terminals detect voltage change-of-state.

6. [PREFAULT] PUSHBUTTON

This pushbutton toggles PREFAULT voltage and current on/off. When lit, this indicates thatPREFAULT voltages and currents may be non-zero.

7. [MODE/MENU DISPLAY]

This display is used to annunciate active modes and selections. It’s also used for displaying thebuilt-in menu for advanced users, and to annunciate warnings.

8. [FAULT] PUSHBUTTON

When this button is lit, it indicates that the MTS-1710 is in the fault state. When depressed, thispushbutton causes the MTS-1710 to enter the FAULT state, and applies the fault voltages andcurrents to the outputs.

9. [VALUE DISPLAY]

This is the large LCD display for displaying values and settings.

10. [STATIC/DYNAMIC] PUSHBUTTON

This pushbutton selects between static and dynamic operation modes.

11. [STOP/RESET] PUSHBUTTON

This pushbutton stops a dynamic test in progress, or resets the MTS-1710 in the POSTFAULTstate. After pressing this button, the MTS-1710 returns to the PREFAULT state. When this buttonis illuminated, the MTS-1710 is in the POSTFAULT state, and all measurements have been frozenat their values when the stop trigger occurred.

12. [POSTFAULT] PUSHBUTTON

This pushbutton toggles POSTFAULT voltage and current on/off. When lit, this indicates thatPOSTFAULT voltages and currents may be non-zero.

13. [MODE/MENU] PUSHBUTTON

This pushbutton toggles between the mode and menu displays. When lit, this indicates that themenu is active and that the non-menu controls will be inoperable.



14. [PHASE] PUSHBUTTON

This button selects the phase display, and enables phase angle to be adjusted. Pressing this buttonmore than once toggles between the 0-359.9° and 0-±180.0° display scales.

Note: On older MTS-1710 systems, this button may be labelled “PHASE V-I”.

15. [CURRENT] PUSHBUTTON

This button selects the current display, and enables current to be adjusted. Pressing this buttonmore than once may toggle between different current outputs, depending upon the selected currentmode.

16. [SELECT] PUSHBUTTON

This button is used to select a particular menu item when the menu is active.

17. [MODIFY] KNOB

All settings adjustments are made with this spin knob. The knob sensitivity depends upon thespeed at which it’s turned.

Turning the knob slowly makes fine adjustments. Turning the knob at a moderate speed--and veryfast--makes medium and coarse adjustments respectively.

18. [VOLTAGE] PUSHBUTTON

This button selects the voltage display, and enables the voltage(s) selected by the [FAULTPHASE] selector to be adjusted.

19. [FREQ] PUSHBUTTON

This button selects the frequency display, and enables the frequency to be adjusted. Pressing[FREQ] more than once toggles between the line reference frequency mode and the variablefrequency mode.

20. [PREVIOUS] PUSHBUTTON

When the menu is active, this button is used to return to a previous level in the menu. When themenu isn’t active, it returns to the last menu screen accessed.

21. [AUX CONTACT 1] OUTPUT TERMINALS

These auxiliary contact terminals are closed whenever the MTS-1710 is in the FAULT state. Theymay be used to slave an external device, such as a chart recorder, or simulate a breaker. Auxuliarycontact 1 can be used to test premissive and unblocked transfer schemes.



22. [AUX CONTACT 2] OUTPUT TERMINALS

These auxiliary contact terminals are closed whenever the MTS-1710 is in the FAULT state. Theymay be used to slave an external device, such as a chart recorder, or to switch an additional currentor voltage.

Both contacts 1 and 2 are rated at 5A/120VAC and may be programmed for other functions (seeSection 5.15).

23. [FAULT PHASE] SELECTOR

This switch selects the phase being faulted. As well, this phase of voltage is monitored and usedfor phase measurement.

24. [DC VOLTAGE ENABLE] PUSHBUTTON

This pushbutton is used to enable/disable the DC voltage output.

25. [DC VOLTAGE LIVE] LED

This LED, when on, indicates that the DC voltage output is live. Green indicates 22-70V; yellowindicates 70-130V; and red indicates 130-300V.

26. [FAULT TYPE] SELECTOR

This knob selects the type of fault to be simulated.

27. [DC VOLTS] OUTPUT TERMINALS

DC voltage output terminals for units with the DC Voltage output option.

28. [DC AMPS] OUTPUT TERMINALS

These terminals provide DC current output in the I4 current mode.

29. [CURRENT MODE] SELECTOR

This knob selects the active current mode.

30. [REMOTE] LED INDICATOR

When lit, this LED indicates that the MTS-1710 is under remote control.

31. [I1 OUTPUT] TERMINALS

These output terminals provide output current in the I1-LOW and I1-HIGH current modes.




These output terminals provide the I2 output current in the I2-HARMONIC and I1&I2 currentmodes.


These output terminals provide the I3 output current in the I3 and I3-WYE current modes. They’reactually the same terminals as the I1 and I2 output terminals. The terminals are simply interpretedas A, B, C and N outputs (marked in red). The internal single phase current is switched to theappropriate A, B, C and N terminals based upon the selected FAULT MODE.

35. [AC VOLTAGE OUTPUT LIVE] LED

This LED indicates when AC voltage outputs are potentially live.

[VOLTAGE MONITOR] OUTPUT TERMINALS (Not illustrated, older MTS-1710 systems only)

These terminals allow an external voltmeter to monitor the active voltage (selected by the FAULTMODE selectors).

36. [VOLTAGE OUTPUT] TERMINALS

These are the 3-Φ wye-connected output voltage terminals. 37. COOLING INTAKE

3.2 REAR PANEL LAYOUT

FIGURE 3.2 REAR PANEL LAYOUT

AUX OUTPUTS

AUX INPUTS

MTS-1750

COM 3 SLAVE CURRENT

COM 2 RS-232C

COM 1 RS-232C

MAINS

F15A

SLAVE CURRENT IN

POWER OFF BEFORECONNECTING/

DISCONNECTING.ROTATE TO LOCK BEFORE USE

SIGNAL INPUT

12345 6 87 10 119



1. [SLAVE CURRENT IN] CONNECTOR

Current input from MTS-1720. Two channel current source for B & C phase currents.

2. MAINS INPUT FUSE

This is the main AC input fuse. For 120V systems, replace only with a fast blow, 15A/250VACfuse. For 240V systems, replace only with a fast blow, 8A/250VAC fuse.

AMPLIFIER OUTPUT FUSES (not illustrated)

These are the voltage A, B, C amplifier output fuses. The VA and VB fuses are fast blow 4A fuses.The VC fuse is a 5A, fast blow fuse.These fuses are only present on earlier model MTS-1710’swith 125V output voltage amplifiers (shipped before Aug 10, 1994).

3. AC INPUT RECEPTACLE

This is the main AC input receptacle.

4. SAFETY FRAME GROUND TERMINAL

5. EXTERNAL AMP SIGNAL INPUT

Optional inputs for advanced fault playback and external frequency reference.

6. [AUX OUTPUTS] PORT

Digital outputs port for the Programmable I/O channels option.

7. [AUX INPUTS] PORT

Digital inputs port for the Programmable I/O channels option.

8. [MTS-1750] PORT

Connection to MTS-1750 High Current Source via DB 15.

9. [COM3 SLAVE CURRENT] PORT

Communications port connector to MTS-1720. Two channel current source.

10. [COM2 RS-232C] PORT

Spare communications port which may be used to control auxiliary devices.

11. [COM1 RS-232C] PORT

Main MTS-1710 RS-232C serial interface port.



3.3 BASIC APPLICATIONS

3.3.1 Getting Started

• Connect main power, and safety ground.• Turn on the MTS-1710 [POWER] switch.

Note the status indicated in the (lower) [MODE/MENU DISPLAY]. This indicates all the primary modeswhich have been selected.

FIGURE 3.3 MODE/MENU DISPLAY

FAULT MODE CURRENT MODE

VOLTS LINE

A-N O-N I1&I2

C-N

C-A

A-NA-B

B-N B-C

O-N

O-O30 (0-0)

REMOTE

I1

(0-N)

I4HIGH

MODE/MENU

30

This area annunciatesthe units associatedwith the (upper) valuedisplay.

This area annunciatesthe timer start modeIST = Internal timer startXST = External timer start

This area indicates theselected FAULT MODE PHASE.

This area indicates theselected CURRENT MODE.

This identifies whichcurrent outputs areactive and adjustable.

This area indicates theselected FAULT MODE TYPE.The FAULT MODE TYPEdetermines what type offault is being simulated.

The FAULT MODE PHASEdetermines which phaseis being faulted.It is also the voltagewhich is monitored, andthe voltage which isused for the phasemeasurement.In I3 current mode, theFAULT MODE PHASEis the current path fromthe I3 current output.

This area indicates theFrequency mode. "LINE" signifiesthat the output is phaseand frequency locked tothe input line power.In variable frequency mode,the actual output frequencyis displayed here.

LOW

I1&12



3.3.2 Safety & other precautions

3.3.2.1 SAFETY

• The AC yellow LED under the AC voltage output terminals indicates when AC voltage is potentiallylive (not present on older models).

• Whenever any of the red [PREFAULT], [FAULT] or [POSTFAULT] lights are lit, there are potentiallylive AC outputs.

• The DC voltage output may be live at all times. This is indicated by the LED beside the DC voltageoutput terminals (not present on older units).

3.3.2.2 ISOLATION

• All outputs are isolated from the AC input supply and case/earth ground to a maximum of 300 VAC/DC.

• The start & stop trigger inputs are isolated from each other, from the AC input supply, from the AC/DCoutputs, and from the case/earth ground.

• The AC current and voltage outputs share a common return/ground.

3.3.2.3 PROTECTION

• The AC voltage output is protected from short circuits, overloads and overtemperature.• The AC current output is protected from open circuits, overloads and overtemperature.

3.3.2.4 PRECAUTIONS

• DON'T CHANGE CONNECTIONS WHILE OUTPUTS ENERGIZED! Turn outputs off,and make current and voltage connection changes before changing current modes.

• DON'T CLOSE A CURRENT CIRCUIT WHILE OUTPUTS ARE ENERGIZED!• DON’T ATTEMPT TO PARALLEL CURRENT OUTPUTS UNLESS THE CURRENT

MODE KNOB HAS A I3P POSITION (AVAILABLE ONLY ON NEWER MODELS).• IN 3-PHASE CURRENT CONNECTIONS (I3-WYE CURRENT MODE), THERE MUST

BE A NEUTRAL RETURN PATH FOR EACH OUTPUT (A, B, C)!!

3.3.3 Making Basic Adjustments

Three steps are involved in making basic adjustments:1. Select the parameter to be adjusted ([VOLTAGE], [CURRENT], [PHASE] or [FREQ]).

The selected parameter will be displayed on the [VALUE DISPLAY], and the appropriate units willbe displayed on the lower [MODE/MENU DISPLAY].

2. Put the MTS-1710 into the appropriate fault state (PREFAULT, FAULT or POSTFAULT) to adjust thedesired setting.

3. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to change the setting to the desired value. Note that the [MODIFY] knobsensitivity depends upon the speed at which it’s turned. Turning the knob slowly makes fineadjustments. Turning the knob at a moderate speed--and very fast--makes medium and coarseadjustments respectively.



3.3.4 Generalized Setup Procedure

The following is a quickstart procedure illustrating the necessary steps required to test fundamental typesof protective relays. For detailed explanations, see Section 4.

Connections:

• Connect the relay inputs to the appropriate voltage and current outputs.• Connect the relay contacts to the [EXTERNAL STOP] trigger contact inputs.

Setup nominal Φ-N voltages:

• Select STATIC operation mode using the [STATIC/DYNAMIC] pushbutton.• Turn [FAULT TYPE] to Φ-N mode.• Press [PREFAULT] on.• Press [VOLTAGE] to display the Φ-N voltage.• For each of the A-N, B-N and C-N selections on the [FAULT PHASE] selector, adjust the voltage to the desired nominal (prefault) Φ-N voltage.

Setup desired fault mode and current mode:

• Select the desired fault mode on the FAULT MODE selectors.• Select the desired current mode on the [CURRENT MODE] selector. (Most single phase testing

requires the I1-LOW mode).

Setup desired fault current and voltage:

• Press [CURRENT].• Press and hold the [FAULT] button to apply fault values of current and voltage.• While holding in the [FAULT] button, adjust the current to desired fault values.• Press [VOLTAGE].• While holding in the [FAULT] button, adjust the voltage to desired fault values.• When the relay operates, the [TONE] button will light. Press the [TONE] button to enable/disable the

audible contact sense tone.

Setup desired phase between voltage and current:

• Press [PHASE].

The phase angle displayed will be the phase between the selected voltage (see lower left corner of the[MODE/MENU DISPLAY]), and the current. The display reads voltage leading current. Note that aminimum voltage and current output must be present to display a phase reading.

• Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the phase angle. The phase angle between the current and all threevoltages changes when this adjustment is performed.



Running a dynamic test:

• Select DYNAMIC operation mode by pressing the [STATIC/DYNAMIC] button.• Press [FAULT] to initiate the test. The fault levels are now applied to the outputs, and the timer is

started. • If, and when, the relay operates, the stop trigger will be activated, and the [STOP/RESET] button will

be lit. The values of all parameters (V, I, f, Φ) will be frozen at the time of the stop trigger, and can be

recalled. The operate time can be displayed by pressing the [TIME] button.

• Press [STOP/RESET] to reset the MTS-1710 to the PREFAULT state.



3.3.5 Overcurrent Relay Test

3.3.5.1 SETUP

To test single-phase overcurrent relays:

1. Connect the relay to the MTS-1710, as shown in Figure 3.4.

2. Turn off the MTS-1720, if on and connected.

3. Select I1-LOW current mode (or I1-HIGH current mode when more than 30A is required).

FIGURE 3.4 OVERCURRENT RELAY TEST SETUP

I

Select DYNAMIC mode to run timing test

Display operate timeor current

Press [FAULT] to apply fault current

Select I1-LOW current mode for most tests.

Select I1-HIGH current mode for instantaneous tests requiring over 30 amps.

OVERCURRENTRELAY



3.3.5.2 MINIMUM PICKUP TEST.

To check the minimum pickup level of an overcurrent relay:

1. If the MTS-1720 is on and connected, then turn it off.2. Make test connections, as shown in Figure 3.4.3. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC], as required, to select STATIC operation mode.4. Press and hold [FAULT], or short the [EXTERNAL START] contact inputs. This holds the MTS-1710 in the fault state, indicated by the illuminated [FAULT] button.5. Press [CURRENT] to display/adjust current.6. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to slowly increase the current. When the relay contacts close, the [TONE]

button will light. If the audible stop trigger tone has been enabled (by pressing the [TONE] button), thetone also will sound. The current may be adjusted as required to determine the minimum pickup level.

7. Release the [FAULT] button and remove connections to the [EXTERNAL START] inputs.

Note: A foot switch is often useful when doing this type of work. Connect a normally open foot switch tothe [EXTERNAL START] contact inputs, and press on the switch to apply fault voltage andcurrent levels. Release to return to prefault (or off) levels.

3.3.5.3 INVERSE-TIME CHARACTERISTIC TEST.

To check the inverse-time curve of an overcurrent relay:

1. Make test connections, as shown in Figure 3.4.2. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC], as required, to select STATIC operation mode.3. Press and hold [FAULT] or short the [EXTERNAL START] contact inputs. This holds the MTS-1710

in the fault state, indicated by the illuminated [FAULT] button.4. Press [CURRENT] to display/adjust the current. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to set the test current.5. Release the [FAULT] button and remove connections to the [EXTERNAL START] inputs.6. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC] to select DYNAMIC operation mode.7. Press [FAULT] to initiate timing check.8. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. The operate time and current can

be viewed by pressing [TIME] and [CURRENT] respectively. Press [STOP/RESET] to return to theprefault state and prepare for the next test.

9. For each new value of current, repeat steps 2 to 9.

3.3.5.4 INSTANTANEOUS ELEMENT TEST.

To check the instantaneous element of an overcurrent relay:

1. Make test connections, as shown in Figure 3.4. Note that, on some relays, the instantaneous element mayhave a separate set of contacts. Select I1-HIGH current mode if more than 30A is required. Otherwise,select I1- LOW current mode.

2. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC], as required, to select STATIC operation mode.3. Press [CURRENT] to display current.



4. Press and hold [FAULT] and turn the [MODIFY] knob to change the current. When the relay contactsclose, the [TONE] button will light. If the audible stop trigger tone has been enabled (by pressing the[TONE] button), the tone also will sound. Releasing the [FAULT] button at any time will turn off thecurrent. This allows you to make several passes at adjusting the current without overheating the relay.You can also set the fault current without applying current to the relay using the fault current presetfeature (see Section 4.6.9).

Note: If an “OVERLOAD I1” warning appears, the relay burden may be too high. If possible, apply

current to the instantaneous element only, and bypass the timed element.

5. To time the operation of the instantaneous element, press [STATIC/DYNAMIC] to select DYNAMICoperation mode.

6. Press [FAULT] to initiate timing check.7. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. The operate time can be viewed by

pressing [TIME]. Press [STOP/RESET] to return to the prefault state and prepare for the next test.

FIGURE 3.5 OVERCURRENT RELAY TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST SETUP

Select I4 current mode.

Manually rotate disk and hold main contacts closed

TARGET

OP



3.3.5.5 TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST.

To check the target and seal-in features of a DC current-operated target:

1. Connect the relay, as shown in Figure 3.5. Select I4-DC current mode, and static operation mode.2. Use the current preset feature to preset the DC current to the appropriate value (usually 0.2A or 2.0A).

This is done by setting [PREFAULT] off, pressing and holding the [CURRENT] button, and adjustingthe [MODIFY] knob. Release the [CURRENT] button when done.

3. Turn [PREFAULT] on.4. Manually rotate the induction disk fully on the relay, and hold the main contacts closed. The target and

seal-in unit should operate. This can be verified on the MTS-1710 by observing the DC current jumpfrom basically zero to a new value, and seeing the [TONE] button LED turn off.

5. Release the induction disk, and the seal-in unit should continue to allow the DC current to flow.6. Turn [PREFAULT] off and observe the seal-in unit drop out. The DC current suddenly will drop to

zero, and the [TONE] button LED will turn on.

The connections to the external stop trigger inputs are only to give visible/audible indication of thecontact status here. When the contacts are open, a DC voltage (from the DC current output) appearsacross the contacts. This is sensed and the [TONE] LED (and tone, if enabled) is on. When the contactsclose, the DC voltage drops to near zero, and the [TONE] LED is off.



3.3.6 Voltage Relay Test

FIGURE 3.6 VOLTAGE RELAY TEST SETUP

3.3.6.1 PICKUP TEST.

To check the pickup level of an over/undervoltage relay:

1. Make test connections, as shown in Figure 3.6. Select Φ-N/A-N fault mode. If more than 150V isrequired, connect the relay across A-B, and select 2Φ-N/A-B fault mode.



2. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC], as required, to select STATIC operation mode.3. Press and hold [FAULT], or short the [EXTERNAL START] contact inputs. This holds the MTS-1710

in the fault state, indicated by the illuminated [FAULT] button.4. Press [VOLTAGE] to display/adjust voltage.5. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the voltage until the relay operates. When the relay contacts close,

the [TONE] button will light. If the audible stop trigger tone has been enabled (by pressing the[TONE] button), the tone also will sound. The voltage may be adjusted, as required, to determine thepickup level.

6. Release the [FAULT] button, and remove connections to the [EXTERNAL START] inputs.

3.3.6.2 TIMING TEST.

To check the operation time:

1. Perform steps 1-3 of the pickup check above.2. Press [VOLTAGE] to display/adjust voltage. Set the desired overvoltage or undervoltage level.3. Release the [FAULT] button, and remove connections to the [EXTERNAL START] inputs.4. If prefault voltage is desired, turn [PREFAULT] on, and set desired prefault voltage.5. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC] to select DYNAMIC operation mode. Press [FAULT] to initiate.6. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. Press [TIME] to read the operate

time. Press [TIME] again to toggle between time in seconds/cycles. Press [STOP/RESET] to return tothe prefault state, and to prepare for the next test.

7. For each new value of voltage, repeat steps 2 to 6.



1. Make test connections, as shown in Figure 3.7. Select I4-DC current mode, and static operation mode.Select Φ-N/A-N fault mode. If more than 150V is required, connect the relay across A-B and select2Φ-N/A-B fault mode.

2. Turn [PREFAULT] on. Press [VOLTAGE] and turn the [MODIFY] knob to set the prefault voltage, asrequired.

3. Press and hold the [FAULT] button, and turn the [MODIFY] knob to set the fault voltage. Release the[FAULT] button.

4. If you want a value other than the default voltage during postfault, press [POSTFAULT], and set thepostfault voltage.Then turn [PREFAULT] on. To verify the seal-in function, set the postfault voltage toa value which doesn’t operate the relay.

5. Use the current preset feature to preset the DC current (usually 0.2A or 2.0A). Note that the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] should indicate DC-AMPS while making this setting.

6. Select dynamic operation mode. Turn [POSTFAULT] on. (This is for DC current to be on in postfaultto operate the target and seal-in).

7. Press [FAULT] to initiate.When the relay operates, the MTS-1710 will change to postfault state, thetarget and seal-in should operate, and the fault voltage level will be removed.

8. Turn [POSTFAULT] off to remove the DC current, and to release the seal-in unit.



FIGURE 3.7 CONNECTIONS FOR VOLTAGE RELAY TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST

3.3.7 1-Φ Impedance Relay/Directional Overcurrent Relay Test

These relays require a single voltage and current for testing. The I1-LOW current mode is most appropriatefor these types of relays.

Make connections as shown on the next page. The MTS-2100 program provided with your MTS-1710 isuseful for demonstrating the standard tests described in this section.


Display operate timeor voltage Press [FAULT] to apply fault voltage

RELAY

NOTE:Use a 0-0 voltage if morethan 150VAC is required.Turn [PREFAULT] on tomaintain a prefault voltage.

UNDER/OVERVOLTAGE

TARGET

OP



FIGURE 3.8 1-Φ IMPEDANCE OR DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT RELAY TEST SETUP

3.3.7.1 REACH/MINIMUM PICKUP TEST.

The following procedure tests the reach of a single-phase impedance relay or minimum pickup of adirectional overcurrent relay:

Preparation

1. If the MTS-1710 is on and connected, then turn it off.2. Connect relay, as shown in Figure 3.8. Select Φ-N/A-N fault mode. If more than 150V is required,

connect the relay voltage input across VAB, and select 2Φ-N/A-B fault mode. 3. Select I1-LOW current mode and static operation mode. Turn [PREFAULT] on, press [CURRENT],

and adjust current to 0A.4. Press [VOLTAGE], and set the nominal voltage.

I

V

SINGLE PHASE IMPEDANCE

OR DIRECTIONAL

OVERCURRENT RELAY

Test connections shownfor phase-neutral, A-N fault modeand I1-LOW current mode

Select desired parameter for adjustment



Determine reach/pickup

5. Press and hold the [FAULT] button, or short the [EXTERNAL START] contact inputs. Set the desiredtest fault voltage. Press [CURRENT] and set starting fault current (e.g. 5A). This is necessary to set thephase angle.

6. Press [PHASE] and adjust the phase angle to the MTA or a value within the operating region.7. Press [CURRENT] and slowly increase the current until the relay operates. For impedance relays, you

can also press [VOLTAGE] and decrease the voltage. The [TONE] button will light when the relaycontacts close. The [TONE] button also toggles an audible tone on or off.

8. For impedance relays, the reach can be displayed directly by activating the impedance display feature(see Section 5.10.3.1).

9. To test at different angles, repeat at step 5.10. When finished, release the [FAULT] button or [EXTERNAL START] contact input.

3.3.7.2 MTA TEST.

The following procedure determines the maximum torque angle of a single-phase impedance or directionalovercurrent element:

1. If you have not done so, perform steps 1-7 of the reach/minimum test above to find the pickup point atthe theoretical MTA. Increase the current slightly to move further into the region of operation.

2. Press [PHASE], and increase the phase angle until the relay opens. Record this phase angle value.3. Adjust the phase angle to the nominal MTA. Decrease the phase angle until the relay opens again.

Record this value.4. The measured MTA is the average of the two recorded phase angle values.5. Release the [FAULT] button or [EXTERNAL START] contact input.

3.3.7.3 OPERATE TIME TEST.

The following procedure determines the operation time of a single-phase impedance relay or directionalovercurrent element:

1. If you have not done so, perform steps 1-6 of the reach/minimum pickup test above to find the pickuppoint at the theoretical MTA. Increase the current (or decrease the voltage for an impedance relay) tothe desired point for testing.

2. Release the [FAULT] button or [EXTERNAL START] contact input.3. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC] to select dynamic operation mode. Press [FAULT] to initiate the fault.4. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. Press [TIME] to see the operation

time. Press [TIME] again to toggle between display in seconds or cycles.5. Press [STOP/RESET] to clear and prepare for next test.

3.3.7.4 TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST

See Application Note (AN17) Section 2.5.

3.3.8 Voltage Restrained Overcurrent Relay Test

The following procedure tests voltage restrained or voltage controlled overcurrent elements. The elementmay or may not be directional (phase angle sensitive).




Preparation

1. If the MTS-1710 is on and connected, then turn it off.2. Connect relay, as shown in Figure 3.8. Select Φ-N/A-N fault mode. If more than 150V is required,

connect the relay voltage input across VAB, and select 2Φ-N/A-B fault mode. 3. Select I1-LOW current mode and static operation mode. Turn [PREFAULT] on, press [CURRENT],

and adjust current to 0A.4. Press [VOLTAGE], and set the nominal voltage.

Determine pickup

5. Press and hold the [FAULT] button, or short the [EXTERNAL START] contact inputs. Set the desiredtest fault voltage. Press [CURRENT] and set starting fault current (e.g. 5A). This is necessary to set thephase angle.

6. If the element is directional, press [PHASE] and adjust the phase angle to the MTA or a desired valuewithin the operating region.

7. Press [CURRENT] and slowly increase the current until the relay operates. The [TONE] button willlight when the relay contacts close. The [TONE] button also toggles an audible tone on or off.The pickup level varies with the voltage for voltage restrained/controlled overcurrent elements.Therefore press [VOLTAGE], change the voltage and verify that the pickup level changesappropriately.

8. When finished, release the [FAULT] button or [EXTERNAL START] contact input.


The following procedure determines the operation time of a voltage controlled overcurrent element:

1. If you have not done so, perform steps 1-7 of the minimum pickup test above to find the pickup point atthe theoretical MTA.

2. Increase the current to the desired point for testing. Press [VOLTAGE], and set the desired controlling/restraint voltage.

3. Release the [FAULT] button or [EXTERNAL START] contact input.4. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC] to select dynamic operation mode. Press [FAULT] to initiate the fault.5. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. Press [TIME] to see the operation

time. Press [TIME] again to toggle between display in seconds or cycles.6. Press [STOP/RESET] to clear and prepare for next test. Repeat from step 2 for each new value of

voltage and or current.


See Application Note (AN17) Section 2.5.

3.3.9 3-Φ Impedance Relay Test

To test three-phase, three-element impedance relays, the I3 current mode should be used. This allows thecurrent to be routed to the phase element being tested while eliminating any change in connections.



Select the appropriate fault mode to test the desired Φ -N, Φ -Φ or 3-Φ elements. The MTS-2100program provided with your MTS-1710 is useful for demonstrating the standard tests described in thissection.

FIGURE 3.9 3-Φ IMPEDANCE RELAY TEST SETUP 3.3.9.1 PREPARATION.

Connect the relay and setup prefault conditions as described below:

1. If the relay is DC-powered and you’re using the DC voltage output of the MTS-1710, check the DCvoltage output before connecting the relay. This can be done by toggling the [VOLTAGE] pushbuttonuntil the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] indicates “DCVolts”. If the voltage isn’t correct, adjust it via themenu by selecting SETTINGS DCVolts in the menu. Then turn the [MODIFY] knob to position thecursor over the desired voltage, and press [SELECT]. Press [MODE/MENU] to exit the menu. If theDC voltage output option isn’t installed, an external DC source may be used.

DCSupply

Va

Vb

Vc

Vn

Ia

Ib

Ic

In Use I3 current mode for

controls.

For DC powered


Press [FAULT] to apply fault values

3 phase impedance relaysSelect element to betested using FAULT MODE

relays only.

Turn [PREFAULT] on to maintain prefault values



2. Connect relay as shown in Figure 3.9. Select I3 current mode and static operation mode. Turn[PREFAULT] on, press [CURRENT], and adjust current to 0A.

3. Select Φ-N/A-N fault mode, press [VOLTAGE], and set the nominal Φ−Ν voltage (69.28V default).Do the same for B-N and C-N.

3.3.9.2 REACH TEST.

The following procedure tests the reach of an impedance element at a given angle:

Preparation

1. Perform steps 1-3 in the Preparation Section (3.3.9.1).

Select fault type and phase

2. Select the desired fault type Φ-Ν, Φ-Φ, or 3-Φ elements. For Φ-N and Φ-Φ fault types, select thedesired fault phase.

Determine reach

3. Press and hold the [FAULT] button, or short the [EXTERNAL START] contact inputs. Press[CURRENT] and set starting fault current (e.g. 5A). This is necessary to set the phase angle.

4. Press [PHASE] and adjust the phase angle to the MTA or desired value. When using Φ-Φ and 3Φ(Φ-Φ)fault types, it’s not necessary to account for any 30° offset. The angle displayed is the angle whichrelay sees. For example, if the MTA is 75° offset, adjust the phase until the MTS-1710 reads 75°.

5. Press [VOLTAGE] and decrease the voltage until the relay operates. You can also press [CURRENT]and increase the current. When the relay contacts close, the [TONE] button will light. The [TONE]button also toggles an audible tone on or off.

6. To display reach directly, activate the impedance display feature (see Section 5.10.3.1).

Repeating for other angles/elements

7. To test at different phase angles, repeat at step 4. To test other elements (A-N, B-N, C-N, A-B, B-C, C-A), simply rotate the [FAULT PHASE] selector. The preset fault quantities will be immediatelyapplied to the new phase, providing for rapid testing. Release the [FAULT] button or [EXTERNALSTART] contact input when finished.

8. To test other fault types (Φ-N, Φ-Φ, 3Φ), repeat at step 2.

3.3.9.3 MTA TEST.

The following procedure determines the maximum torque angle of an impedance element:1. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 1-3 in the Preparation section (3.3.9.1).2. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 2-5 of the reach test above to find the reach at the theoretical

MTA. Decrease the voltage, or increase the current slightly, to move the impedance further into theregion of operation.

3. Press [PHASE], and increase the phase angle until the relay opens. Record this phase angle value.4. Adjust the phase angle to the nominal MTA. Decrease the phase angle until the relay opens again.

Record this value. When using Φ-Φ and 3Φ(Φ-Φ) fault types, it’s not necessary to account for any 30°offset.



5. The measured MTA is the average of the two recorded phase angle values.6. Release the [FAULT] button or [EXTERNAL START] contact input.7. To test other elements (A-N, B-N, C-N, A-B, B-C, C-A), simply rotate the [FAULT PHASE] selector

and repeat at step 2.


The following procedure determines the operation time of an impedance relay element:1. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 1-3 in the Preparation section (3.3.9.1).2. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 2-5 of the reach test above to find the reach at the theoretical

MTA. To set the impedance to the desired percent of reach for testing, decrease the voltage, or increasethe current.

3. Release the [FAULT] button or [EXTERNAL START] contact input. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC] toselect dynamic operation mode.

4. Press [FAULT] to initiate the fault.5. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. Press [TIME] to see the operation

time. Press [TIME] again to toggle between display in seconds or cycles.6. Press [STOP/RESET] to clear and prepare for next test.7. To test other elements (A-N, B-N, C-N, A-B, B-C, C-A), or zones, simply rotate the [FAULT PHASE]

selector, and repeat at step 2.

3.3.9.5 SWITCH-ONTO-FAULT TEST.

The following procedure determines the operation time of the switch-onto-fault feature of an impedancerelay. This procedure is the same as the timing test, except that the dynamic test is performed with prefaultoff:1. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 1-3 in the Preparation section (3.3.9.1).2. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 2-5 of the reach test above to find the reach at the theoretical

MTA. To set the impedance to the desired percent of reach for testing, decrease the voltage, or increase the current.3. Release the [FAULT] button or [EXTERNAL START] contact input.4. Turn [PREFAULT] off. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC] to select dynamic operation mode. Press [FAULT]

to initiate the fault.5. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. The relay should trip, indicating

switch-onto-fault (if annunciation is available). Press [TIME] to see the operation time.6. Press [STOP/RESET] to clear and prepare for next test.

3.3.9.6 CURRENT SUPERVISION TEST.

This test checks the current supervision level of a distance element.1. Perform steps 1- 4 of the Reach test (Section 3.3.9.2) above.2. While still holding in the [FAULT] button or shorting the [EXTERNAL START] contact inputs, press

[VOLTAGE], and adjust the voltage to zero. This sets the fault impedance to zero. 3. Press [CURRENT], and adjust the current to zero.4. Now slowly increase the current. When the relay contacts close, the [TONE] button will light. At this

point, the fault current level is the current supervision level.5. Release the [FAULT] button, or disconnect [EXTERNAL START] contact input.6. To test other elements (A-N, B-N, C-N, A-B, B-C, C-A), simply change the fault mode, and repeat at

step 2.



3.3.9.7 PERMISSIVE TRIP TEST.

The following procedure checks the basic operation of permissive trip (PUR or POR) functions of animpedance relay. The [AUX CONTACT 1] is used to apply a DC signal to the permissive trip input to therelay:

1. *If you haven’t done so, perform steps 1-3 in the Preparation section (3.3.9.1), except using theconnections shown in Figure 3.10.

2. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 2-5 of the reach test above to find the zone 2 reach at thetheoretical MTA. To set the impedance to the desired percent of reach for testing, decrease the voltage,or increase the current.

3. Release the [FAULT] button or [EXTERNAL START] contact input. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC] toselect dynamic operation mode.

FIGURE 3.10 3-Φ IMPEDANCE RELAY PERMISSIVE TRIP TEST SETUP



Use I3 current mode

Select element to betested using FAULT MODEcontrols.




4. Press [FAULT] to initiate the fault.5. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. Press [TIME] to see the operation

time. The relay should operate in the zone 1 time.6. Press [STOP/RESET] to clear and prepare for next test.7. Repeat steps 3-6, with the connections to the permissive trip input removed, and the relay should

operate in the zone 2 time.8. To test other elements (A-N, B-N, C-N, A-B, B-C, C-A), or other zones, simply rotate the [FAULT

PHASE] selector, and repeat at step 2.

* Alternatively, an MTS-1730 output channel could be used to apply DC voltage to the permissive tripinput of the relay rather than the MTS-1710’s auxiliary contact output. For example, if the MTS-1730’s output channel 0 is used, the following commands should be sent via the RS-232 port to closethe contacts during the fault state:

DIO,OUT0,0,1 DIO,OUT1,1,1 DIO,OUT2,0,1

3.3.9.8 TESTING SIGNAL SEND/CARRIER SEND OUTPUT.

This procedure checks the signal send/carrier send/key output operation of a distance relay withcommunications-aided accelerated tripping.

Testing the signal send/carrier send/key output is the same as testing an instantaneous distance element.The signal send/carrier send/key output operation depends on the scheme type, as shown on the followingpage:

Signal send/carrier send/keyScheme output asserted for

Permissive underreach fault in Zone 1Permissive overreach fault in Zone 2Blocking fault in reverse Zone 3

Procedure

1. Perform steps 1-3 in the Preparation section (3.3.9.1).2. Connect the signal send/carrier send/key output to the [EXTERNAL STOP] trigger inputs.3. Select the appropriate fault type Φ-Φ, Φ-N etc. Generally the test is done once for both Φ-Φ and Φ-N

to check that a carrier send is output for both phase and ground faults.4. Press and hold the [FAULT] button or short to the [EXTERNAL START] contact inputs. Press

[CURRENT] and set a starting fault current (e.g. 5A).5. Press [PHASE] and adjust the phase angle to the MTA (MTA-180° for blocking scheme).6. Press [VOLTAGE] and decrease the voltage until the signal send contact operates. You also can press

[CURRENT] and increase the current. When the contacts close, the [TONE] button will light. The[TONE] button also toggles an audible tone on or off.

7. Verify that the signal send contact closes only works for faults in the specified zone(s) in the tableabove.

8. Set the fault voltage and current to within the operating zone.



9. Release the [FAULT] button or [EXTERNAL START] contact input. Select dynamic operation mode.Press [FAULT] and time the operation of the signal send output. The operation should be virtuallyinstantaneous.

10. Select static operation mode again, press and hold [FAULT], and reverse the fault phase angle settingby 180°. The signal send contact should not close.

3.3.10 Differential Relay - Three-Terminal Type

Most electromechanical current differential relays are a three-terminal type. This section describes how toperform standard tests on this type of relay.

FIGURE 3.11 CONNECTIONS FOR THREE-TERMINAL CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS


1. Connect the relay as shown in Figure 3.11. Select I1&I2 current mode and static operation mode.2. Press [CURRENT] to display/adjust I1 current. “I1-AMPS” should be indicated in the [MODE/MENU

DISPLAY]. Press and hold [FAULT], and set the current to zero.3. Press [CURRENT] again to display/adjust I2 current.4. Slowly increase the operate current (I2) until the relay operates. Record this reading as the minimum

pickup current. Release the [FAULT] button.

OP

R1

R2DIFFERENTIAL

RELAY

Press [CURRENT] to toggle between I1 and I2adjustment/display.

Press [PHASE ] to displayand adjust phase between

I1 and I2.

Select I1&I2current mode

I1

I2I2

R1 R2

OP

&



3.3.10.2 SLOPE TEST.

1. Connect relay, as shown in Figure 3.11. Select I1&I2 current mode and static operation mode. Turn[PREFAULT] off.

2. Press [CURRENT] to display/adjust I1 current. “I1-AMPS” should be indicated in the [MODE/MENUDISPLAY]. Press and hold [FAULT], and increase the current to the desired restraint current value.

3. Press [CURRENT] again to display/adjust I2 current. Increase the operate current to 1A. Press [PHASE], and check the phase between I1&I2. Adjust if necessary to 0°. Press [CURRENT], and

decrease the current to 0A.4. Slowly increase the operate current (I2) until the relay operates. Record the I1 and I2 current readings.

Release the [FAULT] button.5. Use the required formula to calculate slope. If the simple I2÷I1 formula applies, this can displayed

directly. Select DISP RATIOS CURRENT-RATIOS I2÷I1 via the menu. If the I2÷(I1+I2÷2) formulaapplies, select DISP RATIOS CURRENT-RATIOS SLOPE I2÷((2I1+I2)÷2) in the menu.

6. To repeat at different values of restraint, repeat at step 2.


1. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 1-3 of the slope test above.2. Press [CURRENT] to display/adjust I2 current. Increase the operate current to the desired value.

Release the [FAULT] button.3. Select dynamic operation mode. Press [FAULT] to perform the timing test.4. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. Press [TIME] to see the operation

time. Press [TIME] again to toggle between display in seconds or cycles.5. Press [STOP/RESET] to clear and prepare for next test.

3.3.10.4 HARMONIC RESTRAINT TEST.

1. Connect relay, as shown in Figure 3.11. (The relay doesn’t need to be connected to the MTS-1710 I1output for this test). Select I2-HARMONIC current mode and static operation mode. Turn[PREFAULT] on.

2. Press [CURRENT] to display/adjust I2 current. “I2-AMPS” should be indicated in the [MODE/MENUDISPLAY]. Increase the current to the desired test value (usually equal to the tap value). The relayshould be operated*.

3. Press [CURRENT] to display/adjust %harmonic. “%-HARM” should be indicated in the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY]. Increase the %harmonic until the relay restrains to determine the %harmonicrestraint value. The harmonic value defaults to second harmonic. For testing at higher harmonics, press[FREQ] and turn the [MODIFY] knob to select the desired value.NOTE: For halfwave harmonic testing, select DC-Amps.

4. Turn [PREFAULT] off.

*NOTE: For latching trip elements, it may be necessary in step 2 to first set the %-harmonic to a highvalue to restrain operation, and then to increase the fundamental current (I2-AMPS). Then,in step 3, the % harmonic should be decreased until the relay operates.

For relays with harmonic restraint elements which are traditionally tested with half waverectified AC, such as the GE BDD 15/16 and ABB HO, see important additional informationin Application Note 23.



3.3.10.5 INSTANTANEOUS TEST.

The following procedure describes how to test the unrestrained instantaneous overcurrent element:

1. Depending upon the current required, one of two connections can be used for the current. If 30A or lessis required, the current coils can be left connected as shown in Figure 3.11, and I1&I2 current modeused. If more than 30A is required, connect as shown in Figure 3.12. For the latter, select I1-HIGHcurrent mode.

2. Select static operation mode, and turn [PREFAULT] off.3. Press and hold the [FAULT] button.4. If using the I1&I2 current mode method, press [CURRENT] to display/adjust I1-AMPS, and adjust I1

to zero. Press [CURRENT] again, and increase I2 until the relay operates.

OR

If using the I1-HIGH current mode method, press [CURRENT], and increase the current until the relayoperates.

FIGURE 3.12 INSTANTANEOUS TEST FOR THREE-TERMINAL CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS

OP

R1

R2DIFFERENTIALRELAY

Select I1-HIGHcurrent mode

+

I1

I1

R1 R2

OP



5. Release the [FAULT] button at any time to turn off the current. This allows you to make several passesat adjusting the current without overheating the relay. As well, you can set the fault current withoutapplying current to the relay, using the fault current preset feature (see Section 4.6.9).

6. To time the operation of the instantaneous element, select dynamic operation mode, and press [FAULT] to initiate.7. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. The operate time can be viewed by pressing [TIME]. Press [STOP/RESET] to return to the prefault state, and to prepare for the next test.


The following procedure describes how to test a current-operated target and seal-in unit on a differentialrelay:

1. A MTS-1720 is required for this test. Refer to Section 9.3.3 for proper connection and setup of theMTS-1720. Connect the relay, as shown in Figure 3.13. Select I4-DC current mode and staticoperation mode. Turn [PREFAULT] on.

2. Use the current preset feature to preset the DC current to the appropriate value (usually 0.2A or 2.0A).This is done by setting [PREFAULT] off, pressing and holding the [CURRENT] button, and adjustingthe [MODIFY] knob. Release the [CURRENT] button when done.

3. Select B-N/Φ−Ν fault mode. Display the AC current by pressing [CURRENT] until the upper leftcorner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] reads “AC-AMPS”.

4. Press and hold [FAULT]. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to increase the current until the relay operates. Thetarget (and seal-in unit, if available) also should operate. The [TONE] button LED should turn off.

5. Press [CURRENT] to display/adjust the DC current. Increase the DC current to 0.2A or 2A, as required,to operate the target.

6. Release the [FAULT] button to remove the AC current. 7. If a seal-in unit is included, turn [PREFAULT] off and observe the seal-in unit dropout. The DC current

will drop to zero and the [TONE] button LED will turn on.



FIGURE 3.13 CURRENT-OPERATED TARGET TEST - THREE-TERMINAL TYPE DIFF’L RELAY

3.3.11 Differential Relay - Independent Coil Type

Many solid state current differential relays have independent coils for the two current inputs. This sectiondescribes how to perform the standard tests on this type of relay:

TARGET Select I4 current mode.

0-25A LED indicates AC available

Toggle [CURRENT] toadjust/display DC/ACcurrent.

OP

R1

R2

Optional

2.100

OFF

ON



FIGURE 3.14 CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL RELAY TEST - INDEPENDENT COIL TYPE


1. Connect the relay as shown in Figure 3.14. Select I1-LOW current mode and static operation mode.2. Press [CURRENT] to display/adjust I1 current. Press and hold [FAULT].3. Slowly increase the current (I1) until the relay operates. Record this reading as the minimum pickup

current. Release the [FAULT] button.

3.3.11.2 SLOPE TEST.

1. Connect relay as shown in Figure 3.14. Select I1&I2 current mode and static operation mode. Turn[PREFAULT] off.

2. Press [CURRENT] to display/adjust the I1 current. “I1-AMPS” should be indicated in the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY]. Press and hold [FAULT], and increase the current to the desired nominal value.

DIFFERENTIALRELAY


Press [PHASE] to displayand adjust phase between

I1 and I2.

Select I1&I2

current mode

I1 I2

Phase angle betweenI1 & I2 is normallyset to 0°



3. Press [CURRENT] again to display/adjust the I2 current. Increase to the nominal value. Press[PHASE], and set the phase between I1&I2. Adjust if necessary. This is typically 0°, but may be 30° or-30° for transformer differential relays which protect Y-∆ transformers. The relay should now beoperated.

4. Slowly decrease the operate current (I2) until the relay operates. Record the I1 and I2 current readings.Release the [FAULT] button.

5. Use the required formula to calculate slope. If the standard |I1-I2|÷((I1+I2)÷2) formula applies, this canbe directly displayed. Select DISP RATIOS CURRENT-RATIOS SLOPE |I1-I2|÷((I1+I2)÷2) via the menu.

6. To repeat at different values of restraint, repeat at step 2.


1. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 1-3 of the slope test above.2. Press [CURRENT], and adjust either the I1 or I2 current to the desired test value. The relay should

now be operated. Release the [FAULT] button.3. Select dynamic operation mode. Press [FAULT] to perform the timing test.4. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. Press [TIME] to see the operation

time. Press [TIME] again to toggle between display in seconds or cycles.5. Press [STOP/RESET] to clear, and to prepare for the next test.

3.3.11.4 HARMONIC RESTRAINT TEST.

Using the test connections shown in Figure 3.14, follow the procedure given in Section 3.3.10.4.

3.3.11.5 INSTANTANEOUS TEST.

Use the test connections, as shown in Figure 3.14.

If more than 30A is required, the I1-HIGH current mode should be used. Follow the same basic procedureas outlined in Section 3.3.10.5.

3.3.11.6 TARGET TEST.

To test current-operated targets on this type of relay, follow the procedure outlined in Section 3.3.10.6,except connect the B-N and C-N current outputs of the MTS-1710 to the two independent current coils.

3.3.12 Synchronizing/Reclosing or Synchrocheck Relay

These types of relays are tested using the synchronizing mode of the MTS-1710.

The following sections describe how to perform standard tests. The SYNCSCOPE computer programprovided with your MTS-1710 is useful (but not a necessity) for demonstrating these tests.



FIGURE 3.15 SYNCHRONIZING RELAY TEST

3.3.12.1 PHASE ANGLE LIMIT TEST.

1. Make test connections, as shown in Figure 3.15.2. Select Φ-N/C-N fault mode, Il-LOW current mode. Turn [PREFAULT] off. If the upper right corner of

the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] doesn’t indicate “LINE”, press [FREQ] to toggle to line referencemode.

3. Using the menu, select SETTINGS MODES FREQ SYNCHRONIZING ON to enable synchronizingmode.

4. Turn [PREFAULT] on and, if required, check the A-N and C-N voltages by pressing [VOLTAGE], and selecting A-N and C-N fault phase. Adjust if necessary.

GEN(or BUS)

BUS(or LINE)SYNCHRONIZING

OR SYNCHROCHECKRELAY Va at fault frequency setting

Vc at prefault frequency setting

Select 0-N C-N fault mode and press

[PHASE] to display phase between Vc & Va

Select variable frequencyreference mode

Select DYNAMIC operation modeand press [FAULT] to initiate



5. Select Φ-N/C-N fault mode, and press [PHASE]. Note that the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] indicatesthis is the phase between Va and Vc. Press [PHASE] to toggle between 0-360° and 0-±180° displaymodes.

6. Increase and decrease the phase angle to determine the phase angle limit window. The relay should beoperated within the window.

3.3.12.2 VOLTAGE LIMIT TEST.

1. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 1-4 above (Section 3.3.12.1).2. Select Φ -N/C-N fault mode, and press [PHASE]. Adjust the phase between Va and Vc to zero. 3. Press [VOLTAGE]. Increase and decrease the voltage to determine the voltage limit window. The relay

should be operated within the window.

3.3.12.3 SLIP FREQUENCY LIMIT TEST.

1. Make test connections, as shown in Figure 3.15.2. Select Φ-N/C-N fault mode, I1-LOW current mode. Turn [PREFAULT] off. If the upper right corner

of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] indicates “LINE”, press [FREQ] to toggle to variable frequencyreference mode.

3. Using the menu, select SETTINGS MODES FREQ SYNCHRONIZING ON to enable synchronizingmode.

4. Turn [PREFAULT] on and, if required, check the A-N and C-N voltages by pressing [VOLTAGE], and selecting A-N and C-N fault phase. Adjust if necessary.5. Press [FREQ], and set the bus (Vc) frequency.6. Select dynamic operation mode and press [FAULT]. While in fault state, the fault frequency displayed is the generator (Va) frequency. Vc stays fixed at the

prefault (bus) frequency. Starting from a high value of frequency, slowly decrease until the relayoperates. The indicated frequency, minus the prefault (bus) frequency, is the slip frequency limit.

3.3.12.4 BREAKER ADVANCE TIME CHECK.

1. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 1-6 above (Section 3.3.12.3). Don’t press reset before continuingwith step 2 below. If the Stop/Reset button is not lit, repeat steps 1-6 above.

2. Press [PHASE]. This displays the angle between the bus and generator voltage at the time the relayoperated. Press [PHASE] to toggle between 0-360° and 0-±180° display modes.

3. Using the menu, select SETTINGS MODES FREQ BRKR-ADV to activate breaker advance timescreen.

4. Turn the [MODIFY] knob until =0.00° is displayed, and the breaker advance time is shown.Alternatively, turn the [MODIFY] knob to the known circuit breaker advance time, and the Φ=xxx.xwill indicate the phase angle at the time of breaker closure.

3.3.12.5 SYNCHRONIZING ELEMENTS WITH POSITIVE SEQUENCE VOLTAGE SUPERVISION

Some synchronizing elements may have positive sequence voltage supervision. In this case, Va and Vbshould be used, and may have to be increased in amplitude to generate enough positive sequence voltage toenable the synchronizing element.



See Figure 3.16 for typical connections.

FIGURE 3.16 CONNECTIONS FOR SYNCHRONIZING ELEMENTS WITH POSITIVE SEQUENCE VOLTAGE SUPERVISION

3.3.13 Ground Fault Overvoltage Relay

This type of relay uses a voltage element to sense generator zero sequence current, and often has anundervoltage inhibit element. This means that two voltages--one 3rd-harmonic, and one at the fundamentalfrequency, are required.

GEN(or BUS)

BUS(or LINE)SYNCHRONIZING

OR SYNCHROCHECKRELAY Va at fault frequency setting

Vc at prefault frequency setting

Select 0-N C-N fault mode and press

[PHASE] to display phase between Vc & Va

Select variable frequencyreference mode

Select DYNAMIC operation modeand press [FAULT] to initiate



FIGURE 3.17 GROUND FAULT OVERVOLTAGE RELAY3.3.13.1 SETUP.

1. Select static operation mode and turn [PREFAULT] off. Connect the relay, as shown in Figure 3.17.2. Using the menu, select SETTINGS MODES FREQ SYNCHRONIZING ON to enable synchronizing

mode. This mode allows Vc to be fixed at the fundamental while the other outputs may be at aharmonic frequency.

3. Turn [PREFAULT] on, and select Φ-N/C-N fault mode. Note that the frequency reading is thefundamental (60 Hz or 50 Hz).

4. Press [VOLTAGE], and set the inhibit voltage for the 27S element above the inhibit level.

59N & 27N

(3rd harmonic)

27SGROUND FAULTOVERVOLTAGE

RELAYVa at 3rd harmonic or fundamental

Vc at fundamental frequency

Select 0-N C-N or A-N to display/adjust

corresponding voltage

Select frequency and

turn [MODIFY] to select

harmonic

Enable synchronizing mode via menu



3.3.13.2 OVERVOLTAGE PICKUP TEST.

To check the pickup level of the 59N element:

1. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 1-4 above (Section 3.3.13.1).2. Select Φ-N/A-N fault mode. If the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] doesn’t show VOLTS in the upper left

corner, press [VOLTAGE]. 3. Press and hold [FAULT], or short the [EXTERNAL START] contact inputs. This holds the MTS-1710

in the fault state, indicated by the illuminated [FAULT] button. 4. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to increase Va (fundamental) until the relay operates. When the relay

contacts close, the [TONE] button will light. If the audible stop trigger tone has been enabled (bypressing the [TONE] button), the tone also will sound. The voltage may be adjusted, as required, todetermine the pickup level.

5. Release the [FAULT] button, and remove the connections to the [EXTERNAL START] inputs.

3.3.13.3 OVERVOLTAGE TIMING TEST.

To check the operation time:

1. Perform steps 1-2 of the pickup check above.2. Press and hold [FAULT], and turn the [MODIFY] knob to set the desired overvoltage level.3. Release the [FAULT] button.4. Select dynamic operation mode, turn [PREFAULT] on, and press [FAULT] to initiate.5. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. Press [TIME] to read the operate


6. For each new value of voltage, select static operation mode, and repeat steps 2-6.

3.3.13.4 3RD HARMONIC UNDERVOLTAGE TEST.

To check the pickup level of the 3rd harmonic undervoltage element:

1. If you haven’t done so, perform the same steps as in Section 3.3.13.1.2. Select Φ-N/A-N fault mode. Press [FREQ], and turn the [MODIFY] knob to select 3rd harmonic. 3. If the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] doesn’t show VOLTS in the upper left corner, press [VOLTAGE]. 4. Press and hold [FAULT], or short the [EXTERNAL START] contact inputs. This holds the MTS-1710

in the fault state, indicated by the illuminated [FAULT] button. 5. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust Va (3rd-harmonic) until the relay operates. When the relay contacts

close, the [TONE] button will light. If the audible stop trigger tone has been enabled (by pressing the[TONE] button), the tone also will sound. The voltage may be adjusted, as required, to determine thepickup level.

6. Release the [FAULT] button, and remove the connections to the [EXTERNAL START] inputs.

3.3.13.5 UNDERVOLTAGE INHIBIT TEST.

To check the inhibit of the 3rd-harmonic undervoltage element by the supervising undervoltage element:



1. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 1-4 of Section 3.3.13.1.2. Select Φ-N/A-N fault mode. If the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] doesn’t show, VOLTS in the upper left

corner, press [VOLTAGE]. 3. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to lower Va (3rd-harmonic) until the relay operates. When the relay contacts

close, the [TONE] button will light. If the audible stop trigger tone has been enabled (by pressing the[TONE] button), the tone also will sound.

4. Change the fault mode to Φ-N/C-N. Adjust the inhibit voltage lower until the relay restrains to find thethreshold for the inhibit element.

3.3.14 Frequency Relay Test


To check the pickup level of an over/underfrequency element:

1. The test connections are the same as those for a voltage relay (see Figure 3.6). Select Φ-N/A-N faultmode. If more than 150V is required, connect the relay across A-B, and select 2Φ-N/A-B fault mode.

2. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC], as required, to select STATIC operation mode.3. Press [FREQ] once or twice, as required, to toggle the frequency reference mode from line to variable.

The annunciation in the upper right of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] will change from “LINE” to aspecific frequency (defaults to your system frequency 60.000Hz or 50.000Hz).

4. Press [VOLTAGE] to display/adjust voltage. Turn [PREFAULT] on, and set the desired prefaultvoltage.

5. Press and hold [FAULT], or short the [EXTERNAL START] contact inputs. This holds the MTS-1710 in the fault state, indicated by the illuminated [FAULT] button.6. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the voltage for the fault state (generally the same as prefault).7. Press [FREQ] to display/adjust frequency. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the frequency for the

fault state. When the relay contacts close, the [TONE] button will light. If the audible stop trigger tonehas been enabled (by pressing the [TONE] button), the tone also will sound. The frequency may beadjusted, as required, to determine the pickup level.

8. Release the [FAULT] button, and remove connections to the [EXTERNAL START] inputs.

3.3.14.2 TIMING TEST.

To check the operation time of an over/underfrequency element:

1. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 1-4 of the pickup check above.2. Press and hold [FAULT], or short the [EXTERNAL START] contact inputs. This holds the MTS-1710 in the fault state, indicated by the illuminated [FAULT] button.3. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the voltage for the fault state (generally the same as prefault).4. Press [FREQ] to display/adjust frequency. Set the desired fault frequency.5. Release the [FAULT] button, and remove connections to the [EXTERNAL START] inputs.6. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to set a specific prefault frequency if desired.7. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC] to select DYNAMIC operation mode. Press [FAULT] to initiate.8. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. Press [TIME] to read the operate




9. For each new value of frequency, repeat steps 2 and 4 to 8.



1. Connect relay, as in Figure 3.7. Select I4-DC current mode.2. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 2-4 of the pickup check above.3. Turn [PREFAULT] on, press [FREQ], and adjust the frequency until the relay operates.4. Press [CURRENT], and adjust the DC current to 0.2A or 2A, as required, to operate the target.5. To test the seal-in feature, adjust the frequency back to normal, and the contacts should remain closed

until the DC current is removed.

Note: If the above adjustments are made in the FAULT state rather than prefault, a complete dynamictest can be performed which simulates real world operation.

3.3.14.4 UNDERVOLTAGE INHIBIT TEST.

To check the undervoltage inhibit function:

1. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 1-4 of the pickup check in Section 3.3.14.1.2. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the voltage to a level below the inhibit setting.3. Press [FREQ], and adjust the frequency to a value which would normally cause the relay to trip. The

relay should restrain from operating ([TONE] led stays off).4. Press [VOLTAGE] and increase the voltage. The relay should trip when the voltage reaches the inhibit

level. This step can be done in the dynamic operation mode to freeze the readings at the time of thetrip, if desired.

3.3.14.5 FREQUENCY RATE-OF-CHANGE TEST.

To check a frequency rate-of-change element:

1. If you haven’t done so, perform steps 1-6 of the timing test in Section 3.3.14.2. The initial faultfrequency (start of the ramp) will be the frequency you had set in the FAULT state. This can also be setvia the menu using the SETTINGS RAMP FREQ INITIAL selection. This frequency is generally thesame as the prefault.

2. Press [MODE/MENU], and set up the ramp end frequency and ramp rate via the SETTINGS RAMPFREQ FINAL and SETTINGS RAMP FREQ RATE selections. Exit the menu by pressing [MODE/MENU].

3. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC] to select DYNAMIC operation mode. Press [FAULT] to initiate.4. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. Press [TIME] to read the operate


5. This test should be repeated at ramp rates slightly above and below the element’s ∆f/∆t setpoint. Repeat steps 2-4 for each new ramp rate.

(Note: You can actually initiate the fault with the menu still active. This allows you to modify the ramp rate for successive trials without having to re-enter and exit the menu. See Section 5.1.2 for a description of this feature).



FIGURE 3.18 SIMPLE FREQUENCY RATE-OF-CHANGE TESTS

3.3.15 DC Auxiliary/Time-Delay Relay Test


To check the pickup level of an DC auxiliary or time-delay element:

1. NOTE: To avoid damage to the relay, set the DC voltage to off before connecting. This can be doneby pressing the [MODE/MENU] key to enter the menu, then selecting SETTINGS DCVoltsOFF using the [SELECT] button and [MODIFY] knob. Press [MODE/MENU] again to exitthe menu.

2. Connect the relay, as in Figure 3.19.3. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC], as required, to select STATIC operation mode.4. If desired, press [VOLTAGE] once or twice, as required, to toggle the [VALUE DISPLAY] to DC volts.

The annunciation in the upper left of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] will change to “DCVolts”.5. Press the [MODE/MENU] key to enter the menu. Then select SETTINGS DCVolts CONTINUOUS-

ADJUST. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to slowly increase the voltage until the relay operates (or dropsout for an undervoltage element). When the relay contacts close, the [TONE] button will light.

6. Press [MODE/MENU] again to exit the menu.

FAULTPREFAULT

(a) Prefault frequency=initial fault frequency

f

t

final faultfrequency

prefault/initial faultfrequency

frequencyinitial fault

frequencyfinal fault

t

f

(b) Prefault frequency=initial fault frequency

PREFAULT FAULT

prefaultfrequency



FIGURE 3.19 DC AUXILIARY/TIME-DELAY RELAY PICKUP TEST

NOTE: It’s possible to perform this test with the same connections as for the timing test below, providingthat the test is performed in the FAULT state, and that the lead connecting to the external starttrigger (red) input is temporarily disconnected.

3.3.15.2 PICKUP TIMING TEST.

To check the operation time of a DC auxiliary or time-delay element (This procedure assumes a normallyopen relay contacts):

1. Connect the relay, as in Figure 3.20.2. Press the [MODE/MENU] key to enter the menu. Then select SETTINGS DCVolts CONTINUOUS-

ADJUST using the [SELECT] button and [MODIFY] knob. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to set the testvoltage.

3. Next go to the SETTINGS MODES TIMER menu, and select EXTERNAL timer start mode. (Thereason for this is explained in Section 5.3.2).

4. Press [MODE/MENU] again to exit the menu.5. Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC], as required, to select DYNAMIC operation mode. Press [FAULT] to

initiate the test.

TIME-DELAYRELAY

Set DC voltage via menu.

DC AUXILIARY/



6. When the relay operates, the [STOP/RESET] button will illuminate. Press [TIME] to read the operatetime. Press [STOP/RESET] to return to the prefault state.

FIGURE 3.20 DC AUXILIARY/TIME-DELAY RELAY TIMING TEST

3.3.15.3 DROPOUT TIMING TEST.

To measure the dropout time of a DC auxiliary relay (with normally open contacts):

1. Set the auxiliary contact type to NC (i.e. closed in prefault, open in fault state) via the SETTINGSMODES AUX-CONTCT AUX_CONTACT_1 NC selection in the front panel menu.

2. Proceed as described in Section 3.3.15.2 above.

3.4 SETTINGS MAP

Due to the large number of settings which may be programmed on the MTS-1710, the following map maybe a useful guide.

This may be used to record the settings required for testing a particular device or relay. Each of thesesettings is explained in detail in Section 4.

Select DYNAMIC operation mode to run timing test

Press [FAULT] to start timing testSelect External Starttimer mode via menu

TIME-DELAY

RELAY


DC AUXILIARY/



* This is the fault voltage phase(s) as selected by the FAULT TYPE and FAULT PHASE selection. It may be VAN, VBN, VCN, VAB, VBC, VCA or V-3Φ . Example: The map on the next page gives an example of the settings map testing of the Φ-Φ A-B

element of a 3Φ impedance relay.

MTS-1710 Settings Map

Fault Type Operation mode Freq. reference mode

Fault Phase Current mode Harmonic

Parameter

PREFAULT FAULT POSTFAULT

ON/OFF Initial Ramp Rate Duration Final ON/OFF

VAN [V] - - - - -

VBN [V] - - - - -

VCN [V] - - - - -

V____ * [V]

I1 or I3[A]

Phase [deg]

Freq. [Hz]

I2 current [A] Special Modes and Settings (via menu)

I2 %harmonic Timer Start Mode INT/EXT Fault incidence angle

I4 [DC amps] Dynamic Meas. Mode Synchronizing mode ON/OFF

Phase Sequence +ve/-ve Auto-reclose delay

Relay Type being tested Type of test Date User

Notes:



3.5 GENERAL HINTS ON MANUAL USE

The Manta Test Systems MTS-1710 differs in usage from conventional relay test systems in many areas.The following hints will help new users become familiar with the MTS-1710:

MTS-1710 Settings Map Example

Fault Type Φ-Φ Operation mode STATIC Freq. reference mode LINE

Fault Phase A-B Current mode I3 Harmonic 1

Parameter


ON Initial Ramp Rate Duration Final OFF

VAN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VBN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VCN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VAB [V] 120.0 variable off off N/A N/A

I1 or I3[A] 1.0 5.0 off off N/A N/A

Phase [deg] 75.0 75.0 off off N/A N/A

Freq. [Hz] N/A N/A off off N/A N/A

I2 current [A] N/A Special Modes and Settings (via menu)

I2 %harmonic N/A Timer Start Mode INT Fault incidence angle RANDOM

I4 [DC amps] N/A Dynamic Meas. Mode AUTO Synchronizing mode OFF

Phase Sequence +ve Auto-reclose delay 0.0

Relay Type being tested Type of test Date User

KD-4 Φ-Φ reach

Notes: Vary the fault voltage VAB until the relay operates. To test other phase-to-phase elements, change the fault phase selection, and adjust phase angle. Lower voltage until relay operates.



1. Selecting Settings.

Select the major mode settings before setting parameters, such as current, voltage and phase angle. In general, follow the settings map (Section 3.4) from top to bottom in setting up the instrument. There are some settings which depend upon previous settings being made correctly (especially rampingparameters). For each parameter (voltage, current, phase, frequency), there may be a prefault, fault andpostfault setting.

Watch the pushbuttons in the CONTROL section of the front panel to determine the present state (seeSection 4.1).

2. Current Mode.

Always select the desired current mode before adjusting current or phase angle. See Section 4.6 for currentmode selection guide.

3. True Measured Value Display.

The [VALUE DISPLAY] shows true measured values. This means that current must be flowing in a closedcircuit in the load for a value to appear.

Similarly, a current must be flowing to obtain a phase reading when adjusting phase.

4. Fault Mode Selectors and Voltage, Current, Phase Adjustments.

The [FAULT PHASE] and [FAULT TYPE] selectors allow simplified setup for standard faults.

Simply select the fault type and phase, and voltage adjustment will adjust the faulting voltage(s), currentadjustment will adjust the appropriate phase current(s), and phase angle adjustments will adjust theappropriate phase angle(s).

Always select the desired frequency reference mode and harmonic before making phase adjustments.

5. Use of prefault and fault states.

Be sure to develop the habit of applying fault voltages and currents in the FAULT state (i.e. [FAULT]button depressed in the static operation mode).

Most users tend to overuse the prefault state for testing. They’re then confused in setting up a dynamic testinvolving prefault and fault. Using the fault state allows you to quickly remove high fault currents toprevent damage to the relay. It also allows you to immediately perform a timing test after the relay’soperate point is determined.

When testing distance relays, using the fault state for faults will prevent switch-onto-fault trips in normaltesting of distance elements. A user will also find it easier to learn operation with the MTS-1720, in whichprefault and fault current settings and operation is slightly different from operation with the MTS-1710alone.



Section 4 provides details on all these operational aspects.

The MTS-2100 computer program provided with your MTS-1710 is also very helpful as a learning anddemonstration aid. Please refer to the documentation provided with MTS-2100 for use.


DETAILED OPERATION - Section 4

DETAILED OPERATION

4.1 FAULT STATES

The MTS-1710 operates in one of three fault states indicated by the [FAULT] and [STOP/RESET] buttonlights as follows:.

The prefault state simulates the healthy inputs to the relay prior to the fault occurrence. The fault statesimulates the inputs to the relay during a fault condition. The postfault state simulates the inputs to the relayafter the fault condition and relay operation.

The MTS-1710 can output different voltage and current levels, phase, and frequency in each of the prefault,fault and postfault states.

4.2 OPERATION MODES

Operation within the three fault states is governed by the selected operation mode, which may be STATICor DYNAMIC. Select the operation mode by pressing the [STATIC/DYNAMIC] button.

4.2.1 Static Operation Mode

In the static operation mode (static mode), the outputs are normally in the prefault state.

When a closed contact or voltage is present on the [EXTERNAL START] trigger inputs, or the [FAULT]button is depressed, the output is in the fault state. This is normally used to initially set fault conditions.

Note that the trigger action (closed contact, voltage, or depressing [FAULT]) must be maintained to holdthe MTS-1710 in the fault state. Transitions between the two states is depicted in the following diagram:

FAULT light STOP/RESET light Fault state

off off PREFAULT

ON off FAULT

off ON POSTFAULT

Uses of the STATIC operation mode Uses of the DYNAMIC operation mode

Pickup checksQuick go/no-go tests

Adjustments of any settings“Static” relay testing

All timed testsDynamic test

Any test involving ramping and/or durationPulsed output (response time) test

Reading hold/freezeTwo-wire pulse timing



FIGURE 4.1 FAULT STATE DIAGRAM FOR STATIC OPERATION MODE

Note that, in static operation mode, only one of the [PREFAULT], [FAULT] or [POSTFAULT] buttonsmay be illuminated at a time. The illuminated button indicates which settings (prefault, fault or postfault)are being adjusted and displayed.

4.2.2 Dynamic Operation Mode

The dynamic operation mode (dynamic mode) allows execution of a complete simulation from prefault tofault, and then to postfault states.

Transition between these three states is controlled by the [EXTERNAL START] and [EXTERNAL STOP]trigger inputs, and the [FAULT] and [STOP/RESET] buttons. In the dynamic operation mode, the triggeractions only need to be momentary to latch the MTS-1710 into the next fault state.

The state transition diagram is shown below:

FIGURE 4.2 FAULT STATE DIAGRAM FOR DYNAMIC OPERATION MODE

FAULTPREFAULT

[FAULT] button onor closed contactor voltage sensed

on START TRIGGER

[FAULT] button offand open contactand no voltageon START TRIGGER

STOP TRIGGER

RESET

START TRIG

GER

STOP

TRIGG

ERRESE

T

POSTFAULT FAULT

PREFAULT



In normal application, the MTS-1710 begins in PREFAULT state. A start trigger action will change theMTS-1710 to the FAULT state.

A start trigger action may include pressing the [FAULT] button, a transition on the [EXTERNAL START]trigger inputs, an RS-232C STR command, or an auxiliary start signal from the optional digital input ports.While in the FAULT state, all start trigger actions will be ignored.

Now a stop trigger action will change the MTS-1710 to the POSTFAULT state. A stop trigger action canoriginate from a transition on the [EXTERNAL STOP] trigger inputs, and RS-232C STP command, or anauxiliary stop signal from the optional digital input ports.

While in the POSTFAULT state, all further start and stop trigger actions are ignored, preventing the MTS-1710 from re-entering a FAULT state.

Now, only a reset action will restore the MTS-1710 to the PREFAULT state. The reset action may be causedby pressing the [STOP/RESET] button, or by the RS-232C RES command.

Changing from dynamic to static operation mode also will cause a reset action, returning the MTS-1710 tothe PREFAULT state if it was previously in the FAULT or POSTFAULT state.

4.2.3 Blinking Indicators in Dynamic Mode

Note that, in dynamic operation mode, one or more of the [PREFAULT], [FAULT] or [POSTFAULT]buttons may be illuminated at a time. This is due to the fact that the prefault and postfault voltage/currentmay be turned on or off (see Section 4.4).

If the prefault or postfault levels are armed to be on, its corresponding pushbutton will be illuminated. As avisual aid, if the output levels are turned on in a particular state, and the MTS-1710 is in the correspondingstate, the corresponding button will blink.

For example, if the operation mode is dynamic, and the [PREFAULT] button is lit, the [POSTFAULT]button isn’t lit, and the [FAULT] button is blinking, then the MTS-1710 is in the fault state, with liveoutputs, prefault outputs are set to on, and postfault outputs are set to off.

4.3 CHARACTERISTICS OF FAULT STATES


V & I outputs at prefault settings(or off if prefault set off)

V & I outputs at fault settings V & I outputs at postfault settings

(or off if postfault set off)

Timer=0.0sec Timer running Timer reading frozen

Normal reading speed Fast reading speed(Dynamic operation mode only) *

All readings frozen at their value when stop trigger

occurred

AUX contacts open** AUX contacts closed** AUX contacts open**



* NOTE: In the FAULT state, in dynamic operation mode, all measurements are updated at fourtimes the normal rate. This allows rapid changes of voltage, current, frequency and phaseto be captured. The normal rate (for 60Hz outputs) is approximately four readings persecond for voltage and current measurements, and two readings per second for frequencyand phase measurements. For information on very high speed measurements, see Sections5.7 and 5.14.1.

**NOTE: It’s possible to change the function and the logic of the auxiliary contact output (see Section5.15).

4.4 OUTPUT LEVELS

The voltage/current output in the prefault and postfault states may be set on/off by toggling the[PREFAULT] and [POSTFAULT] respectively.

To set PREFAULT outputs on/off:

Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC] to select dynamic operation mode. Press [PREFAULT], as required, toilluminate or turn off the [PREFAULT] button.

To set POSTFAULT outputs on/off:

Press [STATIC/DYNAMIC] to select dynamic operation mode. Press [POSTFAULT], as required, toilluminate or turn off the [POSTFAULT] button.

In the dynamic operation mode, the dynamic test may be run with four combinations of prefault/postfaultV&I set on/off. This is shown in the chart on the next page:



The following diagrams depict some of the typical sequences which may be simulated. These exampleshave a fault current significantly higher than the prefault, and a fault voltage significantly lower than theprefault. The postfault current and voltage, if enabled, are the same as the prefault settings.

FIGURE 4.3 EXAMPLE OUTPUT SEQUENCE (PREFAULT OFF & POSTFAULT ON)

SelectionsFAULT STATE OUTPUT LEVELS

PREFAULT POSTFAULT

OFF OFFPREFAULT OFF

FAULT FAULT LEVEL

POSTFAULT OFF

ON OFFPREFAULT PREFAULT LEVEL

FAULT FAULT LEVEL

POSTFAULT OFF

OFF ONPREFAULT OFF

FAULT FAULT LEVEL

POSTFAULT POSTFAULT LEVEL

ON ONPREFAULT PREFAULT LEVEL

FAULT FAULT LEVEL

POSTFAULT POSTFAULT LEVEL

I

V

POSTFAULTFAULTPREFAULT



FIGURE 4.4 EXAMPLE OUTPUT SEQUENCE (PREFAULT ON & POSTFAULT OFF)

FIGURE 4.5 EXAMPLE OUTPUT SEQUENCE (PREFAULT ON & POSTFAULT ON)


V

I

I

V




FIGURE 4.6 EXAMPLE OUTPUT SEQUENCE (PREFAULT OFF & POSTFAULT ON)

4.5 TRIGGER/TIMER OPERATION

Transitions between the three fault states are caused by external or internal triggers. The three possibletrigger actions are START, STOP and RESET.

4.5.1 Start Trigger

A “start” trigger causes the MTS-1710 to enter the FAULT state. This only occurs if the MTS-1710 was inthe PREFAULT state.

A start trigger may be caused by pressing the [FAULT] button. The timer may be set to start synchronouslywith this action, or to start when an externally provided signal changes. These triggers are referred to as the“internal start” and “external start” timing modes (see Section 5.3 for details).

4.5.2 Stop Trigger

A “stop” trigger always causes the system to enter the POSTFAULT state. It may be caused by a voltage orcontact change on the [EXTERNAL STOP] trigger inputs.

The stop trigger action is disabled in static operation mode. This eliminates the need to constantly reset thesystem when doing tests (such as minimum pickup) which result in numerous STOP triggers.

In static operation mode, only the tone LED and tone (if enabled) turn on when a closed contact or voltageis sensed on the [EXTERNAL STOP] trigger inputs.


V

I



4.5.3 Reset

A “reset” trigger always causes the system to enter the PREFAULT state. It can only be caused by pressingthe [STOP/RESET] button.

4.5.4 External Start Trigger Inputs

These three input terminals allow external contacts or voltage signals to trigger the MTS-1710 into theFAULT state.

The top and centre terminals detect voltage change-of-state. The lower and centre terminals detect contactimpedance change-of-state, such as contact closure or low-impedance voltage source appearance.

In either case, the changing of a signal causes a start trigger. This could be the disappearance of a signal,thus enabling trigger action from contact opening/voltage disappearance, as well as the more conventionalcontact closure/voltage appearance.

The recommended mode is to use voltage sensing whenever possible, since the voltage sensing terminalsdon’t inject a voltage of their own into the circuit under test. The voltage output from the impedanceterminals, although of a very high source impedance (50k ohms), may be sufficient to alter observedoperation time of sensitive electronic relays.

Up to 300VDC may be applied to any one of the three terminals without damage. AC voltage should beavoided due to the inherent poor accuracy caused by its continuous level variation.

Input impedance of either pair is greater than 50k ohms. Complete galvanic isolation up to 300VDC isassured between these terminals and system ground, and all other inputs and outputs.

4.5.5 External Stop Trigger Inputs

These three input terminals allow external contacts or voltage signals to trigger the MTS-1710 into thePOSTFAULT state. They’re primarily used to sense relay operation.

The sensing action, impedance characteristics, and isolation of these inputs are the same as those of the[EXTERNAL START] trigger inputs (see Section 4.5.4).



FIGURE 4.7 FOUR-WIRE TIMING MEASUREMENT

4.5.6 Trigger Threshold Levels

The threshold voltage level on the trigger inputs is 10V. This low setting was chosen to accommodate newersolid state relays with low voltage logic level outputs.

However, this low threshold level may cause false triggering when working in very noisy environments. Thethreshold levels may be raised if required.

Please contact Manta Test Systems for details.


Select external timer startmode via menu.

Use of 4-wire timingmeasurement to measurethe operate time of anexternally activated relay.

To trip circuits



4.5.7 Two-Wire Pulse Timing

By parallelling the START and STOP inputs, pulse type operations may be timed using only a single pairof sensing leads.

The rising edge of a voltage pulse, for example, would cause a start trigger, and the falling edge would causea stop trigger. This allows measurement of the duration of a voltage pulse.

FIGURE 4.8 TWO-WIRE PULSE TIMING CONNECTIONS

4.5.8 Timing in Cycles

The [TIME] button toggles between timing in seconds and timing in cycles display.

Timing in cycles is calculated from the timer (seconds) reading and the present frequency. In line frequencymode, there must be a voltage output to obtain a frequency measurement, and subsequently a timing incycles value.

If the frequency changes during a test, the time in cycles value will assume that the frequency has alwaysstayed at the latest value (time in cycles doesn’t actually count power cycles--it’s a calculated value).

VOLTAGE PULSE INPUT

OR

CONTACT OPEN-CLOSE-OPENOR CLOSE-OPEN-CLOSE INPUT

Time

PARALLELED START & STOP INPUTS FOR TWO-WIRE TIMING

V

Select EXTERNAL START timing modevia the front panel menu.

NOTE:



4.5.9 Testing SCR Output Type Relays

Relays with SCR outputs can be tested using the connection diagram shown below. Dynamic operationmode should be used.

When [FAULT] is depressed, the fault quantities are applied to the relay, and the [AUX CONTACTS] close,allowing current to flow in the SCR when the relay operates. When the relay operates, the appearance ofvoltage across the load trips the stop trigger of the MTS-1710, causing it to go to the postfault state, andopen the [AUX CONTACTS] which breaks the SCR current.

FIGURE 4.9 TEST CONNECTIONS FOR SCR OUTPUT TYPE RELAYS

If the relay normally operates in less than two cycles, you’ll have to set the auxiliary contact arrangementto type 52A (See Section 5.15.2). This will ensure the voltage is available to the SCR before the fault isapplied.

OP

Set DC voltage outputto DC relay coil ratingor use an externalDC source.

RELAY UNDERTESTDC relay coil or 500-1000 ohm,

15W resistor used as a load.



4.6 CURRENT MODES

The MTS-1710 has seven basic current modes, which determine how the internal current amplifiers areconfigured to perform different types of testing.

The current mode is selected by the [CURRENT MODE] selector. The chart on the next page is a quickreference for selection of the proper mode. Each of the current modes is detailed in the following sections:



1 Available on systems with I3P current mode selection only.2 Available with MTS-1720 only.

While adjusting current settings, the current(s) are actually applied to the output and measured. It istherefore essential for a load to be connected to the selected current output terminals.

The MTS-1710 will apply the current, sense the load impedance, and determine the required voltage to drivethe load. Otherwise the voltage drive may be too low, or the amplifier may dissipate excessive power.

4.6.1 I1-LOW Current Mode

The I1-LOW current mode is the standard mode in which the main current amplifier is connected to [I1OUTPUT] terminals. This mode will handle the majority of testing requirements.

In this mode, the output is direct coupled, allowing DC offsets to be reproduced during fault playback. Toadjust to I1 current, press [CURRENT], and turn the [MODIFY] knob.

Note there are prefault, fault, and postfault current settings (see Section 3.4), and the setting which isadjusted depends upon the present fault state.

Current Mode Selection Guide

Relay Type or Test Recommended Current Mode

OutputTerminals

MaximumOutput1

1-Φ Overcurrent, 1-Φ Impedance I1-LOW I1 OUTPUT 30A @6V(44V max)

1-Φ Overcurrent

(high instantaneous test)

I1-HIGH I1 OUTPUT90A @3V(7.5V max)

I3-PARALLEL1I3 OUTPUT(A,B,C,N)

90A Max44V Max

Transformer differential (harmonic restraint element) I2-HARMONIC I2 OUTPUT 17A @6V

Current differential I1&I2 I1 OUTPUTI2 OUTPUT

65A @3V30A @6V

3-Φ Impedance, 3-Φ Overcurrent Motor protection

I3(or I3-WYE)2

I3 OUTPUT(A,B,C,N)

30A @6V

DC-operated target I4 DC AMPS OUTPUT 6A DC @12V



4.6.2 Il-HIGH Current Mode

I1-HIGH current mode is used for instantaneous tests requiring more than 30A output.

In this mode, the main current amplifier is connected via an internal boost CT to the [I1 OUTPUT]terminals. The output is AC-coupled, and isolated from all outputs and inputs.

To adjust I1 current, press [CURRENT], and turn the [MODIFY] knob. Note there are prefault, fault andpostfault current settings, and the setting which is adjusted depends upon the present fault state.

4.6.3 I3 Current Mode

I3 current mode allows the single-phase current source to be switched to any pair of the [I3 OUTPUT]terminals (indicated in red on the front panel). These terminals are also used as I1 and I2 outputs.

In I3 current mode, they’re configured as a 3Φ, four-wire output as indicated by the red A,B,C & N labels.As a result, any 3-Φ, three-wire or 3-Φ, four-wire system may be tested one phase at a time, withoutmoving wires during the test, by supplying its inputs from the appropriate I3 outputs.

The current path is selected by the [FAULT PHASE] selector, and is indicated in the lower left corner ofthe [MODE/MENU DISPLAY].

For example, if the fault mode is 3-Φ A-B, the current exits the A terminal, and returns through the Bterminal. The C and N terminals are dead (open-circuited).

Current Fault Phase Output Return

A-N A N B-N B N C-N C N A-B A B B-C B C C-A C A

4.6.4 I3-WYE Current Mode

I3-WYE current mode provides full 3Φ current, and requires the MTS-1720. Use of this current mode isdescribed in Section 9.4.



FIGURE 4.10 3Φ IMPEDANCE RELAY TEST SETUP

4.6.5 I1 & I2 Current Mode

The I1&I2 current mode provides two independent current outputs ([I1 OUTPUT] and [I2 OUTPUT]) fortesting current differential relays.

Note that, in this current mode, the I1 output is a lower power (VA) output. (See current mode selectionguide in Section 4.6).

4.6.5.1 BASIC ADJUSTMENTS.

To adjust/display I1 output:

Press [CURRENT] until the upper left corner of the [MODE/MENU] display reads “I1-AMPS”. Turn the[MODIFY] knob, as required.

IMPEDANCERELAY

Use I3 current modefor 3-phase impedancerelays

Select element to betested using FAULTMODE controls



Turn [PREFAULT] on to maintain prefault values.

Ia

Vc

Vn

Ib

Ic

Va

Vb




Press [CURRENT] until the upper left corner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] reads “I2-AMPS”. Turnthe [MODIFY] knob, as required.

To adjust/display the angle between I1 & I2 currents:

Press [PHASE]. In the I1&I2 mode, the phase angle displayed is the phase between I1 & I2 (The angle bywhich I1 leads I2).

Note that the units annunciator in the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] reads “DegI1-2”. Turn the [MODIFY]knob to adjust the phase between I1 & I2.

Ratios percent slope for percent differential relays can be displayed directly on the [MODE/MENUDISPLAY] (see Section 5.10.3 for details).

4.6.5.2 SPECIAL NOTES.

In I1&I2 current mode, the Vc voltage source is re-configured as a current source for I1 output. To ensuremaximum I1 output, turn all Va and Vb settings to zero.

In I1&I2 current mode, either the I1 and I2 neutrals (black terminals) or the I1 and I2 red terminals may beconnected together, but the outputs cannot be parallelled (i.e. don’t connect both the red terminals and theblack terminals together) as a method to obtain higher currents.



FIGURE 4.11 PROPER & IMPROPER CURRENT OUTPUT CONNECTIONS IN I1&I2 CURRENT MODE

Under manual front panel operation, there’s only one set of amplitude and phase angle settings for I1&I2currents for prefault, fault and postfault states. Under computer control, independent I1 & I2 amplitude andphase angle settings are possible for prefault, fault and postfault states. (See Section 6.7.1).

There are several different methods of connecting the I1&I2 output to different types of current differentialrelays. Refer to Sections 3.3.9 and 3.3.10 as a general guide.

Figure 4.11 shows a connection method for a three-terminal type differential relay, with I1 and I2 simulatingCT currents that would actually be produced in an in-service relay.

II

NO

OK

Do not attempt to parallel outputs in I1&I2 current mode



FIGURE 4.12 PERCENTAGE DIFFERENTIAL RELAY TESTING

4.6.6 HARMONIC Current Mode

This current mode generates a current output in one of two ways: 1) the sum of a fundamental frequencycurrent, and pure harmonic, or 2) the sum of a fundamental frequency current and a DC rectified signal ofthe fundamental.

Figure 1 shows the sum of a fundamental frequency current of 60Hz with a 50% Harmonic. Figure 2 showsthe sum of a fundamental at 2.25A and the rectified DC current at 1.00A. Figure 3 shows the pure DCrectified signal without any fundamental current.

OP

R1

R2

I1-I2

I1

I2DIFFERENTIAL

RELAY


Press [PHASE] to displayand adjust phase between

I1 and I2.

Select I1&I2current mode

NOTE:Vc is disabledin this currentmode.

I1 I2I1-I2



FIGURE 4.13 SUM OF FUNDAMENTAL FREQUENCY CURRENT OF 60Hz WITH 50% HARMONIC

FIGURE 4.14 SUM OF FUNDAMENTAL AND THE RECTIFIED DC CURRENT

I

t

0

I

t

0



FIGURE 4.15 PURE DC RECTIFIED SIGNAL WITHOUT ANY FUNDAMENTAL CURRENT

4.6.6.1 % PURE HARMONIC - BASIC ADJUSTMENT


Press [CURRENT] until the upper left corner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] reads “I2-AMPS”.

Turn the [MODIFY] knob as required. This adjusts the total RMS output, maintaining the percentageharmonic constant.

To adjust/display %-harmonic:

Press [CURRENT] until the upper left corner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] reads “%-HARM”.

Turn the [MODIFY] knob, as required. This adjusts the percentage harmonic of the output from 0 to 50%.

To adjust/display harmonic frequency:

Press [FREQ] and turn the [MODIFY] knob, as required, to select desired harmonic or frequency.

In line frequency mode, the harmonic number is displayed in the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY]. In variablefrequency mode, the harmonic frequency in Hz is displayed in the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY].

Note: Adjustment of harmonic frequency requires the %HARM to be set to something other than zero.

To adjust waveshape:

Press [PHASE] and turn the [MODIFY] knob, as required. This adjusts the “phase” between the harmonicand the fundamental, thereby changing the waveshape of the I2-Harmonic output.

t

I

0



The phase angle reading has no direct meaning in this current mode because the voltage and current are atdifferent frequencies (see Section 4.6.6.3).

The percentage of harmonic is defined as:

% nth harmonic = nth harmonic amps x 100 fundamental amps

In the case of 2nd harmonic of 60Hz, which is most often used, this becomes:% 2nd harmonic = 120 Hz amps x 100

60 Hz amps

This definition yields the same percentage of second harmonic as traditional techniques, which combine a60 Hz signal with a half-wave rectified 60 Hz signal. These techniques use the formulas:

% 2nd harmonic = 0.47 IDC x 100 (Westinghouse formula)IAC + 1.11 IDC

% 2nd harmonic = 0.212 IDC x 100 (G.E. formula)0.45 IAC + 0.5 IDC

where, IAC = 60Hz component in Amps (RMS)IDC = half-wave rectified component in Amps (average)

Note that the G.E. formula is actually the same as the Westinghouse formula if both numerator anddenominator are multiplied by 2.22.

Note: The DC-Amps must be zero to adjust the %HARM.



FIGURE 4.16 HARMONIC RESTRAINT TESTING

4.6.6.2 DC AMPS - BASIC ADJUSTMENT.


Press [CURRENT] until the upper left corner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] reads “I2-AMPS”.

Turn the [MODIFY] knob as required. This adjusts the fundamental current.

OP

R1

R2

TRANSFORMER DIFFERENTIAL

RELAY

Select I2-HARMONICcurrent mode.

2nd through to 10th harmonic

can be selected by pressing [FREQ]

and turning the [MODIFY] knob.

Press [CURRENT] to toggle between I2-AMPS

and %-harmonic adjustment/display



To adjust/display rectified DC Current:

Press [CURRENT] until the upper left corner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] reads “DC-AMPS”.

Turn the [MODIFY] knob, as required. This adjusts the amplitude of the half-wave rectified DC signal. Thedisplay shows the value equivalent as measured by an average responding ammeter. This is a setting onlyand is not a measured value.

The %HARM must be set to zero before adjusting the DC-AMPS. Selecting %HARM after the DC-AMPSis set will display the equivalent percent harmonic.


When this I2-HARMONIC current mode is selected, and a harmonic hasn’t been selected, the MTS-1710will automatically select 2nd-harmonic. When I2-harmonic mode is exited, the harmonic setting will returnto the value before I2-HARMONIC current mode was selected.

Due to the technique which the MTS-1710 employs to generate the I2-HARMONIC current, the VA andVB voltage outputs will be at the fundamental frequency and the VC output will be at the harmonicfrequency (for firmware versions below 7.0, all voltage outputs will be at the harmonic frequency). Inaddition, the VC output won’t be directly controllable. This means the voltage outputs probably won’t beuseful in the I2-Harmonic mode (Application Note 23). In addition, the phase angle reading (Phase) willhave no direct meaning due to this effect.

There are independent %-harmonic settings for the prefault and fault states. This allows tests of responsetime of harmonic restraint elements to be performed.

To adjust the prefault %harmonic, adjust in the prefault state. To adjust the fault %harmonic, adjust in thefault state. The prefault %harmonic setting is also used in the postfault state if postfault is enabled (ON).

For relays with harmonic restraint elements which are traditionally tested with half wave rectified AC, suchas the GE BDD 15/16 and ABB HU, see important additional information in Application Note 23.

4.6.7 I4-DC Current Mode

The I4 current mode provides DC current for testing of DC-operated targets. Up to six amps is available atup to 12V.

The DC current is output at the I4 terminals. All other current outputs (I1, I2, I3) are disabled when thismode is selected.

If simultaneous AC and DC currents are required, refer to Section 9.4.5.

4.6.8 Disabling of Voltage C in Special Current Modes

In the I1&I2 current mode, the VC channel is converted to provide I1. In the I2-harmonic current mode, thesignal for the VC channel provides the harmonic content component of the current. This means that, in thesetwo current modes, you will not be allowed to adjust voltage in these fault modes:



Φ-N C-NΦ-Φ C-A

Φ-Φ B-C3Φ (all types)2-Φ-N C-A2-Φ-N B-C

4.6.9 Fault Current Preset Feature

This feature allows setting of the FAULT current without actually applying current to the load. The faultcurrent preset feature is applicable to the I1-LOW, I1-HIGH, I2-HARMONIC, I1&I2, I3, I3-WYE, I3-PARALLEL, and I4-DC current modes.

To preset the FAULT current:

1. Select static operation mode.2. Set prefault off.3. Press and hold the [CURRENT] button.4. After half a second, a beep will sound and the fault current setting (not measurement) will appear on

the [VALUE DISPLAY].5. Increase or decrease as desired using the [MODIFY] knob. Then release the [CURRENT] button. 6. To apply the fault current, press [FAULT].

Note that, for the I1&I2 current mode, both the I1 and I2 level can be preset by toggling between the two,using the [CURRENT] button. Similarly, for the I4-DC current mode, with the MTS-1720 on, both the I4level and the AC current level can be preset by toggling between the two using the [CURRENT] button.

4.6.10 I3-PARALLEL Current Mode

The I3-PARALLEL current mode allows more than one current channel to be paralleled together, and becontrolled as if they were one current channel.

NOTE: Paralleling only can be performed with MTS-1700 systems with an I3P current modeselection on the front panel.

4.6.10.1 OUTPUT CAPABILITY.

For n current channels paralleled together:

Maximum power = n x 400 VA (for MTS-1710’s)Maximum power = n x 1000 (for MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 systems)

3Maximum current = n x 30 ArmsMaximum voltage = 44 Vrms

For one MTS-1710 + MTS-1720, three current channels are available.



The resulting output is:

Maximum power = 1000 VAMaximum current = 90 ArmsMaximum voltage = 44 Vrms

4.6.10.2 SELECTING I3-PARALLEL CURRENT MODE.

I3-PARALLEL current mode can be activated by selecting I3P with the [CURRENT MODE] selectorswitch on the front panel, or by sending IMD9 command via the RS-232C interface.

If a MTS-1720 isn’t being used, the I3P selection will default to I3 current mode. Paralleling still can beperformed with a second MTS-1710.

4.6.10.3 PARALLELING WITH ONE MTS-1710, PLUS ONE MTS-1720.

In this configuration, up to 90Amax, 1000VA max, 44Vrms max single-phase can be obtained.

FIGURE 4.17 PARALLELING WITH (1) MTS-1710 + (1) MTS-1720

For current paralleling:

1. Select I3-PARALLEL current mode on the MTS-1710.

2. Connect the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 current outputs, as shown in the diagram above. Operation in thismode is in effect identical to I1-HIGH current mode, except for the fact that the current is obtained bya parallel connection to three output terminals.

LOAD

Select I3P (PARALLEL) current mode



4.6.10.4 PARALLELING OF TWO MTS-1710s.

In this case, I3-PARALLEL current mode doesn’t have to be selected to parallel current outputs since aMTS-1720 isn’t being used.

Up to 60Amax, 800VA max, 44Vrms max single-phase can be obtained.

4.6.10.4.1 Single phase load

FIGURE 4.18 PARALLELING WITH TWO MTS-1710s


1 Connect the multi-system synchronization cable at the rear, as shown in Figure 4.25.2 Select I1-LOW current mode on both MTS-1710s.3 Connect the MTS-1710 current outputs, as shown in the diagram above.4 To synchronize the fault initiation/termination, connect the start/stop trigger inputs, as shown.5 Set the current amplitude and phase angle on each MTS-1710 individually (normally set to the

same on both). The current through the load will be the vectorial sum of the two currents.

I1-LOW I1-LOW

TRIP

LOAD

Multi-systemsync connection

(rear)

Note: Select I1-LOW current mode on both MTS-1710 systems



4.6.10.4.2 Three phase connection

This connection is for three-phase testing with a single phase current (up to 60Amax, 800VA max, 44Vrmsmax), using a three-phase, four-wire connection.

FIGURE 4.19 PARALLELING FOR A THREE-PHASE LOAD


1. Connect the multi-system synchronization cable at the rear, as shown in Figure 4.25.

2. Select I3 current mode, and select the same fault type and phase on both MTS-1710s.

3. Connect the MTS-1710 current outputs, as shown in the diagram above.

4. To synchronize the fault initiation/termination, connect the start/stop trigger inputs, as shown.

5. Set the current amplitude and phase angle on each MTS-1710/1720 system individually (normally setto the same on both). The current through each phase of the load will be the vectorial sum of theparalleled currents.

TRIP

THREE-PHASE RELAY

I3


(rear)

Note: Select I3 current mode on both MTS-1710 systems

IN IC IB IA



4.6.10.5 PARALLELING OF TWO (MTS-1710 + MTS-1720) SYSTEMS.

4.6.10.5.1 Single phase high current

In this configuration, up to 180Amax, 2000VA max, 44 Vrms max single-phase can be obtained.

FIGURE 4.20 PARALLELING OF TWO (MTS-1710 + MTS-1720) SYSTEMS



2. Select I3-PARALLEL current mode on both MTS-1710s.

3. Connect the MTS-1710 + MTS-1710 current outputs, as shown in the diagram above.


5. Set the current amplitude and phase angle on each MTS-1710/1720 system individually (normally setto the same on both). The current through the load will be the vectorial sum of the six paralleled currents.

TRIPLOAD


(rear)

Note: Select I3P (PARALLEL) current mode on both MTS-1710 systems

TRIP



4.6.10.5.2 Three phase high current

In this configuration, three-phase at up to 60Amax, 800VA max, 44 Vrms max per phase can be obtained.

FIGURE 4.21 THREE-PHASE HIGH CURRENT PARALLEL CONNECTION



2. Select I3-WYE current mode on both MTS-1710s.




TRIP

THREE-PHASE RELAY

I3


(rear)

Note: Select I3 current mode on both MTS-1710 systems

IN IC IB IA



4.6.10.6 PARALLELING MORE THAN TWO (MTS-1710 + MTS-1720) SYSTEMS.

Higher currents and higher VA output can be obtained by simply connecting more MTS-1710 + MTS-1720systems together. The MTS-1720 systems are optional.

NOTE: External transient protection is required when paralleling together more than three MTS-1700systems. Please contact Manta Test Systems Technical Support for more details.

4.6.10.6.1 Single phase high current

FIGURE 4.22 PARALLELING MORE THAN TWO (MTS-1710 + MTS-1720) SYSTEMS SINGLE PHASE LOAD



2. Select I3-PARALLEL current mode on all MTS-1710s.



5. Set the current amplitude and phase angle on each MTS-1710/1720 system individually (normally set to the same on both). The current through the load will be the vectorial sum of the paralleled currents.

TRIPLOAD


(rear)

Note: Select I3P (PARALLEL) current mode on all MTS-1710 systems


(rear)

To next MTS-1700 system

I3-PARALLEL



4.6.10.6.2 Three phase high current

FIGURE 4.23 PARALLELING MORE THAN TWO (MTS-1710 + MTS-1720) SYSTEMS THREE PHASE LOAD



2. Select I3-WYE current mode and the same fault type/phase on all MTS-1710s.




TRIP

THREE-PHASE RELAY

I3-PARALLEL


(rear)

Note: Select I3-WYE current mode on all MTS-1710 systems

IN IC IB IA


(rear)

To next MTS-1700 system



4.6.10.7 SETTING AND DISPLAYING CURRENT IN THE I3-PARALLEL CURRENT MODE.

When I3-PARALLEL current mode is selected, the IA, IB and IC channels of the I3 current output are set tothe same absolute phase angle and equal amplitudes.

To set the fault value:

1. Select STATIC operation mode.

2. Press and hold [FAULT], or apply a short circuit on the external start trigger contact inputs.

3. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the total current output.

4. Release the [FAULT] button, and remove any short circuit on the external start trigger contactinputs.

To set the postfault value:

1. Select STATIC operation mode.

2. Turn [POSTFAULT] on.

3. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the total current output.

To set the angle between the current and the voltage:

If paralleling more than one system together, see also Section 4.10.4.

4.6.10.8 FAULT CURRENT PRESET IN THE I3-PARALLEL CURRENT MODE.

Each channel will be set to one-third of the preset value. For example, if only two channels are paralleledtogether, only two-thirds of the preset value will be obtained.

4.6.10.9 IMPEDANCE AND POWER DISPLAY IN I3-PARALLEL CURRENT MODE.

Impedance and power displays (see Sections 5.10.3.1, 5.10.4) will use the summed current measurement(IA+IB+IC) to compute and measure impedance and power.

4.6.10.10 PHASOR TABLE COMMAND AND MTS-2100 OPERATION IN I3-PARALLEL CUR-RENT MODE.

In I3-PARALLEL current mode, the PHT command returns the summed current measurement (IA+IB+IC)in prefault and fault states, and the summed current setting in postfault state as the value for I3.

The IA+IB+IC summed current is treated as a single high current. This is displayed accordingly as a singlecurrent in the MTS-2100 program.



4.6.10.11 DISABLED FUNCTIONS IN I3-PARALLEL CURRENT MODE.

Individual current phase angle adjustment is disabled in I3-PARALLEL current mode since the phaseangles of all currents being paralleled should be the same for parallel operation.

Calibration functions are also disabled in I3-PARALLEL current mode since there’s no calibrationnecessary for current in this current mode.

4.7 FAULT MODES

The fault mode selects the type of fault to be simulated. The fault mode is a combination of the FAULTPHASE and FAULT TYPE selections.

The fault mode controls also are used to select the voltage(s) to be measured, displayed, adjusted, and to beused in phase angle measurements. In the I3 current mode, the fault mode also sets the current path from the[I3 OUTPUT]. In I3-WYE current mode, the fault mode also controls the three-phase current (see Sections9.4.1 and 9.4.2).

The fault mode selector simplifies voltage adjustment by allowing simultaneous adjustment of one or morevoltages, and automatic selection and display of the voltage of interest.

FIGURE 4.24 VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT IN VARIOUS FAULT MODES

C

A'A

C

B

Phase-to-Neutral Phase-to-Phase

C'

B'

A'A

C

B B

C

A

B'

C'

B

C

A A'

B'

C'

Two-Phaseto-Neutral

Three-Phase(0-0)

Three-Phase(0-N)

C'A'

A

C

B



4.7.1 Φ-N Fault Type

The Φ-N fault type allows display and adjustment of any single Φ-N voltage, and allows simulation ofsingle phase faults. This fault type should be selected to set the nominal Φ-N voltages.

The prefault settings of VAN, VBN and VCN set in Φ-N fault type determine the maximum voltages thatcan be obtained in the Φ-Φ and 3Φ fault types. These settings are known as nominal Φ-N voltages.

The MTS-1710 default settings for the prefault Φ-N voltages is 69.3V for all phases.

Once the fault, (and postfault, if desired) Φ-N voltages is set, it can be applied to any desired phase (A-N,B-N, or C-N) by changing the [FAULT PHASE] selector.

4.7.2 Φ-Φ Fault Type

The Φ-Φ fault type allows collapsing of a phase-to-phase voltage from the nominal value. When this faulttype is selected, turning the [MODIFY] knob simultaneously changes the amplitude and phase of twoselected Φ-N voltages, resulting in a change of the Φ-Φ voltage.

Once the prefault, fault (and postfault, if desired) voltages are set, they can be applied to any two desiredphase (A-B, B-C, C-A) by changing the [FAULT PHASE] selector.

4.7.3 3Φ-(Φ-Φ) Fault Type

The 3Φ-(Φ-Φ) fault type allows collapsing of the entire 3Φ voltage triangle from the nominal Φ-Nvoltages. If I3 current mode is selected, the current path will be the Φ-Φ path selected by the [FAULTPHASE] selector.

When this fault type is selected, turning the [MODIFY] knob simultaneously changes the amplitude of allthree phases of voltage. This allows simulation of three phase faults. The (Φ-Φ) description indicates that the voltage being measured and displayed is a Φ-Φ voltage, althoughall three voltages are being varied simultaneously. Any Φ-Φ voltage (A-B, B-C, C-A) can be monitored bychanging the [FAULT PHASE] selector.

4.7.4 3Φ-(Φ-N) Fault Type

The 3Φ-(Φ-N) fault type is the same as the 3Φ-(Φ-Φ) fault type, except that the voltage being monitored isany of the Φ-N voltages.

Any Φ-N voltage (A-N, B-N, C-N) can be monitored by changing the [FAULT PHASE] selector. Inaddition, if I3 current mode is selected, the current path will be a Φ-N path versus a Φ-Φ path for 3Φ-(Φ-Φ)fault types.

4.7.5 2Φ-N Fault Type

The 2Φ-N fault type simulates 2Φ-N faults by allowing adjustment of any two Φ-N voltagessimultaneously.



The Φ-N amplitudes of the two selected phases are set to the same value, and adjusted simultaneously. The displayed voltage is the phase-to-phase voltage across the two faulting phases. Once the prefault, fault (and postfault, if desired) voltages are set, they can be applied to any two desiredphases (A-B-N, B-C-N, C-A-N) by changing the [FAULT PHASE] selector.

4.7.6 Fault Simulation Examples

The following examples demonstrate use of the fault mode controls and the voltage adjustment together forsimulating various types of faults.

4.7.6.1 SINGLE-PHASE-TO-GROUND FAULT EXAMPLE.

To simulate a single phase fault, set up the following voltages:

Fault mode Fault state Voltage Φ-N A-N Prefault 70V Φ-N B-N Prefault 70V Φ-N C-N Prefault 70V Φ-N A-N Fault 30V

Once the fault Φ-N voltage of 30V is set, it can be applied to any desired phase (A-N, B-N, or C-N) bychanging the [FAULT PHASE] selector.

4.7.6.2 SINGLE-PHASE OVERVOLTAGE EXAMPLE.

To simulate a single phase overvoltage fault, set up the following voltages:

Fault mode Fault state VoltageΦ-N A-N Prefault 70V Φ-N B-N Prefault 70V Φ-N C-N Prefault 70V Φ-N A-N Fault 95V

Once the fault Φ-N voltage of 95V is set, it can be applied to any desired phase (A-N, B-N, or C-N) bychanging the [FAULT PHASE] selector.

4.7.6.3 PHASE-TO-PHASE FAULT EXAMPLE.

To simulate a phase-to-phase fault, set up the following voltages:

Fault mode Fault state Voltage Φ-N A-N Prefault 70V Φ-N B-N Prefault 70V Φ-N C-N Prefault 70V Φ-Φ B-C Prefault 120V Φ-Φ B-C Fault 40V



Once the fault Φ-Φ voltage of 40V is set, it can be applied to any desired phase (A-B, B-C, or C-A) bychanging the [FAULT PHASE] selector. In addition, if I3 current mode is selected, the current path will be a Φ-Φ path.

4.7.6.4 THREE-PHASE-TO-GROUND FAULT EXAMPLE.

To simulate a three-phase-to-ground fault, set up the following voltages:

Fault mode Fault state Voltage Φ-N A-N Prefault 70V Φ-N B-N Prefault 70V Φ-N C-N Prefault 70V 3Φ-(Φ-Φ) B-C Prefault 120V 3Φ-(Φ-Φ) B-C Fault 10V

4.7.6.5 THREE-PHASE-OVERVOLTAGE FAULT EXAMPLE.

To simulate a three-phase-overvoltage fault, set up the following voltages:

Fault mode Fault state Voltage Φ-N A-N Prefault 100V <-overvoltage value Φ-N B-N Prefault 70V Φ-N C-N Prefault 70V 3Φ-(Φ-Φ) B-C Prefault 120V <-nominal (prefault) voltage 3Φ-(Φ-Φ) B-C Fault 10V 4.7.6.6 TWO-PHASE-TO-GROUND FAULT EXAMPLE.

To simulate a two-phase-to-ground fault, set up the following voltages:

Fault mode Fault state Voltage Φ-N A-N Prefault 70V Φ-N B-N Prefault 70V Φ-N C-N Prefault 70V 2Φ-N C-A Prefault 120V 2Φ-N C-A Fault 55V

Once the fault 2Φ-N voltage of 55V is set, it can be applied to any desired phase (A-B-N, B-C-N, or C-A-N) by changing the [FAULT PHASE] selector.

4.7.7 Voltage Adjustment with Unbalanced Systems

Voltage adjustments in the Φ-Φ fault types will collapse the appropriate Φ-Φ voltage to simulate a trueΦ-Φ fault, even if the prefault Φ-N voltages are unbalanced. This is shown in Figure 4.26.

Similarly, for 3Φ fault types, 3Φ voltage adjust will be performed to keep the percentage voltage collapseon all three phases equal, even if the prefault Φ-N voltages are unbalanced.



FIGURE 4.25 VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT WITH UNBALANCED SYSTEMS

4.8 PHASE ANGLE CONTROL

4.8.1 Basic Adjustments

Interpreting the phase angle display:

Pressing the [PHASE] button ([PHASE V-I] button on older instruments) displays the phase angle betweenthe voltage being monitored and the current, except in a few special cases.

The voltage being monitored is determined by the FAULT MODE controls, and may be a Φ-N or a Φ-Φvoltage. This is displayed in the lower left corner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY].

If V-leads-I phase angle measurement reference is selected (the factory default setting), indicated by“DEG:V-I” in the upper left corner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY], then the phase angle is the numberof degrees by which the voltage leads the current. If I-leads-V phase angle measurement reference isselected (i.e. the default), indicated by “DEG:I-V” in the upper left corner of the [MODE/MENUDISPLAY], then the phase angle is the number of degrees by which the current leads the voltage.

Adjusting the phase angle:

When the [MODIFY] knob is turned, the phase angle between the current, and all three voltage phases, ischanged. The interphase angle between the voltages remains fixed.

Changing the display mode:

Pressing the [PHASE] button toggles between the 0-360 and 0-±180 display modes.

4.8.2 Interpretation of Phase Angle Display and Fault Mode Selection

This section assumes that V-leads-I phase angle measurement reference is selected. If I-leads-V phase anglemeasurement is selected, then the display values will be 360, minus the value shown.

C'

B

A'A

C

Three-Phase

B

C

AA'

B'

C'

Phase-to-Phase



4.8.2.1 IN I1-LOW, I1-HIGH & I3 CURRENT MODES.

When the MTS-1710 is first turned on, the default phase angle relationships are as shown below (assumingthat A-N/Φ-N fault mode is selected).

In these examples, the current mode is set to I3 which causes the current to be routed to the appropriate [I3OUTPUT] terminals. These diagrams are still applicable for I1-LOW and I1-HIGH current modes.

0.0 DEG:V-I IST LINE

A-N Φ-N I3

Next, if the phase angle is adjusted to 70°, by pressing [PHASE] and turning [MODIFY], the phase of thecurrent is shifted, and the displays and phase angle relationships appear as follows:

70.0

DEG:V-i IST LINE

A-N Φ-N I3

Recall that the phase angle display shows the phase between the selected fault voltage (indicated in thelower left corner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY]), and the current. Next, if the [FAULT PHASE] ischanged to B-N, note that the current is rotated to maintain the phase angle between the faulting phase, andthe current the same. In addition, in I3 current mode, the current will be routed to the [I3 OUTPUT] B andN terminals.

70.0

DEG:V-I IST LINE

B-N Φ-N I3

Similarly, if the [FAULT PHASE] is changed to C-A/Φ-Φ, the current is rotated to maintain the phaseangle between VCA and the current at 70°.

VA

VB

VC

I

I

VC

VB

VA

0

VA

VB

VC

I

0



70.0

DEG:V-I IST LINE

C-A Φ-Φ I3

4.8.2.2 I3-WYE CURRENT MODE. See Section 9.4.4.

4.8.3 Adjusting Prefault, Fault and Postfault Phase Angle

When adjusting phase angle in the fault state and postfault state, the phase angle relative to the prefaultsetting is adjusted. This simplifies operation for most testing where phase angle between voltage and currentdoesn’t change.

Example:

a) Select static operation mode and, with prefault on, adjust phase angle to 10°. Pressing [FAULT] or[POSTFAULT], you should also observe that the phase angle is 10° (remember to have adequatecurrent to get a reading).

b) Press and hold in the [FAULT] button. Note that the phase angle is 10° (same as prefault). Adjust thephase angle to 20°. Then release the [FAULT] button.

c) Press [POSTFAULT] on (in static mode). Note that the phase angle is 10° (same as prefault). Adjust thephase angle to 30°. You have now set prefault phase angle=10°, fault phase angle=20°, postfault phaseangle=30°.

d) Press [PREFAULT] on to return to prefault. Adjust the phase angle to 90°. e) Changing to the fault state and postfault state, you’ll find that the fault phase=100°, and postfault phase

angle=110. This means that the relative phase angle between (fault and prefault) and (fault and postfault)have not changed.

The implication of this is, if phase angle isn’t required to dynamically change between the voltage and thecurrent, you only need to set the phase in prefault state. The phase in fault and postfault states will be thesame (i.e. relative values=0). This prevents you from having to set both fault and postfault phase angle tothe proper value every time the prefault phase is changed.

4.8.4 Special Notes

The phase angle measurement has a response time of approx 20ms (100ms when MTS-1720 used in I3-WYE current mode). When measuring phase angle in dynamic tests, be aware that the reading may not beaccurate if the operate time of the relay is less than this minimum time.

The fault phase angle can be checked before or after a dynamic test by selecting static operation mode,selecting [PHASE], and pressing [FAULT].

0I

VC

VB

VA

VCA



4.9 MONITOR VOLTAGE

Note: This feature is on older MTS-1710 systems only.

When changing from one fault phase or mode to another, the [VOLTAGE MONITOR] terminals allow foran external voltmeter to monitor the faulting voltage without manually switching connections. The voltageof interest during the fault is switched to these terminals. This is intended to connect to a voltmeter only--not for an auxiliary power output.

The monitor voltage, based upon the fault phase selection, is shown in the following table:

Note: Phase measurements will always measure the phase between the monitor voltage and the current.

4.10 FREQUENCY CONTROL

4.10.1 Frequency Reference Modes

The MTS-1710 has three frequency reference modes: line, variable, and 25Hz. For the special 25Hzreference mode, see Section 5.13.

4.10.1.1 LINE FREQUENCY REFERENCE MODE.

In this mode, the output voltages and currents are phase and frequency locked to the input AC line. Thisallows the MTS-1710 to be used along with other test sources which are also synchronized to the input ACline.

To select the line frequency reference mode:

Press the [FREQ] button until “LINE”, “2nd-HARM”, “3rd-HARM” etc. is indicated in the upper rightcorner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY].

“LINE” indicates that the outputs are phase and frequency locked to the input AC line. “nth-HARM”indicates that the outputs are phase locked to, and are the nth harmonic, of the input AC line.

In line frequency reference mode, the actual output frequency is measured from the voltage beingmonitored. This means that the voltage output must be a few volts to read a frequency value in Hz.

FAULT PHASE VOLTAGE MONITOR OUTPUT

A-N Voltage A-N

B-N Voltage B-N

C-N Voltage C-N

A-B Voltage A-B

B-C Voltage B-C

C-A Voltage C-A



For example, if the AC line input is 60Hz, and 2nd-harmonic is selected, the frequency display should read120.0Hz.

4.10.1.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY REFERENCE MODE.

In this mode, the output voltages and currents are derived from an internal crystal-controlled reference. Thisallows the frequency to be varied between 40Hz to 800Hz for testing frequency-operated relays.

To select the variable frequency reference mode:

Press the [FREQ] button until an actual frequency value in Hz is indicated in the upper right corner of the[MODE/MENU DISPLAY].

To adjust the frequency:

Press [FREQ], and turn the [MODIFY] knob.

The present frequency is displayed on the [VALUE DISPLAY], and on the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY].The prefault, fault, and postfault frequency can be set independently.

4.10.2 Harmonic Generation

Harmonics of the line frequency may be generated by turning the [MODIFY] knob when frequency modifyis selected, and when the frequency reference is the AC line. The upper right corner of the [MODE/MENUDISPLAY] annunciates the selected harmonic number.

Note that the phase adjustment resolution is proportional to the harmonic number. The normal 0.25° phaseresolution is reduced to 0.5° for the 2nd-harmonic range; 0.75° for the 3rd-harmonic range; etc.

4.10.3 Dynamic Frequency Testing

In variable frequency reference mode, the frequency in prefault, fault and postfault states can be setindependently. The only restriction is all three settings must be in the same harmonic range.

Some special considerations should be taken into account when the frequency is stepped from a prefaultvalue to a fault value. This is often performed to test frequency relays.

The MTS-1710 will instantaneously change the frequency from the prefault setting to the fault setting at thezero crossing of the voltage being monitored. The voltage may be a Φ-N or a Φ-Φ voltage.

If internal timer start mode is selected (see Section 5.3.1), the timer will be synchronized to start at themoment when the frequency instantaneously changes. This ensures proper timing measurements whenperforming this type of test.

The change from prefault to fault state may have occurred up to one cycle before this moment due to thesynchronization to the zero crossing of the voltage.



4.10.4 Multi-System Synchronization

This feature provides the capability for synchronizing the frequency and phase angle of two or more MTS-1700 systems.

The frequency of both systems will be controlled by the first MTS-1710 (designated the “master”).

4.10.4.1 CONNECTION METHOD.

FIGURE 4.26 MULTI-SYSTEM SYNC CONNECTION (TWO MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 SYSTEMS)

FIGURE 4.27 MULTI-SYSTEM SYNC CONNECTION (TWO MTS-1710s ONLY)

Connect the multi-system synchronization cable at the rear, as shown in Figure 4.27 or 4.28.

MASTER SYSTEMSLAVE SYSTEM

AU X O UT PUTS

AU X INPU TS

MT S-17 50 MT S-17 50

CO M 3 SLAVE CU RR ENT

CO M 2 RS- 232C

CO M 1 RS- 232C

MA INS

F 15A

SL AVE C UR RENT IN



SIG NA L IN PUT

S

AU X O UT PUTS

AU X INPU TS

CO M 3 SLAVE CU RR ENT

CO M 2 RS- 232C

CO M 1 RS- 232C

MA INS

F 15A

SL AVE C UR RENT IN



SIG NA L IN PUT

MTS-1710 to MTS-1710 Synchronization cable(Manta Test Systems part # 12-2539-00)

S M

0

VA

VB

VC

I

VBC

MASTER SYSTEMSLAVE SYSTEM

AUX O UTPUTS

AUX INPUTS

COM 3 SL AVE CURRENT

COM 2 RS- 232C

COM 1 RS- 232C

MAINS

F15A

SLAVE CURRENT IN



SIGNAL INPUT

M

S

Current output cable

AUX O UTPUTS

AUX INPUTS

COM 3 SL AVE CURRENT

COM 2 RS- 232C

COM 1 RS- 232C

MAINS

F15A

SLAVE CURRENT IN



SIGNAL INPUT

MTS-1750MTS-1750

M

S

Current output cable

DB-9 to DB-9 straight through connected cablepin 1 to pin 1, pin 2 to pin 2, etc.

(Manta Test Systems part # 12-2810-00)

MTS-1710 to MTS-1720 Connection Cable(Manta Test Systems part # 12-2800-00)

To nextMTS-1700

system



4.10.4.2 CONTROL OF FREQUENCY AND PHASE ANGLE WHEN USING MULTI-SYSTEMSYNCHRONIZATION.

The frequency of both systems will be controlled by the first MTS-1710 (designated the “master”). Themaster is designated strictly by how the rear interconnecting communication cable is connected. Refer toFigures 4.27 and 4.28 to determine which system will be the master.

The frequency of the slave system (if set to LINE frequency reference mode) will now follow that of themaster. To verify this:

1. Turn on both MTS-1700 systems.2. Press [FREQ], as required, to select LINE frequency reference mode on the slave MTS-1710 system.3. Select VARIABLE frequency reference mode on the master MTS-1710 system.4. Turn [PREFAULT] ON (on both MTS-1710s).5. Vary the frequency of the master MTS-1710, and the frequency on the slave MTS-1710 should follow

the master.

The frequency in prefault, fault and postfault state of the slave system(s) will follow the frequency set onthe master system in each state respectively. If fault playback mode is activated, the sample rate of the slavesystem(s) will follow the sample rate set on the master system.

The phase angle display shown when [PHASE] is pressed is normally the phase angle between the selectedcurrent and voltage (on the same system). As a result, when paralleling the current outputs on multiple MTS-1700 systems (as described in Section 4.6.10), the phase angle settings on the master and slave systemsshould be the same.

If there are basically two (or more) independent three-phase systems (synchronized in frequency), the phaseangle on the master and slave systems can be set independently. The phase angle display shown when[PHASE] is pressed is normally the phase angle between the selected current and voltage (on the samesystem). This means that, to check the absolute phase angle settings, use the displays in the individual phaseadjustment menus, described in Section 5.12.2.1.

If the absolute phase angle of two outputs on two different systems are the same, they will be in phase. Thephase angle settings also can be changed in individual phase adjustment mode (see Sections 5.12.2.1 and6.7).



4.10.4.3 USE OF THE MULTI-SYSTEM SYNC CAPABILITY FOR TESTING PILOT-WIRE RELAY SYSTEMS.

Pilot wire relay systems, or communications-based relay schemes, can be laboratory tested using the multi-system sync capability of the MTS-1700 system.

FIGURE 4.28 PILOT WIRE RELAY TEST (DIRECT CONNECTION)

The MTS-1730 can be used for channel delay simulation, as shown in Figure 4.27.

For example, to simulate a 10ms channel delay, the following commands should be sent to the MTS-1730:

DIO,OCD1,1,10,1,1DIO,OCD0,1,10,0,1

TRIP TRIP

RELAY 1 RELAY 2

Voltage Voltage

Current Current

Note: Select I3-WYE current mode on both MTS-1710 systems


(rear)

Tx Rx Tx Rx+ - + - + - + -

- -DCV DCV+ +DCV DCV ++

I3-WYE I3-WYE



FIGURE 4.29 PILOT WIRE RELAY TEST (SIMULATED CHANNEL DELAY)

4.10.5 External Frequency Reference

This feature provides the capability for synchronizing the frequency and phase angle to an external signal(e.g. signal generator).

To use this feature, connect a ±5V to ±15V (or 0 to +5V or 0 to +15V) 25-75Hz signal to the “ExternalSync+” and “External Sync-” pins of the external amp signal input connector.

A unipolar or bipolar signal may be used. Set frequency reference mode to “LINE”.

The use of this feature can be combined to be used with the multi-system sync feature.

DCV

+ - + -

D C/AC- +

D C/AC- +

1 0-3 00 V

1 0-3 00 V

D C/AC- +

D C/AC- +

1 0-3 00 V

1 0-30 0 V

D C/AC- +

D C/AC- +

1 0-3 00 V

1 0-30 0 V

D C/AC- +

D C/AC- +

1 0-3 00 V

1 0-30 0 V

POWER

0 4 8 12

1 5 9 13

2 6 10 14

3 7 11 15

0 4 8 12

1 5 9 13

2 6 10 14

3 7 11 15

IN PUTS

OUTPUTS

OUTPUTINPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUTINPUTINPUTINPUT

0 -3 0 0 V A C/D C

300 mA

I N PU T/O U TPU T

CO N D I TI ON E R

MTS- 1730

SI G N A L

0 -3 0 0 V A C/D C

300 mA

0 -3 0 0 V A C/D C

300 mA0 -3 0 0 V A C/D C

300 mA

-

TRIP TRIP

RELAY 1 RELAY 2

Tx Rx Tx Rx

Voltage Voltage

Current Current

+ - + -

-DCV DCV

D C/AC- +

D C/AC- +

1 0-3 00 V

1 0-3 00 V

D C/AC- +

D C/AC- +

1 0-3 00 V

1 0-30 0 V

D C/AC- +

D C/AC- +

1 0-3 00 V

1 0-30 0 V

D C/AC- +

D C/AC- +

1 0-3 00 V

1 0-30 0 V

POWER

0 4 8 12

1 5 9 13

2 6 10 14

3 7 11 15

0 4 8 12

1 5 9 13

2 6 10 14

3 7 11 15

IN PUTS

OUTPUTS


0 -3 0 0 V A C/D C

300 mA

I N PU T/O U TPU T

CO N D I TI ON E R

MTS- 1730

SI G N A L

0 -3 0 0 V A C/D C

300 mA

0 -3 0 0 V A C/D C

300 mA0 -3 0 0 V A C/D C

300 mA

D C/AC- +

D C/AC- +

1 0-3 00 V

1 0-3 00 V

D C/AC- +

D C/AC- +

1 0-3 00 V

1 0-30 0 V

D C/AC- +

D C/AC- +

1 0-3 00 V

1 0-30 0 V

D C/AC- +

D C/AC- +

1 0-3 00 V

1 0-30 0 V

POWER

0 4 8 12

1 5 9 13

2 6 10 14

3 7 11 15

0 4 8 12

1 5 9 13

2 6 10 14

3 7 11 15

IN PUTS

OUTPUTS


0 -3 0 0 V A C/D C

300 mA

I N PU T/O U TPU T

CO N D I TI ON E R

MTS- 1730

SI G N A L

0 -3 0 0 V A C/D C

300 mA

0 -3 0 0 V A C/D C

300 mA0 -3 0 0 V A C/D C

300 mA

+

-

DCV+

Note: Select I3-WYE current mode on both MTS-1710 systems


(rear)



FIGURE 4.30 EXTERNAL AMP SIGNAL INPUT CONNECTOR

Pin # Signal1 Va input2 Signal Ground3 Vb input4 Vc input5 Ia input6 External Sync +7 External Sync -

4.11 AUDIBLE TONE

The audible tone is used for multiple purposes:

1. To indicate relay operation

This function can be enabled/disabled by pressing the [TONE] button.

It’s enabled when a long beep sounds after pressing the [TONE] button. It’s disabled when a short beepsounds after pressing the [TONE] button.

When enabled, and when a closed contact or a voltage (above 10V) is sensed on the appropriate[EXTERNAL STOP] trigger inputs, the tone will be activated. The tone will persist until the triggeringsource is removed.

This feature is commonly used in static operation mode for manual pickup checks.

2. To indicate entry into the postfault state

As with the previous function, this function can be enabled/disabled by pressing the [TONE] button.

When enabled, and when the MTS-1710 enters the postfault state, a short beep occurs to indicate completionof a dynamic test. Of course, this only occurs in dynamic operation mode.

Pin 6

Pin 1Pin 4 Pin 2

Pin 7

Pin 3Pin 5

External Amp Signal Input ConnectorAs viewed from rear panel of the instrument



3. To provide user action feedback

A short beep provides pushbutton feedback whenever a pushbutton action changes some mode or state. Abeep doesn’t sound when a pushbutton action results in no changes.

This feature is always enabled and isn’t affected by the [TONE] button activation.

4. To indicate warnings

A one hertz pulsing tone, along with warning annunciators (see Section 4.13), indicates overload of one ormore outputs.

This warning tone must be enabled by using the front panel menu. (See Section 5.9).

4.12 ADJUSTING POSTFAULT VALUES

To simulate certain conditions, such as auto-reclosing or multiple stage faults, it may be necessary to setpostfault values of current, voltage, phase and frequency.

To set postfault values:

Select static operation mode, and press the [POSTFAULT] button, until postfault light is on. Set the desired postfault V, I, phase (and frequency if using variable frequency reference mode).

To use these postfault settings in a dynamic test:

Select dynamic mode. Turn postfault on to apply programmed postfault values in postfault state.

Note that, when a dynamic test is performed and a stop trigger occurs, the measured values will be frozenat the time of the stop trigger. These will be fault values and not the postfault values which are actually beingoutput in the postfault state.

Note that separate prefault, fault and postfault values are not available for the current in I2-harmonic, I4-DCand I1&I2 current modes.

4.13 WARNING ANNUNCIATORS

Clipping overload, and overtemperature warnings are annunciated on the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY].When any of these conditions are present, the display will alternate between the normal display and thewarning display. All warnings will continue to flash until the causing condition has been removed.



The following warning annunciators may be triggered:

Note that multiple overloads may be annunciated. For example, “OVERLOAD: Vac” will indicate overloadon both Va and Vb.

An audible warning tone also can be activated to alert these conditions. See Section 5.9.

If overload warnings persist for more than 12 seconds, the warning tone will be forced “on” to alert the user.If the warnings persist for 20 seconds, the MTS-1710 (and MTS-1720, if used) will shut off all poweroutputs, and the following message will be blinked on the display:

When this occurs, the outputs can be restored by pressing the [STOP/RESET] button (or by the RS-232“RES” command). However, all amplitude settings will be forced to zero. This will prevent immediate re-entry into an overload condition, if remedial action wasn’t taken.

Annunciator Cause Required action

Va Clipping overload of Va output Decrease Va voltage or decrease loading on Va output

Vb Clipping overload of Vb output Decrease Vb voltage or decrease loading on Vb output

Vc Clipping overload of Vc output Decrease Vc voltage or decrease loading on Vc output

I Clipping overload of current output in I1, I3 or I4 output

Decrease current/lower the load impedance

I1 Clipping overload of I1 output in I1&I2 current mode

Decrease I1 current/lower the load impedance on the I1 output

I2 Clipping overload of I2 output in I1&I2 or I2-HARMONIC current

modes

Decrease I2 current/lower the load impedance on the I2 output

Ia Clipping overload of Ia output in I3-WYE current mode

Decrease Ia current/lower the load impedance on the Ia output

Ib Clipping overload of Ib output in I3-WYE current mode

Decrease Ib current/lower the load impedance on the Ib output

Ic Clipping overload of Ic output in I3-WYE current mode

Decrease Ic current/lower the load impedance on the Ic output

OVERTEMP Thermal overload of amplifier system

Set voltage and current outputs off to allow system to cool

* WARNING: OVERLOAD SHUTDOWN PRESS RESET



4.14 DC VOLTAGE CONTROL

This section only applies to units with the DC Voltage output option.

DC voltage is available at the [DC VOLTS] terminals of the front panel. This output may be live (dependingupon the setting) whenever the MTS-1710 is on since it’s intended to supply power to solid state relaysunder test. A maximum of 100W and 300V is available.

Displaying the DC voltage level:

Press the [VOLTAGE] button once or twice (as required) to activate the DC voltage display.

The units annunciator should read “DCVolts” in the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY], as illustrated below:

48.0

DCVolts IST LINE

B-N Φ-N I3

Press the [VOLTAGE] button again to return to the AC voltage display. To prevent accidental adjustmentof the DC voltage, adjustments can only be made through the menu.

Enabling the output (Enable button/LED indicator):

For units with the additional output enable button and LED indicator, the button to the left of the outputterminals enables and disables the output.

The LED colour indicates the following ranges:

LED Colour Output OFF OFF Green 24-70V Yellow 70-130V Red 130-300V

Setting standard DC voltage output levels:

Activate the menu using the [MODE/MENU] button, and select SETTINGS DC-VOLTS in the menu. The[MODE/MENU DISPLAY] will appear as shown below.

Turn the [MODIFY] knob to position the cursor over one of the OFF, 24V, 48V, 125V or 250V selections.Press [SELECT] and the selected level will be set, and the present measured output will be displayed.

Fine adjustment of the level can be performed by turning the [MODIFY] knob. Press [MODE/MENU] whendone.



CONTINUOUS-ADJUST

OFF 24v 48V 125V 250

Continuous adjustment of DC voltage output:

The DC voltage output can be varied continuously from 24V to 300V by selecting SETTINGS DC-VOLTSCONTINOUS-ADJUST in the menu. The [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] will appear as shown above.

Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the voltage. Press [MODE/MENU] or [SELECT] when done.

DC VOLTAGE OUTPUT:

48.0 VOLTs

For units with the additional output enable button and LED indicator, when the output is disabled, the valuein the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] is the setting which will be applied when the output is enabled. You’llnote that the measured value is basically zero in the [VALUE DISPLAY] if the output is disabled.

Note: The DC voltage output isn’t changed when the set defaults action is executed using the SETTINGSDEFAULT menu selection, or the RS-232 DEF command. This prevents resetting of solid staterelays during testing, which are supplied from the DC voltage output.

See Section 6.2.15 for instructions on controlling the DC voltage output via the RS-232 port.

Setting the Default DC Voltage:

The default DC voltage output on power up can be set by selecting OTHER DEFAULT DC-VOLTAGE inthe menu.

Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the voltage. Press [MODE/MENU] or [SELECT] when done.

The default setting on power-up also can be set via the RS-232 interface using the DDF# command. SeeSection 6.2.15.


ADVANCED OPERATION - Section 5

ADVANCED OPERATION

The following section describes advanced capabilities of the MTS-1710 accessible via front panel controls.Most of these capabilities are accessible via the front panel menu.

5.1 MENU OPERATION

5.1.1 Basic Usage

The menu provides access to a large number of features without adding more controls to the front panel.These features are organized in a hierarchical tree structure (see Figures 5.1 and 5.2). The tree structure canbe expanded in the future to accommodate special requirements of advanced users without major re-design.

To activate the menu:

Press the [MODE/MENU] pushbutton. This button will be lit whenever the menu is active, and mostpushbuttons, except the three menu controls, will be disabled.

The top level menu should appear in the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] as shown below.

SETTINGS OPTIONS DISP

EXEC OTHER

Selecting menu items:

To select a menu item, turn the [MODIFY] knob to move the blinking cursor over the desired selection.Press [SELECT].

If the item is a sub-menu, a new menu will be displayed. If the item is an executable function, the functionwill be performed immediately. If the item is an adjustment, the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] will show anadjustment display, such as the one below, to set a voltage ramp rate.

VOLTAGE RAMP RATE:

0.01 V/SEC

An adjustment display is indicated by a prompt followed by a colon ‘:’. To make an adjustment, turn the[MODIFY] knob, and press [SELECT] after the desired value has been reached.

When entering any such menus which display a colon “:” after a descriptor, the cursor will be positionedover the present setting or selection. An example is the “Dynamic measurement mode” menu shown below:

DYNAMIC MEAS-MODE:

AUTO RMS PEAK

If a menu item isn’t available, an appropriate error message will be displayed. Press [SELECT] or[PREVIOUS] to return to the previous menu display.



FIGURE 5.1 MTS-1710 MENU TREE

Rev

-O

Cur

rent

-Rat

ios

Impe

danc

e

V/H

z

Sto

p

Sta

rt

Ban

k

I1/I2

I2

/I1

I1-C

T

I2-C

T

I1/I2

-Slo

pe

Clo

ck

Bau

d-ra

te

Ser

v

Ver

sion

D

efau

ltM

TS

-173

0

Mea

sure

men

t G

ener

atio

n

Sav

e

Vol

tage

I1

I1

-Hig

h

I4

DC

-Vol

ts

I3V

A

VB

V

C

IA

IB

IC

VD

C_L

OW

V

DC

_HIG

H

Set

tings

Opt

ion

Dis

pE

xec

Oth

er

Def

ault

R

atio

s

Rea

ding

s

Pow

er

V/I

V

/2I

V

/ 3I

Z

1gnd

K

-fac

tor

Z

0/Z

1

Aut

o

KW

AT

T

kV

AR

k

VA

P

F

See

figu

re 5

-2

MT

S-1

710

MT

S-1

720

Z1

R1

X1

DC

-Vol

tage

P

hase

-Dis

play

Cal

ibra

tion

LE

D-T

est

Tec

hnic

al-S

uppo

rt

V-L

eads

-I

I-Le

ads-

V

|I1-I

2|/(

(I1+

I2)/

2

I2/(

(2I1

+I2

)/2)



FIGURE 5.2 MTS-1710 SETTINGS SUB-MENU TREE

Pha

se

Fre

q

Vol

tage

C

urre

nt

Initi

al

Fin

al

Rat

e D

urat

ion

Clr-

all

Clr-

allDef

ault

Tim

er

Pha

se

War

ning

F

req

Mea

s A

ux-c

ontc

t

On

Off

On

Off

Inte

rnal

-sta

rt

Ext

erna

l-sta

rt

Ena

ble

A

djus

t+

VE

(abc

)

-VE

(acb

)

Aut

o R

MS

Pea

k

Indi

vidu

al_A

dj_M

ode

Phs

_Seq

M

eas

Nor

mal

Ind

iv-C

urre

nt I

ndiv

-Vol

tage

On

Off

Pre

faul

t Fa

ult

Pos

tfaul

t

Bkr

-Adv

Syn

chro

25H

z

Off

24V

48V

125

V 2

50V

Con

tinuo

us-a

dj

Ram

pD

C-v

olts

FIA

Pos

tfau

ltM

odes

Brk

r-tim

e

Trip

-typ

e

Rec

lose

P

T

Aut

o-re

clos

e-de

lay

Rec

lose

-into

-fau

lt

Nor

mal

Hig

h-sp

eed

Fau

lt-du

ratio

n R

emot

e-en

d-tr

ip

NO

N

C

52A

5

2B

Del

ay

Per

mis

sive

U

nblo

ck

NO

N

C

52A

5

2B

AU

X_C

ON

TAC

T_1

A

UX

_CO

NTA

CT

_2

Initi

al

Fin

al

Rat

e D

urat

ion

Clr-

all

Initi

al

Fin

al

Rat

e D

urat

ion

Clr-

all

Initi

al

Fina

l R

ate

Dur

atio

n C

lr-al

l

See

sec

tion

5.12

.2.1

3-P

ole

1-P

ole

Line

-sid

e B

us-s

ide



Exiting the menu:

The [MODE/MENU] button may be pressed at any time to exit the menu.

Re-entering the previously or last visited menu screen:

Pressing [PREVIOUS] while in the menu will return you to the previous menu. Pressing the [PREVIOUS]button when not in the menu will allow you to re-enter the last visited menu screen.

5.1.2 Special Notes

Both the [FAULT] and the [STOP/RESET] button are enabled while the menu is active. This is handy fordoing tests such as response time checks, power swing, or df/dt relay elements in which some menuaccessible parameter must be adjusted between trials.

For example, checking the response time of a relay may require adjusting the “Current duration” setting viathe menu. The test can be performed without exiting the menu by pressing [FAULT], and then [STOP/RESET] to clear.

The duration can then be immediately changed for the next trial, and the test re-run by pressing [FAULT].In this manner, trials may be performed successively to find the response time.

A power swing test is similar, except that a current or voltage ramp rate is varied between tests, and a df/dtrelay test is similarly performed by varying the frequency ramp rate between tests.

5.2 RAMPING & FAULT DURATION

Simultaneous and independent ramping of the following four parameters is possible:

Frequency (in variable frequency mode)Phase angleFault voltageFault current

Refer to Figure 5.3 to see the basic ramp and duration sequences.

The start trigger causes the four parameters to instantaneously change to the initial fault values. For eachparameter, if ramping is programmed, the parameter will ramp at the programmed rate until the final valueis reached. After this, if a duration is programmed, the final value will be held for the programmed duration,after which the postfault value is output.

If a duration isn’t programmed, the final value will be held until a stop trigger occurs. Ramping only occursin dynamic operation mode. At any point in this sequence, a stop trigger may occur, forcing the outputimmediately to the postfault value.

To set ramp (initial, rate, and final) values, the MTS-1710 must be in static operation mode. Only the initialfault levels can be modified in dynamic mode--if and only if--the ramp rate has been set off.



The ranges of programmable ramp rates are:

Frequency 0.0 to 10.00 Hz/secPhase 0 to ±5000.0°/secVoltage 0 to 2000 V/sec (in Φ-N and 2Φ-N fault types)

0 to 1000 %/sec (in Φ-Φ and 3Φ fault types) Current 0 to 350.0 A/sec

5.2.1 Programming Ramp/Duration Settings

The ramp settings are programmed via the SETTINGS RAMP menu which appears as follows:

CLR-ALL PHASE FREQ.

VOLTAGE CURRENT

For ramp settings, each parameter has its own sub-menu. The CLR-ALL selection sets ramp rates and faultdurations for all parameters to OFF. (The final fault values are not cleared. However, they won’t be useduntil ramping is re-enabled).

While programming ramp values, the fault values are actually applied to the output and measured. (Noticethat the FAULT button is lit).

It’s important for the current to have the actual load connected. The MTS-1710 will apply the fault current,sense the load impedance, and determine the required voltage to drive the load. Otherwise, the voltage drivemay be too low, or the amplifier may dissipate excessive power.

Each parameter has four settings which specify its behaviour in the fault state: a fault initial value, a faultfinal value, a ramp rate, and a duration. For ramping, if the fault final value is greater than the fault initialvalue, the parameter will be ramped up. If the fault final value is less than the fault initial value, theparameter will be ramped down.



FIGURE 5.3 BASIC RAMP/DURATION SEQUENCES


V, I, f

or 0 - prefault level

- fault initial level

(c) Programmed duration

(a) No ramp or duration programmed


- prefault levelor 0V, I, f

t

t

t

t

- fault final level

ramp

V, I, f

or 0 - prefault level


(d) Programmed ramp + duration

(b) Programmed ramp



duration

durationram

p

- fault final level



FIGURE 5.4 OTHER RAMP/DURATION SEQUENCES


or 0

- postfault level


(c) Ramp only, prefault off, postfault on,

(a) fault initial level=prefault level

- fault final level


t

t

t

- fault final level

V, I, f

(b) Initial fault level > prefault level,



prefault on, postfault on

duration

stop trigger terminates ramp early

NOTES: Prefault and postfault voltage/current can be set on or offin any combination.At the end of any programmed duration, the active parameterchanges to the postfault level.

A stop trigger (i.e. entry into postfault) will terminate anyramp or duration in progress and outputs will change topostfault levels.

1.

2.

3.

- postfault level

- postfault level



5.2.2 Voltage Ramp & Fault Duration

Voltage ramping is available for all fault modes.

In Φ-N and 2Φ-N fault types, the voltage ramp rate is programmed directly in volts/second. In Φ-Φ and 3Φ fault types, the voltage ramp rate is programmed in percentage of nominal voltage per second (%/sec).

For example, if one desires to collapse the voltage from nominal to zero in 1 second, a ramp rate of 100%/sec should be programmed. Note that, for Φ-Φ fault types, the percentage ramp rate setting is onlyapproximate.

Note that voltage ramping and fault duration is disabled if I1&I2 or I2-HARMONIC current mode has beenselected (see Section 4.6.8).

5.2.3 Current Ramping & Fault Duration

Current ramping and fault duration is only available for I1-LOW, I1-HIGH, I3, I3-WYE and I3-PARALLEL current modes.

5.2.3.1 CURRENT DURATION.

For normal current duration, this setting is available under the SETTINGS RAMP CURRENT DURATIONFAULT-DURATION selection.

5.2.3.2 REMOTE-END-TRIP-SIMULATION.

This feature is provided to test pilotless accelerated tripping functions. (See Application Note AN4 for moredetails). The MTS-1720 (I3-WYE current mode) is required for this feature.

When enabled, and when the MTS-1700 is in the FAULT state and dynamic operation mode, the currentsin the phases which are not participating in the fault will be set to zero after the pre-programmed remote-end-trip time. For example, if B-G fault type was selected, the A and C phase currents would be set to zeroafter the pre-programmed time.

This feature is programmed under the SETTINGS RAMP CURRENT DURATION REMOTE-END-TRIPselection in the menu. When the remote-end trip time is shown in the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY], pressingthe [TIME] button toggles between display in seconds and cycles. The default setting is OFF.

5.2.4 Frequency Ramping

Frequency ramping is only available in variable frequency reference mode. Frequency ramping is alsoavailable in the higher harmonic ranges (2nd through 10th harmonic).

The only limitation is the prefault, fault initial, fault final and postfault frequency must all be in the sameharmonic range.



5.2.5 Phase Ramping

Because phase angle rolls over at the 0/360° point, given a start and stop value for phase angle ramping, thephase angle may be ramped in one of two directions. As a result, the direction must be specified, along withthe phase angle ramp rate.

FIGURE 5.5 PHASE ANGLE RAMP DIRECTION PROGRAMMING

5.2.6 Effects on other Operations

Normally in dynamic mode, in the fault state, you’re allowed to adjust fault values (Φ, V, I, f). However, ifa ramp or duration has been programmed for that particular parameter, you’ll only be allowed to adjustfault values in static operation mode. Otherwise, set the ramp and duration to OFF to be able to adjust theparameter.

5.2.7 Clearing Ramp and Duration Settings

To turn off all ramps and fault durations, select SETTINGS RAMP CLR-ALL in the menu.

To turn off the ramp and fault duration for a single parameter, select the CLR-ALL action in the SETTINGSRAMP PHASE menu for the individual parameter (as shown below):

When CLR-ALL is selected, the final fault value(s) are not cleared. However, they won’t be used untilramping is re-enabled.

The initial fault value is used as the value in the fault state.

VOLTAGE DURATION

2.972 SEC

VOLTAGE DURATION:

178.2 CYCLES

Startangle

Stopangle angle

Start

angleStop

Negativeramp rate

Postiveramp rate

Negativeramp rate

PositiveRamp rate

Example A Example B

0 0

INITIAL FINAL RATE

DURATION CLR-ALL



5.2.8 Programming Durations

Durations from 0-99.999 seconds (6000 cycles at 60 Hz) can be programmed. They can be programmed ineither seconds or cycles (based upon the present output frequency).

While adjusting a duration setting in the [MODE/MENU] display, pressing the [TIME] button togglesbetween display in seconds and cycles.

Example duration setting in seconds:

VOLTAGE DURATION

2.972 SEC

Pressing [TIME] changes the display to cycles (shown here assuming 60 Hz output):

VOLTAGE DURATION:

178.2 CYCLES

5.2.9 Example Applications of Ramp and Fault Duration Features

Example 1

The following settings map shows an example simulation of a phase-to-phase fault.

VAB is ramped from the nominal 120V to 10V, and the current is stepped from 1A to 4A, then ramped to12A. The phase angle VAB to IAB is stepped from 12° in prefault, to 75° during the fault.


Fault Type Φ-Φ Operation mode DYNAMIC

Freq. reference mode LINE


Parameter



VAN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VBN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VCN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VAB [V] 120.0 120.0 20%/sec off 10.0 N/A

I1 or I3[A] 1.0 4.0 3A/sec off 12.0 N/A

Phase [deg] 12.0 75.0 off off N/A N/A




Example 2

The following settings map shows an example frequency ramp to test frequency rate-of-change relays.

The frequency is ramped from 60Hz prefault to 57.5Hz at 0.3Hz/second:

Example 3

The settings map on the next page shows an example momentary 3Φ fault which may be used to test theresponse time of a relay.

The fault values are applied for 10 cycles (assuming 60Hz output), then return to prefault levels. The returnto prefault is programmed by setting postfault on, and programming the postfault settings to be equal to theprefault settings.


Fault Type Φ-Ν Operation mode DYNAMIC Freq. reference mode VARIABLE

Fault Phase A-N Current mode I1-LOW Harmonic 1

Parameter



VAN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VBN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VCN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VAN [V] 69.3 69.3 off off N/A N/A

I1 or I3[A] 0.0 0.0 off off N/A N/A

Phase [deg] N/A N/A off off N/A N/A

Freq. [Hz] 60.000 60.000 0.3Hz/sec N/A 57.500 N/A



5.3 TIMER CONTROL

The MTS-1710’s timer has both an internal and external start mode. This timer start mode can beprogrammed via the menu under SETTINGS MODES TIMER.

5.3.1 Internal Start Timer Mode

Internal start timer mode is indicated by “IST” on the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY], and is the default setting.

In internal start mode, the timer is synchronized to start when the outputs change from prefault to faultvalues. This may be several milliseconds after the [FAULT] button is pressed, or after an external starttrigger occurs, depending upon the following factors:

a) If the frequency reference is variable mode, and the prefault frequency is different from the faultfrequency, the timer will start when the frequency step occurs. The frequency step will occur,after the start trigger, on the first zero crossing of the voltage being monitored.

b) If a fault incidence angle has been programmed, the timer will start when the specified angle isreached in the current waveform, and the outputs change from prefault to fault levels. (SeeSection 5.4).

c) If neither of the above conditions are true, the timer will start when the outputs change from theprefault to fault values (approximately 1ms after external trigger).

The above factors, which determine the type of internal start trigger, are in order of priority. If two or moreconditions are true, the higher one will determine the mode of operation.


Fault Type 3Φ(Φ-Φ) Operation mode DYNAMIC Freq. reference mode LINE


51 Parameter



VAN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VBN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VCN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VAB [V] 120.0 60.0 off 0.167sec N/A 120.0

I1 or I3[A] 0.5 8.0 off 0.167sec N/A 0.5

Phase [deg] 5.0 5.0 off off N/A 5.0




5.3.2 External Start Timer Mode

External start timer mode is indicated by “XST” on the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY].

In external start mode, the outputs will change from prefault to fault levels when the [FAULT] button ispressed, an RS-232 ‘STR’ command is given, or an external START trigger is sensed. However, the timerwon’t start until an external START trigger is sensed.

In a sense, the timer is decoupled from the fault controls. Use this mode to time auxiliary sequences, or toperform accurate time measurements between the external START and STOP trigger signals. This modeshould be selected to do accurate 4-wire or 2-wire pulse timing.

The external start timer mode is used to start the timer at some time after the MTS-1710 changes to theFAULT state. An example use of this is to time the operation of a DC auxiliary relay shown in Figure 5.6.

This example uses the DC voltage output option, the AUX contacts, and the external start timer mode.Should you not have the DC voltage option, an external source may be used.

Since the DC voltage is always present and unswitched, the AUX contacts are used to apply DC voltage tothe relay when [FAULT] is pressed. To eliminate the operation time of the MTS-1710’s internal AUX relay,the external start timer mode is used and the timer is started when DC voltage is sensed across the relay coil.The timer is stopped when the relay contacts change state (open/close).



FIGURE 5.6 DC AUXILIARY RELAY TIMING TEST

NOTE: The external start timer mode is intended to be used when there’s a separate signal used to startthe timer which is different from the fault initiation signal or event.

If external start timer mode is used, and the external start trigger signal also triggers the fault, fault incidence angle control must be set to random (off), since the combination of these conditions is invalid.

The external start timer mode can be used to time secondary and auxiliary relays in a relay system wherethe applied inputs to the system under test must operate a primary relay first, before the relay of interest isoperated. An example of this is shown in Figure 5.7.


Press [FAULT] to start timing testSelect External Starttimer mode via menu

TIME-DELAYRELAY


DC AUXILIARY/



FIGURE 5.7 SPECIAL APPLICATION OF THE EXTERNAL START TIMER MODE

IV

TIMEDELAY TD

TD

94

94 94 94 94

21

21

Trip Bus

400 ms 1-5 msP/U

Trip Alarm Reclose

Purpose: To measure the operate time of the time delay relay, TDon the auxiliary trip bus.


Press [FAULT] to turn on V & I outputs and start testSelect External Starttimer mode via menu

Timer starts when relayis energized and stopswhen TD contacts open.



5.4 FAULT INCIDENCE ANGLE CONTROL

Fault incidence angle control is provided via the menu under SETTINGS FIA. Fault incidence angle controlallows programmability of the angle at which the fault occurs.

A setting of RANDOM means that the outputs will change from prefault to fault based entirely uponexternal signals and inputs, typically occurring at random phase angles. When FIA is set to a specific angle,all outputs will change from prefault to fault when the fault voltage reaches the specified angle. This maybe up to 1 cycle after the start trigger signal.

For example, if the fault phase is B-N, the fault incidence angle setting is referenced to VB. If the faultphase is A-B, the fault incidence angle is referenced to VAB. The default setting is 0°.

(FIA control isn’t valid in harmonic frequency modes (i.e. above 75Hz). FIA is forced to RANDOM whenin fault playback mode because the fault data determines the exact fault voltage and current waveforms.

FIGURE 5.8 EXAMPLES OF FIA SETTINGS

Note: The fault incidence angle programming assumes that the prefault voltages are balanced (equal inamplitude and 120° apart). If this isn’t the case, a correction may be required to program the faultincidence angle properly.

FAULTPREFAULT PREFAULT FAULT

Fault incidence angle = 0

Fault incidence angle = 90 deg. Fault incidence angle = 180 deg.

Fault incidence angle = 220 deg.

V

V V

V



5.5 SYNCHRONIZING MODE

Synchronizing mode is intended for testing of synchrocheck relays, reclosing relays, generator controls, andother similar devices which require two independent frequency sources.

5.5.1 Operation

Synchronizing mode can be enabled/disabled via the menu under SETTINGS MODES FREQSYNCHRONIZING.

When enabled, select variable frequency mode, and set a fault frequency different from the prefaultfrequency value. In the fault state, VC will run at the prefault frequency while all other outputs will run atthe fault frequency. The slip frequency is the difference between the prefault and fault frequency settings.

The standard connections, when using this mode, is shown in Figure 3.15.

5.5.2 Phase Measurement in Synchronizing Mode

When the synchronizing mode is enabled, high speed measurement of phase between two voltages isperformed (similar to the synchrocheck option on MTS-1030 Multifunction Powermeter).

To use this, turn synchronizing mode on, and select Φ-N C-N fault mode. In the FAULT state, VCN willrun at fault frequency.

Press [PHASE] and note that high speed phase measurement occurs. Note that the units annunciator willread “DegVa-c”.

In the other Φ-N fault modes, the annunciator will read “DegVa-b” and “DegVa-a”. If the fault mode is Φ-Φ, 2-Φ-N, or 3-Φ, the phase measurement is meaningless.

In synchronizing mode, an additional feature to note is, if you operate in dynamic mode and setPOSTFAULT on, when the stop trigger occurs, the phase reading will freeze, and the phase angle betweenthe two voltages should also freeze at this value, allowing verification with an external phase angle meter.

After the relay has operated, the MTS-1710 enters the postfault state and freezes the phase reading. Thecircuit breaker advance time, and phase angle at time of breaker closure, can be seen by selectingSETTINGS MODES FREQ BRKR-ADV in the menu.

5.5.3 Measurement of Circuit Breaker Advance Time To perform this test, the MTS-1710’s Vc output is connected to the relay bus voltage input, and the MTS-1710’s VA output is connected to the relay generator voltage input, as in Figure 3.15.

After the relay has operated, the MTS-1710 enters the postfault state and freezes the phase reading. Thecircuit breaker advance time, and phase angle at time of breaker closure, can be seen by selectingSETTINGS MODES FREQ BRKR-ADV in the menu.

BREAKER ADVANCE

TIME:103ms Φ=+15.4°



Turn the [MODIFY] knob to the circuit breaker advance time setting, and the Φ=xxx.x will indicate the phase angle at time of breaker closure. Or turn the [MODIFY] knob until 00.0° is displayed, and therequired breaker advance time is shown.

The Φ=xxx.x or breaker phase is computed from the following formula:

Φbreaker = Fgen- bus + 360(fgen - f bus)tb

(or, in terms of the Va & Vc outputs, Φbreaker = Φa-c + 360 (fa-fc)tb) where: Φbreaker = phase angle at the time of breaker closure Φgen- bus = phase of the generator voltage referred to the bus voltage tb = circuit breaker advance time f bus = bus frequency (MTS-1710 prefault frequency setting) fgen = generator frequency (MTS-1710 fault frequency)

The total error in this value is given by: ±360∆f ± 0.5° f Typical values at 60Hz: ±0.8° for ∆f =.05 Hz ±1.1° for ∆f = 0.1 Hz

5.6 PHASE SEQUENCE

The voltage output phase sequence can be programmed via the menu under SETTINGS MODES PHASEPHS-SEQ.

The following choices are provided:

PHASE SEQUENCE+ve Selects positive phase sequence (abc). This is the default setting.-ve Selects negative phase sequence (acb)

In I3-WYE current mode, this feature also controls the phase sequence of the 3Φ current output.

5.7 DYNAMIC MEASUREMENT MODE

The dynamic measurement mode controls high speed measurement of voltage and current in FAULT state.This is provided in the menu under SETTINGS MODES MEAS.

The following choices are provided:

DYNAMIC MEAS MODE

AUTO Use high-speed peak responding measurement for first 240ms in FAULT state, andRMS measurement at all other times. (This is the default setting).

RMS Forces true RMS responding measurement all of the time.

PEAK Use RMS measurement in PREFAULT state, and high-speed peak respondingmeasurement in FAULT state.



High-speed peak responding measurement is useful when testing fast response solid state relays. Theserelays will operate in response to fault levels before normal RMS measurement circuitry is able to accuratelymeasure the fault current/voltage levels. The high speed measurement mode is peak-responding andmeasures the output current and voltages every cycle (for 40-75Hz outputs).

For almost all testing, the default AUTO setting is adequate. For testing involving high speed ramping, thePEAK setting may be required to capture the value of rapidly changing currents/voltages.

5.8 DEFAULT SETTINGS

5.8.1 Restoring Default Settings

To return all settings to factory default values, select SETTINGS DEFAULT in the menu, or execute theDEF command via the RS-232C interface.

5.8.2 Primary Default Settings

The following settings map shows the default power-up settings:

* If in manual control mode, the current mode, fault mode, fault type, fault phase and current modeselected will be the one selected on the front panel.

MTS-1710 Default Settings Map

Fault Type Φ- N* Operation mode STATIC Freq. reference mode LINE

Fault Phase A-N* Current mode I1-LOW* Harmonic 1

Parameter


OFF Initial Ramp Rate Duration Final OFF

VAN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VBN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VCN [V] 69.3 - - - - -

VAN * [V] 69.3 0 OFF OFF 69.3 69.3

I1 or I3 [A] 0 0 OFF OFF 0 0

Phase [deg] 0 0 OFF OFF 0 0

Freq. [Hz] 60.000 60.000 OFF OFF 60.000 60.000

I2 current [A] 0 Special Modes and Settings (via menu)

I2 %harmonic 0 Timer Start Mode INT Fault incidence angle 0

I4 [DC amps] 0 Dynamic Meas. Mode AUTO Synchronizing mode OFF

Phase Sequence +ve Auto-reclose delay 0.0



Note: The default system voltage (69.3V) and system frequency (60.0 Hz) can be changed using theVDF# and FDF# commands via the RS-232C interface.

Systems intended for use in North America are shipped with 69.3V and 60.0Hz defaults. Systemsintended for use in Europe, Africa and Asia are shipped with 63.5V and 50.0Hz defaults.

5.8.3 Other Default Settings

Other default settings not appearing in the settings map are:

[VALUE DISPLAY]: Displays AC voltage[MODE/MENU DISPLAY]: Displays mode dataTone: OffWarning tone: OffTime display mode: secondsFault Playback mode: offFault Playback rate: 20kHzBreaker time: 0.0 secAuto-reclose time delay: 0.0 secReclose-into-fault events: 0Trip type: 3-polePT Location: Line-sideRemote end trip time: offPhase measurement speed: NormalPhase Adjustment mode: NormalAmplitude Adjustment mode: NormalBreaker advance time: 0 msPhase display mode: 0 - 360° Reverse phase display: DisabledAux contact arrangement: NO

5.9 WARNING TONE

This feature provides an audible warning tone on overload of any of the outputs.

When enabled, a one hertz pulsing tone, along with warning annunciators (see Section 4.13), indicatesoverload of one or more outputs. This warning tone can be enabled/disabled via the menu under SETTINGSMODES WARNING.

5.10 DISPLAY CONTROL FEATURES

These features control the function of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY]

5.10.1 Default Mode Display

This is the default data displayed in the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] when the menu is not active. This isdescribed in Figure 3.3.



The DISP DEFAULT selection in the menu restores the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] to show this modedata.

5.10.2 Multiple Readings Display

This display allows viewing of multiple parameters on the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY].

Up to four parameters can be displayed simultaneously. For example, if the [VALUE DISPLAY] readsvoltage, the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] may appear as follows:

The upper left corner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] will continue to display the units associated withthe upper [VALUE DISPLAY]. The multiple readings display is activated by the DISP READINGSselection in the menu.

5.10.3 Ratio Display Modes

These display modes allow the direct display of standard ratios used in protective relay testing, such asimpedance (in testing impedance relays), and percent slope (in testing percent differential relays). These areaccessed by selections in the DISP RATIOS menu.

Ratio display modes are selected under the DISP RATIOS menu. After selection of one of these ratios, theupper right corner of the [MODE/MENU] display is replaced by the selected ratio value. Overflow valuesand invalid values are indicated by “-----” on the display.

5.10.3.1 IMPEDANCE DISPLAYS.

Impedance can be displayed directly using any one of the four standard formulas: V÷I, V÷2I, V÷ I, or V÷(I + KI).

Select the desired impedance display under the DISP RATIOS IMPEDANCE menu. The impedance iscalculated using the present values of the voltage and current readings. The impedance display is invalidfor I4-DC current mode.

This feature is most useful for displaying reach when testing impedance relays. An example of this is shownbelow:

DEG:V-I V÷2I=2.913Ω Φ-Φ A-B I3

5.10.3.1.1 Z1 gnd display

This display mode shows the positive sequence impedance (Z1) for phase-ground faults directly.

3

VOLTS 2.937A

107.9deg 60.00Hz



Ground fault impedance relays are required to respond to the positive sequence impedance of a line toground fault. However, these relays are supplied with the Φ-N voltage and phase current, plus adetermined proportion of the residual current. This proportion of the residual current is the zero sequencecompensation factor, K. Consider an A-phase to ground fault. The voltage seen by the relay is:

VA = I1 Z1 + I2 Z2 + I0 Z0

Ιf we make assumptions that the fault impedance is zero, and that the faulted line isn’t mutually coupled toanother 3Φ line, and that there are no other sources of zero sequence current between the relaying locationand the fault, we find that the Z1 from the relay to the fault is:

Z1 = VA IA + K I0

where: I0 = IA + IB + IC (residual current)

K = Z0 - Z1 (zero sequence compensation factor) 3 Z1 (In this equation for K, Z1 and Z0 are the positive and zero sequence impedances respectively of the entire line)

For relay testing, we generally set current in the unfaulted phases to zero, and assume that Z1 and Z0 for theline are at the same angle. If we make these assumptions, the formula for Z1 generalized for any phasereduces to:

Z1 = V (positive sequence impedance seen by the relay) I(1 + K)

The magnitude of Z1 is the impedance that the MTS-1710 can display directly using the Z1gnd displaymode.

To use this display mode:

1. Select a Φ-N fault mode

2. Set the prefault IA, IB, IC to 0A if the MTS-1720 is on. (Send AIA0, AIB0, AIC0 when using theRS-232C interface).

3. Select DISP RATIOS IMPEDANCE Z1gnd in the menu.

4. Select DISP RATIOS IMPEDANCE K-factor in the menu and dial in the zero sequencecompensation factor.

5. Exit the menu. Z1gnd is now displayed. Adjust the fault voltage, current, and phase angle for relaypickup.



Example display:

DEG:v-I Z1gnd=4.183Ω Φ-N B-N I3

NOTE: This display is not valid for I3-WYE current mode in cases where unfaulted phases have non-zerocurrent because we assumed the residual current is equal to the fault current for this calculation.

The K-factor can be specified directly via the menu selection DISP RATIOS IMPEDANCE K-factor, orindirectly as the ratio of Z0÷Z1 via the menu selection DISP RATIOS IMPEDANCE Z0÷Z1. TheZ0÷Z1 value is typically used by GE.

5.10.3.1.2 Automatic impedance display selection

This feature lets the MTS-1710 automatically select the proper impedance formula for display based uponthe present fault mode. This circumvents the need to change the display selection when changing fault typesin testing a multiple element relay.

To use this feature, select DISP RATIOS IMPEDANCE AUTO Z1 in the menu. The automatic impedancedisplay selection is made according to the following table:

To turn off the impedance display, select DISP DEFAULT, or any other desired display mode in the menu.

5.10.3.1.3 Automatic resistance display selection

This feature is similar to the automatic impedance display selection mode described in 5.10.3.1.2 above,except that the resistive component of the positive sequence impedance is displayed.

To use this feature, select DISP RATIOS IMPEDANCE AUTO R1 in the menu. 5.10.3.1.4 Automatic reactance display selection

This feature is similar to the automatic impedance display selection mode described in 5.10.3.1.2 above,except that the reactive component of the positive sequence impedance is displayed.

To use this feature, select DISP RATIOS IMPEDANCE AUTO X1 in the menu.

Fault Mode TypeSelected Impedance formula

MTS-1710 only MTS-1710 + MTS-1720

Φ-N V÷(I + KI) V÷(I + KI)

Φ-Φ V÷2I V÷I

3Φ(Φ-Φ) V÷ I V÷I

3Φ(Φ-N) V÷I V÷I

2Φ-N V÷2I V÷I

3



5.10.3.2 CURRENT RATIO DISPLAY.

In I1&I2 current mode, the current ratios (I1÷I1CT) and (I2÷I2CT) can be displayed directly as a (I2÷I2CT) (I1÷I1CT)percentage value.

These ratios are accessed by selections in the DISP RATIOS CURRENT-RATIOS menu. They are onlyvalid in the I1&I2 current mode. See Figure 5.20 for programming of CT tap values.

5.10.3.3 PERCENT SLOPE DISPLAY.

5.10.3.3.1

This display mode shows percent slope directly according to the standard formula:

| (I1÷I1CT) - (I2÷I2CT) |

(I1÷I1CT) + (I2÷I2CT) [ 2 ] which is used for percent differential relays. This display mode is selected via the DISP RATIOS CURRENT-RATIOS SLOPE |I1-I2|÷((I1+I2)÷2) selection in the front panel menu.

When using this display, the percent differential relay should be connected, as shown in Figure 4.12. SeeSection 5.10.3.4 for programming of CT tap values.

This ratio is calculated using the present values of the I1 and I2 current readings, and is only available inI1&I2 current mode. This calculation isn’t a vector calculation--meaning that it only takes into account themagnitudes of I1 and I2. Normally, I1 and I2 should be in phase (or 180° out of phase) when performingthis type of testing.

5.10.3.3.2 I2÷((2I1+I2)÷2) formula

This display mode shows percent slope according to the standard formula:

I2÷I2CT x 100% 1 2• I1 + I2 2 [ I1CT I2CT ]which is used for percent differential relays.

This display mode is selected via the DISP RATIOS CURRENT-RATIOS SLOPE I2÷((2I1+I2)÷2)selection. When using this display mode, the percent differential relay should be connected, as shown inFigure 3.11.

The ratio is calculated using the present values of the I1 and I2 current readings, and is only available in I1&I2 current mode.

|I1-I2|÷((I1+I2)÷2) formula

x 100%



5.10.3.4 I1 & I2 CT TAPS FOR CURRENT RATIO DISPLAYS.

The I1 and I2 CT taps can be programmed into the menu for use in the current ratio and percent slope displaycalculations. These are accessed under the DISP RATIOS CURRENT-RATIOS I1-CT and DISP RATIOSCURRENT-RATIOS I2-CT selections.

The default value is 1.0 A, and the programmable range is 0.1A to 20.0A.

5.10.3.5 VOLTS-PER-HERTZ RATIO DISPLAY.

This display mode shows the present voltage divided by the present frequency. This is useful when testingvolts-per-Hertz relays.

5.10.4 Power Display Modes

These display modes allow direct display of the single-phase power quantities: kWatts, kVars, kVA, andPower Factor.

These modes are useful for checking devices, such as Watt and Var transducers, and reverse power relays.The power readings are available under the DISP POWER selection in the menu.

The power quantities are computed from the presently selected voltage, current and phase angle readings(which may be Φ-N or Φ-Φ quantities). Because of special phase angle measurements made in I1&I2current mode, the kWATT, kVAR and Power Factor readings are unavailable in this current mode. Anyinvalid or overflow values are indicated by “-----” on the display.

5.11 ADVANCED POSTFAULT FEATURES

This section describes advanced features of the MTS-1710’s postfault state.

5.11.1 Breaker Time

This simulates the breaker operating time while specifing the length of time the fault quantities aremaintained following the relay trip.

Normally, this is set to zero. It may be set to a specific value when testing devices which require truesimulation of breaker operation to perform such functions as fault recording or fault location. The breakertime may be set via the menu under SETTINGS POSTFAULT BRKR-TIME.

While the breaker time is shown on the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY], pressing the [TIME] button togglesbetween display in seconds and cycles.

5.11.2 Auto-Reclose Simulation

5.11.2.3 AUTO-RECLOSE TIME DELAY.

BREAKER-TIME:

0.034 SEC



This feature allows simulation of the dead time between the time a fault is cleared and the time an auto-reclose occurs.

This time delay is programmed under the SETTINGS POSTFAULT RECLOSE AUTO-RECLOSE-DELAY selection in the menu. The default setting of this time delay is zero (i.e. immediate reclosure).

In dynamic operation mode, when the MTS-1710 enters the postfault state, it will simulate tripping onspecific phases for the time specified by the auto-reclose time delay. After this delay time, if postfaultoutputs are enabled, the voltages and currents will change to the programmed postfault levels.

For the default of 3-pole trip mode, and line-side PT’s, all voltages and currents will be set to zero duringthe auto-reclose time delay. This is illustrated in Figure 5.9.

The auto-reclose time delay can be programmed in seconds or in cycles (based upon the present outputfrequency). While the auto-reclose time delay is shown on the [MODE/MENU] display, pressing the[TIME] button toggles between display in seconds and cycles.

Note that, if individual amplitude adjustment mode is set, all outputs will be zero during the reclose delayinterval, regardless of the trip type and PT location settings.

FIGURE 5.9 AUTO-RECLOSE TIME DELAY

5.11.2.2 RECLOSE INTO FAULT.

This feature allows testing of multi-shot auto-reclose relays.

When enabled, after the relay operates on an initial fault, the MTS-1710 will reset back to prefault state,allowing a subsequent start trigger (caused by the CLOSE signal from the relay) to trigger a reclose-into-fault (MTS-1710 in FAULT state). A properly functioning relay should trip again. This repeats until theprogrammed number of recloses in either the relay or the MTS-1710 expires.

This feature is only applicable in dynamic operation mode. The number of reclose-into-fault events isprogrammed under the SETTINGS POSTFAULT RECLOSE RECLOSE-INTO-FAULT selection in themenu.

I

V


Auto-reclosetime delay



The default setting is zero, indicating that, when the relay operates on the first fault, the MTS-1710 willremain latched in the postfault state. This is the normal mode of operation for the MTS-1710.

To test the total number of reclose shots of the relay, set the number of reclose into fault events to be equalto the relay #of shots setting. At the end of a test, press [STOP/RESET] to re-initialize the MTS-1710’sinternal reclose-into-fault event counter.

Figure 5.10 shows an example of an unsuccessful 2-shot auto-reclose test. This entire sequence can beexecuted automatically and recorded by the sequence of events recording capability of the programmable I/O channels. In addition, MTS-1730 can be used to simulate the breaker closed (52A) signal.

FIGURE 5.10 TWO-SHOT AUTO RECLOSE TEST

5.11.3 Trip Type

This setting allows both single-pole and three-pole tripping to be simulated.

In 3-pole trip mode, the MTS-1710/MTS-1720 simulate 3Φ tripping. In 1-pole trip mode, the MTS-1710/MTS-1720 simulates tripping of only the phases participating in the fault (e.g. B-phase, if Φ-N/B-N faultmode is selected).

For Φ−Φ and 2-Φ-N fault types, tripping on the appropriate faulted phases is simulated. The non-faultedphases will remain at their nominal (prefault) current and voltage levels in the postfault state, and won’t beaffected by any auto-reclose simulation.

I

V

Prefault InitialFault

1stReclose

intofault fault

intoReclose

2nd

Lockout

BRKRCLOSED

TRIP

CLOSE

MTS-1710STATE

Prefault Prefault PrefaultFault Fault PostfaultFault

TIME DELAY TO AUTO- RECLOSE: 20.0 CYC



When 1-pole trip mode or bus side PT simulation is specified, the [POSTFAULT] on/off setting is moreappropriately interpreted as operating breaker closed/open rather than whether postfault voltages andcurrents are on or off. Be forewarned that voltages and currents may still be non-zero in the MTS-1710postfault state even if the [POSTFAULT] button isn’t illuminated.

The trip mode may be set via the menu under SETTINGS POSTFAULT TRIP-TYPE. The default settingis 3-pole.

Note that, if individual amplitude adjustment mode is set, all outputs will be zero during the reclose delayinterval, regardless of the trip type setting.

5.11.4 PT location

This setting allows simulation of either line-side or bus-side potential transformers.

For line-side PT simulation, whenever a simulated breaker is open, the voltage on the corresponding phasewill be zero. This occurs on any faulted phase during postfault if postfault is set off, or during an auto-reclose time delay.

For bus-side PT simulation, whenever a simulated breaker is open, the voltage on the corresponding phasewill be the nominal (prefault) setting. This occurs on any faulted phase during postfault if postfault is setoff, or during an auto-reclose time delay.

The PT location setting may be set via the menu under SETTINGS POSTFAULT PT. The default setting isline-side PT simulation.

When bus side PT simulation is specified, the [POSTFAULT] on/off setting is more appropriatelyinterpreted as operating breaker closed/open rather than whether postfault voltages and currents are on oroff. Be forewarned that voltages and currents may still be non-zero in the MTS-1710 postfault state even ifthe [POSTFAULT] button isn’t illuminated.

Note that, if individual amplitude adjustment mode is set, all outputs will be zero during the reclose delayinterval, regardless of the PT location setting.

LINE-SIDE BUS-SIDE PT LOCATION:

TRIP-TYPE: 3-POLE 1-POLE



5.11.5 Examples

Example 1 below shows a complete simulation of a B-G fault with the following postfault settings:

Postfault: onBreaker time: 4 cycles

Trip type: 1-Φ Auto-reclose time delay: 11 cycles PT location: line side

FIGURE 5.11 POSTFAULT SEQUENCE EXAMPLE 1 Example 2 on the following page shows a complete simulation of a B-G fault with the following postfaultsettings:

Postfault: onBreaker time: 4 cycles

Trip type: 3-Φ Auto-reclose time delay: 11 cycles PT location: bus side

Ib

Vb

Prefault Fault Reclose

MTS-1710STATE

Prefault Fault Postfault

Va

Vc

Ia

Ic


Breakeroperate

time

RelayTrip



FIGURE 5.12 POSTFAULT SEQUENCE EXAMPLE 2

5.12 PHASE ADJUSTMENT MODE

This setting determines the manner in which phase angles are changed by the user.

The phase adjustment mode is selected via the menu under SETTINGS MODES PHASE INDIVIDUAL-ADJ-MODE ENABLE. This menu appears as follows:

5.12.1 Normal Phase Adjustment Mode

The default setting is “Normal” where phase adjustment automatically adjusts the appropriate current(s)and/or voltage(s). This is dependent upon the current mode.

Ib

Vb

Prefault Fault Reclose

MTS-1710STATE


Va

Vc

Ia

Ic


Breakeroperate

time

RelayTrip

INDIV-VOLT INDIV-CUR

PHS-ADJ MODE: NORMAL



For example, in I1&I2 current mode, the phase of I1 is changed. In all other current modes, the phase of thecurrent is changed.

This automatic selection of phase to be adjusted frees the user from determining the proper phase to alter,and is sufficient in almost all applications.

5.12.2 Individual Phase Adjustment Modes

The “Individual-voltage” and “Individual-current” phase adjustment modes allow for the prefault, fault andpostfault phase of all currents and voltages to be set independently. This allows simulation of an unbalancecondition or non-standard faults.

The phase settings can be changed via menu control, or outside of the menu, similar to normal phaseadjustment. Simulation of standard or “classical” faults for relay testing doesn’t require these modes.

FIGURE 5.13 INDIVIDUAL PHASE ADJUSTMENT MODES

VB

VC

VA

VA'VC'

VB'

VB'VC'

VA'VA

VC

VB

Single knob rotatesall current or all voltage vectors.

Continuous adjustment ineither direction.

Example vector configurations possibleusing individual phase adjustment modes

Each vector can beadjusted independently

in either direction

VA

VC

VB

Normal Phase Adjustment Mode Individual Phase Adjustment Modes

VAVC

VB

I

VA

VB

VC

I

I

II

I'



5.12.2.1 MENU CONTROL OF INDIVIDUAL PHASE.

To independently adjust voltage/current phase angles:

1. Under menu control in the SETTINGS MODES PHASE INDIVIDUAL-ADJ-MODE ENABLE menu,select either “Individual-voltage” or “Individual-current” phase adjust mode. The difference betweenthese two selections will be explained in 5.12.2.2. The two are equivalent under menu control.

2. Next, enter the SETTINGS MODES PHASE INDIVIDUAL-ADJ-MODE ADJUST menu. Then selectthe desired state in which you wish to change the phase (PREFAULT, FAULT or POSTFAULT).

After this step, the menus will vary depending on the current mode.

5.12.2.1.1 Individual phase adjustment in I1-LOW & I1-HIGH current modes

In these current modes, after PREFAULT, FAULT or POSTFAULT is selected, a display, similar to the onebelow, will appear, showing the present settings for that particular fault state.

Note that these numbers are settings--and not actual measured values--in contrast to the [VALUEDISPLAY]. In addition, these are absolute values, not relative values as shown on the [VALUE DISPLAY].

To change a particular setting, turn the [MODIFY] knob to move the cursor to the desired quantity. Press[SELECT], and the cursor will move to the first digit of the phase value to be modified. An example isshown below for VB.

Turn [MODIFY] knob to the desired value, and then press [SELECT]. The cursor will move back to the firstletter of the quantity, as in the example displayed below:

Repeat this, as desired, for all phases, and for each of the prefault, fault and postfault states.

The individual phase adjustment menu tree for I1-LOW and I1-HIGH current modes is summarized in thefollowing figure:

vA:000.0° VB:105.5°

vC:120.0° I2:30.5°

VA:000.0° vB:240.0°

VC:120.0° I2:30.5°

VA:000.0° vB:240.0°

VC:120.0° I2:30.5°



FIGURE 5.14 INDIVIDUAL PHASE ADJUSTMENT MENU TREE (I1-LOW & I1-HIGH Current Modes)

5.12.2.1.2 I2-HARMONIC current mode individual phase adjustment

In this current mode, after PREFAULT, FAULT or POSTFAULT is selected, a display similar to the onebelow will appear, showing the present settings for that particular fault state.

Note that these numbers are settings--and not actual measured values--in contrast to the [VALUEDISPLAY].


Turn the [MODIFY] knob to the desired value, and then press [SELECT]. The cursor will move back to thefirst letter of the quantity, as in the example displayed below:


Prefault Fault PostfaultNormal Indiv_Volt Indiv_Current

VA VB VC I1

Enable Adjust

Individual_Adj_Mode Phs-seq Meas

VA VB VC I1

VA VB VC I1

VA:000.0° VB:105.5°

VC:120.0° I2:30.5°

VA:000.0° vB:240.0°

VC:120.0° I2:30.5°

vA:000.0° vB:240.0°

vC:120.0° I2:30.5°



The individual phase adjustment menu tree for I2-HARMONIC current mode is summarized in the figurebelow:

FIGURE 5.15 INDIVIDUAL PHASE ADJUSTMENT MENU TREE FOR I2-HARMONIC CURRENT MODE

5.12.2.1.3 I1&I2 current mode individual phase adjustment



To change a particular setting, turn the [MODIFY] knob to move the cursor to the desired quantity. Press[SELECT], and the cursor will move to the first digit of the phase value to be modified. An example isshown below for I2.



Prefault Fault PostfaultNormal Indiv_Volt Indiv_Current

VA VB VC I2

Enable Adjust


VA VB VC I2

VA VB VC I2

VA:000.0° vB:240.0°

I1:000.0° I2:30.0°

VA:000.0° vB:240.0°

I1:000.0° I2:300.0°

vA:000.0° VB:240.0°

I1:000.0° I2:27.5°



The individual phase adjustment menu tree for I1&I2 current mode is summarized in the figure below:

FIGURE 5.16 INDIVIDUAL PHASE ADJUSTMENT MENU TREE FOR I1&I2 CURRENT MODE

5.12.2.1.4 I3 current mode individual phase adjustment








VA VB I1 I2

Normal Indiv_Volt Indiv_Current

Enable Adjust

VA VB I1 I2

VA VB I1 I2

VA:000.0° vB:240.0°

vC:120.0° I3:30.5°

VA:000.0° VB:240.0° VC:120.0° I3:30.5°

VA:000.0° VB:105.5°

VC:120.0° I3:30.5°



The individual phase adjustment menu tree for I3 current mode is summarized in the following figure:

FIGURE 5.17 INDIVIDUAL PHASE ADJUSTMENT MENU TREE FOR I3 CURRENT MODE

5.12.2.1.5 I3-WYE current mode individual phase adjustment

The individual phase adjustment menu tree for I3-WYE current mode is shown in the following figure:

FIGURE 5.18 INDIVIDUAL PHASE ADJUSTMENT MENU TREE FOR I3-WYE CURRENT MODE

In this current mode, after PREFAULT, FAULT or POSTFAULT is selected, the following display willappear:


VA VB VC I3 VA VB VC I3

VA VB VC I3


Normal Indiv_Volt Indiv_Current

Enable Adjust

Current Voltage Current VoltageCurrent Voltage

VA VB VC

IA IB ICIA IB IC IA IB IC

VA VB VCVA VB VC


Enable Adjust


VOLTAGE CURRENT



Select voltage to adjust/display voltage phase angle settings, or current to adjust/display current phase anglesettings.

If VOLTAGE is selected:A display similar to the one on the following page will appear, showing the present settings for thepreviously selected fault state:




Press [PREVIOUS] to return to the previous menu display.

If CURRENT is selected:

A display similar to the one below will appear, showing the present settings for the previously selected faultstate:


To change a particular setting, turn the [MODIFY] knob to move the cursor to the desired quantity. Press[SELECT], and the cursor will move to the first digit of the phase value to be modified. An example isshown below for IC.


vA:000.0° vB:240.0°

vC:120.0°

iA:330.0° iB:240.0°

iC:163.5°

iA:330.0° iB:240.0°

iC:i20.0°

iA:330.0° iB:240.0°

iC:120.0°

vA:000.0° vB:240.0°

vC:120.0°

vA:000.0° VB:105.0°

vC:120.0°



Press [PREVIOUS] to return to the previous menu display.

To adjust/display phase angle settings in other fault states:Press [PREVIOUS] to return to the PREFAULT, FAULT, POSTFAULT submenu display. Select thedesired state and repeat steps as outlined in this section 5.12.2.1.5.

5.12.2.2 NON-MENU CONTROL OF INDIVIDUAL PHASE.

The individual phase angles can be adjusted outside of menu control. This allows the phase angle reading(measured) to be viewed at the same time the individual phase is changed.

To activate this method of adjustment, choose either the “Individual-voltage” or “Individual-current” phaseadjustment mode under the SETTINGS MODES PHASE INDIVIDUAL-ADJ-MODE ENABLE menu(press [MENU] to exit). Pressing [PHASE], and turning the [MODIFY] knob, will adjust the phase of oneor more outputs, as defined by the present fault state, fault mode, current mode, and individual phase adjustmode.

This method of adjustment changes the same settings as described in Section 5.12.2.1 above. However, thismethod provides for changing the phase of more than one output at a time in Φ-Φ, 2-Φ-N and 3-Φ faultmodes. Again, there are separate prefault, fault and postfault phase settings for all outputs, and the selectedsetting which is adjusted depends upon the present fault state.

When the phase adjustment mode is set to “Individual-Voltage”, the output phase which is changed isdetermined by the table on the next page:



* May be prefault, fault or postfault setting, depending upon present fault state.

When the phase adjustment mode is set to “Individual-current”, the output phase, which is changed, isdetermined by the table on the following page:


Fault mode Current mode Adjusted phase*

Φ-N A-N any VA

Φ-N B-N any VB

Φ-N C-N all except I1&I2 VC

Φ-Φ Α−Β or 2Φ-Ν A-B any VA, VB

Φ-Φ Β−C or 2Φ−Ν B-C all except I1&I2 VB, VC

Φ−Φ C-A or 2Φ-N C-A all except I1&I2 VC, VA

3Φ all except I1&I2 VA, VB, VC

Φ-N C-N I1&I2 none

Φ−Φ B-C or 2Φ-N B-C I1&I2 VB

Φ−Φ C-A or 2Φ-N C-A I1&I2 VA

3Φ I1&I2 VA, VB

Current mode Adjusted phase*

I1-LOW, I1 HIGH I1

I3 I3

I3-WYE See next table

I1&I2 (with current display set to I1-AMPS)

I1


I2

I2-HARMONIC I2



When the phase adjustment mode is set to “Individual-Current”, the output phase, which is changed, isdetermined by the table below:


In I3-WYE current mode, when the phase adjustment mode is set to “Individual-Current”, the output phase,which is changed, is determined by the table below:


5.12.3 Viewing Phase Settings

Note that, at any time, you can view the phase settings for any fault state (regardless of the phase adjustmentmode setting) under the following menus:

SETTINGS MODES PHASE INDIVIDUAL-ADJ-MODE ADJUST PREFAULT SETTINGS MODES PHASE INDIVIDUAL-ADJ-MODE ADJUST FAULT SETTINGS MODES PHASE INDIVIDUAL-ADJ-MODE ADJUST POSTFAULT

Current mode Adjusted phase*

I1-LOW, I1 HIGH I1

I3 I3

I3-WYE See next table


I1


I2

I2-HARMONIC I2

Fault mode Adjusted phase*

Φ-N A-N IA

Φ-N B-N IB

Φ-N C-N IC

Φ-Φ A-B or 2Φ-N A-B IA, IB

Φ-Φ B-C or 2Φ-N B-C IB, IC

Φ-Φ C-A or 2Φ-N C-A IC, IA

3Φ IA, IB & IC



5.12.4 Special Notes

Once the phase adjustment mode is set to “individual-voltage” or “individual-current”, any action, whichwould usually change the phase of one or more outputs, will no longer do so. This includes the following:

1. Changing phase-to-phase voltage (in Φ-Φ fault types) 2. Changing phase sequence3. Changing [FAULT PHASE] selector

Due to the method in which the MTS-1710 controls phase, changing the harmonic setting (or harmonicrange in variable frequency reference mode) will change the individual phase settings. As a result, alwaysselect the desired frequency and harmonic before changing individual phase settings.

The programmable phase resolution changes with harmonic setting. The resolution is 0.25° times theharmonic number.

The VC phase settings in individual phase adjust modes are invalid if synchronizing mode is active.Similarly, I1 phase settings in individual phase adjust modes are invalid if I1&I2 current mode is selectedand synchronizing mode is active. Also, I2 phase settings in individual phase adjust modes are invalid in I2-HARMONIC current mode, since I2 is a fundamental+harmonic, and the voltages run at the harmonicfrequency.

5.12.5 Example - Use of Individual Phase Adjust for Synchronizing Device Testing

An alternate method for testing synchronizing devices to the one described in Section 3.3.12 uses theindividual phase adjustment feature. This method also allows AC current to be used (required for some newsynchronizing devices).

5.12.5.1 PHASE ANGLE LIMIT TEST.

1. Make test connections, as shown in Figure 3.15.2. Select static operation mode, Φ-N/A-N fault mode and I1-LOW current mode.3. Turn [PREFAULT] on, press [VOLTAGE] and set Va to the required nominal voltage.4. Select C-N fault phase and set Vc to the required nominal voltage (usually same as VA).5. In the menu, select SETTINGS MODES PHASE INDIVIDUAL-ADJ-MODE ENABLE.6. Press [PREVIOUS] and select ADJUST PREFAULT in the menu. A display similar to the following

should appear:

7. Now we are going to use Va & Vc as the generator and bus (or line and bus) voltages respectively. Turnthe [MODIFY] knob to position the cursor over Vc, and press [SELECT].

8. Adjust the angle of Vc to be the same as Va. This places the synchronizing voltage and reference voltagein phase.

VA:000.0° vB:240.0°

vC:120.0° I1:0.0°

vA:000.0° vB:240.0°

vC:000.0° I1:000.0°



9. Increase and decrease the phase angle to determine the phase angle limit window. The relay should beoperated within the window.

10. Press [PREVIOUS] twice and select ENABLE NORMAL in the menu, unless you are going on to dothe voltage limit test in the next section.

11. Press [MODE/MENU] to exit the menu.

5.12.5.2 VOLTAGE LIMIT TEST. 1. Perform steps 1-8 in the phase angle limit test procedure if you have not already done so.2. Press [MODE/MENU] to exit the menu.3. Press [VOLTAGE] to display/adjust Vc if the [VOLTAGE] button is not illuminated.4. Increase and decrease the voltage to determine the voltage limit window. The relay should be operated

within the window.5. When you have found the limit/threshold point, you can select Φ-Φ/C-A fault type and phase to read the

voltage difference Vca.6. Select SETTINGS MODES PHASE INDIVIDUAL-ADJ-MODE ENABLE NORMAL in the menu to

turn off individual phase adjustment.

5.13 25Hz FREQUENCY REFERENCE MODE

25Hz output is available on voltage outputs and the I1-LOW or I3 current output. 25Hz output is enabledby selecting SETTINGS MODES FREQ 25Hz ON in the menu.

Multiples of 25Hz may be output by pressing [FREQ], and turning the [MODIFY] knob.

5.14 PHASE MEASUREMENT FEATURES

5.14.1 Phase Measurement Speed

Normally phase measurement is averaged over several cycles to obtain higher accuracy. However, thiscompromises on reading speed, and may be too slow for high speed tests.

A single cycle, ±1° accurate, high speed phase measurement mode is selectable for these situations. Thephase measurement speed can be selected via SETTINGS MODES PHASE MEAS in the menu.

Note that the high-speed mode is automatically used by the synchronizing mode feature.

5.14.2 Reverse Angle Display

This feature displays the reverse of the present angle (i.e. present phase angle + 180° ), which may be usefulfor directional relay testing.

The reverse angle can be displayed by first selecting EXEC REV-Φ ENABLE in the menu. This enables athird toggle for the [PHASE] button which will display the reverse angle. Note that the units annunciator inthe [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] reads “DEG+180”.



The action of the [PHASE] button is depicted in Figure 5.20. The reverse angle display is disabled if I1&I2current mode or synchronizing mode is active.

FIGURE 5.19 [PHASE] BUTTON ACTION & PHASE DISPLAY MODE

5.14.3 Phase Angle Measurement Reference

Phase angle measurement reference is selectable between voltage leading current (V-Leads-I) display, andcurrent leading voltage (I-Leads-V) display.

With the V-Leads-I selection active, the phase angle displayed is the number of degrees by which thevoltage leads the current. This is annunciated by the “DEG:V-I” units indicator in the upper left corner ofthe [MODE/MENU DISPLAY], when phase is selected.

With the I-Leads-V selection active, the phase angle displayed is the number of degrees by which the currentleads the voltage. This is annunciated by the “DEG:I-V” units indicator in the upper left corner of the[MODE/MENU DISPLAY], when phase is selected.

Example:

0-360DISPLAY

MODE

0 180DISPLAY

MODE

REV-0DISPLAY

MODE

PRESS

[PHASE]BUTTON

PRESS[PHASE]BUTTON

PRESS[PHASE]BUTTON

BUTTON[PHASE]

PRESS

MODEDISPLAY

0 180

MODEDISPLAY

0-360

REVERSE PHASE DISPLAYDISABLED (DEFAULT)

REVERSE PHASE DISPLAYENABLED

70

I

0

V

290



This setting may be selected using the OTHER DEFAULT PHASE-DISPLAY selection in the front panelmenu. The default selection is V-Leads-I. This setting is non-volatile.

Note that this setting only pertains to measurements of phase angle between voltage and current. It doesn’tpertain to phase angle measurement in I1&I2 current mode, or when synchronizing mode is on.

Phase angle programming, using the PHS#, PFI#, PFF#, PPO# commands, is still specified in terms ofdegrees by which the voltage leads the current, irrespective of the phase angle measurement referencesetting.

5.15 AUX CONTACT OUTPUT ARRANGEMENT

The mode of operation of the [AUX CONTACT] outputs can be programmed for different applications.This can be set via SETTINGS MODES AUX-CONTACT in the menu.

5.15.1 Normally Open/Normally Closed Arrangement

With NO arrangement, the [AUX CONTACT] output is normally open, and closes during fault state. Thisis the default setting.

However, in some situations, it may be desirable to invert this so that the [AUX CONTACT] output isnormally closed, and opens during fault state. Select NC arrangement in these cases.

Phase Angle Measurement Reference

Phase display mode V-Leads I Phase Measurement ReferenceDisplay

I-Leads-V PhaseMeasurement ReferenceDisplay

0-360° Phase display modeactive 70.0 290.0

DEG:V-I IST LINE DEG:I-V IST LINE

0-±180° Phase displaymode active 70.0 -70.0

DEG:V-I IST LINE DEG:I-V IST LINE



5.15.2 Breaker Simulation 52A/52B

The 52A and 52B arrangement modes allow the [AUX CONTACT] output to simulate these signals whenused along with either an external or internal DC voltage supply. This is useful for testing many relays whichrequire this signal.

The 52A selection sets the [AUX CONTACT] output closed in the prefault and fault states (breaker closed),and open in the postfault state. The 52B selection sets the [AUX CONTACT] output open in the prefaultand fault states, and closed in the postfault state (breaker open). The next figure shows typical connectionsrequired when using the MTS-1710’s DC voltage option.

FIGURE 5.20 BREAKER SIMULATION USING AUX CONTACTS

The breaker simulator (52A or 52B) function of the auxiliary contact output can be used with the breakertime feature. This will open (or close) the simulated breaker contacts at a programmable time after therelay trips (i.e. in the postfault state). Both functions are programmed via the front panel menu or the RS-232 commands. Refer to Section 5.11.1 for details on the breaker time feature.

5.15.3 Permissive & Unblock Signal Simulation

This feature allows the [AUX CONTACT_1] output to simulate a permissive or unblock signal from aremote end when used along with either an external or internal DC voltage supply. This is useful for testingcommunication-based scheme protection relays. [AUX CONTACT_2] does not support this feature.

Relay under test

52A or 52B

input


52A

52B



The PERMISSIVE selection sets the [AUX CONTACT_1] output open in the prefault and postfault states,and closes approximately 30ms after entering the fault state (permissive to allow accelerated trip). TheUNBLOCK selection sets the [AUX CONTACT_1] output closed in the prefault and postfault states, andopens approximately 30 ms after entering the fault state (removal of blocking to allow accelerated trip).

The figure below shows typical connections required when using the MTS-1710’s DC voltage option.

FIGURE 5.21 PERMISSIVE & UNBLOCK SIGNAL SIMULATOR USING AUX CONTACTS

5.15.4 Auxiliary Contact Delay

The delay time for simulating the permissive/unblock signal, using the auxiliary contacts, is programmablevia the SETTINGS MODES AUX-CONTCT AUX_CONTACT_1 DELAY selection in the front panelmenu. The default setting is 32 ms.

5.16 PHASE REVERSAL FUNCTION

The present phase angle setting (angle between the voltage and the current) can be reversed by 180° in onestep by using the EXEC REV-Φ selection in the front panel menu. This is useful for switching from aforward direction fault to a reverse direction fault when testing for a directional, reverse power or distancerelay.

Relay under test

Permissive or Unblock

input


Permissive

Unblock

delay


RS-232C INTERFACE - Section 6

RS-232C INTERFACE

The RS-232C interface allows the MTS-1710 to be used in automated testing, and provides access to thefault playback capabilities and other extended features. Virtually all the instrument functions may becontrolled via the RS-232C interface.

6.1 RS-232C CONNECTION

6.1.1 Interface Specifications

The main interface port is COM1. The COM1 RS-232C connector is a DB-25 female connector wired as aDCE (Data Communications Equipment).

Since many computers ignore the handshake signals, pins 2, 3 and 7 may be the only lines that have to beconnected to obtain a functional interface. Due to potential complexities involved, contact your computerdealer regarding cabling requirements for your specific computer or terminal.

The following data will assist you in setting up an operational interface:

Baud Rates: User selectable (300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2000, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600, 19200 or38400 baud)

Format: 8 bits, 1 stop bit, no parity Handshaking: XON/XOFF handshaking

Hardware handshaking must be used when the baud rate is set to 38.4k baudConnector: female DB-25

The COM2 port is used to control an auxiliary device, such as a protective relay.

6.1.2 RS-232C Connector Pin Assignments

6.1.2.1 COM1 PORT.Connector Pinout:DB-25 Pin# Signal Direction

2 Transmit Data To MTS-17103 Receive Data From MTS-17104 Request to Send To MTS-17105 Clear to Send From MTS-17107 Signal Ground NA8 Data Carrier Detect From MTS-1710

Note: Shielded cable should be used between the external device (computer), and the MTS-1710. Theshield should be connected to the frame (earth) ground.



Recommended cable for connection to PCs:

To MTS-1710 To PC To PC Male DB-25 Pin# Female DB-25 Female DB-9

2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 24 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 75 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 5 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 86 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 6 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 67 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 7 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 58 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1

20 - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 20 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 4

6.1.2.2 COM2 PORT.Connector Pinout:DB-25 Pin# Signal Direction

2 Transmit Data To MTS-17103 Receive Data From MTS-17104 Request to Send To MTS-17105 Clear to Send From MTS-17107 Signal Ground NA8 Data Carrier Detect From MTS-1710

Note: Shielded cable should be used between the external device (computer), and the MTS-1710.

6.1.3 Baud Rate Selection

The communications baud rate for COM1 is selected by using the menu under OTHER BAUD-RATE.See Section 5.1 for details on using the menu. The factory default setting is 9600 baud.

After selecting the baud rate, this value is retained in non-volatile memory and need not be re-selected aslong as the same baud rate is desired.

The baud rate for COM2 is selected by the C2B# command. (See Section 6.2.16) This value is retained innon-volatile memory and need not be re-selected, as long as the same baud rate is desired.

6.1.4 XON/XOFF Handshaking

The RS-232C output has XON/XOFF capability to prevent data loss when used with computers anddevices with XON/XOFF capability. Handshake control must be set to HARDWARE if 38.4 baud isselected.

The standard CONTROL-S (ASCII 19) and CONTROL-Q (ASCII 17) characters are used to pause andresume data output from the MTS-1710. These may be used manually, if desired, to pause the display.



6.2 COMMAND DESCRIPTIONS

For experimentation or learning purposes, the RS-232C interface operates in an easy-to-use,conversational or ‘terminal’ mode. When using a computer, the computer should be running terminal

emulation software such as Manta Test Systems’ Powerterm, PROCOMM or Windows ‘95 HyperTerminal.

A three-letter command is used to select any particular function. Simply type this command, followed bythe RETURN key, from the computer or terminal connected to the MTS-1710.

Some commands require an additional numerical value(s) to follow the command. This is indicated by the# character in the command summary following.

All commands may be entered in any combination of upper and lower case, although key command lettersare denoted here in upper case for clarity.

6.2.1 Control Mode Programming

Any commands intended to program the MTS-1710 can only be executed in remote mode. Remote mode isentered by sending the REM command.

When the MTS-1710 is in remote mode, the [REMOTE] led indicator will be lit. The MTS-1710 can berestored to local control by the LOC command. A manual override is also available.

By pressing and holding the [STOP/RESET] button for two seconds, the MTS-1710 can be forced out ofremote mode into local mode.

Command DescriptionREM Remote mode

• Places the MTS-1710 in remote control mode. All front panel controls will bedisabled, except for the [STOP/RESET] button. (This is a safety feature).

LOC Local mode• Places the MTS-1710 in local control mode. Front panel controls are re-enabled.

6.2.2 Fault State Control

Command Description

STR Start trigger (Enter fault state)• In dynamic operation mode, this command is the equivalent of a start trigger. In

static operation mode, this command causes the fault initial values to be appliedto the outputs. However, the timer isn’t started.

STP Stop trigger (Enter postfault state) • This command can only be executed in dynamic operation mode.



RES Reset• Returns the MTS-1710 to prefault state.• Clears any overload warnings which may exist.

PRF# Set Prefault on/off• Valid values are 0 and 1

0 - sets prefault V&I off1 - sets prefault V&I on

POF# Set Postfault on/off • Valid values are 0 and 1

0 - sets postfault V&I off1 - sets postfault V&I on

PFS Print Fault State• The MTS-1710 will return the current fault state (“PREFAULT”, “FAULT” or

“POSTFAULT”)

• Example: Ready>DYN <- select dynamic operation modeReady>PFS <- interrogate fault statePREFAULTReady>STR <- cause start triggerReady>PFS <- interrogate fault stateFAULTReady>PTS <- print timer reading2.104secReady>STP <- cause stop triggerReady>PFS <- interrogate fault statePOSTFAULTReady>

STS Print Stop Trigger Status• Returns the status of the stop trigger input.This is used to sense the presence of

a closed contact or voltage on the [EXTERNAL STOP] trigger inputs.• If a stop trigger channel is selected on the digital I/O channels, the selected

channel is also checked for closed contact or voltage.• “ACTIVE” is returned if a closed contact or voltage is sensed.• “INACTIVE” is returned if neither of the above is sensed.

WFS# Wait on Fault State• Wait for specified time or exit from FAULT state.• Waits until either the fault state changes to prefault or postfault, or until the

specified time elapses. After this, the present fault state is returned.• Valid values are 0.02 to 99.99 seconds.• During the waiting period, RS-232 command execution is suspended.• This command is meant to be executed only in FAULT state, with operation

mode set to dynamic. The delay value is programmed with the maximumexpected relay operation time.



Example:Ready>STR <-begin test sequenceReady>WFS2.5 <-wait for relay closure up to 2.5 sec. laterPOSTFAULT <-MTS-1710 returns “POSTFAULT” indicating

operation

6.2.3 Fault Mode Control

Command DescriptionFMD# Set Fault Mode

• Valid values are 0 - 140 - Φ-N A-N1 - Φ-N B-N2 - Φ-N C-N3 - Φ-Φ A-B4 - Φ-Φ B-C5 - Φ-Φ C-A6 - 3Φ-(Φ-Φ) A-B7 - 3Φ-(Φ-Φ) B-C8 - 3Φ-(Φ-Φ) C-A9 - 3Φ-(Φ-N) A-N10 - 3Φ-(Φ-N) B-N11 - 3Φ-(Φ-N) C-N12 - 2Φ-N A-B13 - 2Φ-N B-C14 - 2Φ-N C-A

FMD? Interrogate Fault Mode • Prints the present value of the fault mode (0-14). See the FMD# command

description for assignments.

6.2.4 Operation Mode Control

Command DescriptionDYN Dynamic Mode

• Sets dynamic operation mode

STT Static Mode• Sets static operation mode

6.2.5 Voltage Programming

6.2.5.1 COMMANDS.

Command Description AVA# Amplitude Va

• Sets the maximum prefault amplitude of Va• Valid values are 0 - 150.00 (volts)• This command is disallowed when Φ-Φ fault type is selected. See example for

use in Φ-Φ fault mode.



AVB# Amplitude Vb• Sets the maximum prefault amplitude of Vb• Valid values are 0 - 150.00 (volts)• This command is disallowed when Φ-Φ fault type is selected. See example for


AVC# Amplitude Vc• Sets the maximum prefault amplitude of Vc• Valid values are 0 - 150.00 (volts)• This command is disallowed when Φ-Φ fault type is selected. See example for


VPR# Voltage - Prefault• Sets the prefault voltage amplitude• For Φ-N and 2-Φ-N fault modes, specify values in volts. Valid values are 0 -

150.00 (volts)• For Φ-Φ and 3-Φ fault modes, specify value in percent. This percentage is the

percentage of the nominal Φ-N voltage. Valid values are 0-100.0 (%).• In Φ-Φ fault modes, this percentage setting is only approximate.• Note that prefault must be turned on (using the PRF1 command) for this value to

be applied to the outputs in prefault state• Note that, for 2 Φ-N fault modes, this setting changes the Φ-N values. However,

the Φ-Φ value is displayed on the MTS-1710 display.

VFI# Voltage - Fault Initial• Sets the fault initial voltage• For Φ-N and 2-Φ-N fault modes, specify values in volts. Valid values are 0 -


percentage of the nominal Φ-N voltages. Valid values are 0-100.0 (%).• In Φ-Φ fault modes, this percentage setting is only approximate. If a VFI# command is sent while in FAULT state and dynamic operation mode,

it will only take effect immediately if all ramp rates and durations are zero.Otherwise, a reset action, and a subsequent start trigger into FAULT state, isrequired to apply the new fault initial value.

• Note that, for 2-Φ-N fault modes, this setting changes the Φ-N values. However, the Φ-Φ value is shown on the MTS-1710 display.

VRR# Voltage Ramp Rate• Sets the voltage ramp rate• For Φ-N and 2-Φ-N fault modes, specify values in volts/sec. Valid values are 0 -

2000.0 (volts/sec)• For Φ-Φ and 3-Φ fault modes, specify value in %/sec. This percentage is the

percentage of the nominal Φ-N voltage. Valid values are 0-1000.0 (%/sec).• A value of 0 turns off voltage ramping• In Φ-Φ fault modes, the %/sec ramp rate setting is only approximate.

VDU# Voltage Duration• Set the voltage fault duration• Valid values are 0 - 99.999 (seconds)• A value of 0 turns off voltage fault duration.



VFF# Voltage - Fault Final• Sets the fault final voltage• For Φ-N and 2-Φ-N fault modes, specify values in volts. Valid values are 0 -


percentage of the nominal Φ-N voltage. Valid values are 0-100.0 (%).• In Φ-Φ fault modes, this percentage setting is only approximate.• Note that, for 2Φ-N fault modes, this setting changes the Φ-N values. However,

the Φ-Φ value is shown on the MTS-1710 display.

VPO# Voltage - Postfault• Sets the postfault voltage• For Φ-N and 2-Φ-N fault modes, specify values in volts. Valid values are 0 -


percentage of the nominal Φ-N voltage. Valid values are 0-100.0 (%).• In Φ-Φ fault modes, this percentage setting is only approximate.• Note that postfault must be turned on (using the POF1 command) for this value

to be applied to the outputs in postfault state• Note that, for 2Φ-N fault modes, this setting changes the Φ-N values. However,

the Φ-Φ value is displayed on the MTS-1710 display.

VDF# Voltage - Default• Sets the default Φ-N voltage on power-up• Valid values are 0 - 150.00 (volts)• This value will take effect the next time the MTS-1710 is turned on, or when

default settings are restored. (see Section 5.8.1 for details).

6.2.5.2 EXAMPLES.

The following examples show command sequences using the voltage programming commands:

Example 1 Simple Φ-N Fault

AVA70 <- set prefault amplitudes to 70VAVB70AVC70PRF1 <- prefault onPOF0 <- postfault offDYN <- dynamic operation modeFMD1 <- simulate B-N faultVFI15 <- fault amplitude 15VSTR <- initiate fault

Example 2 Simple Φ-Φ Fault

FMDO <- simulate A-N fault AVA70 <- set prefault Φ-N amplitudes to 70VAVB70



AVC70PRF1 <- prefault onPOF0 <- postfault offDYN <- dynamic operation modeFMD3 <- fault mode A-BVPR100 <- prefault amplitude at 100% of nominalVFI35 <- fault amplitude 35% of nominalSTR <- initiate fault

Example 3 Simple 3-Φ Fault

AVA70 <- set prefault Φ-N amplitudes to 70VAVB70AVC70PRF1 <- prefault onPOF1 <- postfault onDYN <- dynamic operation modeFMD7 <- fault mode 3Φ, monitoring VbcVPR100 <- prefault amplitude at 100% of nominalVPO90.1 <- postfault amplitude at 90.1% of nominalVFI26.8 <- fault amplitude 26.8% of nominalSTR <- initiate fault

Example 4 Φ-N Ramp

AVA70 <- set prefault Φ-N amplitudes to 70VAVB70AVC70PRF1 <- prefault onPOF0 <- postfault offDYN <- dynamic operation modeFMD2 <- fault mode C-NVFI60 <- initial fault amplitude at 60VVFF10 <- final fault amplitude at 10VVRR23 <- ramp rate at 23V/secSTR <- initiate fault and ramp

Example 5 Φ-Φ Ramp

FMDOAVA70 <- set prefault Φ-N amplitudes to 70VAVB70AVC7PRF1 <- prefault onPOF0 <- postfault offDYN <- dynamic operation modeFMD5 <- fault mode C-AVFI100 <- initial fault amplitude at 100% of nominalVFF15 <- final fault amplitude at 15% of nominalVRR24 <- ramp rate at 24%/secSTR <- initiate fault and ramp



6.2.6 Current Control

6.2.6.1 CURRENT CONTROL COMMANDS.

Command Description

IMD# Current Mode• Set the Current Mode.• Valid values are 0-9.

0 - I2-HARMONIC1 - I4(DC)2 - I1-HIGH3 - I1-LOW4 - I1&I25 - I3 (If the MTS-1720 is available, I3-WYE will be selected)6 - I1-HIGH-AUX7 - I1-LOW-AUX8 - I3-AUX9 - I3-PARALLEL

AI1# Amplitude I1• Sets the I1 prefault current value.• In I1-LOW current mode, valid values are 0 - 30.00 (amps).• In I1-LOW current mode with one MTS-1750 connected, valid values are 0 -

150.0 (amps).• In I1-HIGH current mode, valid values are 0 - 90.0 (amps).• In I1&I2 current mode, valid values are 0 - 65.0 (amps) for I1.• In I3 current mode, this command sets the I3 prefault level. Valid values are 0 -

30.00 (amps).• Note that prefault must be turned on (using the PRF1 command) for this value to

be applied to the outputs in prefault state.• In I3-PARALLEL current mode, this command sets the prefault current from the

MTS-1710+MTS-1720 (and optional three MTS-1750s) paralleled output.• With the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 only, valid values are 0 - 90.00 A.• With the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + three MTS-1750s, valid values are 0 -

450.0 A.• All three current channels must be paralleled together to obtain the

programmed value of current. • Each current is set to one-third of the programmed value.

IFI# Initial Fault Current• Sets the fault initial current value.• In I1-LOW current mode, valid values are 0 - 30.00 (amps).• In I1-LOW current mode with one MTS-1750 connected, valid values are 0 -

150.0 (amps).• In I1-HIGH current mode, valid values are 0 - 90.0 (amps).• In I3 and I3-WYE current modes, this command sets the I3 initial fault level.

Valid values are 0 - 30.00 (amps).• This value is only used for I1-LOW, I1-HIGH I3, and I3-WYE current modes.



• If an IFI# command is sent while in FAULT state and dynamic operation mode,it will only take effect immediately if all ramp rates and durations are zero.Otherwise, a reset action, and a subsequent start trigger into FAULT state, isrequired to apply the new fault initial value.

• In I3-PARALLEL current mode, this command sets the initial fault current fromthe MTS-1710+MTS-1720 (and optional three MTS-1750s) paralleled output.− With the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 only, valid values are 0 - 90.00 A.− With the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + three MTS-1750s, valid values are 0 -

450.0 A.− All three current channels must be paralleled together to obtain the

programmed value of current. − Each current is set to one-third of the programmed value.

IFF# Final Fault Current• Sets the fault final current value.• In I1-LOW current mode, valid values are 0 - 30.00 (amps).• In I1-LOW current mode with one MTS-1750 connected, valid values are 0 -

150.0 (amps).• In I1-HIGH current mode, valid values are 0 - 90.0 (amps).• In I3 and I3-WYE current modes, this command sets the I3 initial fault level.

Valid values are 0 - 30.00 (amps).• In I3-PARALLEL current mode, this command sets the final fault current level

from the MTS-1710+MTS-1720 (and optional three MTS-1750s) paralleledoutput.− With the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 only, valid values are 0 - 90.00 A.

− With the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + three MTS-1750s, valid values are 0 - 450.0 A.

− All three current channels must be paralleled together to obtain the programmed value of current.− Each current is set to one-third of the programmed value.

IPO# Current - Postfault• Sets the postfault current value.• In I1-LOW current mode, valid values are 0 - 30.00 (amps).• In I1-LOW current mode with one MTS-1750 connected, valid values are 0 -

150.0 (amps).• In I1-HIGH current mode, valid values are 0 - 90.0 (amps).• In I3 and I3-WYE current modes, this command sets the I3 prefault level. Valid

values are 0 - 30.00 (amps).• In I3-PARALLEL current mode, this command sets the postfault current level

from the MTS-1710+MTS-1720 (and optional three MTS-1750s) paralleledoutput. − With the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 only, valid values are 0 - 90.00 A.

− With the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + three MTS-1750s, valid values are 0 -450.0 A.

− All three current channels must be paralleled together to obtain the programmed value of current.

− Each channel is set to one-third of the programmed value.



IRR# Current - Ramp Rate• Sets the current ramp rate.• Valid values are 0 - 350.0 (amps/sec).• A value of 0 turns off current ramping.• In I3-PARALLEL current mode, this command sets the current ramp rate for the

paralleled three channels (MTS-1710+MTS-1720 and optional three MTS-1750s) output. − All three current channels must be paralleled together to obtain the programmed rate of ramp. − Valid values are 0 - 350.0 A/sec.

IDU# Current Duration• Set the current fault duration.• Valid values are 0 - 99.999 (seconds).• A value of 0 turns off current fault duration.

AI2# Amplitude I2• Set the amplitude of I2 in I1&I2 or I2-HARMONIC current modes.• Valid values are 0-30 in I1&I2 and 0-17 in I2-HARMONIC.• In I2-HARMONIC current mode, this sets the amplitude of the fundamental

component of the output current.

%HM# Percent Harmonic• Set the percentage harmonic of the I2 current output in I2-HARMONIC current

mode in the FAULT state.• Valid values are 0 - 50.0 (%)• Settable only when AHW# and AHP# are set to zero.

%HP# Percent Harmonic Prefault• Set the percentage harmonic of the I2 current output in I2-HARMONIC current

mode in the PREFAULT and POSTFAULT states.• Valid values are 0 - 50.0 (%).• Settable only when AHW# and AHP# are set to zero.

AHW# Amplitude half-wave rectified fault• Set the half-wave rectified amplitude of the I2 current output (as measured by an

average responding ammeter) in I2-HARMONIC current mode in the FAULTstate

• Valid values are 0 - 5.000 Amps.• Note: Settable only when %HM# and %HP# are set to zero.

AHP# Amplitude half-wave rectified prefault• Set the half-wave rectified amplitude of the I2 current output (as measured by an

average responding ammeter) in I2-HARMONIC current mode in thePREFAULT and FAULT states

• Valid values are 0 - 5.000 Amps.• Note: Settable only when %HM# and %HP# are set to zero.



AI4# Amplitude I4• Set the amplitude of I4 (DC current) I4-DC current mode.• Valid values are 0 - 6.00 (amps).

6.2.6.2 COMMANDS USED IN I3-WYE CURRENT MODE.

The following additional commands are used when the MTS-1720 is connected, and when I3-WYEcurrent mode is selected:

Command Description

AIA# Amplitude Ia• Sets the nominal (prefault) Ia current value.• Valid values are 0 - 30.00 (amps) in I3-WYE current mode with the MTS-1710

+ MTS-1720.• In I3-WYE current mode with the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + three MTS-1750s,

valid values are 0 - 150.0 (amps).• Note that prefault must be turned on (using the PRF1 command) for this value to

be applied to the outputs in prefault state.

AIB# Amplitude Ib• Sets the nominal (prefault) Ib current value.• Valid values are 0 - 30.00 (amps) in I3-WYE current mode with the MTS-1710



be applied to the outputs in prefault state.• This value only takes effect in I3-WYE current mode.

AIC# Amplitude Ic• Sets the nominal (prefault) Ic current value.• Valid values are 0 - 30.00 (amps) in I3-WYE current mode with the MTS-1710



be applied to the outputs in prefault state.• This value only takes effect in I3-WYE current mode.

IPR# Current - Prefault• Sets the prefault current amplitude• Specify values in Φ-N amps. • Valid values are 0 - 30.00 (amps) in I3-WYE current mode with the MTS-1710


valid values are 0 - 150.0 (amps).• This value is applied to the current outputs specified by the fault mode.• Note that prefault must be turned on (using the PRF1 command) for this value to

be applied to the outputs in prefault state• In I3-WYE current mode, the value must be specified in Φ-N amperes,

regardless of the fault mode.



6.2.6.3 EXAMPLES.

The following examples show command sequences using the current programming commands:

Example 1 Simple overcurrent testAI10.5 <- prefault amplitude to 0.5APRF1 <- prefault onPOF0 <- postfault offDYN <- dynamic operation modeIFI12 <- fault amplitude to 12ASTR <- initiate fault

Example 2 Φ-Φ fault using both current and voltage ramping

AI12.4 <- prefault current 2.4AAVA70 <- set prefault Φ-N voltage amplitudes to 70VAVB70AVC70PRF1 <- prefault onPOF0 <- postfault offDYN <- dynamic operation modeFMD3 <- fault mode B-CVPR100 <- prefault voltage at 100% of nominalVFI80 <- fault voltage 80% of nominalVFF35 <- fault voltage 35% of nominalVRR120 <- voltage ramp rate at 120%/secIFI2.4 <- initial fault current 2.4AIFF16 <- final fault current 16AIRR100 <- current ramp rate 100 amps/secSTR <- initiate fault

Example 3 Simple Φ-Φ fault in I3 current mode, with prefault and postfault outputs on

FMD0 <- select Φ-N mode to set nominal voltagesAVA70 <- set prefault Φ-N voltage amplitudes to 70VAVB70AVC70IMD5 <- I3 current modeFMD4 <- Φ-Φ B-C faultIPR0.5 <- prefault current = 0.5AIFI12 <- fault amplitude = 12AIPO1 <- postfault current = 1AVPR100 <- prefault Vbc = 121V (100% of nominal)VFI24.7 <- fault Vbc = 30V (24.7% of nominal)VPO100 <- posftfault Vbc = 121V (100% of nominal)PRF1 <- prefault onPOF1 <- postfault onDYN <- dynamic operation modeSTR <- initiate fault

NOTE: For examples of programming in I3-WYE current mode, see Section 9.6.



6.2.7 Phase Control

These phase commands set the phase angle between the monitored voltage and current (Except in I1&I2current mode, the phase between I1 and I2 is changed). Note these quantities change depending upon thecurrent mode and fault mode.

For everyday users, the MTS-1710 simplifies phase angle settings down to the phase angle of primaryinterest. When the MTS-1710 is turned on, the phase angle setting is set to zero. In most cases, the PHS#,PFI#, PFF#, and PPO# commands will intelligently set the phase angle to the desired value between thevoltage and current of interest (as selected by the fault mode).

However, in special cases, such as a Φ-Φ fault with unbalanced prefault voltages, there will be a constantdifference between the setting specified and the actual phase angle (as measured by the MTS-1710). ThePRP command is provided to allow resetting of the internal reference. This is similar to the tare concept ona scale.

In general, if the phase setting isn’t acting as expected, send the PRP command while current and voltageare on, and a valid phase reading is displayed. Then resend all the PHS#, PFI#, PFF# and PPO# settings.This should correct the phase setting to the desired values.

6.2.7.1 COMMANDS.

Command Description

PRP Preset Phase• Presets the internal phase reference to the presently monitored voltage.• This command should be sent each time the fault mode or current mode is

changed.• Current must be flowing, and a valid phase reading present, before this

command is sent.

PHS# Prefault Phase• Sets the prefault phase angle• Valid values are -360.0 to 360.0 (degrees)• Note that changing the value of the prefault phase changes the absolute value of

the fault initial, fault final, and postfault phase settings. The relative valuesbetween fault initial and prefault, fault final and prefault, and postfault andprefault, stay unchanged.

As a result, it may be necessary to reprogram the fault initial, fault final and

postfault phase using the PFI, PFF and PPO commands if the prefault phase ischanged.

• Note that for I1-LOW, I1-HIGH, I3, I3-PARALLEL, I3-WYE, I1-LOW-AUX,I1-HIGH-AUX and I3-AUX current mode, the value for the setting is alwaysthe number of degrees by which the voltage leads the current (The phase displaymode may be set differently and read a different value).



PFI# Phase -Fault Initial• Sets the fault initial phase angle• Valid values are -360 to 360 (degrees)• If a PFI# command is sent while in FAULT state and dynamic operation mode, it will only take effect immediately if all ramp rates and durations are zero. Otherwise, a reset action, and a subsequent start trigger into FAULT state, is required to apply the new fault initial value.• Note that for I1-LOW, I1-HIGH, I3, I3-PARALLEL, I3-WYE, I1-LOW-AUX,

I1-HIGH-AUX and I3-AUX current mode, the value for the setting is alwaysthe number of degrees by which the voltage leads the current (The phase displaymode may be set differently and read a different value).

PRR# Phase Ramp Rate• Sets the phase ramp rate• Valid values are 0 - ±5000.0 (degrees/sec)• A value of 0 turns off phase ramping

PDU# Phase Duration• Set the phase fault duration• Valid values are 0 - 99.999 (seconds)• A value of 0 turns off phase fault duration

PFF# Phase -Fault Final • Sets the fault final phase angle • Valid values are -360 to 360 (degrees) • Note that for I1-LOW, I1-HIGH, I3, I3-PARALLEL, I3-WYE, I1-LOW-AUX,


PPO# Phase -Postfault • Sets the postfault phase angle • Valid values are -360 to 360 (degrees) • Note that for I1-LOW, I1-HIGH, I3, I3-PARALLEL, I3-WYE, I1-LOW-AUX,


6.2.7.2 EXAMPLES.

Example 1 Simple dynamic Φ-N fault

FMD0 <- Φ-N A-N faultIMD3 <- I1-LOW current modeAVA70 <- prefault voltages at 70VAVB70AVC70AI12 <- 2.0A prefault currentPHS0



PRF1 <- prefault onPOF0 <- postfault offDPH <- display phase (optional)IFI15 <- 15A fault currentVFI40 <- 40V fault voltagePFI75 <- 75 degrees fault angle between VA & IDYN <- dynamic operation modeSTR <- initiate fault

Example 2 Recalibrate phase setting using PRP command

STT <- static operation mode to prevent trigger into postfaultFMD0 <- Φ-N A-N fault modeIMD3 <- I1-LOW current modeAVA70 <- prefault voltages at 70VAI15 <- 5.0A prefault currentPRF1 <- prefault onDPH <- display phase (optional)DLY1 <- wait one second for valid phase readingPRP <- preset phasePHS0 <- set phase to 0 (optional)AI10 <- turn current off

6.2.8 Frequency Control/Programming

6.2.8.1 COMMANDS.

Command Description

LIN Line Frequency Mode• Sets line frequency reference mode

VFQ Variable Frequency Mode• Sets variable frequency reference mode

FRQ# Prefault Frequency• Sets the prefault frequency value• Valid values are 40.000 - 80.000 (Hz)• This command only takes effect in variable frequency reference mode.

FFI# Frequency - Fault Initial• Sets the fault initial value for frequency ramping• Valid values are 40.000 - 80.000 (Hz)• If a FFI# command is sent while in FAULT state and dynamic operation mode, it

only will take effect immediately if all ramp rates and durations are zero.Otherwise, a reset action, and a subsequent start trigger into FAULT state, isrequired to apply the new fault initial value.

• This command only takes effect in variable frequency reference mode.



FRR# Frequency Ramp Rate• Sets the frequency ramp rate• Valid values are 0 - 10.0 (Hz/sec)• A value of 0 turns off frequency ramping• This command only takes effect in variable frequency reference mode.

FDU# Frequency Duration• Set the frequency fault duration• Valid values are 0 - 99.999 (seconds)• A value of 0 turns off frequency fault duration

FFF# Fault Final Frequency• Sets the fault final value for frequency ramping• Valid values are 40.000 - 80.000 (Hz)• This command only takes effect in variable frequency reference mode.

FPO# Postfault Frequency• Sets the postfault frequency value• Valid values are 40.000 - 80.000 (Hz)• This command only takes effect in variable frequency reference mode.

LHM# Line Harmonic• Sets the harmonic in line frequency reference mode• Valid values are 1 - 10

VHM# Variable Frequency Harmonic• Sets the harmonic in variable frequency reference mode (and in 25Hz frequency

reference mode)• Valid values are 1 - 10

FDF# Frequency - Default• Sets the default variable frequency on power-up• Valid values are 40.000 - 80.000 (Hz)• This value will take effect the next time the MTS-1710 is turned on, or when

default settings are restored (see Section 5.8.1 for details).

F25 25Hz Frequency Mode• Sets 25Hz frequency reference mode

6.2.8.2 EXAMPLES.

Example 1 The following command sequence performs a frequency ramp from 60Hz to 58.219Hz at0.3Hz per second.

Note that, if a stop trigger occurs, the output will change immediately to the postfault frequency value.VFQ <- select variable frequency reference modeVHM1 <- select fundamentalDYN <- dynamic operation mode for dynamic test



PRF1 <- prefault V&I onFRQ60 <- prefault frequency at 60HzFFI60 <- fault initial freq. at 60 HzFFF58.219 <- fault final freq. at 58.219 HzFRR0.3 <- frequency ramp rate at 0.3Hz/secFPO60 <- postfault frequency at 60HzSTR <- start ramp

Example 2 The following command sequence performs a frequency step from 60Hz to 62.0Hz, thenramps down at 1.6Hz/sec to 51.3Hz, and holds this value for 2.3 seconds before changing to a 59.55Hzpostfault value.

Note that, if a stop trigger occurs, the output will change immediately to the postfault frequency value.

VFQ <- select variable frequency reference modeVHM1 <- select fundamentalDYN <- dynamic operation mode for dynamic testPRF1 <- prefault V&I onPOF1 <- postfault V&I onFRQ60 <- prefault frequency at 60HzFFI62 <- fault initial freq. at 62 HzFFF51.3 <- fault final freq. at 51.3 HzFRR1.6 <- frequency ramp rate at 1.6 Hz/secFDU2.3 <- hold final value for a duration of 2.3 secondsFPO59.55 <- postfault frequency at 59.55HzSTR <- start sequence

Example 3 The following command sequence sets the output of all voltages and currents in all fault statesto 400Hz.

VFQ <- select variable frequency reference modeVHM7 <- select 7th harmonicFRQ57.143 <- select base frequency (57.143Hz x 7 = 400.0Hz)FFI57.143 <- same value for fault stateFPO57.143 and postfault state

Example 4 The following command sequence performs a frequency step from 60Hz to 59.2Hz, thenramps down to 58Hz at 0.2Hz per second, holds for 60ms, and then returns to 60Hz. Note that, if a stoptrigger occurs, the output will change immediately to the postfault frequency value.

VFQ <- select variable frequency reference modeVHM1 <- select fundamentalDYN <- dynamic operation mode for dynamic testPRF1 <- prefault V&I onFRQ60 <- prefault frequency at 60HzFFI59.2 <- fault initial freq. at 59.2 HzFFF58 <- fault final freq. at 58 Hz



FRR0.2 <- frequency ramp rate at 0.2Hz/secFDU0.06 <- frequency duration 0.06 secondsFPO60 <- postfault frequency at 60HzSTR <- start ramp

6.2.9 RS-232 Control

Command Description

LF1 Line Feed On• Sets auto line feeds (ASCII 10) after carriage returns (ASCII 13) on• In the ‘on’ state, a line feed code is sent at the end of every line output by the

instrument. Some computers, terminals and printers require this code to printoutput on successive lines.

LF0 Line Feed Off• Sets auto line feed off• This command turns off the transmission of line feeds (ASCII 10) after each

carriage return (ASCII 13)

The MTS-1710 can communicate in two conversational modes: Program mode or Terminal mode. Themode is controlled by the following two commands:

PGM Program mode• The program mode is used for direct computer control of the MTS-1710.

In this mode, characters sent to the MTS-1710 are not echoed back to theterminal or computer. Communication on the interface is effectively limited toone direction at a time.

Also, the user prompt isn’t sent, and units such as “Hz” and “deg” are not printedin response to print commands. All these features help simplify applicationsprograms.

TRM Terminal mode • The TRM command is the opposite of the PGM command and places the MTS- 1710 in the user-friendly Terminal mode. All commands are echoed, and units

are printed with all values.

This mode is used for simple tests, demonstrations, and very simple controlapplications. It’s ideal for use with the terminal emulator feature ofPowercomm.



BRT# Baud Rate • Sets the COM1 baud rate • Valid values are 0 - 11

0 - 300 baud 6 - 3600 baud1 - 600 baud 7 - 4800 baud2 - 1200 baud 8 - 7200 baud3 - 1800 baud 9 - 9600 baud4 - 2000 baud 10 - 19200 baud5 - 2400 baud 11 - 38400 baud

• The change in baud rate is effective immediately following the execution of theBRT command.

• The new setting is retained in non-volatile memory, and takes effect untilchanged again.

6.2.10 Timer & Tone Control

Command Description

XST External Timer Start• This command selects External timer start mode (see Section 5.3)

IST Internal Timer Start• This command selects Internal timer start mode (see Section 5.3)

TON# Tone Enable/Disable• This command controls the audible tone for indicating contact and voltage

sensed on the [EXTERNAL STOP] terminals, and for indicating entry intopostfault state (See Section 4.11).

It also controls the overload warning tone feature.• Valid values are 0 to 4

0 - disable tone for external stop and postfault indication1 - enable tone for external stop and postfault indication2 - disable warning tone3 - enable warning tone4 - beep tone momentarily

6.2.11 Display/Print Commands

Command Description

DCU# Display Current• Selects current on the [VALUE DISPLAY]• If no argument is specified, this command brings up the last selected current

parameter on the [VALUE DISPLAY]• DCU1 and DCU2 select I1 and I2 respectively to be displayed in I1&I2 current

mode.• DCU3, DCU4 and DCU5 selects I2, %-harmonic and DC-AMPS current

respectively to be displayed in I2-Harmonic current mode.



DFR Display Frequency• Selects frequency on the [VALUE DISPLAY]

DPH# Display Phase• Selects phase on the [VALUE DISPLAY]• If no argument is specified, this command brings up phase angle reading on the

[VALUE DISPLAY].• DPH0 selects the 0 - 360° phase display mode.• DPH1 selects the 0 - ±180° phase display mode.• DPH2 selects the reverse phase angle display.• DPH3 selects V-Leads-I phase angle measurement reference.• DPH4 selects I-Leads-V phase angle measurement reference.

DTC Display Time (cycles)• Selects the timer (cycles) reading on the [VALUE DISPLAY]

DTS Display Time (seconds) • Selects the timer (seconds) reading on the [VALUE DISPLAY]

DVO Display Voltage • Selects voltage on the [VALUE DISPLAY]

PI1 Print I1 • Prints the present value of the I1 output (or I3 output in I3 current mode) • Only valid for I1-LOW, I1-HIGH, I1&I2, I3, I1-LOW-AUX, I1-HIGH-AUX,

and I3-AUX current modes

PI2 Print I2 • Prints the present value of the I2 output (only valid for I1&I2 and I2- Harmonic

current modes)

PI4 Print I4 • Prints the present value of the I4 output (only valid for I4 current mode)

PFR Print Frequency • Prints the present value of frequency in Hz

PPH Print Phase • Prints the present value of phase angle in degrees

PTS Print Time (sec) • Prints the present timer reading (in seconds)

PTC Print Time (cycles) • Prints the present timer reading (in cycles)

PVO Print Voltage • Prints the present value of voltage (in volts)



PDI Print Displays • Prints the contents of the MTS-1710 front panel displays

HLP Print Help • Prints a summary list of available commands

PWN Print warnings • This command returns a value indicating which overload warnings are active. • A value of 0 indicates no warnings are active. • The value returned will range from 0-16,383 (in decimal), and should be

interpreted as a 14 bit value to determine the active warnings. 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 <- bit position

A 1 in a bit position will indicate an active warning. The bit position assignments are as follows:

Bit# Indicator 0 Va overload 1 Vb overload 2 Vc overload 3 I1 or I3 overload (or Ia overload in I3-WYE current mode) 4 Ib overload 5 I2 overload 6 Ic overload 7 Overtemperature warning 8 Output Overload shutdown 9 Thermal Overload shutdown10 Timing RAM check error11 Phase RAM check error12 Phase flash check error13 Timing NVRAM check error

For example, a returned value of 132 (equivalent to 00000010000100 in binary) would indicate amplifiersystem overtemperature, and Vc overload.

6.2.12 Clock/Calender Control

Command Description

RTR# Real Time Clock Reset• Resets the real time clock to 0:0:0 and date to 01-01-00

TIM# Print Time and Date• Prints the present time and date

HMS#,#,# Set Time Hours, Minutes, Seconds• Sets the real time clock, time value

MDY#,#,# Set date (Month, Day, Year)• Sets the real time clock, calendar setting• Specify the numerical values of month, day, year (e.g. MDY 11,4,91 sets the

date to Nov. 4, 1991)



6.2.13 Fault Playback Commands

6.2.13.1 COMMANDS - 8 BIT DATA.

Command Description

RCM# Playback Mode• Valid values are 0 - 3

0 - playback off1 - Internal data mode2 - Internal data repetitive mode3 - External data mode (requires Option -04)

• This command also resets (clears) the fault playback data buffer.

RCR# Playback Rate • Sets the fault playback rate. This should be set to be equal to the sample rate of

the rate of the fault waveform to be played back. • The anti-alias filter is automatically set to one half of the playback rate by this

command. • Valid values are 2.00 - 30.00 (kHz)

RCD#,#,#,# Playback Data • This command specifies one set of data points for fault playback. • The arguments specify the value of Va, Vb, Vc and I respectively (In I1-LOW

and I3 current modes). • Valid values are 0 - 255 (binary offset code) • Each successive RCD command stores the next set of data points into the MTS-

1710’s fault playback data buffer. This data buffer is reset when an RCM#command, or LOC command, is sent.

• See Section 7.3.1 for details • When the MTS-1720 is connected, and the I3-WYE current mode is selected,

the RCD command takes six arguments, and is of the form RCD#,#,#,#,#,#

NOTE: See Section 7 for complete details on use of fault playback commands.

6.2.13.2 COMMANDS - 14 BIT DATA.

Command Description

FPM# Fault Playback Mode• Valid values are 0 - 3

0 - playback off1 - Internal data mode2 - Internal data repetitive mode3 - External data mode (requires Option -04)

• This command also resets (clears) the fault playback data buffer.

FPR# Fault Playback Rate • Sets the fault playback rate. This should be set to be equal to the sample rate of

the rate of the fault waveform to be played back.



• The anti-alias filter is automatically set to one half of the playback rate by thiscommand.

• Valid values are 2.00 - 30.00 (kHz)

FPD#,#,#,# Fault Playback Data • This command specifies one set of data points for fault playback. • The arguments specify the value of Va, Vb, Vc and I respectively (In I1-LOW

and I3 current modes). • Valid values are 0 - 16,383 (binary offset code) • Each successive FPD command stores the next set of data points into the MTS-

1710’s fault playback data buffer. This data buffer is reset when an FPM#command, or LOC command, is sent.

• See Section 7.3.1 for details • When the MTS-1720 is connected, and the I3-WYE current mode is selected,

the FPD command takes six arguments, and is of the form FPD#,#,#,#,#,#

NOTE: See Section 7 for complete details on use of fault playback commands.

6.2.14 Programmable Waveform Commands

6.2.14.1 COMMANDS.

Command Description

PWC# Programmable Waveform Control • Valid values are 0 - 3

0 - programmable waveform off1 - programmable waveform on2 - reset programmable waveform data table and selects the 720 point (every 1/2

degree) 8-bit data definition mode3 - reset programmable waveform data table and selects the 1440 point (every

1/4 degree) 14-bit data definition mode

PWD# Programmable Waveform Data• This command is used to define the individual waveform data points for each

half degree (or each quarter degree if 14 bit mode is selected) in the waveform• Valid values are 1 - 255 (binary offset code) when 8 bit data definition mode is

selected

1 = - x VmaxRMS for voltages or - x ImaxRMS for current

2 = - (126/127 x VmaxRMS) for voltages or - (126/127 x ImaxRMS) forcurrent

.

.128 = 0 output

129 = (1/127 x VmaxRMS) for voltages or (1/127 x ImaxRMS) forcurrent

.

.

255 = Vmax for voltages or x Imax for current

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2



• Valid values are 1 - 16,383 (binary offset code) when 14 bit data definition modeis selected

1 = - x VmaxRMS for voltages or - x ImaxRMS for current

2 = - (8190/8191) x VmaxRMS) for voltages or - (8190/8191) x ImaxRMS) for current..8192 = 0 output

8193 = (1/8191 x VmaxRMS) for voltages or (1/8191 x ImaxRMS) for current..

16383 = Vmax for voltages or x Imax for current

6.2.14.2 USAGE.

The programmable waveform commands allow one to replace the normal sine wave voltage and currentoutputs with a user-defined waveform.

The waveform is defined by 720 consecutive data points (one for each half degree), or 1440 data points(one for each quarter degree) if the 14 bit Playback mode is selected. Waveform data points aredownloaded to the MTS-1710 using the PWD command. Once the waveform is defined and enabled, itsamplitude, frequency, harmonic and phase may be manipulated using the front panel controls.

The waveform is defined by an 8-bit or 14-bit binary offset code where 0 corresponds to the maximumnegative output, and 255 (8-bit mode) or 16383 (14-bit mode) corresponds to the maximum positiveoutput. See Section 7.3.1 for more details on this. Although the waveform is defined to 8 bit resolution, theactual output voltage/current is adjustable to 12 bit resolution by the MTS-1710’s internal control circuitry.

After the user-defined waveform is downloaded and enabled, the anti-alias filter should be setappropriately using the RCR command to ensure accurate reproduction. The rate should be set to twice thehighest frequency component of the waveform.

The programmable waveform feature may be used to perform testing using a waveform containingmultiple harmonics.

6.2.14.3 EXAMPLE - 8 BIT DATA.

The following is an example usage of the programmable waveform commands which redefine the sinewave output to a triangular wave.

To set up the programmable waveform, the following commands should be used:

REM <- remote control modePWC2 <- reset to start of waveform data tablePWD1 <- first data point, -Max output at 0 degrees!1 <- second data point (use repeat last command feature)!2 <- data point at 1 degree!3 <- data point at 1.5 degrees

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2



!3 <- data point at 2 degrees!4!5 <- data point at 3 degrees!5..etc. (note that some points are repeated due to 8-bit amplitude resolution)..!252 <- data point at 178 degrees!252 <- data point at 178.5 degrees!253 <- data point at 179 degrees!254!255 <- data point at 180 degrees (+Max output)!255!254 <- data point at 181 degrees!253!253 <- data point at 182 degrees..etc. (triangular waveform definition continued)..!5 <- data point at 356.5 degrees!5 <- data point at 357 degrees!4!3 <- data point at 358 degrees!3!2 <- data point at 359 degrees!1 <- last data point at 359.5 degrees

To enable the programmable waveform, send the following commands:

PWC1 <- enable programmable waveformRCR18.6 <- rate=18.6kHz, filter at 9.3kHzLOC <- local control mode

Now the amplitude, phase and frequency of the waveform may be controlled from the front panel (or RS-232C interface, if desired).

To return to normal sine wave output, send the following commands:

REM <- remote control modePWC0 <- programmable waveform offLOC <- return to local control mode

6.2.14.4 EXAMPLE - 14 BIT DATA.

The following is an example usage of the programmable waveform commands which redefine the sinewave output to a triangular wave.



To set up the programmable waveform, the following commands should be used:

REM <- remote control modePWC3 <- reset to start of waveform data tablePWD1 <- first data point, -Max output at 0 degrees!1 <- second data point (use repeat last command feature)!128 <- data point at 0.5 degrees!193 <- data point at 0.75 degrees!193 <- data point at 1 degree!257!321 <- data point at 1.5 degrees!321..etc. (note that some points are repeated due to 8-bit amplitude resolution)..!16379 <- data point at 179 degrees!16380 <- data point at 179.25 degrees!16381 <- data point at 179.5 degrees!16382!16383 <- data point at 180 degrees (+Max output)!16383!16382 <- data point at 180.5 degrees!16381!16381 <- data point at 181 degrees..etc. (triangular waveform definition continued)..!321 <- data point at 358.25 degrees!321 <- data point at 358.50 degrees!257!193 <- data point at 359.00 degrees!193!128 <- data point at 359.50 degrees!1 <- last data point at 359.75 degrees

To enable the programmable waveform, send the following commands:

PWC1 <- enable programmable waveformRCR18.6 <- rate=18.6kHz, filter at 9.3kHzLOC <- local control mode

Now the amplitude, phase and frequency of the waveform may be controlled from the front panel (or RS-232C interface, if desired).

To return to normal sine wave output, send the following commands:

REM <- remote control modePWC0 <- programmable waveform offLOC <- return to local control mode



6.2.15 DC Voltage Control

This section only applies to units with the DC Voltage output option.

The following commands are associated with control of the DC voltage output:

Command Description

VDC# Volts DC• Set DC voltage output• Valid values are 0, and 24 to 300 Volts • A value of zero disables the DC voltage output• Enables DC output if the value is non-zero

PVD Print Volts DC• Prints the present value of DC voltage (in volts)

DVD Display Volts DC• Selects DC voltage on the [VALUE DISPLAY]

DDF# DC Voltage Default • Sets the default DC voltage on power-up • Valid values are 0, and 24 - 300 (Volts) (250V maximum may apply on older

MTS-1710 systems) • This value will take effect the next time the MTS-1710 is turned on

6.2.16 COM2 Interface Commands

The following commands sent to the MTS-1710 COM1 port are used to control or send/receive data fromthe COM2 port:

Command Description

C2B# COM2 Baud Rate• Sets the baud rate for COM2• Valid values are 0-12. The default value is 11 (9600 baud).

0 - 50 baud 7 - 1050 baud1 - 110 baud 8 - 2400 baud2 - 134.5 baud 9 - 4800 baud3 - 200 baud 10 - 7200 baud4 - 300 baud 11 - 9600 baud5 - 600 baud 12 - 38400 baud6 - 1200 baud

• The change in baud rate is effective immediately following execution of theC2B command.

• The new setting is retained in non-volatile memory, and takes effect untilchanged again.



C2S COM2 Send • This command defines up to 70 characters of data to be transmitted out the

MTS-1710 COM2 port. • The data is enclosed in double quote characters or single quote characters. • The following example sends the word REPORT, followed by a carriage return

out COM2:

Ready>C2S“REPORT\m”

• Note that control characters must be specified by a \ character combination. Forexample, \m specifies a carriage return, and \j specifies a linefeed character. Abackslash character \ is specified by 2 backslashes, i.e.: \\.

C2C COM2 Chat• This command allows direct communication to an external device connected to

the MTS-1710’s COM2 port.

Characters received on COM2 are sent to COM1, and characters received onCOM1 are sent to COM2. The result is the host connected to COM1 will appearas if it was directly connected to the device on COM2.

• To resume normal communication with the MTS-1710, the host connected toCOM1 should send a control-Z character (decimal 26) - see C2D command tochange this. The link will be broken, and the host will resume communicationwith the MTS-1710.

• This feature will work even if COM1 and COM2 are set at different baud rates.

C2D# COM2 Chat mode disable character • Turn off chat mode with ASCII number representing the character. • For example, to use CTRL-Z to turn off COM2 chat mode, use the following

command: C2D26. • Following are other ASCII Control Codes that could be used:

CTRL - @ 00CTRL - A 01CTRL - B 02CTRL - C 03CTRL - D 04CTRL - E 05CTRL - F 06CTRL - G 07CTRL - H 08CTRL - I 09CTRL - J 10CTRL - K 11CTRL - L 12CTRL - M 13 CTRL - N 14CTRL - O 15CTRL - P 16



CTRL - Q 17CTRL - R 18CTRL - S 19CTRL - T 20CTRL - U 21CTRL - V 22CTRL - W 23CTRL - X 24CTRL - Y 25CTRL - Z 26CTRL - [ 27CTRL - \ 28CTRL - ] 29CTRL - ^ 30CTRL - _ 31

C2F# COM2 Format

• Sets the data format for the MTS-1710 COM2 port Valid values are 0 - 19

0 - even parity, 1 stop bit, 7 bits1 - even parity, 1 stop bit, 8 bits2 - even parity, 2 stop bits, 7 bits3 - even parity, 2 stop bit, 8 bits4 - odd parity, 1 stop bit, 7 bits5 - odd parity, 1 stop bit, 8 bits6 - odd parity, 2 stop bits, 7 bits7 - odd parity, 2 stop bit, 8 bits8 - space parity, 1 stop bit, 7 bits9 - space parity, 1 stop bit, 8 bits10 - space parity, 2 stop bits, 7 bits11 - space parity, 2 stop bit, 8 bits12 - mark parity, 1 stop bit, 7 bits13 - mark parity, 1 stop bit, 8 bits14 - mark parity, 2 stop bits, 7 bits15 - mark parity, 2 stop bit, 8 bits16 - no parity, 1 stop bit, 7 bits17 - no parity, 1 stop bit, 8 bits (default)18 - no parity, 2 stop bits, 7 bits19 - no parity, 2 stop bit, 8 bits

• Set this setting to match the device connected to COM2• The new setting is retained in non-volatile memory and takes effect until

changed again.

6.2.17 Other Commands

Command DescriptionCAL# Calibration

• Calibration save enable/disable • Valid values are 0-5



0 - disables saving of calibration factors into NVRAM1 - enables saving of calibration factors into NVRAM2 - reserved for factory use only3 - save MTS-1710 and MTS-1720 calibration factors into NVRAM4 - reserved for factory use only5 - reserved for factory use only

VER1 Version (MTS-1710) • Print Manta Test Systems MTS-1710 model number, firmware version and

serial number

VER2 Version (MTS-1720)• Print Manta Test Systems MTS-1720 model number, firmware version and

serial number, if it’s connected and turned on.

VER3 Status (MTS-1750)• Prints the MTS-1750 status code indicating the number of MTS 1750s detected.

Bits 0, 1 and 2 in the status code will have a value of 1 if an MTS-1750 isdetected corresponding to channels A, B & C. (e.g. a status code of 03 indicatesand MTS-1750 detected on channel A & B).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 <- bit position

A 1 in a bit position will indicate an active warning. The bit position assignmentsare as follows:

Bit# Indicator 0 1750 Detected on Ia 1 1750 Detected on Ib 2 1750 Detected on Ic 3 Incorrect number of MTS-1750’s connected for present current

mode (eg. a MTS-1750 must be connected to each of the threecurrent outputs if I3-wye mode is selected)

4 Invalid 1750 current mode 5, 6, 7 Factory use only

POS Positive Phase Sequence • Sets positive phase sequence

NEG Negative Phase Sequence• Sets negative phase sequence

FIA# Fault Incidence Angle• Set fault incidence angle control• Valid values are 0 - 359 (degrees)• A value of 360 sets FIA control to random (off)



DEF Default settings• Restores all settings to power-up default values (except DC voltage)• See Section 5.8 for details

TDR# Time Delay to Reclose• Sets the auto-reclose time delay• Valid values are 0 - 99.999 seconds

RIF# Reclose into fault• Sets the number of reclose into fault events• Valid values are 0 - 11• Default value is 0

The [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] can be programmed to display user messages and data using thefollowing commands:

DRD Display Readings Data• This command selects the multiple readings display to be shown on the

[MODE/MENU DISPLAY].• See Section 5.10.2 for a complete description of this feature.

DUD Display User Data• This command selects user data to be displayed on the [MODE/MENU

DISPLAY].

UDD User Display Data• This command defines up to 40 characters of user data to be displayed on the

[MODE/MENU DISPLAY].• The data is defined in double quote characters• The following example displays a user message on the [MODE/MENU

DISPLAY]:

Ready>UDD“Set fault voltage to 40V”Ready>DUDReady>

DMD# Display Mode Data• This command selects mode data to be displayed on the [MODE/MENU

DISPLAY].• The argument specifies the type of mode display. Valid values are 0 -15.

0 - Default mode display1 - Mode display with V÷I ratio2 - Mode display with V÷2I ratio

3 - Mode display with V÷ I ratio4 - Mode display with V÷(I + kI) ratio (Z1gnd display)5 - Mode display with I1÷I2 ratio6 - Mode display with I2÷I1 ratio

3



7 - Mode display with |I1-I2| slope ratio I1+I2

2 8 - Mode display with V÷Hz ratio9 - Mode display with kWatt reading10 - Mode display with kVar reading11 - Mode display with kVA reading12 - Automatic impedance display selection mode13 - Automatic resistance display selection mode14 - Automatic reactance display selection mode

15 - Mode display with I2 slope ratio (2I1 + I2)

[ 2 ]

Z1K# Z1 k-factor• This command sets the k-factor for the Z1gnd display mode• Valid values are - 0.999 to 20.000• The default setting is 0.

DMM# Dynamic Measurement Mode• Sets the dynamic measurement mode• Valid values are 0 - 2

0 - Auto1 - RMS2 - Peak

• See Section 5.7 for a detailed description of these modes.• Note: RES command must be sent prior to switching measurement modes.

SYN# Synchronizing Mode• Enable/Disable synchronizing mode• Valid values are 0 and 1

0 - Synchronizing mode off1 - Synchronizing mode on

• See Section 5.5 for a detailed description of this mode.

DLY# Delay• Delay command execution• Delays execution of any further commands for a specified time• Valid values are 0 - 99.999 seconds. Values less than 0.02 seconds are rounded

down to 0.0 seconds.

PCF Print Configuration• Print equipment configuration code• Returns 1 if only the MTS-1710 is connected.• Returns 2 if the MTS-1710 and MTS-1720 are connected.

PHT Phasor Table• Print the last settings of all AC outputs in a phasor table format.• Example:

Ready>PHTVA,069.27,000.0



VB,069.27,240.0VC,069.27,120.0I1,005.04,030.0Ready>

The first item in the line is the output. The first number is the magnitude in voltsor amps, and the second number is the absolute phase angle in degrees.

• Note that the currents values in I3-WYE current mode, and the voltage values,are the settings, and not measured values. The phasors, which are output, willchange, depending upon the current mode.

• Manta Test Systems’ MTS-2100 Powerscope program uses this to produce areal-time display of the phasors.

AXC#,# AUX Contacts Arrangement• First argument sets the AUX contact output arrangement. Valid values are 0 - 5:

0 - NO contacts (default)1 - NC contacts2 - 52A signal simulation3 - 52B signal simulation4 - Permissive signal simulation (not supported by AUX CONTACT_2)5 - Unblock signal simulation (not supported by AUX CONTACT_2)

• Second argument (optional ) specifies the contact output. Valid values are 1 or 2.Default value: 1 i.e. [AUX CONTACT_1]

PUD# • Permissive/unblock DelayPrograms the delay time for the permissive/unblock signal simulation usingthe auxiliary contacts.

• Valid values: 0.000 -20.000 seconds• Default value: 0.032 sec

BKT# Breaker Time

• Sets the breaker time• Valid values are 0 - 5.000 (seconds)

PFC# Postfault Control• Sets postfault control features• Valid values are 0 - 3

0 - 3Φ trip type, line side PT’s1 - 1Φ trip type, line side PT’s2 - 3Φ trip type, bus side PT’s3 - 1Φ trip type, bus side PT’s

RET# Remote End Trip Time• Sets the remote end trip simulation time• Valid values are 0 - 20.000 (seconds)

PMM# Phase Measurement Mode• Sets the phase measurement mode• Valid values are 0-1

0 - normal speed1 - high speed



6.3 RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MANUAL SETTINGS AND RS-232C COMMANDS

The RS-232C command directly sets maps to various manual settings on the MTS-1710. The MTS-1710settings map is shown here with the blanks filled in with the corresponding three-letter command(s) whichcontrol the particular setting. The actual command is shown underlined for clarity.

6.4 COMMAND REPEAT FACILITY

The last command can be repeated by using the ! (exclamation mark) character. This is particularly usefulfor saving transmission time on commands used for sending fault data and waveform data.

Example 1: The following command sequence polls the MTS-1710 status five times.

PFS!!!!!

MTS-1710 Settings Map

Fault Type FMD# Operation mode STT/DYN Freq. reference mode VFQ/LIN

Fault Phase FMD# Current mode IMD# Harmonic VHM#/LHM#

Parameter


OFF Initial Ramp Rate Duration Final OFF

VAN [V] AVA# - - - - -

VBN [V] AVB# - - - - -

VCN [V] AVC# - - - - -

V [V] VPR# VFI# VRR# VDU# VFF# VPO#

I1 or I3 [A] AI1# IFI# IRR# IDU# IFF# IPO#

Phase [deg] PHS# PFI# PRR# PDU# PFF# PPO#

Freq. [Hz] FRQ# FF|# FRR# FDU# FFF# FPO#

I2 current [A] AI2# Special Modes and Settings (via menu)

I2 %harmonic %HM# Timer Start Mode IST/XST Fault incidence angle FIA#

I4 [DC amps] AI4# Dynamic Meas. Mode DMM# Synchronizing mode SYN#

Phase Sequence POS/NEG Auto-reclose delay TDR#



Example 2: The following command sequence steps the prefault current to three different values:

PRF1 <- turn prefault onRES <- return to prefault stateAI11 <- set prefault current to 1A!2 <- step prefault current to 2A!5 <- step to 5A!2.5 <- step to 2.5A

6.5 COMMAND SUMMARY

6.5.1 Control Mode Programming

REM Remote Control modeLOC Local control mode

6.5.2 Fault State Control

STP Stop trigger (Enter postfault state)STR Start trigger (Enter fault state)RES Reset (Return to prefault state)POF# Postfault on/offPRF# Prefault on/offPFS Print fault stateSTS Print stop trigger statusWFS# Wait on fault state

6.5.3 Operation Mode Control

DYN Dynamic Operation ModeSTT Static Operation Mode

6.5.4 Fault Mode Control

FMD# Set Fault Mode

6.5.5 Voltage Programming

AVA# Set Nominal VaAVB# Set Nominal VbAVC# Set Nominal VcVRR# Set voltage ramp rateVPR# Set voltage - prefaultVPO# Set voltage - postfaultVFI# Set voltage - fault initialVDU# Set voltage - durationVFF# Set voltage - fault finalVDF# Set voltage - default



6.5.6 Current Control

IMD# Set Current ModeAI1# Set prefault current (I1 or I3)IDU# Set current durationIFI# Set current - fault initialIRR# Set current ramp rateIFF# Set current - fault finalIPO# Set current - postfaultAHW Amps half wave faultAHP Amps half wave prefault%HM# Set percent harmonic -fault%HP# Set percent harmonic -prefaultAI2# Set amplitude of I2AI4# Set amplitude of I4AIA# Set nominal Ia currentAIB# Set nominal Ib current (I3-WYE current mode only)AIC# Set nominal Ic current (I3-WYE current mode only)IPR# Set prefault current

6.5.7 Phase Control

PDU# Set phase durationPRP Preset phasePRR# Set phase ramp ratePHS# Set phase - prefaultPFI# Set phase - fault initialPFF# Set phase - fault finalPPO# Set phase - postfault

6.5.8 Frequency Control/Programming

LIN Line frequency reference modeVFQ Variable frequency reference modeFRQ# Set Frequency - prefaultFFI# Set Frequency - fault initialFFF# Set Frequency - fault finalFRR# Set Frequency ramp rateFDU# Set Frequency durationFPO# Set Frequency - postfaultLHM# Set Line harmonicVHM# Set variable frequency harmonicFDF# Set Frequency - defaultF25 25Hz frequency reference mode

6.5.9 RS-232 Control

LF0 Auto line feed offLF1 Auto line feed on



TRM Terminal modePGM Program modeBRT# Set baud ratePRT# Printer echo (on/off)

6.5.10 Timer & Tone Control

XST External timer startIST Internal timer startTON# Tone enable/disable

6.5.11 Display/Print Commands

PI1 Print I1PI2 Print I2PI4 Print I4PFR Print FrequencyPPH Print PhasePTS Print time (sec)PTC Print time (cycles)PVO Print voltagePWN Print warningsPDI Print displaysDCU# Display currentDFR Display frequencyDPH# Display phaseDTC Display time (cycles)DTS Display time (seconds)DVO Display voltageHLP Print Help

6.5.12 Clock/Calender Control

RTR Real time clock resetTIM Print date & timeHMS#,#,# Set time HH,MM,SSMDY#,#,# Set date MONTH,DAY,YEAR

6.5.13 Fault Playback & Programmable Waveform Commands

6.5.13.1 COMMANDS FOR 8-BIT FAULT PLAYBACK.

RCD#,#,#,# Playback dataRCM# Playback modeRCR# Playback rate



6.5.13.2 COMMANDS FOR 14-BIT FAULT PLAYBACK.

FPD#,#,#,# Fault Playback DataFPM# Fault Playback ModeFPR# Fault Playback Rate

6.5.13.3 PROGRAMMABLE WAVEFORM COMMANDS.

PWC# Programmable waveform controlPWD# Programmable waveform data

6.5.14 Individual Phase & Amplitude Programming Commands

PAM# Phase Adjustment ModePHS#,#,# Set individual phase valueAAM# Amplitude adjustment modeAVA#,# Amplitude Va individual valueAVB#,# Amplitude Vb individual valueAVC#,# Amplitude Vc individual valueAI1#,# Amplitude I1 (or I3) individual valueAI2#,# Amplitude I2 individual valueAIA#,# Amplitude Ia individual valueAIB#,# Amplitude Ib individual valueAIC#,# Amplitude Ic individual value

6.5.15 DC Voltage Control Commands

VDC# Volts DCPVD Print Volts DCDVD Display Volts DCDDF# Set default DC voltage

6.5.16 COM2 Interface Commands

C2B# COM2 Baud rateC2S”” COM2 SendC2C COM2 ChatC2F# COM2 FormatC2D# COM2 Chat mode disable character

6.5.17 Other Commands

CAL# Calibration save enable/disableVER Print version & serial No.NEG Negative phase sequencePOS Positive phase sequenceFIA# Fault incidence angleDEF Default settingsDMD# Display mode dataZ1K# Z1 K-factor



DRD Display Readings DataDUD Display user dataUDD”” User display dataDMM# Dynamic measurement modeSYN# Synchronizing modeTDR# Time Delay to RecloseRIF# Reclose into fault eventsDLY# DelayPCF Print configurationPHT Phasor tableAXC# Aux contact arrangementPUD# Permissive/unblock delayBKT# Breaker timePFC# Postfault controlRET# Remote end tripPMM# Phase measurement mode

6.6 PROGRAMMING HINTS

1. All control commands should be sent in remote control mode.

2. An automated control program should initiate control by sending the following command sequence:

<CR> <- empty line (carriage return) to clear any partially sent previous commandPGM <- select program modeLF0 <- turn off line feedsREM <- change to remote control

3. Certain commands are only allowable in certain modes, or may be interpreted by the MTS-1710differently in different modes. This means that, when programming a sequence, the operation mode,fault mode, and current mode should be selected first (using the STT/DYN, FMD, and IMDcommands).

Then any special modes and settings, such as synchronizing mode or fault incidence angle, should beset up. Then, all parameter programming should be done (i.e. voltage, current, phase, frequencysettings). Finally an STR command is given to start a programmed sequence.

4. A 0.2 second delay should be added before the execution of a STR command to ensure all MTS-1710internal operations have been completed before entering the FAULT state.

6.7 INDIVIDUAL PHASE AND AMPLITUDE PROGRAMMING

The amplitude and phase of all AC voltage and current outputs can be independently programmed using“Individual Phase Adjustment Mode” and “Individual Amplitude Adjustment Mode”.

When these two combined modes are set, the MTS-1710 doesn’t use its own intelligence to set faultcurrents, voltages and phase angles to simulate standard faults. All settings must be set by the appropriateRS-232 commands.



Normally it’s possible to specify each state (prefault, fault, postfault) using as few as three quantities.Using individual phase and amplitude programming, up to 12 quantities must be specified for each state.This is a level of programmability between normal RS-232 commands and fault playback.

Individual phase and amplitude programming allows simulation of non-standard faults, and faults withnon-zero source impedance. Simulation of standard or “classical” faults for relay testing does NOT requireindividual phase and amplitude programming. Instead, use the normal command set which is summarizedin Sections 6.5.1 to 6.5.11.

6.7.1 Programming Individual Phase/Amplitude for the MTS-1710

6.7.1.1 INDIVIDUAL PHASE/AMPLITUDE SETTINGS MAP.

The following settings map shows the RS-232 commands associated with the individual phase andamplitude settings for the MTS-1710:

* I2-Harmonic and I1&I2 current modes only

MTS-1710 Settings Map (Individual Phase/Amplitude Mode)


Fault Phase FMD# Current mode IMD# Harmonic VHM#/LHM#

Amplitude adjust mode AAM1 Phase adjust mode PAM1

Parameter


PRF# POF#

Amplitude Phase Amplitude Phase Amplitude Phase

VA AVA#,0 PHS#,0,1 AVA#,1 PHS#,1,1 AVA#,2 PHS#,2,1

VB AVB#,0 PHS#,0,2 AVB#,1 PHS#,1,2 AVB#,2 PHS#,2,2

VC AVC#,0 PHS#,0,3 AVC#,1 PHS#,1,3 AVC#,2 PHS#,2,3

I1 or I3 AI1#,0 PHS#,0,4 AI1#,1 PHS#,1,4 AI1#,2 PHS#,2,4

I2* AI2#,0 PHS#,0,5 AI2#,1 PHS#,1,5 AI2#,2 PHS#,2,5

Freq. [Hz] FRQ# FFI# FPO#

Special Modes and Settings (via menu)

Timer Start Mode IST/XST Fault incidence angle FIA#

Dynamic Meas. Mode DMM# Synchronizing mode SYN0

Auto-reclose delay TDR#



6.7.1.2 INDIVIDUAL PHASE PROGRAMMING COMMANDS.

Command Description

PAM# Phase Adjustment Mode• Set Phase Adjustment mode• Valid values are 0 - 2.

0 - Normal1 - Individual Voltage2 - Individual Current

• Under remote control, “Individual Voltage” or “Individual Current” phaseadjustment modes are identical. Under local front panel control, these modesallow adjustment of phase angle of individual voltages and currentsrespectively.

• See Section 5.12.2 for more details on individual phase adjustment modes.

PHS#,#,# Individual Phase• Set individual phase value• First argument is the phase value. Valid values are -360.0 to 360.0° • Second argument specifies the fault state. Valid values are 0 - 2

0 - prefault phase1 - fault phase2 - postfault phase

• Third argument specifies the output. Valid values are 1 - 5.1 - Va output2 - Vb output3 - Vc output4 - I1 (or I3) output5 - I2 output (I1&I2 or I2-HARMONIC current mode only)

• For example, to set the postfault phase of Vc to 201.5°, use the command:PHS201.5,2,3

• This command is only valid in “Individual Voltage” or “Individual Current”phase adjustment modes.

• This command specifies an absolute phase angle setting. The reference for thissetting is the internal reference of the MTS-1710. This is unlike the usual use ofthe PHS# command which allows setting of the phase relative to the current.

• See the table in Section 6.7.1.1 for all combinations of this command.

6.7.1.3 INDIVIDUAL AMPLITUDE PROGRAMMING COMMANDS.

Command Description

AAM# Amplitude Adjustment Mode• Set Amplitude Adjustment mode• Valid values are 0 and 1

0 - Normal1 - Individual

• When individual amplitude adjust mode is set, all usual amplitude adjustments,except for prefault Φ-N settings, will be disabled.



AVA#,# Amplitude Va• Set individual Va amplitude• First argument is amplitude. Valid values are 0 - 150.00 volts• Second argument specifies the fault state. Valid values are 0 - 2.

0 - prefault Va1 - fault Va2 - postfault Va

• This command is only valid in individual amplitude adjustment mode.

AVB#,# Amplitude Vb• Set individual Vb amplitude• First argument is amplitude. Valid values are 0 - 150.00 volts• Second argument specifies the fault state. Valid values are 0 - 2.

0 - prefault Vb1 - fault Vb2 - postfault Vb


AVC#,# Amplitude Vc• Set individual Vc amplitude• First argument is amplitude. Valid values are 0 - 150.00 volts.• Second argument specifies the fault state. Valid values are 0 - 2.

0 - prefault Vc1 - fault Vc2 - postfault Vc


AI1#,# Amplitude I1 or I3• Set individual I1 or I3 amplitude• First argument is amplitude. Valid values are:

0 - 30.000 amps for I1-LOW or I3 current modes0 - 60.000 amps for I1&I2 current mode0 - 90.000 amps for I1-HIGH current mode

• Second argument specifies the fault state. Valid values are 0 - 2.0 - prefault I1 (or I3)1 - fault I1 (or I3)2 - postfault I1 (or I3)


AI2#,# Amplitude I2• Set individual I2 amplitude• First argument is amplitude. Valid values are 0 - 30.0 amps in I1&I2 mode or 0 -

17.0 in I2-HARMONIC.• Second argument specifies the fault state. Valid values are 0 - 2.

0 - prefault I21 - fault I22 - postfault I2

• This command is only valid in individual amplitude adjustment mode.• This command is only valid in I1&I2 and I2-HARMONIC current modes.



Note that the following commands are equivalent:

AVA#,0 = AVA#AVB#,0 = AVB#AVC#,0 = AVC#AI1#,0 = AI1#

6.7.1.4 EXAMPLES.

Example 1 The following example simulates a B phase fault on a non-zero source impedance system.

The following commands should be sent (read in left to right, top to bottom order) to generate this test:

REMFMD1 DYN IMD5LIN LHM1AAM1 PAM1PRF1 POF1AVA67.15,0 PHS120,0,1 AVA71.95,1 PHS125.3,1,1 AVA67.15,2 PHS120,2,1AVB67.15,0 PHS0,0,2 AVB32.84,1 PHS350.9,1,2 AVB67.15,2 PHS0,2,2AVC67.15,0 PHS240,0,3 AVC71.05,1 PHS234.2,1,3 AVC67.15,2 PHS240,2,3AI10,0 PHS0,0,4 AI111.75,1 PHS287.2,1,4 AI10,2 PHS0,2,4

An STR command will initiate the fault.

MTS-1710 Settings Map Example (Individual Amplitude/Phase Mode)

Fault Type Φ−N Operation mode

Dynamic Freq. reference mode LINE

Fault Phase B-N Current mode I3 Harmonic 1

Amplitude adjust mode

Indiv. Phase adjust mode Indiv.

Parameter


ON ON


VA 67.15 120.0 71.95 125.3 67.15 120.0

VB 67.15 0.0 32.84 350.9 67.15 0.0

VC 67.15 240.0 71.05 234.2 67.15 240.0

I1 or I3 0.0 0.0 11.75 287.2 0.0 0.0

I2 - - - - - -

Freq. [Hz] - - -



Example 2:

This example shows how the MTS-1710 can be programmed to simulate 3Φ voltage + 3Φ current output.

Three currents are simulated by using a T-connection in I1&I2 current mode. I1 and I2 spaced 90° apart,and I2 is connected in reverse to the 3rd current coil of a 3Φ relay. An open delta 3Φ voltage can be set upusing VA and VB spaced 60° apart.

The following example shows a 3Φ fault with prefault load present and no postfault outputs:


REMFMD6 DYN IMD4LIN LHM1AAM1 PAM1PRF1 POF0AVA120,0 PHS-150,0,1 AVA30,1 PHS-150,1,1AVB120,0 PHS-90,0,2 AVB30,1 PHS-90,1,2AI1.5,0 PHS-6,0,4 AI15,1 PHS-60,1,4AI2.5,0 PHS84,0,5 AI25,1 PHS30,1,5



Fault Type 3Φ Operation mode Dynamic Freq. reference mode LINE

Fault Phase A-B Current mode I1 & I2 Harmonic 1

Amplitude adjust mode Indiv. Phase adjust mode Indiv.

Parameter


ON OFF


VA 120.0 -90.0 30.0 -90.0 - -

VB 120.0 -150.0 30.0 -150.0 - -

VC - - - - - -

I1 or I3 0.5 -6.0 5.0 -60.0 - -

I2 0.5 84.0 5.0 30.0 - -

Freq. [Hz] - - -



The VA, VB and VN output terminals provide an open-delta 3Φ voltage in this example.

The phase relationships between the outputs in this example are shown in the following example:


When using individual phase and amplitude programming, the following should be noted:

If fault incidence angle control is set to a specific angle, the MTS-1710 will change from prefault to faultstate when the Va output reaches the specified FIA.

The fault duration is normally indefinite (until a stop trigger or reset action occurs). It can be limited to aspecified time by setting the voltage, current and phase duration to the same time.

For example, if a 1.28 second fault duration was desired, then the following commands should be sent:

VDU1.28IDU1.28PDU1.28FDU1.28

Voltage, current and phase ramps may interfere with the individual phase and amplitude settings. Thismeans that all ramps should be turned off when using individual phase and amplitude programming withthe following commands:

VRR0IRR0PRR0

Synchronizing mode should be turned off when using individual amplitude and phase programming.

6.7.2 Programming Individual Phase/Amplitude for the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720

When the MTS-1720 is connected to the MTS-1710--and is active--(I3-WYE current mode selected), theindividual phase and amplitude can be programmed for full 3Φ voltage and current.

Simulated 3-phase current using T connection

VB

VA

I1

I2

-I2

Open-deltavoltage



6.7.2.1 INDIVIDUAL PHASE/AMPLITUDE SETTINGS MAP.

The following settings map shows the RS-232 commands associated with the MTS-1710 + slave currentunit when operating in the I3-WYE (true 3Φ) current mode:

6.7.2.2 INDIVIDUAL PHASE PROGRAMMING COMMANDS.

The PAM# command, described in Section 6.7.1.2, is the same for use with the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720Two channel source. The PHS#,#,# command is extended to handle three-phase current, as follows:

Command Description

PHS#,#,# Individual Phase• Set individual phase value• First argument is the phase value. Valid values are -360.0 to 360.0°.• Second argument specifies the fault state. Valid values are 0 -2.

0 - prefault phase1 - fault phase2 - postfault phase

• Third argument specifies the output. Valid values are 1 - 6.

MTS-1710 Settings Map (Individual Phase/Amplitude Mode)


Fault Phase FMD# Current mode IMD5 Harmonic VHM#/LHM#

Amplitude adjust mode AAM1 Phase adjust mode PAM1

Parameter


PRF# POF#


VA AVA#,0 PHS#,0,1 AVA#,1 PHS#,1,1 AVA#,2 PHS#,2,1

VB AVB#,0 PHS#,0,2 AVB#,1 PHS#,1,2 AVB#,2 PHS#,2,2

VC AVC#,0 PHS#,0,3 AVC#,1 PHS#,1,3 AVC#,2 PHS#,2,3

IA AI1#,0 PHS#,0,4 AIA#,1 PHS#,1,4 AIA#,2 PHS#,2,4

IB AIB#,0 PHS#,0,5 AIB#,1 PHS#,1,5 AIB#,2 PHS#,2,5

IC AIC#,0 PHS#,0,6 AIC#,1 PHS#,1,6 AIC#,2 PHS#,2,6

Freq. [Hz] FRQ# FFI# FPO#

Special Modes and Settings (via menu)

Timer Start Mode IST/XST Fault incidence angle FIA#

Dynamic Meas. Mode DMM# Synchronizing mode SYN0

Auto-reclose delay TDR#



1 - Va output2 - Vb output3 - Vc output4 - Ia output5 - Ib output 6 - Ic output

• For example, to set the fault phase of Ib to 68.0°, use the command: PHS68,1,5 • This command is only valid in “Individual Voltage” or “Individual Current”

phase adjustment modes.• This command specifies an absolute phase angle setting. The reference for this

setting is the internal reference of the MTS-1710. This is unlike the usual use ofthe PHS# command, which allows setting of the phase relative to any selectedcurrent.

• See the table in Section 6.7.2.1 for all combinations of this command.

6.7.2.3 INDIVIDUAL AMPLITUDE PROGRAMMING COMMANDS.

The AAM#, AVA#,#, AVB#,#, AVC#,# commands, described in Section 6.7.1.3, are still valid for usewith the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 Two Channel current source.

Programming the current outputs are now performed using the following commands. Note that thesecommands are only available with the MTS-1720 Two Channel current source. In addition, I3-WYEcurrent mode must be selected.

AIA#,# Amplitude IA• Set individual Ia amplitude• First argument is amplitude. Valid values are 0 - 30.0 amps.• Second argument specifies the fault state. Valid values are 0 -2.

0 - prefault Ia1 - fault Ia2 - postfault Ia

AIB#,# Amplitude Ib• Set individual Ib amplitude• First argument is amplitude. Valid values are 0 - 30.0 amps.• Second argument specifies the fault state. Valid values are 0 - 2.

0 - prefault Ib1 - fault Ib2 - postfault Ib

• This command is only valid for I3-WYE current mode.

AIC#,# Amplitude Ic• Set individual Ic amplitude• First argument is amplitude. Valid values are 0 - 30.0 amps.• Second argument specifies the fault state. Valid values are 0 - 2.

0 - prefault Ic1 - fault Ic2 - postfault Ic

• This command is only valid for I3-WYE current mode.



Note: The following commands are equivalent: AIA#,0 = AIA# = AI1#,0 = AI1#

AIB#,0 = AIB#AIC#,0 = AIC#

6.7.2.4 EXAMPLES.

Example 1: The following example simulates C-A-G fault, with prefault and postfault load, on a systemwith non-zero source impedance.


REM

FMD14 DYN IMD5LIN LHM1AAM1 PAM1PRF1 POF1AVA67.32,0 PHS236.2,0,2 AVA28.89,1 PHS-130.5,1,1 AVA67.32,2 PHS236.2,2,1AVB67.32,0 PHS116.2,0,2 AVB32.55,1 PHS117.0,1,2 AVB67.32,2 PHS116.2,2,2AVC67.32,0 PHS356.2,0,3 AVC73.62,1 PHS-3.9,1,3 AVC67.32,2 PHS245.4,2,4AIA1.96,0 PHS245.4,0,4 AIA16.62,1 PHS172.9,1,4 AIA1,2 PHS245.4,2,4AIB1.96,0 PHS125.4,0,5 AIB13.73,1 PHS27.7,1,5 AIB1,2 PHS125.4,2,5 AIC1.96,0 PHS5.4,0,6 AIC2.03,1 PHS-2.2,1,6 AIC1,2 PHS5.4,2,6



Fault Type 2Φ−N Operation mode STATIC Freq. reference mode LINE

Fault Phase C-A Current mode I3-WYE Harmonic 1

Amplitude adjust mode Indiv. Phase adjust mode Indiv.

Parameter


ON ON


VA 67.32 236.2 28.89 -130.5 67.32 236.2

VB 67.32 116.2 32.55 117.0 67.32 116.2

VC 67.32 356.2 73.62 -3.9 67.32 356.2

IA 1.96 245.4 16.62 172.9 1.0 245.4

IB 1.96 145.4 13.73 27.7 1.0 125.4

IC 1.96 125.4 2.03 -2.2 1.0 5.4

Freq. [Hz] - - -




When using individual phase and amplitude programming for the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 Two channelcurrent source, the same special notes apply, as described in Section 6.7.1.5.


FAULT PLAYBACK - Section 7

FAULT PLAYBACK

Complete re-generation of pre-recorded three-phase voltage and a single phase current are possible usingthe MTS-1710.

For full three-phase current capability, the MTS-1720 is required, and the system should be set in the I3-WYE current mode.

7.1 SPECIFICATIONS

Current Amplifier bandwidth: 0 - 10kHz (load dependent)typical: 10 kHz for 0.1 ohm load

7.5 kHz for 1 ohm loadVoltage Amplifier bandwidth: 0 - 7kHzSample rate: 2 - 30 kHz (programmable)

(Accuracy: ±0.2% for rates <10kHz, ±0.6% for rates >10kHz)Record length: 60,000 samples per phase (600 cycles at 60Hz and 6kHz sample rate)Resolution: 8 bit dynamic + 12 bit scaling, or

14 bit dynamic + 16 bit scalingOutput range: ±230.5V peak, voltage outputs

±42.4A peak, current outputs

For greater resolution, speed and length, the external analog input may be used. The only remainingrestriction will be the amplifier bandwidth and output range. This allows an external computer with D/Acapabilities to be connected to the instrument. Provision for external trigger and timing with external analoginput may be accommodated.

7.2 FAULT PLAYBACK MODES

7.2.1 Internal Data Mode

In the internal data mode, the fault data is stored in the internal memory of the MTS-1710. The data can be“played back” at the appropriate high voltage and current levels upon a start trigger.

Basic operation of a fault playback test involves the following:

• Setup the MTS-1710 modes for fault playback• Download the fault data for the voltage and current signals from an external computer to the

MTS-1710 via the RS-232C interface in an ASCII format.• Start recording equipment, if desired• Arm the MTS-1710 for fault data output• Provide START trigger to start simulation

The maximum record length (in cycles) which can be reconstructed in this mode is given by:

Length [cycles] = 60,000 x line freq [Hz] sample freq [Hz]



For example, the length is typically 80 cycles at 60Hz for a 6kHz sample rate.

7.2.2 Internal Data Repetitive Mode

This mode is the same as the Internal Data Mode, except that the fault data is repeated continuously until astop trigger or reset action occurs.

7.2.3 External Data Mode

In the external data mode, the fault data is stored in the memory of an external computer. The externalcomputer must have its own four channel D/A converter, and provide the MTS-1710 with low level analogsignals.

The MTS-1710, in this mode, operates primarily as a power amplifier system. This allows playback of long-time period waveforms, or playback of waveforms with high resolution.

This mode is only available with the low level input option (Option -04).

7.3 FAULT DATA FORMAT

7.3.1 General Data Format

The fault waveform is specified by a maximum amplitude value, and a series of data points. The maximumamplitude value is specified by the AVA, AVB, AVC, AIA, AIB and AIC commands.

The format is best explained using the following example.

7.3.1.1 EXAMPLE FOR MTS-1710 ONLY - 8 BIT.

When using the MTS-1710 only, the following example command sequence specifies the maximum RMSamplitude output from each of the four channels:

AVA70AVB92.5AVC72AIA20.0

The maximum output range is ±1.414 times the maximum RMS amplitude. This defines the output rangeas approximately ±99.0V on Va, ±130.8V on Vb, ±101.8V on Vc, and ±28.3A on the current.

The AVA, AVB and AVC commands accept values from 0 to 150.0 (volts). The AIA command acceptsvalues from 0 to 30.00 (amps).

After the maximum range is defined, the actual waveform within the ±maximum limits is defined by an 8bit offset binary value.

For voltage outputs: Vout = D - 128 x Vmax RMS where 1 ‹ D ‹ 255 127

2



For current outputs: Vout = D - 128 x Imax RMS where 1 ‹ D ‹ 255 127

Playback Voltage CurrentData Value Output Output 255 Vmax RMS Imax RMS

254 126 Vmax RMS 126 Imax RMS 127 127

. . 129 1 Vmax RMS 1 Imax RMS

127 127

128 0 0

127 - 1 Vmax RMS - 1 Imax RMS 127 127

. . 1 - Vmax RMS - Imax RMS

The playback data values are specified in the RCD command. For example, if the maximum RMSamplitudes were specified as, in the previous example, to be 70.0V on Va, 92.5V on Vb, 72.0V on Vc, and20.0A on the current, the following commands specify three consecutive samples.

Note that the voltage and current values are instantaneous values.

Command Va(V) Vb(V) Vc(V) I(A)RCD128,45,176,201 0.0 -85.49 38.48 16.26RCD130,44,177,202 1.56 -86.52 39.29 16.48RCD131,40,178,209 2.34 -90.64 40.09 18.04

7.3.1.2 EXAMPLE FOR THE MTS-1710+MTS-1720 - 8 BIT.

When both the MTS-1710 and MTS-1720 are used for 3Φ-voltage/3Φ-current fault playback, the followingexample command sequence specifies the maximum RMS amplitude output from each of the four channels:

AVA70AVB92.5AVC72AIA20.0AIB10.4AIC6.9

The maximum output range is ±1.414 times the maximum RMS amplitude. This defines the output rangeas approximately ±99.0V on Va, ±130.8V on Vb, ±101.8V on Vc, ±28.3A on Ia, ±14.7A on Ib, and ±9.76Aon Ic.

2

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2



The AVA, AVB and AVC commands accept values from 0 to 150.0 (volts). The AIA, AIB and AICcommands accept values from 0 to 30.0 (amps).





254 126 Vmax RMS 126 Imax RMS 127 127


127 127

128 0 0

127 - 1 Vmax RMS - 1 Imax RMS 127 127

. .

1 - Vmax RMS - Imax RMS

The playback data values are specified in the FPD command. For example, if the maximum RMSamplitudes were specified, as in the previous example, to be 70.0V on Va, 92.5V on Vb, 72.0V on Vc,20.0A on Ia, 10.4A on Ib, and 6.9A on Ic, the following commands specify three consecutive samples.


Command Va(V) Vb(V) Vc(V) Ia(A) Ib(A) Ic(A)RCD128,45,176,201,8,107 0.0 -85.49 38.48 16.26 -13.90 -1.61RCD130,44,177,202,9,104 1.56 -86.52 39.29 16.48 -13.78 -1.84RCD131,40,178,209,11,102 2.34 -90.64 40.09 18.04 -13.55 -2.00

2

2

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2



7.3.1.3 EXAMPLE FOR THE MTS-1710+MTS-1720 - 14 BIT.

When both the MTS-1710 and MTS-1720 are used for 3Φ-voltage/3Φ-current fault playback, the followingexample command sequence specifies the maximum RMS amplitude output from each of the four channels:

AVA70AVB92.5AVC72AIA20.0AIB10.4AIC6.9

The maximum output range is ±1.414 times the maximum RMS amplitude. This defines the output rangeas approximately ±99.0V on Va, ±130.8V on Vb, ±101.8V on Vc, ±28.3A on Ia, ±14.7A on Ib, and ±9.76Aon Ic.The AVA, AVB and AVC commands accept values from 0 to 150.0 (volts). The AIA, AIB and AICcommands accept values from 0 to 30.0 (amps).





16382 8190 Vmax RMS 8190 Imax RMS 8191 8191


8191 8191

8192 0 0

8191 - 1 Vmax RMS - 1 Imax RMS 8191 8191

. .

1 - Vmax RMS - Imax RMS

The playback data values are specified in the FPD command. For example, if the maximum RMSamplitudes were specified, as in the previous example, to be 70.0V on Va, 92.5V on Vb, 72.0V on Vc,20.0A on Ia, 10.4A on Ib, and 6.9A on Ic, the following commands specify three consecutive samples.

2

2

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2

2 2




Command Va(V) Vb(V) Vc(V) Ia(A) Ib(A) Ic(A)FPD8192,2891,11307,12914,514,6874 0.0 -85.49 38.48 16.26 -13.90 -1.61FPD8352,2827,11372,12978,578,6682 1.56 -86.52 39.29 16.48 -13.78 -1.84FPD8416,2570,11436,13428,707,6553 2.34 -90.64 40.09 18.04 -13.55 -2.00

7.3.1.4 DETERMINING PLAYBACK DATA VALUES - 8 BIT.

Given the actual instantaneous voltage and current values, the playback data values (to be used in the RCDcommand) can be determined from the following formulas:

Playback data values for voltages:

Dva = 127 x (Vaout/(1.414 x AVA)) + 128Dvb = 127 x (Vbout/(1.414 x AVB)) + 128Dvc = 127 x (Vcout/(1.414 x AVC)) + 128

where:AVA is the maximum RMS amplitude for Va specified in the AVA# commandAVB is the maximum RMS amplitude for Vb specified in the AVB# commandAVC is the maximum RMS amplitude for Vc specified in the AVC# command

(The Dva, Dvb and Dvc values should be rounded off to the nearest integer values between 1 and 255).

Playback data values for currents:

Dia = 127 x (Iaout/(1.414 x AIA)) + 128 Dib = 127 x (Ibout/(1.414 x AIB)) + 128Dic = 127 x (Icout/(1.414 x AIC)) + 128

where:AIA is the maximum RMS amplitude for Ia (or I1 or I3) specified in the AIA commandAIB is the maximum RMS amplitude for Ib specified in the AIB commandAIC is the maximum RMS amplitude for Ic specified in the AIC command

(The Dia, Dib and Dic values should be rounded off to the nearest integer values between 1 and 255).

When using the MTS-1710 only, to specify a set of samples for playback, the RCD command is sent,specifying these values.

RCDDva,Dvb,Dvc,Dia

where Dva, Dvb, Dvc, and Dia are the playback values, as calculated above. Note that the current isdependent upon the current mode, and may be I1 (in I1-LOW current mode), or a phase or line current (inI3 current mode).



When using the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 to specify a set of samples for playback, the RCD command issent, specifying these values.

RCDDva,Dvb,Dvc,Dia,Dib,Dic

where Dva, Dvb, Dvc, Dia, Dib, and Dic are the playback values, as calculated above.

7.3.1.5 DETERMINING PLAYBACK DATA VALUES - 14 BIT.

Given the actual instantaneous voltage and current values, the playback data values (to be used in the FPDcommand) can be determined from the following formulas:

Playback data values for voltages:

Dva = 8191 x (Vaout/(1.414 x AVA)) + 8192 Dvb = 8191 x (Vbout/(1.414 x AVB)) + 8192Dvc = 8191 x (Vcout/(1.414 x AVC)) + 8192

where:AVA is the maximum RMS amplitude for Va specified in the AVA# commandAVB is the maximum RMS amplitude for Vb specified in the AVB# commandAVC is the maximum RMS amplitude for Vc specified in the AVC# command

(The Dva, Dvb and Dvc values should be rounded off to the nearest integer values between 1 and 16383).

Playback data values for currents:

Dia = 8191 x (Iaout/(1.414 x AIA)) + 8192 Dib = 8191 x (Ibout/(1.414 x AIB)) + 8192 Dic = 8191 x (Icout/(1.414 x AIC)) + 8192

where:AIA is the maximum RMS amplitude for Ia (or I1 or I3) specified in the AIA commandAIB is the maximum RMS amplitude for Ib specified in the AIB commandAIC is the maximum RMS amplitude for Ic specified in the AIC command

(The Dia, Dib and Dic values should be rounded off to the nearest integer values between 1 and 16383).

When using the MTS-1710 only, to specify a set of samples for playback, the FPD command is sent,specifying these values.

FPDDva,Dvb,Dvc,Dia

where Dva, Dvb, Dvc, and Dia are the playback values, as calculated above. Note that the current isdependent upon the current mode, and may be I1 (in I1-LOW current mode), or a phase or line current (inI3 current mode).



When using the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 to specify a set of samples for playback, the FPD command is sent,specifying these values.

FPDDva,Dvb,Dvc,Dia,Dib,Dic

where Dva, Dvb, Dvc, Dia, Dib, and Dic are the playback values, as calculated above.

7.3.1.6 FAULT PLAYBACK IN I3-PARALLEL CURRENT MODE.

In I3-PARALLEL current mode, specify the total maximum RMS current from the three paralleled channelsusing the AIA command. Then specify the playback data values using the RCD command with four values(i.e. RCDDva,Dvb,Dvc,Di3p) where Di3p = 127 x I3 parallel total instantaneous current ÷ ( x Maximum I3 parallel RMS current) + 128(The Di3p value should be rounded off to the nearest integer value between 1 and 255).

In cases where the 14 bit Fault Playback is selected, specify the playback data values using the FPD com-mand with four values (i.e. FPDDva,Dvb,Dvc,Di3p) where Di3p = 8191 x I3 parallel total instantaneous current ÷ ( x Maximum I3 parallel RMS current) +8192

7.4 SAMPLE RATE & ANTI-ALIAS FILTER

The sample rate for fault playback is set by using the RCR command via the RS-232C interface.

The rate is programmable from 2-30 kHz. Usually, this is set to match the sample frequency of the sourceof the data (such as a digital fault recorder).

To prevent aliasing in reconstructing the fault waveform, a second order anti-alias filter is used in everychannel. The bandwidth of this filter is automatically programmed to half of the sample rate when the RCRcommand is used.

Note: The frequency mode must be set to line frquency for correct waveforms playback.

2

2



7.5 REQUIRED SETTINGS FOR FAULT PLAYBACK

7.5.1 MTS-1710 Only

The following settings are required to set up the MTS-1710 to perform fault playback (8-bit):

RS-232 Command SettingREM Remote control modeDYN Dynamic Operation modeIMD# Select I1-LOW or I3 current mode onlyFMD0 Φ-N fault type (FMD1 and FMD2 also may be used here)LIN Line frequency modeAVA# Set maximum RMS amplitudes using AVA, AVB, AVC, AIA commandsAVB# (Note that prefault outputs will be forced to zero)AVC#AIA#POF# Select desired postfault outputRCM# Select fault playback mode. After fault playback mode is selected, the “FLT-REC”

annunciator will appear in the upper right corner of the [MODE/MENUDISPLAY]

RCR# Set playback rateRCD#,#,#,# Download fault data (Va, Vb, Vc, I)RCD#,#,#,# <- repeat for up to 60,000 samples

7.5.2 MTS-1710+MTS-1720

The following settings are required to set up the MTS-1710 & MTS-1720 to perform full 3Φ-voltage/3Φ-current fault playback in I3-WYE current mode (8-bit):

RS-232 Command SettingREM Remote control modeDYN Dynamic Operation modeIMD5 Select I3-WYE current modeFMD0 Φ-N fault type (FMD1 and FMD2 also may be used here)LIN Line frequency modeAVA# Set maximum RMS amplitudes using AVA, AVB, AVC, AIA, AIB, AIC

commandsAVB# (Note that prefault outputs will be forced to zero)AVC#AIA#AIB#AIC#POF# Select desired postfault outputRCM# Select fault playback mode. After fault playback mode is selected, the “FLT-REC”

annunciator will appear in the upper right corner of the [MODE/MENUDISPLAY]

RCR# Set playback rateRCD#,#,#,#,#,# Download fault data (Va, Vb, Vc, Ia, Ib, Ic)RCD#,#,#,#,#,# <- repeat for up to 60,000 samples



7.6 OPERATION IN VARIOUS FAULT MODES

When fault playback mode is active, the MTS-1710 operates as follows in the various fault states.

7.6.1 Prefault State

In prefault state, all voltage and current outputs are zero.

7.6.2 Fault State

To initiate fault playback, the RS-232C STR command may be used, or an external start can be used byproviding a change of state signal on the [EXTERNAL START] trigger inputs. This changes the MTS-1710to the FAULT state.

When the MTS-1710 enters the FAULT state, the voltage and current outputs reconstruct the faultwaveform based upon the waveform data. As in non-fault playback mode, the MTS-1710 measures thevoltage, current, frequency and phase of the actual outputs, and runs the timer.

The playback may be terminated early by pressing [STOP/RESET], or by the RS-232C RES command.

7.6.3 Postfault State

When an [EXTERNAL STOP] trigger is sensed, or the RS-232C STP command is received, the MTS-1710will enter the postfault state. The time, voltage, current, frequency and phase measurements will be frozenat the time of the stop trigger.

In postfault state, if postfault outputs were set off (using the POF0 command), the voltage and current outputwill be zero in postfault state. If postfault was set on (using the POF1 command), and the MTS-1710changed from fault state to postfault state, the outputs would continue to play back the fault waveform untilthe end of the fault data is reached.

7.7 PLAYBACK OF DIGITAL CHANNELS

Playback of both analog and digital channels simultaneously can be performed by the MTS-1710. Digitaloutputs are played back using the Programmable I/O Channels (Option -03A) and MTS-1730 Digital I/OSignal Conditioner.

These outputs may be inputs to a relay under test, or other protection signalling. This is performed using theDIO,ODY and DIO,OCD commands associated with the programmable digital I/O channels. See SectionA.6.5 for details.

In addition, the sequence of events recording capabilities of the digital input channels is also useful inperforming fault playback. Digital outputs from the MTS-1710, and signals from the system under test, canbe recorded using this function.



7.8 EXTERNAL DATA MODE USAGE

7.8.1 Connections

FIGURE 7.1 EXTERNAL AMP IN CONNECTOR

MTS-1710 External Amp input connector MTS-1720 External Amp input connector

Pin # Signal Pin # Signal 1 Va input 1 Ib input 2 Signal ground 2 Signal ground 3 Vb input 3 Ic input 4 Vc input 4 no connection 5 Ia input 5 no connection 6 External sync + 7 External sync -

The analog input should be connected to a low level signal source (±5V peak maximum). The amplifyinggain factors are 50 Vrms per 1 Vrms for the voltage channels and 10 Arms per 1 Vrms for the currentchannels.

7.8.2 General Procedure

1. Connect the signal source to the MTS-1710 and MTS-1720. 2. Turn on the MTS-1710 and MTS-1720, and then the signal source.3. Send the following commands to the MTS-1710:

REM <- enter remote control modeIMD5 <- select I3/I3-WYE current mode (IMD3 is also allowable here if only the MTS-

1710 is to be used)FMD0 <- set a Φ-N fault mode to allow setting max voltagesLIN <- Line frequency mode

AVA90 <- set the maximum Φ-N rms voltages expected to be outputAVB100AVC95RCM3 <- select external data mode fault playbackDYN <- select dynamic operation mode to do timing

4. Initiate analog playback from the computer.5. Press [STOP/RESET], or send the RES command to reset the MTS-1710 fault state back to prefault.

Pin 6

Pin 1Pin 4 Pin 2

Pin 7

Pin 3Pin 5

mp Signal Input ConnectorsAs

External Aviewed from rear panel of the instrument

Pin 1Pin 4 Pin 2

Pin 3Pin 5

MTS-1710 MTS-1720


SERVICING - Section 8

SERVICING

8.1 FUSE REPLACEMENT

8.1.1 Mains Input Fuse

For 120V systems, replace the rear panel mains AC input fuse with a fast blow, 15A/250VAC fuse. (For240V systems, replace the rear panel mains AC input fuse with a fast blow, 8A/250VAC fuse).

8.1.2 COMM Port Picofuse

The COM3 communications port is fused with a 0.75 amp picofuse. This fuse can be checked for theresistance between the voltage output N terminal and pin 7 of the COM3 connector. The resistance shouldbe less than 200 ohms.

This picofuse is marked as F1 (near rear left corner) on the main backplane for the plug-in cards. The plug-in cards, and card cage shield, will have to be removed to replace the fuse. This only should be performedby a qualified technician. Serious damage may be incurred if this isn’t performed properly.

8.2 LAMP REPLACEMENT

The lamps in the [FAULT], [STATIC/DYNAMIC] and [STOP/RESET] pushbuttons should be replacedwith a Spectro #73, 14.0 volt incandescent lamp.

To replace, remove the plastic cap, pull the ejection lever to eject the existing lamp, and insert the new lamp.

8.3 FIRMWARE UPGRADE

The firmware is upgradable through a serial communication port at the back of the MTS-1710. Call MantaTest Systems to obtain the correct firmware version for your particular unit. The following procedure de-scribes the use of Hyperterminal as the terminal program. However, any terminal program can be used.

1 Copy the files from the diskette to an empty directory on your hard drive (or leave them on the diskette, if you like).

2 Double-click the com1-38400.ht icon ( ) to start HyperTerminal. (If you need to use COM2, you’ll have to modify the HT file)

3 Plug your computer into the MTS-1710’s COM1 port.4 Hold the PREVIOUS key down on the MTS-1710, while you turn on its power.5 You should see something like this on HyperTerminal:



(the funny characters spitting out once every 3 seconds will be different, depending on which font HyperTerminal is using)

6 Now click the send button on the toolbar or select Transfer | Send File.... Select the “Xmodem” protocol (NOT the “1K Xmodem” protocol”), and browse for the BIN file (eg: tmgp80.bin). When you select the file, it will download to the 1710, whereupon the 1710 will verify the file and program it to flash memory, which will look something like this:

NOTE 1: If HyperTerminal fails to send the file (“Error Count Exceeded” error), close and re-start HyperTerminal and try again. This is a bug in older versions of HyperTerminal.

NOTE 2: The 1710 hardware sometimes “remembers” the PREVIOUS key when you power down, to prevent this (and allow the downloaded application to run), either press another key just before powering down, or power down for at least 10 seconds.

8.4 GENERATION CALIBRATION

Calibration of voltage and current generation is required when the output is not equivalent to the actualgenerated signal. Before starting the calibration procedures, the CAL1 command must be sent via the RS-232 interface to enable saving of the calibration factors.

A 0.1% accurate external reference meter is required to perform the calibration.



8.4.1 AC Voltage Generation Calibration

1. Send the following commands via the RS232C communications:REM <- remote controlAVA150 <- sets the maximum prefault amplitude of VaAVB150 <- sets the maximum prefault amplitude of VbAVC150 <- sets the maximum prefault amplitude of VcLOC <- local control

2. Connect a external reference voltmeter to the VA-N terminals. Press [PREFAULT].Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION GENERATION VA in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY] knob toadjust the calibration factor until the reference meter reading is 150.00V ±0.25V.

Press [SELECT].

3. Move the external reference meter leads to VB-N terminals.

Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION GENERATION VB in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY] knob toadjust the calibration factor until the reference meter reading is 150.00V ±0.25V.

Press [SELECT].

4. Move the external reference meter leads to VC-N terminals (no need to turn off the PREFAULT).

Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION GENERATION VC in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY] knob toadjust the calibration factor until the reference meter reading is 150.00V ±0.25V.

Press [SELECT].

5. Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION SAVE in the menu to save the calibration factors in non-volatilememory so that these new calibration factors will be remembered when the MTS-1710 is powered upnext time. Or, send the CAL3 command via the RS-232 interface.

Note: If you’re performing all calibrations, only one SAVE operation at the very end is required.

8.4.2 AC Current I1 Generation Calibration

1. Set dynamic measurement mode to RMS (see section 5.1.1). Select I1-LOW current mode, and connectan external reference ammeter to the I1 OUTPUT terminals.

2. Select Static fault mode. Press and hold [CURRENT], adjust to 10.000A and then release [CURRENT].

3. Select Dynamic fault mode and press [FAULT].

Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION GENERATION IA in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY] knob toadjust the calibration factor until the reference meter reading is 10.000A ±0.025A.

Press [SELECT].



4. Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION SAVE to save the calibration factors in non-volatile memory sothat these new calibration factors will be remembered when the MTS-1710 is powered up next time. Or,send the CAL3 command via the RS232C interface.


8.4.3 AC Current I3 Generation Calibration

This only applies for test sets with a MTS-1720.

1. Remove all loads from the current output terminals.

2. Set dynamic measurement mode to RMS (see section 5.1.1). Select I3-WYE current mode, and a A-NFault Mode. Then connect an external reference ammeter to the I3 OUTPUT A-N terminals.

3. Select Static fault mode. Press and hold [CURRENT], adjust to 10.000A and then release [CURRENT].

4. Select Dynamic fault mode and press [FAULT].

Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION GENERATION IA in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY] knob toadjust the calibration factor until the reference meter reading is 10.000A ±0.025A.

Press [SELECT].

5. Press [STOP]. Connect an external reference meter to the I3 OUTPUT B-N terminals.

6. Select B-N and press [FAULT].

Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION GENERATION IB in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY] knob toadjust the calibration factor until the reference meter reading is 10.000A ±0.025A.

Press [SELECT].

7. Press [STOP]. Connect an external reference meter to the I3 OUTPUT C-N terminals.

8. Select C-N and press [FAULT].

Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION GENERATION IC in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY] knob toadjust the calibration factor until the reference meter reading is 10.000A ±0.025A.

Press [SELECT].

9. Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION SAVE in the CAL menu to save the calibration factors in non-volatile memory so that these new calibration factors will be remembered next time the MTS-1720 ispowered up. Or, send the CAL3 command via RS232 interface.

8.4.4 VDC VOLTAGE GENERATION CALIBRATION

This applies only to units with the DC option installed.



1. Set the DC voltage to 24VDC by selecting MENU SETTINGS DCVOLTS 24V.

2. Connect a DC Volt reference meter to the DC volt outputs.

3. Exit MENU and press the DC VOLTAGE enable button.

4. Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION GENERATION VDC_LOW in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY]knob to adjust the calibration factor until the reference meter reads 24VDC ±0.24V.

Press [SELECT]

5. Press [PREVIOUS] several times to reach the main menu.

6. Select SETTINGS DCVOLTS 250. Exit the MENU.

7. Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION GENERATION VDC_HIGH in the menu.Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the calibration factor until the reference meter reads 250VDC ±2.5V.

Press [SELECT]

8. Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION SAVE in the CAL menu to save the calibration factors in non-volatile memory so that these new calibration factors will be remembered next time the MTS-1720 ispowered up. Or, send the CAL3 command via RS232 interface.

8.5 MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

The recommended calibration interval is one year. Front panel calibration of V & I measurements can bedone using the menu.

There are three voltage scales, two current scales for I1, and two current scales for I1-HIGH, with a separatecalibration factor for each.

AC Voltage scales (approx) 0-82V, 82V-328VI1 scales (approx) 0-8.2A, 8.2A-32.8AI1-HIGH scales (approx) 0-24.5A, 24.5A-98AI3 scale Phase to neutral: 0-8.2A, 8.2-32.8A, 25-45A

Phase to Phase: 0-16.4A, 16.4-65.6AI4 scale (approx) 0-10ADC Voltage scale 0-300V

For the AC voltage, I1, I1-HIGH and I3 measurements, there are both RMS and PEAK measurement modecalibration factors. Calibration of these scales must be done once with dynamic measurement mode set toRMS, and then again in FAULT state, with dynamic measurement mode set to PEAK (see Section 5.7).Before starting the calibration procedures, the CAL1 command must be sent via the RS-232 interface toenable saving of the calibration factors.A 0.1% accurate external reference meter is required to perform the calibration.



8.5.1 AC Voltage Measurement Calibration

1. Set dynamic measurement mode to RMS (see section 5.1.1).

2. Press [VOLTAGE], and select Φ-N A-N fault mode. Adjust the voltage down to 0, and then slowly upto 75V (as read on an external reference meter).

Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE in the menu. Turn the[MODIFY] knob to adjust the calibration factor until the reading is the same as read on a referencemeter.

Press [SELECT].

3. Exit the menu and select Φ-N A-N fault mode. Select prefault and adjust the voltage of A-N to 150V.

4. Select Φ-N B-N fault mode. Adjust the prefault voltage of B-N to 150V.

5. Select Φ−Φ Fault mode. Adjust the voltage to 250V.

Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE in the menu. Turn the[MODIFY] knob to adjust the calibration factor until the reading is the same as read on a referencemeter (the output voltage doesn’t change when this is done).

6. Exit the menu, and select 2ΦN A-B fault mode. Adjust the voltage to near the top of the next scale(283V).

Select OTHER CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT VOLTAGE in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY]knob to adjust the calibration factor until the reading is the same as read on a reference meter (the outputvoltage doesn’t change when this is done).

7. Set the dynamic measurement mode to PEAK (see section 5.1.1), and the operation mode toDYNAMIC. Press [FAULT].

Repeat steps 2 to 4 to adjust the peak measurement calibration factors.

IMPORTANT: This must be done with the dynamic measurement mode set to PEAK, and in theFAULT state (FAULT button flashing).

8. Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION SAVE to save the calibration factors in non-volatile memory sothat these new calibration factors will be remembered when the MTS-1710 is powered up next time.


8.5.2 AC Current (I1) Measurement Calibration

1. Set dynamic measurement mode to RMS (see section 5.1.1). Select I1-LOW current mode, and connectan external reference ammeter to the I1 OUTPUT terminals.

2. Press [CURRENT], adjust the current down to 0, and then slowly up to 5.0A (as read on an externalreference meter).



Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT I1 in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY] knobto adjust the calibration factor until the reading is the same as read on a reference meter. Press [SELECT].

3. Exit the menu, and adjust the current to 20A. Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATIONMEASUREMENT I1 in the menu.

Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the calibration factor until the reading is the same as read on areference meter (the output current doesn’t change when this is done).

Press [SELECT].



IMPORTANT: This must be done with the dynamic measurement mode set to PEAK and in theFAULT state (FAULT button flashing).

5. When done, the CAL1 command must be sent via the RS-232C interface to enable saving of thecalibration factors.

Next, select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION SAVE to save the calibration factors in non-volatile memory so that these new calibration factors will be remembered when the MTS-1710 is powered up next time.

8.5.3 AC Current (I1-HIGH) Measurement Calibration

1. Set dynamic measurement mode to RMS (see section 5.1.1). Select I1-HIGH current mode, and connect

an external reference ammeter to the I1 OUTPUT terminals.

2. Press [CURRENT], adjust the current down to 0, and then slowly up to 20A (as read on an externalreference meter).

Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT I1-HIGH in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY]knob to adjust the calibration factor until the reading is the same as read on a reference meter (the outputcurrent doesn’t change when this is done) .

Press [SELECT].

3. Exit the menu, and adjust the current to 50A.

Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT I1-HIGH in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY]knob to adjust the calibration factor until the reading is the same as read on a reference meter (the outputcurrent doesn’t change when this is done). Press [SELECT].





IMPORTANT: This must be done with the dynamic measurement mode set to PEAK, and in theFAULT state (FAULT button flashing).

To avoid overheating of the output leads while performing this calibration, you can use STATIC operationmode. Just remember to press and hold the [FAULT] button when actually adjusting the calibration factor.


Next, select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION SAVE to save the calibration factors in non-volatile memoryso that these new calibration factors will be remembered when the MTS-1710 is powered up next time.

8.5.4 DC Current Measurement Calibration

1. Set dynamic measurement mode to RMS (see section 5.1.1). Select I4 current mode, and connect anexternal reference DCammeter to the I4-DC OUTPUT terminals.

2. Press [CURRENT], adjust the current down to 0, and then up to 2.0A (as read on an external referencemeter).

Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT I4 in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY] knobto adjust the calibration factor until the reading is the same as read on a reference meter (the outputcurrent doesn’t change when this is done).

Press [SELECT].




8.5.5 AC Current I3 Measurement Calibration (Φ−N Values)

(This applies only to systems with an MTS-1720).

1. Remove all loads from the current output terminals.

2. Set dynamic measurement mode to RMS (see section 5.1.1). Select I3-WYE current mode, and thenconnect an external reference ammeter to the I3 OUTPUT B-N terminals.





(Note: No calibration factor appears on [MODE/MENU/DISPLAY], unlike other calibrations).

Press [SELECT].



Press [SELECT].

5. Set the dynamic measurement mode to PEAK (see section 5.1.1), and the operation mode to DYNAMIC. Press [FAULT].



6. Set current to zero, and remove all loads from the current output terminals.

7. Set dynamic measurement mode to RMS (see section 5.1.1). Select I3-WYE current mode, and connectan external reference ammeter to the I3 OUTPUT C-N terminals.



Press [SELECT].



Press [SELECT].

10. Set the dynamic measurement mode to PEAK (see section 5.1.1), and the operation mode to DYNAMIC. Press [FAULT].






Next, select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION SAVE to save the calibration factors in non-volatilememory so that these new calibration factors factors will be remembered next time the MTS-1720 ispowered up.

8.5.6 AC Current (I3) Measurement Calibration (Φ−Φ Values)

(This applies only to systems with an MTS-1720).

1. Connect the I3 OUTPUT A,B,C,N terminals to a three-phase current meter or power meter. You willrequire a meter which is directly able to read Φ−Φ current (e.g. IAB, IBC, ICA).

2. Set dynamic measurement mode to RMS (see section 5.1.1). Note: Each current output must have areturn connection to the IN terminal.

Select I3-WYE current mode, static operation mode.

3. Select Φ−Φ A-B fault mode.

Short the external start trigger contact sense inputs to hold the MTS-1710 in FAULT state. This causesIA & IB to be 180° out of phase with each other.

4. Press [CURRENT], adjust the IAB current down to 0, and then slowly up to 6.0A (as read on an externalreference meter).


Press [SELECT].

5. Exit the menu, and adjust the IAB current to 23A.


Press [SELECT].

6. Exit the menu, and adjust the IAB current to 40A.




Press [SELECT].

7. Turn the current down to zero. Remove the short from the external start trigger inputs.

8. Set the dynamic measurement mode to PEAK (see section 5.1.1), and the operation mode to DYNAM IC. Press [FAULT].



9. Repeat steps 3-8 for IBC this time by selecting Φ−Φ B-C fault mode.

10. Repeat steps 3-8 for ICA this time by selecting Φ−Φ C-A fault mode.


Next, select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION SAVE to save the calibration factors in non-volatilememory so that these new calibration factors will be remembered next time the MTS-1720 is poweredup.

8.6 DC VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT CALIBRATION

This applies only to units with the DC voltage option installed.

1. Press [VOLTAGE] once or twice, as required, to display DC voltage on the [VALUE DISPLAY].Connect an external reference DC voltmeter to the [DC VOLTS OUTPUT] terminals.

2. Select SETTINGS DC-VOLTS CONTINUOUS-ADJ in the menu. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjustthe voltage output to maximum (300V). Press SELECT.

3. Press the MODE/MENU button to exit the menu. Press the DC Voltage enable button.

4. Select OTHER SERV CALIBRATION MEASUREMENT DC-VOLTS in the menu. Turn the[MODIFY] knob to adjust the calibration factor until the reading is the same as read on a reference meter(the output voltage doesn’t change when this is done).

Press [SELECT].






8.7 TIME MEASUREMENT VERIFICATION

No calibration is required for the time measurement; only verification is required. Special equipment isrequired for this. Note that, if the external start trigger inputs are used to verify the timing, the FIA settingmust be set to RANDOM.

8.8 POWER-UP DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES

On power-up, a number of self-diagnostic checks are performed, and the following messages may bedisplayed on the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY].

SELF TEST: RAM CHECK ERROR 1

Contact technical support for assistance. SELF TEST: RAM CHECK ERROR 2.

Contact technical support for assistance.

WARNING: CALIBRATION NV RAM ERROR

An error was detected in the calibration non-volatile memory. Measurements may not be valid, andthe instrument should be calibrated before use.

WARNING: REPLACE INTERNAL BATTERY

The internal battery is low, and should be replaced. Reset the real-time-clock after replacing thebattery.

WARNING: PLEASE UPGRADE MTS-1720 FIRMWARE

Your MTS-1720 firmware is incompatible with the present version of MTS-1710 firmware.Contact technical support for a firmware upgrade.

8.9 INTERNAL BATTERY REPLACEMENT

The internal battery supplies the real-time clock and some ancillary devices, and requires replacement fromtime-to-time. This procedure only should be performed by a qualified technician. Serious damage may beincurred if this isn’t done properly. The internal battery has no affect on the calibration.

8.9.1 Procedure

1. Unplug the MTS-1710. Observe proper antistatic handling procedures. Ground the MTS-1710 case byconnecting the rear panel ground stud to a secure earth ground.



2. Discharge any static buildup by touching all tools and hands to the case. Wear a proper grounding wristrap.

3. Remove the top cover, and unplug the card in the first plug in-slot from the front. Locate the lithiumbattery in location B1. Remove the battery.

4. Replace with an Eveready CR2032 or equivalent battery. Note that the “+” side of the battery must faceup, and the “-” side must face down.

5. Plug the card firmly back into the first plug-in slot, and restore any disconnected connectors.6. Check to see that all plug-in cards are fully seated. They should all be at the same height. Replace the

top cover.7. Turn on the MTS-1710. With a computer connected to the COM1 port of the instrument, send the RTR

command using a communications program, such as PowerTerm or PROCOMM. Then set the clockusing the MDY#,#,# and HMS#,#,# commands. These commands are described in Section 6.2.12.

8. Check the clock setting using the TIM command, or via the OTHER CLOCK selection in the front panelmenu.

8.10 LED/LAMP TEST FUNCTION

All the LEDs and lamps on the front panel can be tested using the OTHER SERV LED-TEST. This turnson all LEDs and lamps, except for the [TONE] pushbutton LED.

To check the [TONE] pushbutton LED, short the [EXTERNAL STOP] trigger contact sense inputterminals, and this button should light.


MTS-1720 TWO CHANNEL CURRENT SOURCE - Section 9

MTS-1720 TWO CHANNEL CURRENT SOURCE

9.1 INTRODUCTION

The MTS-1720 provides two current output channels in to complement the MTS-1710, and to produce true3Φ current output.

Control of the output amplitude, phase, frequency and all other capabilities are provided through the MTS-1710 front panel. All the advanced control and measurement capabilities, including the prefault/fault/postfault levels, ramping, fault phase selection, and interphase angle display of the MTS-1710 are providedin these additional two current channels.

9.2 SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE: All specifications are subject to change. All AC quantities are RMS values, except as otherwisenoted.

Power outputs are specified for nominal 120VAC/60Hz or 240VAC/50Hz power input, and25°C ambient operating temperature. Derating applies for lower input power voltages andhigher ambient temperatures.

For all current outputs, maximum obtainable current will vary inversely with load impedance.For extended operation at high power output levels, ensure adequate cooling (i.e. tilt standraised to aid air flow to bottom inlets, and adequate clearance for exhaust outlets).

9.2.1 Inputs

Single phase 105-130VAC @ 15A max (or 210-250VAC @8A max), factory set.

9.2.2 Outputs

Two current channelsEach channel:

0-30 A rms, 400VA maximum, 44 V rms maximumTypical performance per phase:

0 - 25A into 0.24 ohm (150VA maximum)0 - 20A into 0.75 ohm (300VA maximum)0 - 15A into 1.8 ohms (400VA maximum)0 - 10A into 3.5 ohms (350VA maximum)0 - 5A into 8.1 ohms (200VA maximum)

NOTE: For all current outputs, maximum obtainable current will vary inversely with load impedance.

Output frequency:• power line (frequency and phase locked)• 1st through 10th harmonic of power line• variable 25.00 Hz ±0.01%

40.00 -80.00 Hz (0.001 Hz resolution, 0.01% accuracy)80.00 - 800.00 Hz (0.01 Hz resolution, 0.02% accuracy)



Four output level settings:• off, prefault, fault, postfault

Phase control:• Phase between current and any voltage is adjustable from 0 through 360°• Adjustment resolution: 0.25°

9.2.3 Metering

All outputs are directly metered by the MTS-1710. This allows direct readout of Φ-Φ and Φ-N currents, andphase angles.

The phase is always measured between the monitor voltage and the current (Φ-Φ or Φ-N), allowing allstandard phase angle relations to be directly displayed.

• AC Current measurements: measures actual output currentTrue RMS responding, autorangingCurrent scales (approx): Phase-Neutral

0-8.2, 8.2-32.7Phase-Phase0-16.4, 16.4-65.4

Accuracy: ±0.5% of reading ±0.2% of scaleMeasures line and phase currents

• Phase measurement: measures phase between monitored voltage and output current0 -359.9° or 0 - ±180° display modesaccuracy: ±0.5°

9.2.4 Static/Dynamic Testing Capabilities

• Phase to neutral faults• Phase to phase faults• Three phase faults• Two phase to neutral faults• Phase, frequency, voltage and current stepping• Phase, frequency, voltage and current ramping with adjustable rate of change• Presetable fault durations, 0 -99.9999 sec• Programmable auto-reclose time delay and reclose-into-fault events• Programmable breaker time• Three-pole and single-pole tripping• Programmable fault incidence angle

9.2.5 Fault Playback

• Ability to accept fault data from fault recorders, EMTP simulation outputs, or user-definedwaveforms

• Sample rate: programmable 2-30 kHz• Record length: 60,000 samples per phase• Resolution: 8 bit: 8 bit dynamic + 12 bit scaling

14 bit: 14 bit dynamic + 16 bit scaling• Peak output levels: ±42.4A



9.2.6 Physical Characteristics

• 19“W x 6”H x 18”D (48.3cm x 14.7cm x 45.7 cm)• Weight: 40 lbs (18.1 kg)• Built-in carry handle/tilt stand

9.2.7 Options

• Option -03 240VAC 50/60Hz input• Option -04 Low level analog input

Low level input to power amplifiers for advanced fault playback• Option -05 One Year extended warranty

Additional year for a total of two years.• Option -10 Hardshell shipping case• Option -11 Cordura carry case

Padded case with shoulder strap and pockets for leads and manuals• Option -14 19” Rackmount enclosure

9.3 SETUP

9.3.1 Front Panel Layout

FIGURE 9.1 MTS-1720 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT

1. [SYNC] LED.Indicates that the MTS-1720 is synchronized to the MTS-1710 and ready to provide output.

2. [POWER] SWITCH.This switch turns on the MTS-1720.

3. POWER LED.

1 2 3

OFF

ON



9.3.2 Rear Panel Layout

FIGURE 9.2 MTS-1720 REAR PANEL LAYOUT

1. VERTICAL SUPPORT FOOT

2. COOLING EXHAUST

3. EXTERNAL AMP SIGNAL INPUT/OUTPUTOptional input for advanced fault playback.

4. [COM1 TO MTS-1710 PORT] Control/communications port to be connected to the MTS-1710 [COM3 SLAVE CURRENT] port.

5. [COM2] PORTReserved for future expansion.

6. [MTS-1750 CH.B] and [MTS-1750 CH.C] PORTSConnections to MTS-1750 High Current Source

7. MAINS INPUT FUSEThis is the main AC input fuse.

For 120V systems, replace only with a fast blow, 15A/250VAC fuse. For high power applications, usea fastblow 20A/250VAC fuse.

(For 240V systems, replace only with a fast blow, 8A/250VAC fuse. For high power applications, usea fastblow 10A/250VAC fuse.)

8. AC INPUT RECEPTACLEThis is the main AC input receptacle.

9. SAFETY FRAME GROUND TERMINAL

10. [SLAVE CURRENT] CONNECTOR This connector carries the current outputs to the MTS-1710.



9.3.3 Getting Started

9.3.3.1 CONNECTIONS AND POWER.

• Turn off the MTS-1710 and MTS-1720. Connect the main power and safety ground to both the MTS-1710 and MTS-1720.

• Connect the [COM3 SLAVE CURRRENT] port of the MTS-1710 to the MTS-1720 [COM1 TO MTS-1710 PORT], using the provided cable. (Use only a Manta Test Systems supplied cable. This is NOT astandard RS-232 cable).

• Connect the MTS-1720 current output to the MTS-1710 slave current input using the high current cableprovided. (On older systems, the connector has a blue locking ring. Retract the blue locking ring beforeinserting. After inserting the connector in the mating socket, twist clockwise to lock. Turn the blue innerlocking ring clockwise to lock the connector in place).

• Turn on the MTS-1710 and MTS-1720 (in any order).

FIGURE 9.3 REAR PANEL MTS-1710/MTS-1720 INTERCONNECTIONS

Power cable portionMTS-1710 to MTS-1720 Connection Cable Assembly

(Manta Test Systems part # 12-2800-00) Control cable portion

Connector formulti-system sync

capability

Connector formulti-system sync

capability

AUX OUTPUTS

AUX INPUTS

COM 3 SLAVE CURRENT

COM 2 RS-232C

COM 1 RS-232C

MAINS

F15A

SLAVE CURRENT IN



SIGNAL INPUT

MTS-1750

S

M



9.3.3.2 ENABLING MTS-1720 OUTPUT.

• When the MTS-1720 is synchronized to the MTS-1710, the [SYNC] LED on the MTS-1720 front panelwill turn on.

• Now when I3 current mode is selected on the MTS-1710, true 3Φ current is available on the [I3OUTPUT] terminals. This is annunciated by “I3-WYE” in the lower right hand corner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY], as opposed to “I3” without the MTS-1720 connected.



FIGURE 9.4 TYPICAL FULL THREE-PHASE RELAY CONNECTIONS

A typical three-phase relay is connected to the MTS-1710, as shown in Figure 9.4.

Ia

Vc

Vn

IMPEDANCERELAY

Use I3 current mode for3-phase impedancerelays.Select element to betested using FAULTMODE controls.

Ib

Ic

Va

Vb


Press[FAULT] to apply fault values

Select [DYNAMIC] mode to run timing test

OFF

ON



Note that the connection to the neutral terminal, In, must always be made. Note that this is the same externalconnections as when the MTS-1710 is used alone. Also note that using the MTS-1720 effectively doublesthe current output compliance voltage for testing Φ-Φ relay elements (to 88Vrms), compared to the MTS-1710 alone (44Vrms).

The compliance voltage for each current output is 44Vrms. For Φ-Φ elements, the currents in the two faultedphases may be placed 180° relative to each other, thereby achieving twice the compliance voltage.

Impedance relays with neutral or residual current coils (such as those by GEC) should be connected, asshown in Figure 9.5.



FIGURE 9.5 CONNECTIONS FOR RELAYS WITH NEUTRAL CURRENT COILS


True 3Φ current is only available when I3 current mode is selected, and when the “I3-WYE” annunciatorappears in the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY].

If the MTS-1720 is turned off, the system reverts to I3 current mode using the MTS-1710 only. The relayconnections are the same for both current modes.

OFF

ON



The MTS-1710 and MTS-1720 can be turned on and off in any order once the two rear panel connectionsare made. Caution: Never connect or disconnect these connections while either unit is on.

9.3.3.4 PRECAUTIONS.

When the MTS-1720 is used in (I3-WYE current mode), extra precautions must be taken when connectingsingle phase relays. Don’t attempt to bridge or parallel outputs in I3-WYE current mode. See Section 4.6.10 to increase theoutput current and compliance voltage for ground elements and single phase relays.

The figure below shows improper and proper connections for the I3-WYE current mode:

FIGURE 9.6 PROPER AND IMPROPER CONNECTIONS FOR I3-WYE CURRENT MODE

Note that the current neutral terminal must always be connected as the return path for every output.

I

0-65A

0-50A

I3 OUTPUT

I1 OUTPUT

A B

I

0-65A

0-50A

I3 OUTPUT

I1 OUTPUT

A B

I

0-65A

0-50A

I3 OUTPUT

I1 OUTPUT

A B

I

0-65A

0-50A

I3 OUTPUT

I1 OUTPUT

A B

I

0-65A

0-50A

I3 OUTPUT

I1 OUTPUT

A B

I

0-65A

0-50A

I3 OUTPUT

I1 OUTPUT

A B

Do not attempt to bridge or parallel outputs in I3-WYE current mode

In terminal must always be connected.

NO

OK



9.4 THREE-PHASE CURRENT OPERATION (I3-WYE CURRENT MODE)

9.4.1 Important Fundamentals

When I3 current mode is selected on the MTS-1710, and the MTS-1720 is available, the current modechanges to “I3-WYE”, annunciated in the lower right hand corner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY]. True3Φ current is now available.

Three-phase testing is greatly simplified by the MTS-1710/MTS-1720 system. Some importantfundamentals of this system are described below.

• Intelligent phase/amplitude control for simulating standard faults.

The concepts of 3Φ voltage manipulation simply have been extended to apply to 3Φ current.

The user can simulate standard faults by adjusting only three settings: the fault voltage, fault current,and phase angle between the two. The MTS-1710 intelligently sets all other phase angles andamplitudes.

For faults involving more than one phase, the fault voltage, fault current, and fault phase angle areautomatically applied to the appropriate phases. The MTS-1710 sets all unfaulted phases to theirprefault amplitude and phase angle.

• Direct phase angle control/display.

The phase angle between the fault phase voltage and current is always displayed, regardless of theselected fault mode. For example, if Φ-Φ A-B fault mode is selected, the phase of Vab referred to Iab

is displayed.

If Φ-N C-N fault mode is selected, the phase of Vc referred to Ic is displayed. This means that, whentesting phase angle sensitive elements, the MTA always can be displayed directly.

In prefault state, phase angle adjustments affect all three phases of current simultaneously. In faultstate, phase angle adjustments alter only the phase angle of the currents participating in the fault.

• Direct measurement of line or phase currents.

The appropriate line current (Ia, Ib, Ic), or phase current (Iab, Ibc, Ica), is measured and displayedbased upon the selected fault mode.

• Memory of fault settings.

The MTS retains values of Φ-N, Φ-Φ, 3Φ and 2Φ-N fault voltage and current.

The fault settings can be applied to successive relay elements of the same type simply by rotating the[FAULT PHASE] selector. For example, if a 2Φ-N fault is set up for A-B-N, the identical conditionscan be applied to B-C-N and C-A-N by rotating the [FAULT PHASE] selector to these positions.



• Identical settings to other similar current modes.

When performing three-phase testing in I3-WYE current mode, virtually the identical settings used inI1-LOW and I3 current modes can be applied. Only the nominal Φ-N currents (if desired) also should

be set. Otherwise, the same current, voltage and phase settings apply.

The result of these aspects is reduced testing time and complexity, and subsequently improvedproductivity.

9.4.2 Fault Modes

This section describes operation in various fault modes as these fault modes pertain to the current outputs.For details on voltage outputs, see Section 4.7.

9.4.2.1 Φ-N FAULT TYPE.

The Φ-N fault type allows display and adjustment of any single Φ-N current, and allows simulation of singlephase faults. Analogous to the voltage, the nominal Φ-N current settings are adjusted in this fault mode.

The PREFAULT settings of Ia, Ib, and Ic set in Φ-N fault type determine the current in unfaulted phases.These settings are known as the nominal Φ-N currents.

The default settings for the nominal Φ-N currents is zero. The prefault interphase angles on the voltages andcurrents are set to 120°.

Once the fault Φ-N (and postfault, if desired) current is set, it can be applied to any desired phase (A-N, B-N and C-N) by changing the [FAULT PHASE] selector.

FIGURE 9.7 PHASE-GROUND FAULT

Example: To simulate the above single phase fault, set up the following values:

Fault mode Fault state Current Voltage Phase V-IΦ-N A-N Prefault 1.0A 70V 10.0° Φ-N B-N Prefault 1.0A 70VΦ-N C-N Prefault 1.0A 70VΦ-N A-N Fault 5.0A 15V 70.0°

Once the fault voltage, current and phase angle are set, they can be applied to any desired phase (A-N, B-N, or C-N) by changing the [FAULT PHASE] selector.

Va

Vc Vb

Ia

Ib

Ic IcIb

Ia

VbVc

Va

PREFAULT FAULT

0

TYPICAL SETTINGSPREFAULT FAULT

CURRENT:VOLTAGE:PHASE V-I:

1.0A70V10 deg.

5.0A15V70 deg.

FAULT MODE = 0-N A-N



9.4.2.2 Φ-Φ FAULT TYPE.

The Φ-Φ fault type allows simulation of Φ-Φ faults.

When this fault type is selected, the current display shows the phase current (Iab, Ibc or Ica), as selected bythe fault phase. This is times the line current (Ia, Ib or Ic) in prefault and postfault states, but twice theline current in fault state.

In the FAULT state, the current phases participating in the fault will have equal magnitudes and oppositephase angle. The unfaulted phase always will remain at its nominal Φ-N current setting and prefault angle.

In prefault state, the interphase angles on the voltages and currents are set to 120°.

Once the prefault, fault (and postfault, if desired) currents are set, they can be applied to any desired phase(A-B, B-C, C-A) by changing the [FAULT PHASE] selector.

FIGURE 9.8 PHASE-PHASE FAULT

Example To simulate the above phase-to-phase fault, set up the following values:

Fault mode Fault state Current Voltage Phase V-IΦ-N A-N Prefault 1.0A 70V 10.0° Φ-N B-N Prefault 1.0A 70VΦ-N C-N Prefault 1.0A 70VΦ-Φ C-A Prefault 1.732A 120VΦ-Φ C-A Fault 10A 65V 75.0°

Once the fault voltage, current and phase angle are set, they can be applied to any desired phase (A-B, B-C,or C-A) by changing the [FAULT PHASE] selector.

9.4.2.3 3Φ FAULT TYPES.

The 3Φ fault types adjust three-phase current.

All three currents are set to the same amplitude simultaneously. However, only one current can bemeasured/displayed at a time.

The 3Φ (Φ-Φ) fault type allows measurement/display of phase currents (Iab, Ibc, Ica). The 3Φ(Φ-N) faulttype allows measurement/display of line currents (Ia, Ib, Ic).

In all fault states, the interphase angles on the voltages and currents are 120°.

3

75 deg.65V10A

10 deg.120V1.73A

PHASE V-I:VOLTAGE:CURRENT:

PREFAULT FAULT

TYPICAL SETTINGS

FAULTPREFAULT

VabVca

Vbc

IaIb

Ic

0

Ibc

IabIca

Vbc

Vca Vab

FAULT MODE = 0-0 C-A



FIGURE 9.9 THREE-PHASE (Φ-Φ) FAULT

Example To simulate the above three-phase-to-ground fault, set up the following values:

Fault mode Fault state Current Voltage Phase V-I3Φ A-B Prefault 1.73A 120V 10.0° 3Φ A-B Fault 10.4A 34.6V 70.0° 3Φ A-B Postfault 1.73A 120V 10.0°

FIGURE 9.10 THREE-PHASE (Φ-N) FAULT

Figure 9.10 is the same as Figure 9.9, except that 3Φ (Φ-N) fault type has been selected. In this way, phase-to-neutral currents and voltages are measured.

9.4.2.4 2Φ-N FAULT TYPE.

The 2Φ-N fault type simulates 2Φ-ground faults.

When this fault type is selected, the current display shows the phase current (Iab, Ibc or Ica), as selected bythe fault phase. This is times the line current (Ia, Ib or Ic).

In this fault type, the currents in the two selected fault phases are adjusted to the same amplitudesimultaneously. The unfaulted phase always will remain at its nominal Φ-N current setting and prefaultangle.

In the prefault state, the interphase angles on the voltages and currents are set to 120°.

70 deg.20V6.0A

10 deg.70V1.0A

PHASE V-I:VOLTAGE:CURRENT:

PREFAULT FAULT

TYPICAL SETTINGS

0

FAULTPREFAULT

Va

Vc Vb

Ib

Ic

Ic

Ib

Ia

VbVc

Va

Ia

FAULT MODE = 30 A-N

3

Iab

Ica

Ibc

Vbc

Vca Vab

FAULT

0



1.73A120V10 deg.

10.4A34.6V70 deg.

VabVca

Vbc

IcaIab

Ibc

PREFAULT

FAULT MODE = 30 A-B



Once the prefault, fault (and postfault, if desired) currents are set, they can be applied to any desired phase(A-B-G, B-C-G, C-A-G) by changing the [FAULT PHASE] selector.

FIGURE 9.11 TWO-PHASE-TO-GROUND FAULT

Example To simulate a two-phase-to-ground fault, set up the following values:

Fault mode Fault state Current Voltage Phase V-IΦ-N A-N Prefault 1.0A 70V 10.0° Φ-N B-N Prefault 1.0A 70VΦ-N C-N Prefault 1.0A 70V2Φ-N B-C Prefault 1.73A 120V2Φ-N B-C Fault 10.4A 30V 70.0°

Once the fault voltage, current and phase angle are set, they can be applied to any desired phase (A-B-N, B-C-N, or C-A-N) by changing the [FAULT PHASE] selector.

Ic

Ib

Vbc

Vca

PREFAULT FAULT



1.73A120V10 deg.

10.4A30V70 deg.

Ia

Vab

VabVca

Vbc

IcaIab

Ibc

Ibc

0FAULT MODE = 20-N B-C



9.4.3 Displayed Quantities

The displayed quantities of voltage, current and phase angle are always determined by the fault mode. Thisis shown in the summary chart below:

The basic principle behind the display is the MTS-1710 always displays the quantity pertaining to the faultmode (i.e. the fault voltage, fault current, and fault phase angle).

9.4.4 Phase Angle Adjustment

Phase angle adjustments will modify the phase angle of one or more currents, based upon the fault modeand fault state. All possible combinations are shown in the chart on the following page:

FAULT TYPE

FAULT PHASE

Displayed Quantities

CURRENT VOLTAGE PHASE V-I

Φ-N A-N Ia Va Φ Va-Ia

Φ-N B-N Ib Vb Φ Vb-Ib

Φ-N C-N Ic Vc Φ Vc-Ic

Φ-Φ A-B Iab Vab Φ Vab-Iab

Φ-Φ B-C Ibc Vbc Φ Vbc-Ibc

Φ-Φ C-A Ica Vca Φ Vca-Ica

3Φ(Φ-Φ) A-B Iab Vab Φ Vab-Iab

3Φ(Φ-Φ) B-C Ibc Vbc Φ Vbc-Ibc

3Φ(Φ-Φ) C-A Ica Vca Φ Vca-Ica

3Φ(Φ-Ν) A-N Ia Va Φ Va-Ia

3Φ(Φ-Ν) B-N Ib Vb Φ Vb-Ib

3Φ(Φ-Ν) C-N Ic Vc Φ Vc-Ic

2Φ-N A-B Iab Vab Φ Vab-Iab

2Φ-N B-C Ibc Vbc Φ Vbc-Ibc

2Φ-N C-A Ica Vca Φ Vca-Ica



Note that, in prefault state, the phase angle of all currents is adjusted. In the fault and postfault states, onlythe phase angle of currents participating in the fault is adjusted.

9.4.5 Simultaneous AC & DC Currents

Sometimes overcurrent relays are tested using a procedure requiring AC current for the operate coil plus DCcurrent for the target and seal-in. This is available in the I4-DC current mode when the MTS-1720 isavailable.

When the I4-DC current mode is selected, the 0-25A LED on the MTS-1710 indicates that AC current isalso available. These currents are output on the B-N and C-N current terminals, and are controlled in the Φ-N/B-N and Φ-N/C-N fault modes.

The [CURRENT] button toggles between display/adjust of DC and AC currents.

9.4.5.1 TESTING DC-OPERATED TARGETS OF OVERCURRENT RELAYS.

1. Ensure the MTS-1720 is ready ([SYNC] LED should be on).

2. Select I4-DC current mode and Φ-N/B-N fault mode. Connect the relay, as shown in Figure 9.12.

(The C-N [I3 OUTPUT] is also available in case a DC current and two AC currents are required).

FAULT TYPE

FAULT PHASE Phase Angle Adjusted

PREFAULT STATE

FAULT STATE

POSTFAULT STATE

Φ-N A-N Ia, Ib, Ic Ia Ia

Φ-N B-N Ia, Ib, Ic Ib Ib

Φ-N C-N Ia, Ib, Ic Ic Ic

Φ-Φ A-B Ia, Ib, Ic Ia,Ib Ia,Ib

Φ-Φ B-C Ia, Ib, Ic Ib,Ic Ib,Ic

Φ-Φ C-A Ia, Ib, Ic Ic,Ia Ic,Ia

3Φ(Φ-Φ) A-B, B-C or C-A Ia, Ib, Ic Ia, Ib, Ic Ia, Ib, Ic

3Φ(Φ-N) A-N, B-N or C-N Ia, Ib, Ic Ia, Ib, Ic Ia, Ib, Ic

2Φ-N A-B Ia, Ib, Ic Ia,Ib Ia,Ib

2Φ-N B-C Ia, Ib, Ic Ib,Ic Ib,Ic

2Φ-N C-A Ia, Ib, Ic Ic,Ia Ic,Ia



3. Select static operation mode, and turn [PREFAULT] on.

Display the AC current by pressing [CURRENT] until the upper left corner of the [MODE/MENUDISPLAY] reads “AC-AMPS”. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to increase the current until the relayoperates.

4. Press [CURRENT] again, and the upper left corner of the [MODE/MENU DISPLAY] should read“DC-AMPS”.

Turn the [MODIFY] knob to increase the DC current to 0.2A (or 2A) to operate the target.

4. Press [CURRENT] to select AC-AMPS, and decrease the AC current to zero. The contacts shouldremain sealed in until the DC current is removed.

If the above is done in the FAULT state instead of prefault, and the DC current is preset (to 0.2A or 2.0A),a complete dynamic test may be performed which simulates real world operation.



FIGURE 9.12 OVERCURRENT RELAY DC TARGET/SEAL-IN TEST

9.4.6 Testing High Burden Current Differential Relays

High burden current differential relays can be tested using two of three current outputs in I3-WYE currentmode. The two currents used should be set in phase or anti-phase via the menu.

Individual phase adjust must be enabled first via SETTINGS MODES PHASE INDIVIDUAL-ADJ-MODEENABLE INDIV-CURRENT. The phase angle can then be set by pressing previous and selecting ADJUSTFAULT.

Select I4 current mode.

0-25A LED indicates AC available

Toggle [CURRENT] toadjust/display DC/ACcurrent.

TARGET

OP

OFF

ON



FIGURE 9.13 TEST CONNECTIONS FOR CURRENT DIFFERENTIAL RELAYS IN I3-WYE MODE

9.4.7 Use of Impedance Display

The impedance display feature shows the present voltage divided by the current. In the I3-WYE currentmode, the present current and voltage are selected by the fault mode.

For impedance relays, the DISP RATIOS IMPEDANCE V/I selection in the menu will display the reach ofΦ-G, Φ-Φ, and 3Φ elements directly. To avoid selection of the incorrect formula, select DISP RATIOSIMPEDANCE AUTO in the menu.

DIFFERENTIALRELAY

OP

R1

R2

I1-I2

I1

I2I1 I2

I1-I2OP

R1 R2

Select I3-WYE current mode

IA and IB must be set outof phase via the menu.

Select 0-N A-N and B-N for changing

A-N (I1) and B-N(I2) currents



9.5 APPLICATION OF ADVANCED CAPABILITIES

Almost all the advanced capabilities of the MTS-1710 are directly applicable to the MTS-1720. Thecapabilities have been extended to apply to the three-phase current system in a logical manner.

The following capabilities apply to the full 3Φ voltage, 3Φ current system:

• Separate prefault, fault, postfault settings in all fault modes • Stepping, ramping and fault duration in all fault modes • Variable frequency and harmonic outputs • Individual phase angle adjustment • Phase sequence: positive and negative • Dynamic measurement mode: auto, RMS, peak • Auto-reclose time delay • Reclose-into-fault events • Breaker time • Trip type (3-pole/1-pole) • Fault incidence angle • Complete RS-232 programmability • Programmable waveform • Fault playback

9.6 RS-232 CONTROL

As with front panel control, very little is different in controlling the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 system underRS-232, compared to the MTS-1710 alone.

The host computer is still only connected to the MTS-1710 [COM1 RS-232C] port. Commands used tocontrol the MTS-1720 are sent to it by the MTS-1710 via the interconnecting control cable.

Refer to section 6 for a full description on the RS-232 control of the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720, and for detailson RS-232 commands.

The following items are noteworthy:

9.6.1 Configuration Check

The PCF (Print configuration) command is useful for checking the equipment configuration to see that theMTS-1720 is connected and ready.

This command will return a value of 2 if the MTS-1720 is available (see Section 6.2.17).

9.6.2 Current Mode Selection

The IMD5 command selects I3-WYE current mode. If the MTS-1720 isn’t connected, off or not ready, thesystem changes to I3 current mode.

No changes to the connections to an external relay are necessary between the two modes.



9.6.3 Current Programming

The AIA#, AIB# and AIC# commands are used to set the nominal Φ-N currents. These are the levelsassumed in the prefault state in Φ-N fault mode, and are the levels assumed by unfaulted phases.

The IPR# command is used to set the prefault current level for Φ-Φ, 3Φ and 2Φ-N fault types. The IFI#,IRR#, IDU#, IFF# and IPO# commands act similarly to the I1-LOW and I3 current mode, except that thevalues are applied appropriately to 3Φ current.

The phases participating in the fault (set by the fault mode) are impacted by these commands. For example,if 3Φ fault mode is selected, all three phases of current will be impacted by the IPR#, IFI#, IRR#, IDU#,IFF# and IPO# commands. If Φ-N B-N fault mode is selected, only Ib would be affected.

All default current levels are set to 0 amps.

9.6.4 Examples

Example 1 The following example command sequence programs the single phase fault, as shown in Figure9.7.

FMD0 <- Φ-N A-N fault modeIMD5 <- I3-WYE current modeDYN <- dynamic operation modeAVA70 <- set prefault Φ-N voltage amplitudes to 70VAVB70AVC70AIA1 <- set prefault Φ-N currents to 1AAIB1AIC1PRF1 <- prefault onPOF0 <- postfault off

<- delay two seconds here for phase reading before presetting phasePRPPHS10 <- prefault phase angle 10° PFI70 <- fault phase angle 70° VFI15 <- fault voltage 15VIFI5 <- initial fault current 5ASTR <- initiate fault



Example 2 The following example command sequence programs the phase-to-phase fault, as shown inFigure 9.8.

FMD0 <- select Φ-N fault type to set nominal amplitudesIMD5 <- I3-WYE current modeDYN <- dynamic operation modeAVA70 <- set prefault Φ-N voltage amplitudes to 70VAVB70 (usually these already have been set as default values)AVC70FMD5 <- Φ-Φ C-A fault modeAIA1 <- set prefault Φ-N currents to 1AAIB1AIC1PRF1 <- prefault onPOF0 <- postfault off

<- delay two seconds here for phase reading before presetting phasePRPPHS10 <- prefault phase angle 10° IPR1 <- prefault Φ-N currents at 1APFI75 <- fault phase angle 75° VPR100 <- prefault Φ-Φ voltage 120V (100% of nominal)VFI54.2 <- fault voltage 65V (54.2% of nominal)IFI5 <- initial fault current 5A (10A phase-to-phase)STR <- initiate fault

Example 3 The following example command sequence programs the three-phase fault, as shown in Figure9.9.

FMD0 <- select Φ-N fault type to set nominal amplitudesIMD5 <- I3-WYE current modeDYN <- dynamic operation modeAVA70 <- set prefault Φ-N voltage amplitudes to 70VAVB70 (usually these already have been set as default values)AVC70FMD6 <- 3Φ A-B fault modeIPR1 <- 3Φ prefault current 1A (1.73A phase-to-phase)PRF1 <- prefault onPOF1 <- postfault on

<- delay two seconds here for phase reading before presetting phasePRPPHS10 <- prefault phase angle 10° PFI70 <- fault phase angle 70°VPR100 <- prefault voltage 120V (100% of 120V nominal)VFI28.8 <- fault voltage 34.6V (28.8% of 120V nominal)IFI6 <- initial fault current 6A (10.4A phase-to-phase)IPO1 <- postfault current 1A (1.73A phase-to-phase)STR <- initiate fault



Example 4 The following example command sequence programs the two-phase-to-ground fault, as shownin Figure 9.11.

FMD0 <- select Φ-N fault type to set nominal amplitudesIMD5 <- I3-WYE current modeDYN <- dynamic operation modeAVA70 <- set prefault Φ-N voltage amplitudes to 70VAVB70 (usually these already have been set as default values)AVC70FMD13 <- 2Φ-N B-C fault modeAIA1 <- set prefault Φ-N currents to 1AAIB1AIC1PRF1 <- prefault onPOF0 <- postfault off

<- delay two seconds here for phase reading before presetting phasePRPPHS10 <- prefault phase angle 10° PFI70 <- fault phase angle 70°IFI6 <- initial fault current 6A (10.4A phase-to-phase)VPR70 <- prefault 2Φ-N voltage at 70V (120V phase-to-phase)VFI70 <- fault voltage 70V (120 phase-to-phase)IPR1 <- 2Φ-N prefault Φ-N currents at 1ASTR <- initiate fault

Example 5 The following example command sequence programs a three-phase fault involving a currentand voltage ramp. Postfault is set on, with an auto-reclose delay of one second.

FMD0 <- select Φ-N fault type to set nominal amplitudesIMD5 <- I3-WYE current modeDYN <- dynamic operation modeAVA70 <- set prefault Φ-N voltage amplitudes to 70VAVB70 (usually these already have been set as default values)AVC70FMD6 <- 3Φ A-B fault modeIPR1 <- 3Φ prefault current 1A (1.73A phase-to-phase)PRF1 <- prefault onPOF1 <- postfault on

<- delay two seconds here for phase reading before presetting phasePRPPHS10 <- prefault phase angle 10°PFI70 <- fault phase angle 70°VPR100 <- prefault voltage 120V (100% of 120V nominal)VFI80.0 <- initial fault voltage 96V (80.0% of 120V nominal)VFF28.8 <- final fault voltage 34.6V (28.8% of 120V nominal)VRR25 <- voltage ramp rate at 25%/secVPO100 <- postfault voltage at 120V (100% of 120V nominal)IFI6 <- initial fault current 6A (10.4A phase-to-phase)IFF15 <- final fault current 15A (21.2A phase-to-phase)IRR4 <- ramp currents at 4A/sec



IPO0.4 <- postfault current 0.4TDR1 <- auto-reclose on postfault after one secondSTR <- initiate fault

9.7 FAULT PLAYBACK

Use of the MTS-1720 allows fault playback with 3Φ current. Details of operation in this mode are describedin Section 7.

Differences between MTS-1710 only, and MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 fault playback, are explained inSections 7.3.1 and 7.5.

9.8 SERVICING

9.8.1 Mains Input Fuse

For 120V systems, replace the rear panel mains AC input fuse with a fast blow, 15A/250VAC fuse. For240V systems, replace the rear panel mains AC input fuse with a fast blow, 8A/250VAC fuse.

9.8.2 Firmware Upgrade

The MTS-1720 firmware is upgradable through a serial communication port at the back of the MTS-1710.Call Manta Test Systems to obtain the correct firmware version for your particular unit. The procedure insection 8.1 describes the use of Hyperterminal as the terminal program to upgrade the unit.


MTS-1750 HIGH CURRENT SOURCE - Section 10

MTS-1750 HIGH CURRENT SOURCE

10.1 INTRODUCTION

The MTS-1750 provides a regulated high current output channel for use with the MTS-1710 and MTS-1720. High current, high VA testing of protection devices can be performed.

Three MTS-1750 units may be used with an MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 system to provide either a single phaseor three phase high current output. The total current output is programmed, measured and displayed on thefront panel of the MTS-1710, or via the RS-232 interface of the MTS-1710.

Static, dynamic and fault playback testing may be performed with the MTS-1750 enhanced system.

NOTE: The MTS-1750 requires an MTS-1710 with the MTS-1750 interface, identifiable by the [MTS-1750 CH A] connector on the rear panel of the MTS-1710. In addition, if the MTS-1720 is usedwith the MTS-1750s, it must also have the MTS-1750 interface, identifiable by the [MTS-1750CH B] and [MTS-1750 CH C] connectors on the rear panel of the MTS-1720.

10.2 SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE: Unless otherwise specified, all specifications are at 25°C ambient temperature. Deratedperformance may be expected at higher temperatures.

10.2.1 Power Supply

• 100-130VAC 50/60Hz single phase, 1800VA maximum

10.2.2 Current Output

Maximum current: 120A RMS(When combined with the MTS-1710 current output, produces 150A output)

Maximum voltage: 12V RMSMaximum power 500VAHigher currents are obtainable when multiple channels are paralleled together.

10.2.3 Measurement Accuracy & Resolution

• Accuracy: ±0.75% of reading ± 0.5% of range • Measurement ranges: 0 -41A, 41-163A• Resolution: 21.5mA

10.2.4 Protection

• Fully short/open circuit proof • Overtemperature, power overload, and clipping alarms • Circuit breaker-protected AC mains input


• 19"W x 6.25"H x 18.75"D (48.3 cm W x 15.9 cm H x 47.6 cm D)• Weight: 53.7 lbs. (24.4 kg)• Built-in carry handle/tilt stand



10.2.6 Accessories Included

• Power cord• Heavy duty shipping case• High current output cables terminated with spade terminals

10.2.7 Interface ConnectorType: DB-15, male

Connector pin-out:

Pin # Direction Type Function1 - - GND2 IN ANALOG IN-3 OUT ANALOG MEAS-4 OUT ANALOG +5V 5 IN DIG DC SERVO6 OUT DIG AMP CLIP7 IN DIG NO CONNECTION8 - - GND9 IN ANALOG IN+10 - - GND11 OUT ANALOG MEAS+12 IN DIG AMP ENABLE13 OUT ANALOG +5V14 OUT DIG AMP STATUS15 IN DIG NO CONNECTION

10.3 SETUP


FIGURE 10.1 MTS-1750 FRONT PANEL

HIGH CURRENT SOURCE

TM

POWER

ALARM

OUTPUT

AUX. CURRENT INPUT

OFF

ON

1 2 53 4



1. [CURRENT INPUT]The current input from one of the MTS-1710 current outputs, to be paralleled with the MTS-1750current output.

2. [POWER SWITCH]This is an integrated power switch and mains circuit breaker.

3. [POWER LED]Indicates instrument power is on when illuminated.

4. [ALARM LED]Indicates overload of the current output when illuminated.

5. [CURRENT OUTPUT] The MTS-1750 current output


FIGURE 10.2 MTS-1750 REAR PANEL

1. [VERTICAL SUPPORT FOOT] 2. [CONTROL CONNECTOR]

Control port connector for control from the MTS-1710 or MTS-1720.3. [SAFETY FRAME GROUND TERMINAL]

Connect to a solid earth ground.4. [AC RECEPTACLE]

This is the main AC input receptacle.

12 0VAC 60HZ

MADE IN CANADA

CONTROL

1 2 43 1



10.4 OPERATION

10.4.1 MTS-1710 + MTS-1750 Configuration

This combination allows up to 150A output single phase from the current output.


FIGURE 10.3 MTS-1710 + MTS-1750 CONTROL CONNECTIONS

• Turn off the MTS-1710, MTS-1720 and MTS-1750. Connect the AC input power and safety ground toall instruments.

• Connect the [MTS-1750 CHAN. A] port of the MTS-1710 to the [CONTROL] connector on the rearpanel of the MTS-1750, as shown in Figure 10.3.

• Connect the current outputs, as shown in Figure 10.4. • Select I1-LOW current mode on the MTS-1710. • Turn on the MTS-1710 and MTS-1750.

AUX OUTPUTS

AUX INPUTS

MTS-1750

COM 2 RS-232C

COM 1 RS-232C

MAINS

F15A

SLAVE CURRENT IN



SIGNAL INPUT

MTS-1710/1720 to MTS-1750 Connection Cable(Manta Test Systems part # 12-3245-00)

120VAC 60HZ

MADE IN CANADA

CONTROL

COM 3 CURRENT



FIGURE 10.4 MTS-1710 + MTS-1750 CURRENT CONNECTIONS


The MTS-1710 automatically detects the MTS-1750. When this occurs, the MTS-1750 indicator, as shownin Figure 10.5, appears.

FIGURE 10.5 MTS-1710 DISPLAY INDICATING MTS-1750 DETECTED

If the current mode is not correctly set for the instrument configuration, the following warning will bedisplayed on the MTS-1710 [MODE/MENU DISPLAY]:

If an incorrect number of MTS-1750s is detected for the selected current mode, the following warning willbe displayed on the MTS-1710 [MODE/MENU DISPLAY]:

HIGH CURRENT SOURCE

TM

POWER

ALARM

OUTPUT

AUX. CURRENT INPUT

OFF

ON

LOAD

Select I1-LOWcurrent mode

[ia ib ic]

NO MTS-1750 DETECTED

IMPROPER MTS-1750

CURRENT MODE

0.00AMPERES IST LINE

o-N A-N M I1-LOW

MTS-1750 DETECTEDINDICATOR



The second line will indicate the phases for which an MTS-1750 was expected, but not found. The allowableequipment configurations and current modes are:

• MTS-1710 + MTS-1750 (in I1-LOW current mode)• MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3) MTS-1750s (in I3-WYE or I3-PARALLEL current

mode)

10.4.1.3 OPERATION WITH THE MTS-1710 + MTS-1750 CONFIGURATION.

10.4.1.3.1 Current Adjustment and Display

Current is selected and adjusted, just as in I1-LOW current mode. The maximum output is 150A. Themeasured value on the [VALUE DISPLAY] is the total paralleled current through the load.

The fault current can be set without applying it to the load by using the fault current preset feature (seeSection 4.6.9).

10.4.1.3.2 RS-232 Programming

The single current output is programmed (similar to the I1-LOW current mode) using the AI1, IFI, IFF, IRR,IPO commands (see Section 6.2.6.1), with the exception that the maximum value is 150A.

10.4.2 MTS-1720 +MTS-1720 + (3) MTS-1750s Configuration

This combination allows up to 450A single phase or 150A per phase, three-phase from the current outputs.



• Connect the [COM3 SLAVE CURRENT] port of the MTS-1710 to the MTS-1720 [COM1 TO MTS-1710 PORT], using the RS-232 cable provided. (Use only the Manta Test Systems supplied cable).This is NOT a standard RS-232 cable).

• Connect the MTS-1720 current output to the MTS-1710 slave current input using the high current cable provided. (On older systems, the connector was a blue locking ring. Retract the blue locking ring before inserting. After inserting the connector in the mating socket, twist clockwise to lock. Turn the blue inner locking ring clockwise to lock the connector in place).

• Connect the [MTS-1750 CH A] port of the MTS-1710 to the [CONTROL] connector on the rear panelof the MTS-1750 that will be channel A, as shown in Figure 10.6 using the provided cable.

• Connect the [MTS-1750 CH B] port of the MTS-1720 to the [CONTROL] connector on the rear panelof the MTS-1750 that will be channel B, as shown in Figure 10.6 using the provided cable.

• Connect the [MTS-1750 CH C] port of the MTS-1720 to the [CONTROL] connector on the rear panelof the MTS-1750 that will be channel C, as shown in Figure 10.6 using the provided cable.



Cu

MTS-1(Man

S-1750NNELA

S-1750NNELB

S-1750NNELC

FIGURE 10.6 MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3)MTS-1750 CONTROL CONNECTIONS

10.4.2.2 OPERATION WITH THE MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3)MTS-1750s CONFIGURATION& SINGLE PHASE OUTPUT.

This configuration allows up to 450A single-phase current output.

10.4.2.2.1 Setup

• Make the rear panel connections, as described in Section 10.4.2.1.• Select I3-PARALLEL current mode on the MTS-1710.• Make the front panel current output connections, as shown on Figure 10.7. Note that the front panel

current connections and the rear panel control connections must correspond.• Turn on the MTS-1710, MTS-1720 and MTS-1750s.

AUX OUTPUTS

AUX INPUTS

MTS-1750 CH A

COM 3 SLAVE CURRENT

COM 2 RS-232C

COM 1 RS-232C

MAINS

F15A

SLAVE CURRENT IN



SIGNAL INPUT

M

S

rrent output cable

710 to MTS-1720 Connection Cableta Test Systems part # 12-2800-00)

120 VAC 6 0HZ

M ADE IN CAN AD A

CONTROL

120 VAC 6 0HZ

M ADE IN CAN AD A

CONTROL

120 VAC 6 0HZ

M ADE IN CAN AD A

CONTROL

MTCHA

MTCHA

MTCHA

MTS-1710/1720 to MTS-1750 Connection Cable(Manta Test Systems part # 12-3245-00)



Seleccu

EL

EL

EL

N

FIGURE 10.7 MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3)MTS-1750 SINGLE PHASE CURRENT CONNECTIONS


Current is selected and adjusted, just as in I1-LOW current mode. The maximum output is 450A. Themeasured value on the [VALUE DISPLAY] is the total paralleled current through the load.



The single current output is programmed similar to the I3-PARALLEL current mode using the AI1, IFI, IFF,IRR, IPO commands (see Section 6.2.6.1), with the exception that the maximum value is 450A.

HIGH CURRENT SOURCE

TM

POWER

ALARM

OUTPUT

AUX. CURRENT INPUT

OFF

ON

LOAD

HIGH CURRENT SOURCE

TM

POWER

ALARM

OUTPUT

AUX. CURRENT INPUT

OFF

ON

TM

POWER

ALARM

OUTPUT

AUX. CURRENT INPUT

OFF

ON

t I3-PARALLELrrent mode

CHANNA

CHANNB

CHANNC

OTE: Rear panel control connections must match figure 10-6.

OFF

ON



Sc

EL

EL

EL

NO

10.4.2.3 OPERATION WITH THE MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3)MTS-1750s CONFIGURATION &THREE PHASE OUTPUT.

This configuration allows up to 150A three-phase current output.

10.4.2.3.1 Setup

• Make the rear panel connections, as described in Section 10.4.2.1.• Select I3-WYE current mode on the MTS-1710.• Make the front panel current output connections, as shown on Figure 10.8. Note that the front panel

current connections and the rear panel control connections must correspond.• Turn on the MTS-1710, MTS-1720 and MTS-1750s.

FIGURE 10.8 MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3)MTS-1750 THREE PHASE CURRENT CONNECTIONS

HIGH CURRENT SOURCE

TM

POWER

ALARM

OUTPUT

AUX. CURRENT INPUT

OFF

ON

HIGH CURRENT SOURCE

TM

POWER

ALARM

OUTPUT

AUX. CURRENT INPUT

OFF

ON

TM

POWER

ALARM

OUTPUT

AUX. CURRENT INPUT

OFF

ON

elect I3-WYEurrent mode

IC

IB

IA

CHANNA

CHANNB

CHANNC

TE: Rear panel control connections must match figure 10-6.

OFF

ON




Current is selected and adjusted, just as in I3-WYE current mode. The maximum output is 150A per phase.The measured value on the [VALUE DISPLAY] is the total paralleled current through the load. Thedisplayed quantity depends on the [FAULT MODE] selection, as shown in the table in Section 9.4.3.



The three-phase current output is programmed similar to the I3-WYE current mode using the AIA, AIB,AIC, IPR, IFI, IFF, IRR, IPO commands (see Sections 6.2.6.1 and 6.2.6.2) with the exception that themaximum value is 150A.

10.4.3 Alarms

When the output of the MTS-1750 is overloaded, the [ALARM LED] will illuminate. The nature of thealarm (overtemperature or current/power overload) will be displayed on the MTS-1710 [MODE/MENUDISPLAY].

10.4.4 Application of Advanced Capabilities

Almost all the advanced capabilities of the MTS-1710 and MTS-1720 are directly applicable to the MTS-1750. The capabilities have been extended to apply to the three-phase current system in a logical manner.These include:

• Separate prefault, fault, and postfault settings in all fault modes• Stepping, ramping and fault duration in all fault modes• Variable frequency and harmonic outputs• Individual phase angle and amplitude adjustment• Phase sequence: positive and negative• Dynamic measurement mode: auto, RMS, peak• Auto-reclose time delay• Reclose-into-fault events• Breaker time• Trip type (3-pole/ 1-pole)• Fault incidence angle• Complete RS-232 programmability• Programmable waveform• Fault playback• Current paralleling• Multi-system synchronization

10.4.4.1 INDIVIDUAL PHASE AND AMPLITUDE ADJUSTMENT WITH THE MTS-1750.

For the MTS-1710 + MTS-1750 configuration, the current amplitude is programmed by the AI1#,#command (150A maximum), and the current phase angle is programmed by the PHS#,#,4 command.



Otherwise, the operation is as described in Sections 5.12.2.1.1 and 6.7.1.

For the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3) MTS-1750 configuration with a single phase load, the currentamplitude is programmed by the AI1#,# command (450A maximum), and the current phase angle is alwaysfixed at 0°. Otherwise, the operation is as described in Sections 5.12.2.1.4 and 6.7.1.

For the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3) MTS-1750 configuration with a three phase load, the currentamplitudes are programmed by the AIA#,# AIB#,# and AIC#,# commands (150A maximum), and thecurrent phase angles are programmed by the PHS#,#,4 PHS#,#,5 and PHS#,#,6 commands. Otherwise, theoperation is as described in Sections 5.12.2.1.5 and 6.7.2.

10.4.4.2 FAULT PLAYBACK WITH THE MTS-1750.

Fault playback can be performed with the MTS-1750 in any of the described configurations.

For the MTS-1710 + MTS-1750 configuration, the maximum current is programmed by the AIA command(150A maximum). Otherwise, the operation is as described in Sections 7.3.1.1 and 7.5.1.

For the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3) MTS-1750 configuration with a single phase load, the maximumcurrent is programmed by the AIA command (450A maximum). Otherwise, the operation is as described inSections 7.3.1.1 and 7.5.1.

For the MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + (3) MTS-1750 configuration with a three phase load, the maximumcurrent for the A, B and C channels is programmed by the AIA, AIB and AIC commands respectively (150Amaximum). Otherwise, the operation is as described in Sections 7.3.1.2 and 7.5.2.

10.4.4.3 PARALLELLING MORE THAN TWO MTS-1710/MTS-1720 SYSTEMS WITH MTS-1750s.

Multiple MTS-1710s with or without MTS-1720s can be paralleled together to provide single phase orthree-phase high current, as described in Section 4.6.10.6. Any of these configurations further can beenhanced by adding one or more MTS-1750s to provide even higher current output.

10.4.4.4 OPERATION OF THE MTS-1750 AS A STAND-ALONE CURRENT SOURCE.

The MTS-1750 can be used as a stand alone high current source without the need of a 1710. Theconfiguration requires a function generator used to control the amplitude, frequency and shape of thegenerated signal.

Connection and Power

• Turn on the Function Generator and ensure the generator has a minimum output voltage.• Select the type of signal (sine wave, square wave, etc.) which you wish to amplify.• Turn off the Function Generator, and ensure the MTS-1750 is also turned off.• Connect the leads of the Function Generator to pins 2 and 9, as shown in Figure 10.9.• Short together pin 12 (ground) to pin 8 (Amplifier enable). Pin 8 is the amplifier enable and is active

low. Shorting this pin to ground forces will always enable the amplifiers.



• Connect the outputs of the MTS-1750 to the device under test. • Connect the AC input power to the MTS-1750, and turn it on. WARNING – OUTPUTS MAY BE

LIVE WHEN MTS-1750 MAIN POWER SWITCH IS ON. TURN OFF MAIN POWERSWITCH BEFORE MAKING WIRING CHANGES.

FIGURE 10.9 MTS-1750 CONTROL CONNECTOR CONNECTIONSFOR STAND ALONE OPERATION

Operation

The function generator controls the MTS-1750 output current. This configuration has a gain of 20 (e.g. ifthe amplitude of the function generator is 0.5 V, the MTS-1750 will output a current of 10.00 A). Theacceptable range of control voltage is 100mV to 5.0V (control voltage can go as low as 0; however, thesignal may be distorted slightly). All adjustments, including amplitude, frequency and general signalshape, are controlled by the function generator.

CONTROL

+ Terminal of

Function Generator

- Terminal of

Function Generator

Short Amplifier

Enable

to Ground

1 2 3 4

9 1311 1210 14

7

15

865

- Terminal of

Voltage Meter

+ Terminal of

Voltage Meter


MTS-1753 THREE CHANNEL CURRENT SOURCE - Section 11

MTS-1753 THREE CHANNEL CURRENT SOURCE

11.1 INTRODUCTION

The MTS-1753 three channel current source is a convenient way to increase the three phase current outputof an MTS-1710 and MTS-1720 system when it’s desired to do very high per-phase current testing. Anexample of this type of work would be complete protective relay system testing using calculated faults basedon real world system parameters. The high power capabilities of the MTS-1710 +1720 + 1753 are sufficientto drive a complete panel full of protective relays, while the relatively long time duration available for thefull power output offers exceptional flexibility in programming fault scenarios.

The total current output is programmed, measured and displayed on the front panel of the MTS-1710, or viathe RS-232 interface of the MTS-1710.

11.2 SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE: All specifications are preliminary and subject to revision.

11.2.1 Power Supply 100-130 VAC 50/60Hz single phase, 1800VA maximum

11.2.2 Current Output

Maximum three phase current per phase 30 amps for 15 seconds, 15 amps continuous MTS-1753 outputMaximum three-phase current per phase 60 amps for 15 seconds, 30 amps continuous total system outputMaximum three phase power per phase 400 VA for 15 seconds, 300 VA continuous total system powerMaximum single-phase current 180 amps for 15 seconds, 90-amp continuous total system outputMaximum single phase power 800 VA continuous, 1200 VA for 15 seconds total system output

11.2.3 Protection

• Fully short/open circuit proof• Overtemperature, power overload, and clipping alarms• Circuit breaker protected AC mains input


• 19"W x 6.25"H x 18.75"D (48.3 cm W x 15.9 cm H x 47.6 cm D)• Weight: 53.25 lbs. (24.15 kg)• Built-in carry handle/tilt stand



11.3 SETUP


FIGURE 11.1 MTS-1753 FRONT PANEL

1. CURRENT INPUTThe three individual phase current outputs from the MTS-1710 are connected to these inputs. Theneutral return terminals are internally connected together. See Figure 11.3 for connection details.

2. POWER SWITCHThis is an integrated power switch and mains circuit breaker.

3. POWER LEDIndicates instrument power is on when illuminated.

4. CURRENT OUTPUTSThe total current from the MTS-1753, -1710, and -1720 flows from these terminals to the deviceunder test.

5. ALARM LEDS Indicate overload of the respective current outputs when illuminated.




FIGURE 11.2 MTS-1753 REAR PANEL

1. CHANNEL A CONTROL CONNECTOR Connects to the “MTS-1750” connector on the MTS-1710.

2. CHANNEL B CONTROL CONNECTOR Connects to the “MTS-1750 CH B” connector on the MTS-1720.

3. CHANNEL C CONTROL CONNECTOR Connects to the “MTS-1750 CH C” connector on the MTS-1720.

4. AC RECEPTACLE This is the main AC input receptacle.

5. SAFETY FRAME GROUND TERMINAL Connect to a solid earth ground.



11.4 OPERATION

11.4.1 MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + MTS-1753 Configuration

This combination allows up to 60 A per phase from the current outputs.


FIGURE 11.3 MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + MTS-1753 CONTROL CONNECTIONS

The standard MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 connections are shown in gray. Additional connections required forthe MTS-1753 are shown in black.



FIGURE 11.4 MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + MTS-1753 CURRENT CONNECTIONS


• Connect the control connectors, as shown in Figure 11.3. • Connect the current wiring, as shown in Figure 11.4. • Select the I3 current mode on the MTS-1710. • Turn on the MTS-1710, MTS-1720 and MTS-1753.




The MTS-1710 automatically detects the MTS-1753. When this occurs, the MTS-1753 indicator, as shownin Figure 11.5, appears.

FIGURE 11.5 MTS-1710 DISPLAY INDICATING MTS-1753 DETECTED

11.4.1.3 OPERATION WITH THE MTS-1710 + MTS-1720 + MTS-1753 CONFIGURATION.


Current is selected and adjusted, just as in I3 current mode. The maximum output per phase is 60A. Themeasured value on the [VALUE DISPLAY] is the total paralleled current through the load.


MTS-1753 DETECTED INDICATOR


APPENDIX A

PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL I/O CHANNELS (OPTION -03A)

This option is intended for use with the MTS-1730 Digital Input/Output Signal Conditioner.

A.1 FEATURES

A.2 APPLICATIONS

• Simulation of auxiliary signals, such as permissive trip, block, reclosure initiate, etc. for protectionpanel testing

• Circuit breaker simulator• Testing of multi-shot reclosing relays, pilot wire relays• Automated testing of multiple contact relays• Sequence of events recording• Routing of currents and voltages for testing multiple relay elements

A.3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

• 16 Programmable digital outputs

• 16 Digital inputs

• 1 Phase programmable square wave output

• Expands MTS-1710 external trigger inputs to seven start triggers and 16 stop triggers

• Implements basic programmable logic functions

• Performs sequence of events recording on all input and output channels

• Programmable delay on all outputs

Parameter Min. Typical Maximum

Input High Voltage +2.0V - +5.0V

Input Low Voltage -0.3V - +0.8V

Input High Current -200uA -400uA -

Input Low Current - -2mA -3.2mA

Output High Voltage 2.4V - 5.1V

Output Low Voltage 0V - 0.4V

Output High Current (sourcing) -200uA -1500uA -

Output Low Current (sinking) 3.2mA - -

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL A-1 CU A002 14A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

PROGRAMMABLE DIGITAL I/O CHANNELS

A.4 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Auxiliary InputsConnector: DB-25 Female Pinout:Pin Signal 1 signal ground2 +5V @ 100mA max3 AUXIN154 AUXIN135 AUXIN116 AUXIN97 AUXIN78 AUXIN59 AUXIN310 AUXIN111 no connection12 no connection13 no connection

Auxiliary OutputsConnector: DB-25 Male Pinout:Pin Signal 1 no connection 2 no connection3 no connection4 AUXOUT15 AUXOUT36 AUXOUT57 AUXOUT78 AUXOUT99 AUXOUT1110 AUXOUT1311 AUXOUT1512 +5V @ 100mA max13 signal ground

NOTE: The signal ground is the same ground as the ground of the MTS-1710 voltage and currentoutputs.

Output isolation is provided by the MTS-1730 Input/Output Signal Conditioner (Option -03B).

Pin Signal14 signal ground15 no connection16 AUXIN1417 AUXIN1218 AUXIN1019 AUXIN820 AUXIN621 AUXIN422 AUXIN223 AUXIN024 no connection25 no connection

Pin Signal14 no connection15 no connection16 AUXOUT017 AUXOUT218 AUXOUT419 AUXOUT620 AUXOUT821 AUXOUT1022 AUXOUT1223 AUXOUT1424 AUXOUT1625 signal ground

A-2 MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A


A.5 OPERATION

Control of all digital I/O channels is provided by extensions of the MTS-1710’s RS-232 command set. Allfunctions of the digital I/O channels are available in all the MTS-1710’s operation modes, as well as in faultplayback.

A.5.1 Digital Inputs

The state of all digital inputs may be read at any time. In addition, while the MTS-1710 is in the FAULTstate, all digital inputs are sampled at 1ms intervals, allowing the MTS-1710 to provide sequence of eventsrecording during a test.

Input channels 0-6 may be used as an external start trigger source. Input channels 0-15 may be used as anexternal stop trigger source. Start and stop triggers from these channels are logically OR’ed with the start/stop triggers on the front panel of the MTS-1710.

The MTS-1730 external start trigger channel can be set via the menu under OPTION MTS-1730 START.The MTS-1730 external stop trigger channel can be set via the menu under OPTION MTS-1730 STOP.

For MTS-1730 systems with more than 16 input channels, only one bank of up to 16 channels can be activeat a time. The active bank can be selected via the menu under OPTION MTS-1730 BANK.

A.5.2 Digital Outputs

The state of all digital outputs may be read at any time. The outputs may be programmed to have differentvalues in prefault, fault and postfault states.

During the fault state, outputs may be programmed to change at a specific time(s). For more complexsimulations, the output may be programmed to change in response to some condition on the input channels.This condition may be defined by a logic equation (i.e. AND/OR condition).

A.5.3 Phase Comparison Output

When enabled, this feature replaces one of the normal output channels with a programmable square waveoutput for use as a phase comparison signal.

The phase of the output is programmable in reference to the voltage and current outputs of the MTS-1710,and may be defined to be different values in prefault, fault and postfault states. The output also may bedisabled in any fault state, or enabled after a specific time in the FAULT state. The pulse width of the outputis also programmable.

A.6 COMMAND SET DESCRIPTION

The following section describes the use of the RS-232C command set for controlling the digital I/Ochannels:

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL A-3CU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS


A.6.1 Interpretation of Logic Values

Logic values of digital inputs and outputs should be interpreted as follows:

1 = Contact closed or voltage present0 = Contact open or voltage absent

A.6.2 Specifying Values in Digital I/O Commands

Values in commands denoted by # can be specified in one of three formats: decimal, binary or hexadecimal.

Decimal values are assumed by default, or specified by an optional and prefix. Binary values are specifiedby a % prefix. Hexadecimal values are specified by an H prefix.

For example, the following values, when used in digital I/O commands, are equivalent:H2E50 (hexadecimal)%10111001010000 (binary)11856 (decimal)&11856 (decimal)

For your reference, a decimal, binary and hexadecimal conversion table is given below:

Decimal Binary Hexadecimal0 0000 01 0001 12 0010 23 0011 34 0100 45 0101 56 0110 67 0111 78 1000 89 1001 910 1010 A11 1011 B12 1100 C13 1101 D14 1110 E15 1111 F

A.6.3 General Commands

Command DescriptionDIO,FMT# Output number format

• Specifies the format of output data values as they’re printed by the MTS-1710 • Valid values are 0-2

0 - hexadecimal (for example, E29B)1 - binary (for example, 1110001010011011)2 - decimal (for example, 58011)



• In all cases, leading zeros may be printed • The default output format is decimal (base 10) • This command doesn’t affect the format in which values in DIO commands

are specified.

DIO,STA Digital I/O status • Prints digital I/O port status and error byte • A value of 0 indicates no warnings and errors are active • The value returned will range from 0-255 (in decimal), and should be

interpreted as an 16 bit value to determine the errors. A 1 in a bit position will indicate an error.

The bit position assignments are as follows:

Bit# Error 0 Input channel sequence of events recorder memory full 1 Timer overflow (65535ms maximum limit) 2 Conditional output table overflow 3 Output channel sequence of events recorder memory full 4-15 not used

A.6.4 Digital Input Control

Command DescriptionDIO,STR# Start trigger channel select

• First parameter specifies the channelValues of 0-6 select channels 0-6Value of 7 disables start trigger (default value)

DIO,STP# Stop trigger channel select• Parameter specifies the channel

Values of 0-15 select channels 0-15Value of 16 disables the stop trigger (default value)

DIO,INP Read inputs• Reads status of all 16 inputs and returns 16 bit result• Example: (assuming hex format initially selected)

Ready>DIO,INP0F29Ready>DIO,FMT1Ready>DIO,INP0000111100101001Ready>



DIO,SEQ Sequence of events report summary• Prints prefault, fault and postfault input values• Example: (assuming hex format selected)

Ready>DIO,SEQPrefault,0800 <- channel 11 = 1, other channels=0, just before faultFault,0800 <- no change at start of faultPostfault,000A <- channels 1,3 = 1 after faultReady>

DIO,SER Sequence of events report• Prints a table representing the sequence of events on the digital input channels.

This table can be sent to an applications program for graphical display.• Only samples before and after a transition are output• Up to 256 transitions will be recorded by the sequence of events function.• Example: (assuming hex format selected)

Ready>DIO,SERTime(ms),Value-0016,08000000,08000008,08000019,0C000025,0C000026,04020102,04020103,04060104,040FEND OF REPORTReady>

• “END OF REPORT” is sent by the MTS-1710 at the end of the sequence ofevents report.

• The report includes all events during the FAULT state until 100ms after entryinto the POSTFAULT state.

• The sequence of events report should be interrogated in the postfault or faultstate. It’s cleared when the MTS-1710 is returned to the prefault state.

• Sequence of events recording is only performed in dynamic operation mode.

DIO,POC# Postfault continuation time • Enables operation of output features and sequence of events recording for the

specified time after entry into the POSTFAULT state. • This enables tests, such as measurement of contact dwell timing and multi-shot

auto reclose simulation, to be performed. • Valid values are 0 - 20000 ms. The default value is 100ms.



DIO,POI Postfault input • Prints the value of showing all input channels which assumed a ‘1’ value within

the postfault continuation time (see DIO,POC) after entering the postfaultstate.

• When used with the MTS-1730, this can be used to determine all contacts whichclosed when the stop trigger occurred.

DIO,IBK# Input bank • For MTS-1730 systems with more than 16 input channels, this command selects the bank which is active. • Valid values are 0-3. Bank 0 is the default. • Within each bank, the channels are numbered 0-15.

A.6.5 Digital Output Control

A.6.5.1 COMMANDS.

Command DescriptionDIO,OUT#,#,# Output definition

• This command is used to specify the value of the outputs at the beginning of aparticular fault state

• First parameter specifies the fault state 0=prefault, 1=fault, 2=postfault

• Second parameter specifies the 16 bit output value • Third parameter specifies the output mask (i.e. channels to be changed have their output mask bit set to. Otherwise, they’re left unchanged) • Example command: (using binary input values)

DIO,OUT,0,%0000010011100000,%0000011011110000 This command specifies that, at the start of prefault, channels 5,6,7 & 10 are set

to 1; channels 4 & 9 are set to 0; and all other channels remain unchanged. Theleading zeros in this command could be eliminated, leaving the command toread as follows:

DIO,OUT,0,%10011100000,%11011110000 • Example command: (using hex input values)

DIO,OUT,1,H0008,H000F This command specifies that, at the start of the FAULT state, channels 0, 1 &

2 are set to 0; channel 3 is set to 1; and all other channels remain unchanged.The leading zeros in this command could be eliminated, leaving the commandto read as follows:

DIO,OUT0,H8,HF • The comma after the command “OUT” is optional.



DIO,ODY#,#,# Delayed output definition • This command is used to specify a change value of the outputs at a particular

time after the beginning of the FAULT state • First parameter specifies the delay time • Valid values are 1 - 65535 (ms) • Second parameter specifies the 16 bit output value

• Third parameter specifies the output mask (i.e. which channels are to be changed)

• Example command: (using hex input values)DIO,ODY,35,H00C0,H0040

This command specifies that, at 35ms after the start of the FAULT state,channel 7 is to be set to 0, channel 6 is to be set to 1, and all other channelsremain unchanged.

• Up to 85 delayed outputs may be defined (Older MTS-1710s may only acceptup to 42 delayed output definitions)

• The comma after the command “ODY” is optional • NOTE: All DIO,ODY commands must be specified in an ascending time order.

Delayed outputs are only processed in dynamic operation mode.

DIO,ORD Read outputs • Reads status of all 16 output channels and returns 16 bit result • Example: (assuming hex format selected)

Ready>DIO,ORDA082Ready>

DIO,OCD#,#,#,#,# Conditional output definition • This command is used to specify a change value of the outputs after a change

in one or more inputs during the FAULT state • First parameter specifies the input value • Second parameter specifies the input mask (i.e. which channels are to be observed for changes) • Third parameter specifies the delay time. The specified output change will occur after this delay time from the time of the specified input change. Valid

values are 0 - 65535 (ms). • Fourth parameter specifies the 16 bit output value

• Fifth parameter specifies the output mask (i.e. which channels are to be changed)

• Up to five conditional outputs may be defined • This command responds to changes; not to constant levels. (i.e. if the condition already has been met, the outputs won’t change)



• Example command: (using hex input values)DIO,OCD,H0040,H0060,12,H0800,H0800

This command specifies that, when the condition (input channel 5 has changedto 0, and input channel 6 has changed to 1) is met, 12 ms later, output channel11 is to be set to 1.

Note that an AND condition is specified by setting more than 1 bit in the inputmask. An OR condition is specified by sending another DIO,OCD command,specifying the second, third, etc. conditions.

• Conditional outputs are edge re-triggerable. This means that an output changewill be triggered each time the inputs change to the specified condition.

• Conditional outputs are only processed in dynamic operation mode.

DIO,OCL Clear output settings • Clears all output prefault, fault, postfault settings, conditional output

definitions, and delayed output definitions. • Sets all digital outputs to 0.

DIO,SEO Sequence of output events report• Prints a table representing the sequence of events on the digital output

channels.This table can be sent to an applications program for graphicaldisplay.

• Only samples after a transition are output.• Up to 128 transitions will be recorded by the sequence of events function.• Example: (assuming hex format selected)

Ready>DIO,SEOTime(ms),Value-0016,08000008,0C000019,04100102,04020113,04060144,040FEND OF REPORTReady>

• “END OF REPORT” is sent by the MTS-1710 at the end of the sequence ofoutput events report.

• The report includes all events during the FAULT state until 100ms after entryinto the POSTFAULT state.

• The sequence of output events report should be interrogated in the postfault orfault state. It’s cleared when the MTS-1710 is returned to the prefault state.

• Recording is only performed in dynamic operation mode.



A.6.5.2 EXAMPLES.

Example 1 Simple Pulse Output.

The following command sequence sets channel 1 output to 0 in prefault state, and produces a 50ms widepositive pulse after 100ms in the fault state, as illustrated in Figure A-1(a).

DIO,OCL <- clear output settingsDYNDIO,OUT0,0,%10 <- channel 1 prefault level=0DIO,ODY100,%10,%10 <- set channel 1 to 1 100ms after FAULTDIO,ODY150,0,%10 <- set channel 1 to 0 150ms after FAULTSTR <- initiate fault using STR command (or use external trigger)

Example 2 Simulated Permissive Trip Signal.

The following command sequence sets channel 2 output to 0 in prefault state, to 1 60 ms after the start ofFAULT state, and back to 0 in postfault, simulating a permissive trip signal, as illustrated in Figure A-1(b).

DIO,OCL <- clear output settingsDYNDIO,OUT0,0,%100 <- channel 2 prefault level=0DIO,ODY60,%100,%100 <- set channel 2 to 1 60ms after FAULTDIO,OUT2,0,%100 <- set channel 2 to 0 in postfaultSTR <- initiate fault using STR command (or use external trigger)

FIGURE A-1. DIGITAL OUTPUT EXAMPLES


(a) Example 1

(b) Example 2

(c) Example 3

Channel1

0 ms 100 ms 150 ms

60 ms0 ms

2Channel

Channel0

1

2

3

ms0 25 40 106



Example 3 Multiple channel digital output sequence.

The following command sequence programs output channels 0-3 to output pre-defined sequence, asillustrated in Figure A-1(c).

DIO,OCL <- clear output settingsDYNDIO,OUT0,0,HF <- channels 0-3 prefault level=0DIO,OUT1,1,1 <- channel 1 changes to 1 on FAULTDIO,ODY25,%1010,%1011 <- channels 0,1 & 3 change at 25msDIO,ODY40,%100,%100 <- channel 2 changes to 1 at 40 msDIO,ODY42,0,%10 <- channel 1 changes to 0 at 42 msDIO,ODY106,0,%1000 <- channel 3 changes to 0 at 106msDIO,OUT2,0,HF <- channels 0-3 postfault level=0STR <- initiate fault using STR command (or use external trigger)

Example 4 Simulated Breaker Closed (52A) Signal.

The following command sequence sets channel 0 to be “off” in postfault state and “on” in all other states.To simulate a 52A signal:

DIO,OCL <- clear output settingsDIO,OUT0,1,1 <- set channel 0 to be on in prefaultDIO,OUT2,0,1 <- set channel 0 to be off in postfault

Note that no command is required to set the fault state value since no change is required when the fault statechanges from prefault to fault.

Example 5 Simulated Breaker Open (52B) Signal.

The following command sequence sets channel 0 to be “on” in postfault state, and “off” in all other states.To simulate a 52B signal:

DIO,OCL <- clear output settingsDIO,OUT0,0,1 <- set channel 0 to be on in prefaultDIO,OUT2,1,1 <- set channel 0 to be off in postfault

Note that no command is required to set the fault state value since no change is required when the fault statechanges from prefault to fault.

A.6.6 Phase Comparison Output Programming

A.6.6.1 COMMANDS.

Command DescriptionDIO,PCO# Phase comparison output enable/disable

• Valid values are 0-1• 0 = disabled (AUXOUT15 becomes normal digital output)

• 1 = enabled (AUXOUT15 becomes programmable square waveoutput)• The default value is 0 (disabled)



DIO,PCP#,#,# Phase comparison phase • First parameter specifies the fault state

0=prefault, 1=fault, 2=postfault• Second parameter provides enable (0=disable, 1=enable)• When disabled, the phase comparison output is set to 0.• Third parameter specifies the phase (0-360°)• NOTE: For the phase comparison output to be synchronized to the fault state

timing identically in successive tests, the fault incidence angle must beprogrammed to a specific value. This synchronizes the start of the fault to aspecific point on the waveform, causing successive tests to be identical. Usethe FIA# command for this purpose.

• If the second parameter is 0 (disable output), then the third parameter (phase)can be omitted.

DIO,PCD# Phase comparison delay • Sets phase comparison output delay from the start of FAULT state. • Valid values are 0-65535 (ms). The default value is 0 ms. • NOTE: For the phase comparison output to be synchronized to the fault state

timing identically in successive tests, the fault incidence angle must beprogrammed to a specific value. This synchronizes the start of the fault to aspecific point on the waveform, causing successive tests to be identical. Usethe FIA# command for this purpose.

DIO,PCW# Phase comparison width• Sets the width of the off (logical 0) time of the phase comparison output signal• Valid values are 1 - 20000 (microseconds)• The width of the on time (logical 1) is: 1/(output frequency) - off time• The default value is 8333 microseconds (1/2 period of 60 Hz)

A.6.6.2 EXAMPLES.

Example 1

The following command sequence sets the phase comparison output to 10° in prefault, to 250° in the faultstate, and to “off” in the postfault state.

FIA0 <- set fault incidence angle to 0° DIO,PCO1 <- enable phase comparison output featureDIO,PCP0,1,10 <- prefault phase at 10° DIO,PCP1,1,250 <- fault phase at 250° DIO,PCD0 <- change to fault phase immediately on entry into fault stateDIO,PCP2,0 <- postfault phase comparison output disabledDIO,OUT2,0,H8000 <- force postfault value to zero



Example 2

The following command sequence sets the phase comparison output to 0 in prefault, to 70° 45ms after entryinto the fault state, and to “off” (zero) in the postfault state.

FIA30 <- set fault incidence angle to 30° DIO,PCO1 <- enable phase comparison output featureDIO,PCP0,0 <- prefault phase comparison output disabledDIO,OUT0,0,H8000 <- force prefault value to zeroDIO,PCP1,1,70 <- fault phase at 70° DIO,PCD45 <- change to fault phase 45ms after entry into fault stateDIO,PCP2,0 <- postfault phase comparison output disabledDIO,OUT2,0,H8000 <- force postfault value to zero

A.7 COMMAND SUMMARY CHART

* Indicates multiple definitions possible.

Digital I/O Command Summary

Start trigger channel DIO,STR# Stop trigger channel DIO,STP,#


Outputs [value, mask] DIO,OUT0,#,# DIO,OUT1,#,# DIO,OUT2,#,#

Delayed Outputs [time, value, mask] *DIO,ODY#,#,#...

Conditional Outputs [input value, input mask, delay, output value, output mask]

*DIO,OCD#,#,#,#,#...

Phase Comparison Phase [0/1, deg] DIO,PCP0,#,# DIO,PCP1,#,# DIO,PCP2,#,#

Phase Comparison Delay [ms] DIO,PCD#

Phase Comparison Output Misc. Output Control

Enable/Disable [1/0] DIO,PCO# Output settings clear DIO,OCL

Width [us] DIO,PCW# Read outputs DIO,ORD

Other Input Commands General Commands

Sequence of events report summary DIO,SEQ Value & mask print format DIO,FMT#

Sequence of events report DIO,SER Status DIO,STA

Read Inputs DIO,INP

Postfault inputs DIO,POI


APPENDIX B

MTS-1730 DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CONDITIONER

The MTS-1730 conditions protection relay and panel digital signals for use by the MTS-1710 digital I/Ochannels.

B.1 SPECIFICATIONS

B.1.1 Input Channels

• Up to 16 fully isolated three-terminal channels, accepting shrouded plugs• Up to 64 bank selectable, three-terminal channels, using 16-channel modules• DC/AC sensing from 10 - 300V peak, at >50kohms• Strappable for 5V or 12V logic sensing input• Contact sensing, dry or wet contact to 300V peak, @ >50kohms• 1ms debounce time for change of state of input signal• LED indicates closed contact or voltage presence• Test pushbutton provided for each channel

B.1.2 Output Channels

• Up to 16 galvanically isolated channels with 5-way binding posts• DC/AC switching at up to 300V peak/300mA• Three output styles available (see Section B.3)• LED indicates “closed contact”• Test pushbutton provided for each channel

B.1.3 Power

• Single phase 105-130VAC @ 1A max (or 210-250VAC @ 0.5A max), factory set

B.1.4 Physical Characteristics

• 19”W x 6”H x 18”D (48.3cm x 14.7cm x 45.7cm)• Weight 16lbs (7.3kg)• Modular plug-in construction.• Built-in carry handle/tilt stand. Rear support feet.

B.2 APPLICATIONS

• Simulation of auxiliary signals, such as permissive trip, block, reclosure initiate, breaker open, etc. forprotection panel testing

• Automated testing of multiple output contact relays• Sequence of events recording• Routing of currents and voltages for testing multiple elements

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL B-1

CU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

MTS-1730 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL CONDITIONER

B.3 ORDERING INFORMATION

MTS-1730 Basic unit, including case, carry handle (two input modules and two outputmodules, included as standard).

Can accommodate up to four input modules and four output modules in total.

• Option -02 240VAC, 50/60 Hz line input• Option -03C1-5 Input module, containing four isolated 3-terminal channels, LED indicators, and test pushbutton. (5V logic voltage sensing)• Option -03C1-12 Input module, containing four isolated 3-terminal channels, LED indicators and

test pushbutton. (12V or greater logic voltage sensing)• Option -03C2-5 16 channel input module, 3-terminal channels, LED indicators.

(5V logic voltage sensing)• Option -03C2-12 16 channel input module, 3-terminal channels, LED indicators. (12V or greater logic voltage sensing)• Option -03D Output module, four isolated channels with five-way binding posts, LED

indicators, and test pushbuttons. Variations available listed below.

• Option -05 1 Year extended warrantyAdditional year for a total of two years.

• Option -11 Hardshell shipping case• Option -14 Cordura carry case• Option -14 19” Rackmount enclosure

Order code Type Voltage rating Current rating Output type Switching speed

Application

Option -03D1 Standard 300V DC/AC 300mA DC/AC

Reed relay 0.25ms typ., 0.5ms

max.

General purpose

Option -03D2 High speed 300V DC/AC 150mA DC, 250mA AC

MOSFET 50us typ.,100 us max.

High speed signals (e.g. phase comparison)

Option -03D4 High current 75V DC or 60V AC

50A DC/AC Form A contact relay

8 ms max operate, 3 ms max. release

Current routing

B-2 MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A


B.4 FRONT PANEL

FIGURE B-1. MTS-1730 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT

1. [POWER] SWITCH.

This switch turns on the MTS-1730.

2. CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT LEGEND.

This legend shows the channel numbering for input and output channels.

When used with the MTS-1710, channels 0-6 can be used as additional start triggers, and channels 0-15can be used as additional stop triggers.

3. INPUT MODULE

Four channel input module. Accepts shrouded plugs.

4. INPUT STATUS LED/TEST PUSHBUTTON

The LED indicates when a closed contact or voltage is detected on the associated input channel. The testpushbutton will force the channel to the “on” state, as if a closed contact or voltage was applied.

5. CONTACT SENSE INPUT

Wet or dry contact sense input.

6. VOLTAGE SENSE INPUT

DC/AC voltage sensing input from 10 to 300V peak at greater than 50k ohms impedance.

7. OUTPUT MODULE

Four channel output module with five-way binding posts.

12

3 4 5 6 7 8 9


CU A002 15A .MANTA TEST SYSTEMS


8. OUTPUT CHANNEL TERMINALS

Normally open contact output. Ratings depend upon type of output module installed. See Section B.3.

9. OUTPUT STATUS LED/TEST PUSHBUTTON

The LED indicates when the associated output channel is in the “on” (closed state). The test pushbuttonwill force the output channel to the “on” (closed) state.

B.5 REAR PANEL

FIGURE B-2. MTS-1730 REAR PANEL LAYOUT

1. OUTPUTS CONNECTORControl signals for output channels. Connect to the MTS-1710 [AUX OUTPUTS] connector, using theappropriate cable.

Connector: DB-25 FemalePinout:

Pin Signal1 signal ground2 don’t use3 AUXOUT154 AUXOUT135 AUXOUT116 AUXOUT97 AUXOUT78 AUXOUT59 AUXOUT310 AUXOUT111 no connection12 no connection13 no connection

2. INPUTS CONNECTORConditioned input channel signals. Connect to the MTS-1710 [AUX INPUTS] connector, using theappropriate cable.

Pin Signal14 signal ground15 AUXOUT1616 AUXOUT1417 AUXOUT1218 AUXOUT1019 AUXOUT820 AUXOUT621 AUXOUT422 AUXOUT223 AUXOUT024 no connection25 no connection

1 2 3 4 5 6



Connector: DB-25 MalePinout:Pin Signal1 no connection2 no connection3 no connection4 AUXIN15 AUXIN36 AUXIN57 AUXIN78 AUXIN99 AUXIN1110 AUXIN1311 AUXIN1512 don’t use13 signal ground

3. AUX CONNECTORReserved for future expansion.

4. AC INPUT RECEPTACLEThis is the main AC input receptacle.

5. MAINS INPUT FUSEThis is the main AC input fuse. Replace only with a fast blow, 1A/250VAC fuse.

6. SAFETY GROUND TERMINAL

B.6 CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS AND SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

The input and output channels of the MTS-1730 are numbered from 0 to 15 from left to right, top to bottom.See the legend on the far left of the front panel for reference.

When used with the MTS-1710, the following channels have special capabilities:

Input Channels 0-6: Can function as external start triggers. This feature is enabled/controlled by theDIO,STR# RS-232 command.

Input Channels 0-15: Can function as external stop triggers. This feature is enabled/controlled by theDIO,STP# RS-232 command.

Output Channel 15: Can function as a programmable square wave output for use as a phase comparisonsignal. See Section A.6.5 for details on this function.

When this feature is desired, the output module should be a high speed type (Option-03D2 or -03D3).

Pin Signal14 no connection15 no connection16 AUXIN017 AUXIN218 AUXIN419 AUXIN620 AUXIN821 AUXIN1022 AUXIN1223 AUXIN1424 no connection25 signal ground




B.7 FOUR-CHANNEL INPUT MODULE

Revision 5 of the four-channel input module is user configurable for 5V logic input sensing or 12V (orgreater) logic input voltage sensing. These newer revision four-channel input modules appear as shown inthe following figure:

FIGURE B-3. FOUR-CHANNEL INPUT MODULE

To change the logic input sense level on each channel, four plug jumpers must be relocated on theassociated module's printed circuit board. The 12V logic input sense configuration is recommended forhigher noise immunity. You can change the logic input voltage level to 5V, if required, for interfacing to5V logic. The proper location of these jumpers is shown in the figure on the next page:

10 -30 0V

10 -30 0V

10 -30 0V

INPUT

10-30 0V



FIGURE B-4. CONFIGURATION JUMPERS FOR INPUT SENSE LEVELS ON FOUR-CHANNEL INPUT MODULES

MTS-1730 Input Channel Board Revision 5

Jumper plug positions for5V logic input sensing

Jumper plug positions for12V (or greater) logic input sensing




B.8 16-CHANNEL INPUT MODULE

The 16-channel input module expands the input capability of the MTS-1730 up to 64 channels when fourof these modules are used.

Characteristics and features include:

• 16 channels at a time can be monitored. (Active module indicated by LED)• User strappable for 5V or 12V logic thresholds• Single module can replace an existing four channel module (any combination of 16 and four channel

modules can be used up to four modules total)• LED indicator on each channel• Wet/dry contact or voltage (up to 300V) input• DB-37 connector for fast one-time hookup• All 16 channels share a common ground, but are isolated from all other modules and earth, and the

remainder of the MTS-1700 system.

FIGURE B-5. MTS-1730 16-CHANNEL INPUT MODULE

INPUT

ACTIVE

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

VOLTAGE INPUTS

5V LOGIC12V LOGIC

0-300 V AC/DC MAX

COM

V15

V14

V13

V12

V11

V10

V9

V8

COM

COM

V7

V6

V5

V4

V3

V2

V1

V0C0

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

C7

COM

COM

C8

C9

C10

C11

C12

C13

C14

C15

INPUTS CONNECTOR

ACTIVE BANK

INDICATOR LED

CHANNEL STATUS

INDICATOR LEDS



B.8.1 Connector Pinout

Connector: DB-37 MalePinout:Pin Signal1 V0 (channel 0 voltage in)2 V1 (channel 1 voltage in)3 V2 (channel 2 voltage in)4 V3 (channel 3 voltage in)5 V4 (channel 4 voltage in)6 V5 (channel 5 voltage in)7 V6 (channel 6 voltage in)8 V7 (channel 7 voltage in)9 COMMON10 COMMON11 V8 (channel 8 voltage in)12 V9 (channel 9 voltage in)13 V10 (channel 10 voltage in)14 V11 (channel 11 voltage in)15 V12 (channel 12 voltage in)16 V13 (channel 13 voltage in)17 V14 (channel 14 voltage in)18 V15 (channel 15 voltage in)19 COMMON

Pin Signal20 C0 (channel 0 contact in)21 C1 (channel 1 contact in)22 C2 (channel 2 contact in)23 C3 (channel 3 contact in)24 C4 (channel 4 contact in)25 C5 (channel 5 contact in)26 C6 (channel 6 contact in)27 C7 (channel 7 contact in)28 COMMON29 COMMON30 C8 (channel 8 contact in)31 C9 (channel 9 contact in)32 C10 (channel 10 contact in)33 C11 (channel 11 contact in)34 C12 (channel 12 contact in)35 C13 (channel 13 contact in)36 C14 (channel 14 contact in)




B.8.2 Input Bank Configuration and Numbering

Input bank configuration and numbering is determined by the position of installed 16-channel inputmodules, and jumpers plugs installed on the backplane internal to the MTS-1730.

Possible configurations are shown in the chart below:

Input Bank Configuration and Numbering Internal JumpersRequired

None

RJ4

RJ2, RJ5

RJ1, RJ3, RJ6

RJ1, RJ3, RJ6(and remove U2

and U3 IC’s)

4 channel modulesBank 0 (ch 0-7)

2Bank

1Bank

16 channelmodules

4 channel modules

BANK 0 (ch 0-15)

Bank0

Bank1

Bank2

Bank3

4 channel moduleBank 0 (ch 0-3)

modules16 channel

3Bank

2Bank

1Bank

0Bank

16 channelmodules

16 channel moduleBank 1

4 channel modulesBank 0 (ch 0-11)



B.8.3 Active Input Bank Selection

The MTS-1710 can only monitor 16 input channels (1 bank) at a time. As a result, when more than one bankexists, the active bank to be monitored must be selected.

This can be done via the OPTION MTS-1730 BANK selection in the front panel menu, or via the DIO,IBK#RS-232 command (see Section A.6.4).

B.8.4 Input Threshold Voltage Selection

Input threshold voltage can be strapped on each channel for 5V or 12V logic thresholds. Factory shippeddefault is 12V.

To change to 5V levels, withdraw the 16-channel module card, and remove the small 2-pin plug jumpers(16 of them) on the board next to the circuitry for each channel. The locations are marked on the board. Nextmark the front panel checkbox on the module to indicate 5V logic.

B.9 EXAMPLE APPLICATION

Figure B-6 shows the MTS-1710, MTS-1720 and MTS-1730 connected to an SEL-121G distance relay fortesting all the relay inputs and outputs.

The relay contacts are powered from the MTS-1710’s DC voltage output and the MTS-1730 voltage senseinputs are used to detect contact operation. The MTS-1730 output channels are used to apply DC voltage toactivate the relay optocoupler inputs.

This setup allows testing of all of the protection features of the relay, including the communication-aidedschemes.

The MTS-1730 channels used are as follows:

Input Channels Output Channels0 Trip contacts 0 Direct Trip optocoupler input1 Close contacts 1 Permissive trip optocoupler input2 A1 contacts 2 not used3 A2 contacts 3 not used4 not used 4 External trigger optocoupler input5 Alarm contacts 5 52A optocoupler input6 A4 contacts 6 Direct close optocoupler input7 A3 contacts 7 Block trip optocoupler input




FIGURE B-6. EXAMPLE CONNECTIONS OF MTS-1730 TO SEL-121G DISTANCE RELAY

VA VB VC N

1 2 3 4 5

IA IB IC IP

6

TRIP TRIP CLOSE A1 A2 A3 A4 ALARM

52A EXT TRIG.DIRECTCLOSE

BLOCKTRIP

PERMISVTRIP

DIRECTTRIPPOWERGND GND

SEL-121G


APPENDIX C

ALPHABETICAL RS-232 COMMAND SUMMARY

Command Function Section(s)

%HM# Set percent harmonic -fault 6.2.6.1%HP# Set percent harmonic -prefault 6.2.6.1AAM# Amplitude adjustment mode 6.7.1.3AHW# Amps half wave fault 6.2.6.1AHP# Amps half wave prefault 6.2.6.1AI1# Set prefault current (I1 or I3) 6.2.6.1AI1#,# Amplitude I1 (or I3) individual value 6.7.1.3AI2# Set amplitude of I2 6.2.6.1AI2#,# Amplitude I2 individual value 6.7.1.3AI4# Set amplitude of I4 6.2.6.1AIA# Set nominal Ia current 6.2.6.2AIA#,# Amplitude Ia individual value 6.7.2.3AIB# Set nominal Ib current (I3-WYE current mode only) 6.2.6.2AIB#,# Amplitude Ib individual value 6.7.2.3AIC# Set nominal Ic current (I3-WYE current mode only) 6.2.6.2AIC#,# Amplitude Ic individual value 6.7.2.3AVA# Set Nominal Va 6.2.5.1AVA#,# Amplitude Va individual value 6.7.1.3AVB# Set Nominal Vb 6.2.5.1AVB#,# Amplitude Vb individual value 6.7.1.3AVC# Set Nominal Vc 6.2.5.1AVC#,# Amplitude Vc individual value 6.7.1.3AXC# Aux contact arrangement 6.2.17BKT# Breaker time 6.2.17BRT# Set baud rate 6.2.9CAL# Calibration save enable/disable 6.2.17C2B# COM2 Baud rate 6.2.16C2C COM2 Chat 6.2.16C2D# COM2 Chat mode off 6.2.16C2F# COM2 Format 6.2.16C2S”” COM2 Send 6.5.16DCU# Display current 6.2.11DDF# Set default DC voltage 6.2.15DEF Default settings 6.2.17DFR Display frequency 6.2.11DIO,FMT# Digital I/O output number format A.6.3DIO,IBK# Digital I/O input bank A.6.4DIO,INP Digital I/O read inputs A.6.4DIO,OCD#,#,#,#,# Digital I/O conditional output definition A.6.5.1DIO,OCL Digital I/O clear output settings A.6.5.1DIO,ODY#,#,# Digital I/O delayed output definition A.6.5.1DIO,ORD Digital I/O read outputs A.6.5.1DIO,OUT#,#,# Digital I/O output definition A.6.5.1

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL C-1CU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS



DIO,PCD# Digital I/O phase comparison delay A.6.6.1DIO,PCO# Digital I/O phase comparison output enable/disable A.6.6.1DIO,PCP#,#,# Digital I/O phase comparison phase A.6.6.1DIO,PCW# Digital I/O phase comparison width A.6.6.1DIO,POC# Digital I/O postfault continuation time A.6.4DIO,POI Digital I/O postfault input A.6.4DIO,SEO Sequence of output events report A.6.5.1DIO,SER Digital I/O sequence of events report A.6.4DIO,SEQ Digital I/O sequence of events report summary A.6.4DIO,STA Digital I/O status A.6.3DIO,STP# Digital I/O stop trigger channel select A.6.4DIO,STR# Digital I/O start trigger channel select A.6.4DLY# Delay 6.2.17DMD# Display mode data 6.2.17DMM# Dynamic measurement mode 6.2.17DPH# Display phase 6.2.11DRD Display Readings Data 6.2.17DTC Display time (cycles) 6.2.11DTS Display time (seconds) 6.2.11DUD Display user data 6.2.17DVD Display Volts DC 6.2.15DVO Display voltage 6.2.11DYN Dynamic Operation Mode 6.2.4F25 25Hz frequency reference mode 6.2.8.1FDF# Set Frequency - default 6.2.8.1FDU# Set Frequency duration 6.2.8.1FFF# Set Frequency - fault final 6.2.8.1FFI# Set Frequency - fault initial 6.2.8.1FIA# Fault incidence angle 6.2.17FMD# Set Fault Mode 6.2.3FMD? Interrogate fault mode 6.2.3FPD#, #, #, # Fault playback data - 14 bit 6.2.13.2FPM# Fault playback mode - 14 bit 6.2.13.2FPO# Set Frequency - postfault 6.2.8.1FPR# Fault playback rate - 14 bit 6.2.13.2FRQ# Set Frequency - prefault 6.2.8.1FRR# Set Frequency ramp rate 6.2.8.1HLP Print Help 6.2.11HMS#,#,# Set time HH,MM,SS 6.2.12IDU# Set current duration 6.2.6.1IFF# Set current - fault final 6.2.6.1IFI# Set current - fault initial 6.2.6.1IMD# Set Current Mode 6.2.6.1IPO# Set current - postfault 6.2.6.1IPR# Set prefault current 6.2.6.2IRR# Set current ramp rate 6.2.6.1IST Internal timer start 6.2.10

C-2 MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A



LF0 Auto line feed off 6.2.9LF1 Auto line feed on 6.2.9LHM# Set Line harmonic 6.2.8.1LIN Line frequency reference mode 6.2.8.1LOC Local control mode 6.2.1MDY#,#,# Set date MONTH,DAY,YEAR 6.2.12NEG Negative phase sequence 6.2.17PAM# Phase Adjustment Mode 6.7.1.2PCF Print configuration 6.2.17PDI Print displays 6.2.11PDU# Set phase duration 6.2.7.1PFC# Postfault control 6.2.17PFF# Set phase - fault final 6.2.7.1PFI# Set phase - fault initial 6.2.7.1PFR Print Frequency 6.2.11PFS Print fault state 6.2.2PGM Program mode 6.2.9PHS# Set phase - prefault 6.2.7.1PHS#,#,# Set individual phase value 6.7.1.2, 6.7.2.2PHT Phasor table 6.2.17PI1 Print I1 6.2.11PI2 Print I2 6.2.11PI4 Print I4 6.2.11PMM# Phase measurement mode 6.2.17POF# Postfault on/off 6.2.2POS Positive phase sequence 6.2.17PPH Print Phase 6.2.11PPO# Set phase - postfault 6.2.7.1PRF# Prefault on/off 6.2.2PRP Preset phase 6.2.7.1PRR# Set phase ramp rate 6.2.7.1PRT# Printer echo (on/off) 6.5.9PTC Print time (cycles) 6.2.11PTS Print time (sec) 6.2.11PUD# Permissive/unblock Delay 6.2.17PVD Print Volts DC 6.2.15PVO Print voltage 6.2.11PWC# Programmable waveform control 6.2.14.1PWD# Programmable waveform data 6.2.14.1PWN Print warnings 6.2.11RCD#,#,#,# Playback data 6.2.13.1RCM# Playback mode 6.2.13.1RCR# Playback rate 6.2.13.1REM Remote Control mode 6.2.1RES Reset (Return to prefault state) 6.2.2RET# Remote end trip 6.2.17RIF# Reclose into fault events 6.2.17RTR Real time clock reset 6.5.12

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL C-3CU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS



STP Stop trigger (Enter postfault state) 6.2.2STR Start trigger (Enter fault state) 6.2.2STS Print stop trigger status 6.2.2STT Static Operation Mode 6.2.4SYN# Synchronizing mode 6.2.17TDR# Time Delay to Reclose 6.2.17TIM Print date & time 6.5.12TON# Tone enable/disable 6.2.10TRM Terminal mode 6.2.9UDD”” User display data 6.5.17VDC# Volts DC 6.2.15VDF# Set voltage - default 6.2.5.1VDU# Set voltage - duration 6.2.5.1VER Print version & serial No. 6.5.17VER1 Print version, model number & serial number of MTS-1710 6.2.17VER2 Print version, model number & serial number of MTS-1720 6.2.17VER3 Print MTS-1750 status code 6.2.17VFF# Set voltage - fault final 6.2.5.1VFI# Set voltage - fault initial 6.2.5.1VFQ Variable frequency reference mode 6.2.8.1VHM# Set variable frequency harmonic 6.2.8.1VPO# Set voltage - postfault 6.2.5.1VPR# Set voltage - prefault 6.2.5.1VRR# Set voltage ramp rate 6.2.5.1WFS# Wait on fault state 6.2.2XST External timer start 6.2.10Z1K# Z1 K-factor 6.2.17

C-4 MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

APPENDIX E

MTS-1710 SYNCSCOPE PROGRAM

E.1 INTRODUCTION

Syncscope is a graphical demonstration aid for illustrating the MTS-1710’s synchronizing mode feature.

E.2 FEATURES• Pseudo real-time display of the Bus/Line and Bus/Generator voltage phasors against the

synchronizing element characteristic.• Pseudo real-time display of the voltage phasors at the time of breaker close (based on breaker advance

time).• Displays quantities as primary or secondary values.• Automatic setup for phase angle limit, voltage limit and frequency limit tests.• Display voltage limit characteristic based on the phasor voltage difference method or difference of

magnitudes method.

E.3 OPERATION

E.3.1 Setup

1. Connect the synchronizing device to the MTS-1710, as shown in Figure 3.15.2. Connect the MTS-1710 COM1 port to your PC's RS-232 port with a standard serial cable. Turn on the

MTS-1710.3. Start the program (SYNCSCOP.EXE) from the program icon, or from Windows [Start] menu.4. When prompted, select the MTS-1710 as the equipment type.

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL E-1


5. When prompted, enter the PC serial port and the communications baud rate to be used.6. When prompted, select Φ-N/C-N fault mode and I1-LOW current mode on the front panel of the MTS-

1710.7. Select the appropriate label (Bus, Generator or Line) for channel A and C voltages beside the Channel

A and Channel C voltage indicators.8. Fill in the VT Ratios under the Synchronizing Element Settings section. Fill in the remaining

synchronizing element settings. These should be entered as secondary values if you set the VT ratios to1. Otherwise, enter these as primary values.

9. The Phasor Vdiff setting works as follows: When checked ON, the voltage window is shown as acircle, indicating that the synchronizing element compares the phasor voltage difference between thetwo voltages to the voltage limit. When left OFF, the voltage window is shown as a trapezoid withcircular sides, indicating that the synchronizing element compares the difference of the magnitude ofthe two voltages to the voltage limit.

E.3.2 Synchroscope Graph

This graph shows the channel A and C voltage phasor relative positions, plotted against the synchronizingelement window bounded by the voltage window and phase angle window. The bus/line/generator requiredvoltage minimum limits are also shown as dotted circles. The dotted white phasor shows the anticipatedposition of the channel A voltage when the breaker closes.

When the "Autoscale" setting is set off, the controls above this can be used to zoom in on and pan thegraph.

E.3.3 Synchronizing Element Measurements

This section shows the present difference angle, frequency and voltage, as well as the closing angle(anticipated phase angle of the channel A voltage when the breaker closes).

The "In Sync" indicator illuminates green when the present voltage difference is within the voltagewindow setting, and the present frequency difference is within the frequency window setting, as well asthe present phase angle difference within the phase window setting.

E.3.4 Phase Limit Test

To perform this test:1. Select Setup | Phase limit test from the Syncscope menu bar.2. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the phase angle to find the phase angle limit of the synchronizing

element.

E.3.5 Voltage Limit Test

To perform this test:1. Select Setup | Voltage limit test from the Syncscope menu bar.2. Turn the [MODIFY] knob to adjust the voltage up and down to find the voltage limit of the

synchronizing element.

E-2 MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

E.3.6 Frequency Limit Test

To perform this test:1. Select Setup | Freq. limit test from the Syncscope menu bar.2. Set the bus and line (or bus and generator, or generator and line) frequencies under the channel A and

channel C voltage indicators.3. Select dynamic operation mode on the MTS-1710.4. Turn [POSTFAULT] on.5. Press [FAULT] to start the test.6. Adjust the frequency, as required, to reduce the frequency difference and to find the frequency limit.7. When the relay operates, the "Closing angle" vector on the graph indicates the position of the channel

A phasor (Bus/line/generator) when the breaker closes. This is calculated based on the breaker advancetime setting, the frequency difference, and the position of the channel A phasor at the time of relayoperation.

E.3.7 Setting Nominal Values

Selecting Edit| Edit nominal values from the Syncscope menu bar allows you to set the nominal Vavoltage, nominal Vc voltage and nominal frequency. These values are used as the defaults for setting up thephase, voltage and frequency limit tests.

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL E-3


E-4 MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

GLOSSARY

Note: For complete details, the relevant section in the manual is listed at the end of each definition.

Auto-Reclose Time Delay This is the dead timebetween the time a fault is cleared and the timeauto-reclosure occurs. On the MTS-1710, it’s thedelay between the end of FAULT state and theactivation of postfault outputs. (5.11.2)

Aux Contact Arrangement The state of theauxiliary contact outputs in the prefault state. Thismay be set to normally open, or normally closed.(5.15)

Breaker Time The time between the relay trip andthe breaker opening. (5.11.1)

Breaker Advance Time (also called CircuitBreaker Advance Time) This is a relayingparameter specifying the time between a breakerclose signal is given by a relay, to the time of actualbreaker closure. (5.5.3)

Current Mode The current mode is the selectedconfiguration of current output(s). (4.6)

Dynamic Measurement Mode This defines themode used to measure AC voltage and currentoutputs during the FAULT state. (5.7)

Dynamic Operation Mode This mode is used toperform dynamic relay testing. (4.2.2)

Dynamic Testing Testing of relays usinginstantaneous steps/ramping of voltage and currentinputs to closely simulate conditions during in-service operation. (1.4.2)

External Start Timer Mode In this mode, thetimer starts synchronously with a change on theexternal start trigger inputs. (5.3.2.)

External Trigger An external start or stop triggeraction. (4.5.4, 4.5.5)

Fault Duration Programmable parameterspecifying the length of time a particular parameteris held a fault level. (5.2)

Fault Incidence Angle The angle in electricaldegrees (referred to the voltage) at which time afault occurs, sometimes referred to as “point-on-wave”. (5.4)

Fault Mode This controls the type and phase offault which is simulated. The Fault Mode primarilyaffects voltage adjustments, but can significantlyaffect current adjustments if the MTS-1720 is used.(4.7)

Fault Phase The selected phase being faulted.This phase is also used for voltage and phasemeasurement. (4.7)

Fault Playback Regeneration of digitized voltageand current waveforms at high power levels.Allows testing of relay response to recorded orpredicted fault waveforms. (1.4.3, and Section 7)

Fault State The fault state simulates the inputs tothe relay during a fault condition. (4.1, 4.3)

Fault Type Selects the type of fault to besimulated. (4.7)

Four-Wire Timing A method for performingtiming events using two wires to a start triggersignal, and two wires to a stop trigger signal.

I2-Harmonic Current Mode This current modeoutputs a current which is the sum of a fundamentaland harmonic current, and which is used forharmonic restraint testing. (4.6.6)

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL F-1CU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

GLOSSARY

I3 Current Mode This current mode outputs asingle current which is switched to any pair of four-wire current output used for testing 3Φ relays.

I3-Wye Current Mode This current mode outputsa full 3Φ wye current. (9.4)

Individual Amplitude Adjustment Mode Thismode allows setting amplitudes of all AC outputsindependently of each other for simulating non-standard faults (6.7).

Individual Phase Adjustment Modes These arethe phase adjustment modes in which the user hasdirect control over the phase of all outputs in allfault states. (5.12.2, 6.7)

Internal Start Timer Mode In this mode, thetimer starts synchronously with the change fromprefault to fault outputs. (5.3.1)

Line frequency reference mode In this frequencyreference mode, the voltage and current outputs arephase and frequency locked to the input AC line.(4.10.1.1)

Local Control Mode Mode used for all frontpanel, manual operation. (6.2.1)

Monitor Voltage The voltage presently selectedfor voltage, phase and frequency measurement.(4.9)

Nominal Φ-N Voltages These are the A-N, B-Nand C-N voltage settings made while Φ-N fault typewas selected. These settings determine themaximum voltages which can be obtained at anytime. (4.7.1)

Normal Amplitude Adjustment Mode This isthe amplitude adjustment mode in which current/voltage adjustment automatically adjusts theamplitude of the faulting voltage(s) or current(s).All other amplitudes are automatically set by theMTS-1710 to simulate standard faults (4.7)

Normal Phase Adjustment Mode This is thephase adjustment mode in which phase adjustmentautomatically adjusts phase between the faultingvoltage and current. All other phase relationshipsare automatically set by the MTS-1710 to simulatestandard faults (5.12.1)

Operation Mode The operation mode defines howvarious inputs affect changes between the MTS-1710 fault states. The operation mode may be staticor dynamic. (4.2)

Output Levels The present level of the voltage andcurrent outputs. The output level may be theprefault, fault or postfault setting, or off. In prefaultstate and postfault states, the output level may be setto off using the [PREFAULT] and [POSTFAULT]buttons. This overrides the prefault and postfaultsettings. (4.4)

Phase Measurement Speed The phasemeasurement speed of the MTS-1710. This may beset to normal or to high-speed (1 cycle response).(5.14).

Postfault State The postfault state simulates theinputs to the relay after the fault condition and relayoperation. (4.1)

Prefault State The prefault state simulates thehealthy inputs to the relay, prior to the faultoccurrence. (4.1)

PT Location This setting parameter allowssimulation of either line-side or bus-side potentialtransformers. For line-side PT simulation,whenever a simulated breaker is open, the voltageon the corresponding phase will be zero. For bus-side PT simulation, whenever a simulated breaker isopen, the voltage on the corresponding phase willbe the nominal (prefault) setting. (5.11.4)

Remote Control Mode Mode used for operationunder computer or external device control. (6.2.1)

F-2 MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

GLOSSARY

Remote End Trip This refers to the simulation ofa remote (far) end 3Φ trip on a two terminal line.It’s simulated by removing currents in all phasesnot participating in the fault. (5.2.3.2, AN4)

Static Operation Mode This mode is used toperform static testing and program MTS-1710settings. (4.2, 4.3)

Static Testing Testing of relays using very slowlyvarying inputs to accurately locate pickup points.(1.4.1)

Synchronizing Mode This mode allows output oftwo different frequencies simultaneously from thevoltage outputs. (5.5)

Trigger Action An action, such as a start or stoptrigger, which causes the MTS-1710 to changebetween fault states (prefault, fault or postfault).(4.5)

Trip Type The type of tripping simulated (3-poleor 1-pole). 3-pole tripping simulates tripping of allthree phases in the postfault state. 1-pole trippingsimulates tripping of only the phases involved in thefault in the postfault state. (5.11.3)

Two-Wire Pulse Timing Method for timing anevent (such as a voltage pulse), using a single pairof wires. (4.5.7)

Variable frequency reference mode In thisfrequency reference mode, the voltage and currentoutputs are generated from an internal crystaloscillator, and may be varied between 45Hz to 650Hz. (4.10.1.2)

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL F-3CU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

GLOSSARY

F-4 MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

Primary reference page numbers are indicatedin bold characters.

0 - 9

16-channel input module B-8, B-1025Hz 2-2, 4-40, 5-42, 6-17, 6-37, C-252A 5-27, 5-45, 6-34, A-11, B-1152B 2-2, 2-5, 5-45, 6-34, A-11

A

ABB® REL512 – Line Distance ProtectionTerminal GG-1

Alstom MBCH and KBCH relays FF-1arcing HH1, HH-3, HH-7auto-reclose 2-3, 3-43, 3-44, 5-19, 5-20, 5-25

to 5-29, 5-28, 5-29, 6-32, 6-35, 6-41, 6-47, 9-2, 9-21, 9-24, 9-25, F-1, S-6

auto-reclose relay testing H-1 to H-6aux contact 4-3, 4-11, 5-13, 5-20, 5-44, 5-45,

5-46, 6-34, 6-40, F-1automated testing T-1, W-1

B

baud rate 6-1, 6-2, 6-20, 6-28, 6-29, 6-38, 6-39,HH-4

blinking indicators 4-3blocking signal simulation - see unblock signal

simulationbreaker advance time 3-34, 5-17, 5-18, 5-20,

E-1, E-3, F-1breaker failure relay Y-1breaker simulation 5-45breaker time 2-3, 5-20, 5-25, 5-29, 5-45, 6-34,

6-40, 9-2, 9-21, C-1, F-1, X-4

C

calendar 2-5, 6-22, 6-38calibration 6-30, 6-31, 6-39, 8-2 to 8-12clock 2-5, 6-22, 6-38COM1 6-1, 6-2, 6-20, 6-28, 6-29, E-1

COM2 6-1, 6-2, 6-28 to 6-30, 6-39COM2 Chat mode disable character 6-29, 6-39COM3 8-1COMTRADE GG-1 to GG-4command repeat facility 6-35command summary 6-3, 6-36, C-1conditional output A-5, A-8, A-9, A-13contact dwell time measurement N-3current ramping 5-8, 6-11current differential relay - see differential relaycurrent duration 5-4, 5-8, 6-11, 6-37CURRENT MODE 4-12, II-3, II-5, II-6, II-8,

II-9, JJ-3, JJ-4, JJ-6, KK-3, KK-5, KK-6, KK-7, KK-8, KK-9

I1-HIGH 4-13, 4-14, 4-24, 4-25, 4-38I1-LOW 4-13, 4-24, 4-26, 4-38I2-HARMONIC 4-13, 4-20, 4-23, 4-24, 4-

47, 4-48I3 4-13, 4-14, 4-23 to 4-29, 4-32 to 4-34, 4-

36, 4-38, 4-48, 4-49, HH-3, II-3, II-5,II-6, II-8, II-9

I3-Parallel 4-13, 4-24 to 4-26, 4-28, 4-30,4-32, 4-33, 6-9 to 6-11, 6-14, 6-15, 10-6 to 10-8

I3-WYE 6-9, 6-10, 6-12, 6-13, 6-22 to 6-24, 6-34, 6-37, 6-46, 6-48, 9-6, 9-9 to 9-12, 9-19 to 9-24, 10-6, 10-9

I4-DC 4-23, 4-24, 4-47, II-7selection guide 4-13

current modes 2-1, 3-4, 3-5, 3-8, 4-12, 4-23, 4-24, 4-38, 4-47, 4-48, 5-8, 5-31 to 5-33,6-9 to 6-11, 6-21, 6-23, 6-24, 6-41, 6-43, 9-9, 9-12

current paralleling 4-25 to 4-31, 10-10current preset 3-13, 3-14, 3-16, 3-29, 4-24, 4-

32current ratio display 5-24, 5-25current reversal L-1 to L-4

D

DC auxiliary relay 3-42, 5-13, 5-14DC current 2-2, 3-4, 3-14, 3-16, 3-29, 3-39, 4-

18, 4-23, 4-24, 5-21, 6-12, 8-8, 9-17, 9-18, II-6, II-7, JJ-5, JJ-6, KK-9

INDEX

MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MM-1CU A002 15A MANTA TEST SYSTEMS

INDEX

DC voltage 2-4, 3-4, 3-8, 3-14, 3-21, 3-25, 3-40, 4-49, 4-50, 5-13, 5-45, 5-46, 6-28,6-32, 6-39, JJ-1, JJ-3, JJ-6, JJ-7, KK-2,KK-4, KK-7, KK-8

digital input channels 7-10, A-6, R-1 to R-3,S-6

digital output channels A-1, A-3, A-7, A-10,A-11

directional overcurrent relay 3-17, 3-18 dynamic measurement mode 5-1, 5-18, 6-33, 6-

40, 8-3 to 8-11, 9-21, C-2, F-1dynamic operation mode 3-2, 3-10, 3-12, 3-

13, 3-16, 3-19, 3-20, 3-23, 3-24, 3-26, 3-27, 3-29, 3-32, 3-34, 3-37, 3-38, 3-39, 3-41, 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, 4-4, 4-11, 4-46, 5-8, 5-26, 6-3 to 6-8, 6-10, 6-13, 6-15 to 6-18, 6-36, 7-9, 7-11, A-6, A-8, A-9, C-2, F-1, LL-4

dynamic testing 1-1, 1-3, 1-4, 2-3, 9-2, J-1, J-9, F-1

E

external frequency reference 3-6, 4-45external start timer mode 5-13 to 5-15, F-1,

N-3external start trigger 2-3, 3-41, 4-8, 4-32, 5-12

to 5-14, A-3, F-1external stop trigger 4-8, A-3external trigger 1-6, 5-12, 7-1, A-1, A-10, A-

11, B-11, F-1, II-3, KK-4, KK-6, KK-7

F

fault current preset feature 4-24, 11-6fault duration 5-4, 5-5, 5-8, 5-9, 5-10, 6-6, 6-

11, 6-15, 6-17, 6-46, 9-2, 9-21, F-1, R-7, R-8

fault incidence angle 2-5, 3-43, 3-44, 5-12, 5-14, 5-16, 5-19, 6-31, 6-35, 6-39, 6-40, 6-41, 6-46, 6-47, 9-2, 9-21, A-12, A-13, F-1

fault mode 3-5, 3-9, 3-15, 3-16, 3-18, 3-20 to 3-23, 3-29, 3-33, 3-34, 3-36 to 3-38, 3-45, 4-14, 4-23, 4-33, 4-35 to 4-38, 5-8, 5-17, 5-19, 5-20, 5-22, 5-23, 5-27, 5-38 to 5-41, 6-5 to 6-8, 6-12 to 6-14, 6-16, 6-32, 6-36, 6-40, 7-10, 7-11, 8-3, 8-4, 8-

6, 8-10, 8-11, 9-11 to 9-17, 9-20 to 9-24, E-2, F-1, HH-2, HH-3, II-3, II-4, II-5, II-6, II-8, II-9, JJ-3, JJ-4, JJ-6, KK-3, KK-4, KK-5, KK-6, KK-7, KK-8, KK-9, LL-3, LL-4

fault phase 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-22, 3-23, 3-25, 3-26, 3-33, 3-34, 3-43 to 3-45, 4-14, 4-33 to 4-36, 4-38 to 4-40, 5-10, 5-11, 5-12, 5-16, 5-19, 5-41, 6-35, 6-41, 6-42, 6-44, 6-45, 6-47 to 6-49, 9-1, 9-11 to 9-17, 9-22 to 9-24, A-12, A-13, F-1

fault playback 1-1 to 1-4, 2-3, 2-4, 3-6, 4-13, 4-43, 5-16, 5-20, 6-1, 6-23, 6-24, 6-38, 6-39, 6-41, 7-1, 7-3, 7-5, 7-8 to 7-11, 9-2 to 9-4, 9-21, 9-25, 10-1, 10-10, 10-11

A-3, F-1, HH-1, HH-3, HH-5, HH-6, HH-7

fault state 4-1 to 4-5, 4-7, 4-8, 4-13, 4-14, 4-23, 4-32, 4-35, 4-36, 4-39, 4-41, 5-5, 5-8, 5-9, 5-13, 5-17, 5-18, 5-26, 5-32 to 5-35, 5-37 to 5-40, 5-44 to 5-46, 6-3, 6-4, 6-6, 6-10, 6-11, 6-15, 6-16, 6-18, 6-36, 6-40, 6-42, 6-43, 6-46 to 6-48, 7-10, 7-11, 8-5 to 8-11, 9-11 to 9-16, 9-18, 9-22, A-3, A-6, A-7, A-8, A-9, A-10, A-11, A-12, A-13, F-1 to F-3

fault type 3-4, 3-9, 3-22, 3-25, 3-43 to 3-45, 4-27, 4-31, 4-33, 4-34, 4-36, 5-5, 5-8, 5-10 to 5-12, 5-19, 5-23, 5-27, 5-41, 5-42, 6-5, 6-6, 6-35, 6-41, 6-44, 6-45, 6-47, 6-49, 7-9, 9-12 to 9-14, 9-16, 9-22 to 9-24, F-1, F-2

fault waveform GG-1, HH-7firmware upgrade 8-1, 9-25four-channel input module B-6four-wire timing 4-9, F-1frequency default 6-17, 6-37frequency duration 6-17, 6-19, 6-37frequency limit test E-1, E-3frequency ramping 5-8frequency relay 3-38front panel, MTS-1710 3-1front panel, MTS-1730 B-3, B-5, B-11function generator 10-11, 10-12fuses 1-6, 3-6, 8-1

MM-2 MTS-1700 SERIES OPERATION AND REFERENCE MANUAL MANTA TEST SYSTEMS CU A002 15A

INDEX

G

generator excitation system testing U-1GCX17G relay KK-1GE CFVB relay LL-1, LL-3GE DFP200 HH-1, HH-3, HH-5GE DLP - Digital Line Protection Relay GG-1ground fault overvoltage relay 3-35, 3-36

H

harmonic 2-1, 2-2, 3-5, 3-27, 3-32, 3-35 to 3-38, 3-43 to 3-45, 4-13, 4-18, 4-19 to 4-21, 4-23, 4-24, 4-40, 4-41, 4-47, 4-48, 5-8, 5-10 to 5-12, 5-16, 5-19, 5-33, 5-34, 5-39 to 5-41, 6-9, 6-11, 6-17, 6-18, 6-20, 6-21, 6-25, 6-35, 6-37, 6-41 to 6-45, 6-47, 6-49, 9-1, 9-21, C-1, C-3, C-4, F-1, HH-1, HH-3, HH-6

harmonic restraint test 3-27, 3-32High current source 10-1, 10-11high impedance fault HH-1, HH-2, HH-7High resolution DC voltage/DC current Z-1

I

I1-High current mode 3-4, 3-11, 3-12, 3-28, 3-32, 4-14, 4-25, 4-38, 6-9, 6-10, 6-43, 8-7

I1-Low current mode 3-11, 3-17, 3-18, 3-20, 3-31, 3-34, 4-13, 4-26, 6-9, 6-10, 6-15, 6-16, 7-7, 8-3, 8-6, 10-4, 10-6, 10-8, E-2

I2-Harmonic current mode 3-27, 4-18, 4-23, 4-48, 5-8, 5-33, 5-34, 6-11, 6-20, 6-42, 6-43, F-1

I3 current mode 3-20, 3-22, 4-14, 4-25, 4-27, 4-33, 4-34, 4-38, 6-9, 6-13, 6-21, 6-23, 6-24, 6-43, 7-6, 7-7, 7-9, 9-6, 9-9, 9-11, 9-12, 9-21, 9-22, 11-6 to 11-10, F-2, HH-2, HH-3

I3-Parallel current mode 4-24 to 4-26, 4-30, 4-32, 4-33, 6-9 to 6-11, 7-8, 10-6 to10-8

I3-Wye current mode 4-14, 4-29, 4-31, 4-33, 4-39, 4-48, 5-8, 5-18, 5-23, 5-36, 5-40, 6-9, 6-10, 6-12, 6-13, 6-22 to 6-24, 6-34, 6-37, 6-46, 6-48, 7-1, 7-9, 7-11, 9-10 to 9-12, 9-19 to 9-24, 10-9, 10-10,

C-1, F-2 I4-DC current mode 3-14, 3-16, 3-29, 3-39, 4-

23, 5-21, 6-12, 9-17, X-1, X-2, X-4, X-5

impedance display 3-19, 3-22, 5-21, 5-23, 6-33, 9-20

impedance relay 3-17 to 3-21, 3-23, 3-24, 3-43, 4-15

individual amplitude adjust mode 6-42individual phase adjustment mode 5-31, 6-40,

6-42instantaneous element test 3-12interface connector 10-2internal start timer mode 5-12, F-2

K

k-factor 5-22, 5-23, 6-33, 6-39, C-4, KK-6KD-4 relay II-1kVA reading 6-33kVAR reading 6-33kWatt reading 6-33

L

Lamp/LED test function 8-13line frequency reference mode 4-40, 4-43, 6-

16, 6-17, 6-37, C-3, F-2local control mode 6-3, 6-26, 6-27, 6-36, C-3,

F-2load loss tripping -see pilotless accelerated

tripping

M

Maximum Torque Angle (MTA) II-3, II-5, KK-3 to KK-5, J-7

MBCH relay FF-2memory voltage polarization test N-1menu 3-2, 3-3, 3-21, 3-27, 3-32 to 3-34, 3-36,

3-39 to 3-44, 4-47, 4-49, 4-50, 5-1 to 5-4, 5-5, 5-8, 5-9, 5-12, 5-16 to 5-28, 5-31 to 5-39, 5-41 to 5-43, 5-45, 5-46, 6-2, 6-35, 6-41, 6-47, 8-3 to 8-13, 9-19, 9-20, A-3, HH-4, II-3, LL-3, LL-4

mho distance relay testing J-1, see also impedance relay


INDEX

minimum pickup test 3-12, 3-20, 3-26, 3-31mode/menu display 3-2, 3-7 to 3-9, 3-16, 3-21,

3-26, 3-27, 3-29, 3-31, 3-33, 3-34, 3-37,3-38, 3-40

monitor voltage 2-2, 4-40, 9-2, F-2MTA test 3-19, 3-22MTS-1720 9-1, 9-3 to 9-6, 9-8 to 9-11, 9-17, 9-

21, 9-25, 11-1, II-1, II-9, JJ-1, KK-1,KK-10

MTS-1730 2-4, A-1 to A-3, A-7, B-1 to B-5,B-8, B-10 to B-12

MTS-1750 2-4, 6-9, 6-10, 6-12, 6-31, 10-1 to10-12high current source 3-6, 9-4stand-alone current source 10-11

MTS-1753 11-1 to 11-6front panel 11-2rear panel 11-3

three channel current source 11-1MTS-1800 MWave program FF-3, FF-4, GG-

3MTS-1900 Utility Suite 2-4

PowerWave application FF-1FaultBuilder application FF-3

multiple readings display 5-21, 6-32multi-system synchronization 2-5, 4-26 to 4-

31, 4-42, 4-43MWave Fault Waveform Playback Software

2-4

N

negative phase sequence 5-18, 6-31, 6-39, C-3nominal MTA II-3, II-5, II-8, KK-3 to KK-5,

KK-8nominal Φ-N currents 9-12 to 9-14, 9-22nominal Φ-N voltages 3-9, 3-22, 6-7, F-2normal amplitude adjustment mode F-2normal phase adjustment mode 5-30, F-2

O

open delta 6-45, BB-1, LL-1operate time test 3-19, 3-20, 3-23, 3-27, 3-32operation mode 3-43, 3-44, 4-1, 5-10, 5-11,

5-12, 5-19, 6-4, 6-5, 6-35, 6-40, 6-41,

6-44, 6-45, 6-47, 6-49, 8-6 to 8-11, A-3,C-2, C-4, F-2

Dynamic 4-1 to 4-4, 4-11, 4-46, LL-4Static 4-1 to 4-3, 4-7, 4-24, 4-32, 4-39, 4-

46, 4-47, LL-3, LL-4optical sensing R-3Optimho, GEC Q-1, Q-2, R-3, R-5, W-1, W-2,

W-4oscilloscope triggering O-1oscillography waveforms GG-1output levels 2-1, 4-3, 4-4, 4-5, 9-1, 9-2, F-2out of step element AA-5 to AA-8overcurrent relay 3-11 to 3-13, 3-17 to 3-19, 9-

17, 9-19, EE-1, HH-1, JJ-1overload warning 6-4, 6-20, 6-22

P

panel testing 1-3, 1-4, A-1, B-1peak measurement mode 8-5percent slope display 5-24, 5-25permissive signal simulation 5-45, 6-34permissive trip test 3-24 phase angle control 4-37, 5-46, 6-14, 6-15phase angle display 4-37, 4-38, 4-43phase angle limit test 3-33, E-1, E-2phase comparison output A-3, A-11, A-12, A-

13, C-2phase display mode 5-20, 5-43, 5-44, 6-14, 6-

15, 6-21phase measurement speed 5-20, 5-42, F-2phase ramping 5-9, 6-15phase reversal function 5-46phase sequence 3-43, 3-44, 5-18, 5-19, 5-41,

6-31, 6-35, 6-39, 9-21, C-3phase-to-ground fault 4-35, 4-36, 9-14, 9-15, 9-

24phase-to-phase fault 4-35, 5-10, 9-13, 9-23, II-

1, II-4, II-10pilot-wire relay testing 4-44pilotless accelerated tripping 5-8, K-1positive sequence components CC-1positive sequence impedance 5-21 to 5-23postfault state 3-2, 3-16, 4-1 to 4-4, 4-7, 4-8, 4-

11, 4-17, 4-23, 4-32, 4-39, 4-41, 4-43,4-46, 4-47, 5-17, 5-25 to 5-28, 5-32 to


INDEX

5-35, 5-45, 5-46, 6-3, 6-7, 6-11, 6-18, 6-20, 6-36, 7-10, A-3, A-6, A-7, A-9, A-11 to A-13, C-4, F-2, F-3

MTS-2100 2-4, 3-17, 3-21, 3-46, 6-34, II-1Power Factor 2-3, 5-25power swing blocking elements AA-1 to AA-8prefault state 3-2, 3-10, 3-12, 3-13, 3-16, 3-29,

3-37 to 3-39, 3-42, 3-45, 4-1, 4-3, 4-7,4-8, 4-23, 4-19, 4-39, 5-18, 5-26, 6-4, 6-6, 6-9, 6-12, 6-36, 7-10, 9-11, 9-13, 9-14, 9-17, 9-22, A-6, A-9, A-10, C-3, F-1, F-2

printer 6-19, 6-38, C-3programmable waveform 6-24 to 6-27, 6-38,

6-39, 9-21, C-3PT location 2-3, 5-20, 5-26, 5-28, 5-29, F-2

Q

questions, frequently asked I-1

R

ramping 2-3, 3-45, 4-1, 5-4 to 5-5, 5-8, 5-9, 5-19, 6-6, 6-11, 6-13, 6-15 to 6-17, 9-1, 9-2, 9-21

reach test 3-22 to 3-24reactance display 5-23, 6-33rear panel, MTS-1710 3-5rear panel, MTS-1720 9-4, 9-5rear panel, MTS-1730 B-4reclose delay interval 5-26, 5-28reclose-into-fault 2-3, 5-20, 5-26, 5-27, 9-2, 9-

21reclosing relay testing H-1 to H-6remote control mode 6-3, 6-25 to 6-27, 6-36, 6-

40, 7-9, 7-11, C-3, F-2remote end trip 5-20, 6-34, 6-40, C-3, F-3, K-

1 to K-3reset time check EE-1resistance display 5-23, 6-33reverse angle display 5-42, 5-43RS-232C interface 6-1, 6-2, 11-1

S

safety 1-5, 3-6 to 3-8, 6-3, 9-4, 9-5, B-5, II-1,II-2, JJ-2, KK-3

sample rate 2-3, 6-23, 7-1, 7-2, 7-8, 9-2Schweitzer SEL321® - Phase and Ground

Distance Relay GG-1SCR output 4-11, R-2SEL relays T-1, P-1sequence of events 5-27, 7-10, A-1, A-3, A-5,

A-6, A-9, A-13, B-1, C-2, V-1 to V-3sequential clearing L-1settings map 3-42 to 3-45single-pole tripping 2-3, 5-27, 9-2sinusoidal waveform HH-3slip frequency limit test 3-34, E-1, E-3slope test 3-27, 3-31, 3-32static operation mode 3-9, 3-12, 3-14, 3-16, 3-

18, 3-20, 3-22, 3-26 to 3-29, 3-31, 3-36to 3-38, 3-40, 3-45, 4-1, 4-2, 4-3, 4-7, 4-24, 4-32, 4-39, 4-46, 4-47, 5-4, 5-9, 5-41, 6-3, 6-5, 6-16, 6-36, 8-8, 8-10, 9-18,C-4, F-3, LL-3, LL-4

static testing 1-4, F-3switch-onto-fault test 3-23synchrocheck relay 3-33synchronizing element settings E-2synchronizing mode 2-5, 3-32 to 3-34, 3-36, 3-

43, 3-44, 5-17, 5-19, 5-42 to 5-45, 6-33,6-35, 6-40, 6-41, 6-46, 6-47, C-4, E-1,F-3

synchronizing relay 3-33, M-1Syncscope 2-4, 3-32, E-1

T

target/seal-in 3-13, 3-14, 3-16, 3-17, 3-19, 3-20, 3-29, 3-39, 9-17 to9-19, X-1, X-2,X-7

timerExternal start mode 5-12, 5-13Internal start mode 5-12

three-phase fault 4-34, 9-23, 9-24, II-1, II-9, II-10


INDEX

three-phase voltage balance relay LL-1three-pole tripping 5-27tone 2-5, 3-1, 3-9, 3-12 to 3-14, 3-16, 3-19, 3-

20, 3-22, 3-23, 3-25, 3-29, 3-37 to 3-40,4-7, 4-46, 4-47, 4-48, 5-20, 6-20, 6-38,C-4

torque control JJ-1, JJ-3transformer differential relay - see differential

relaytrigger action 4-1 to 4-3, 4-7, 4-8, F-1, F-3trip duration test N-2trip type 5-20, 5-26 to 5-29, 6-34, 9-21, F-3two-phase-to-ground fault 4-36, 9-15, 9-24two-wire pulse timing 2-3, 4-1, 4-10, F-3, N-3

U

unbalance 5-31, D-1, LL-1 to LL-4unblock signal simulation 2-5, 5-46, 6-34undervoltage inhibit test 3-37, 3-39upgrade, firmware 8-1, 9-25user display 6-32, 6-40, C-4

V

variable frequency reference mode 3-34, 4-41,4-43, 4-47, 5-8, 5-41, 6-16 to 6-18, 6-37, C-4, F-3

voltage adjustment 4-33, 4-35 to 4-37voltage controlled overcurrent relay, orvoltage restrained overcurrent relay 3-19voltage duration 5-10, 6-6, 6-36voltage limit test 3-34, E-2voltage ramping 5-8, 6-6, 6-13voltage relay 3-15, 3-17, 3-38

X

XON/XOFF 2-4, 6-1, 6-2

Z

zero sequence compensation factor 5-22


mts-1700 series - mantatestforums.commantatest.mantatestforums.com/.../07/mts-1700_user...apr 06,...

Documents